333333333

CONFIGURATION GUIDE
PMP/PTP 450 Series
System Release 22.0

Covers:
PMP 450 AP / PMP 450 SM / PTP 450 / PMP 450d

PMP 450i / PTP 450i

PMP 450b / PTP 450b

PMP 450m

PMP 450 MicroPoP

PMP / PTP 450b Retro

Reservation of Rights

Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability,
function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to
time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium
recommends reviewing the Cambium Networks website for the latest changes and updates to products.
Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or
circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is
possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium products
(machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such
references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such
Cambium products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party software products described in this document may
include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in
semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative
works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or
the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document
may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner
without the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products
shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under
the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except
for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.

Restrictions

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law.
No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,
without prior written permission of Cambium.

License Agreements

The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by
express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an
agreement.

High Risk Materials

Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high-
risk activities or uses of its products including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or aircraft communication systems, air traffic control, life support, or weapons systems
(“High Risk Use”).

This product is not restricted in the EU. Any High Risk is unauthorized, is made at your own risk and you
shall be responsible for any and all losses, damage or claims arising out of any High-Risk Use.

© 2022 Cambium Networks Limited. All rights reserved

pmp-3466_001v000 December 2022

Contents
Contents 3

About This User Guide 14

Contacting Cambium Networks 14

Purpose 14

Product notation conventions in document 14

Cross references 16

Feedback 16

Important regulatory information 16

Application software 17

USA specific information 17

Canada specific information 18

Renseignements specifiques au Canada 18

EU Declaration of Conformity 19

Specific expertise and training for professional installers 19

Ethernet networking skills 19

Lightning protection 19

Training 20

Problems and warranty 20

Reporting problems 20

Repair and service 20

Hardware warranty 20

Security advice 21

Warnings, cautions, and notes 21

Warnings 21

Cautions 21

Notes 21

Caring for the environment 21

In EU countries 22

Contents 3
 In non-EU countries 22

Chapter 1: Configuration 23
Preparing for configuration 23

Safety precautions 24

Regulatory compliance 24

Connecting to the unit 24

Configuring the management PC 24

Connecting to the PC and powering up 26

Using the web interface 26

Logging into the web interface 26

Web GUI 28

Using the menu options 29

Quick link setup 32

Initiating Quick Start Wizard 32

Configuring time settings 37

Viewing the Session Status of the AP/BHM to determine test registration 40

Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces 43

Configuring the IPv4 interface 43

Auxiliary port 56

NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ 57

DHCP 58

Reconnecting to the management PC 73

VLAN configuration for PMP 73

VLAN configuration for PTP 84

PPPoE page of SM 86

IPv4 and IPv6 89

Upgrading the software version and using CNUT 92

Checking the installed software version 92

Upgrading to a new software version 93

General configuration 96

Contents 4
 PMP 450m and PMP/PTP 450i Series 96

PMP/PTP 450b Series 112

PMP/PTP 450 Series 122

Configuring Unit Settings page 133

Unit Settings page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM 134

Unit Settings page of PMP/PTP 450i SM/BHS 136

Setting up time and date 137

Time page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM 137

Configuring synchronization 138

Sync Input 138

Free Run Before GPS Sync 140

Device Type 141

Verify GPS Message Checksum 141

Sync Aux Port Config 141

Aux Port Power to UGPS 142

Configuring security 142

Managing module access by password 142

Isolating from the internet – APs/BHMs 145

Encrypting radio transmissions 146

Requiring SM Authentication 146

Filtering protocols and ports 146

Encrypting downlink broadcasts 151

Isolating SMs 151

Filtering management through Ethernet 151

Allowing management only from specified IP addresses 151

Restricting radio Telnet access over the RF interface 151

Configuring SNMP Access 154

Configuring Security 156

Configuring 802.1X authentication 175

802.1X authentication page of AP 175

Contents 5
 802.1x authentication page of SM 176

Configuring radio parameters 177

PMP 450m Series – configuring radio 177

PMP/PTP 450i Series – Configuring Radio 185

PMP/PTP 450b Series - configuring radio 211

PMP/PTP 450 Series – configuring radio 224

Custom Frequencies page 249

DFS for 5 GHz Radios 252

Contention slots 253

MIMO-A mode of operation 259

Improved PPS performance of 450 Platform Family 261

Setting up SNMP agent 261

Configuring SM/BHS’s IP over-the-air access 261

Configuring SNMP 262

Configuring syslog 268

Syslog event logging 268

Configuring system logging 269

Syslog page of AP/BHM 269

Syslog page of SM 270

Syslog page of BHS 271

Configuring remote access 272

Accessing SM/BHS over-the-air by Web Proxy 272

Monitoring the Link 273

Link monitoring procedure 273

Exporting Session Status page of AP/BHM 275

Configuring quality of service 275

Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters 275

Token Bucket Algorithm 276

MIR Data Entry Checking 276

Committed Information Rate (CIR) 277

Contents 6
 Bandwidth from the SM Perspective 278

Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings 278

SM Prioritization 278

Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) 279

Proportional Scheduler 282

High Priority Bandwidth Traffic 283

Traffic Scheduling 284

Setting the Configuration Source 285

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) 288

Quality of Service (QoS) page of SM 293

Quality of Service (QoS) page of BHM 297

Quality of Service (QoS) page of BHS 298

Citizens Broadband Radio Service (CBRS) 301

PMP 450 Series AP/BHM - CBRS configuration 301

PMP 450 Series SM/BHS-CBRS configuration 305

Installation Color Code 306

Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66 307

Configuration Steps 307

Troubleshooting 311

Configuring Radio via config file 312

Import and Export of config file 312

Configuring cnMaestroTM Connectivity 314

Onboarding 314

Prerequisites for onboarding to cnMaestro™ 315

Knowledge Based articles for onboarding 317

Order of Device Onboarding 317

Device Agent Logs 317

CBRS Log 318

Monitoring Tools for PMP Devices on cnMaestro™ 319

Zero Touch on boarding of the PMP SMs when the corresponding AP is on boarded 320

Contents 7
 Configuring a RADIUS server 321

Understanding RADIUS for PMP 450 Platform Family 321

Choosing Authentication Mode and Configuring for Authentication Servers - AP 322

SM Authentication Mode – Require RADIUS or Follow AP 326

Handling Certificates 331

Configuring RADIUS servers for SM authentication 332

Assigning SM management IP addressing via RADIUS 333

Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration 333

Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration using Zero Touch feature 339

Using RADIUS for centralized AP and SM user name and password management 339

RADIUS Device Data Accounting 345

RADIUS Device Re-authentication 348

RADIUS Change of Authorization and Disconnect Message 349

Microsoft RADIUS support 350

Cisco ACS RADIUS Server Support 355

Monitoring Logs 359

Configuring Ping Watchdog 363

Chapter 2: Tools 364

Using Spectrum Analyzer tool 364

Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies 365

Spectrum Analyzer tool 365

Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool 374

Using the Alignment Tool 377

Aiming page and Diagnostic LED – SM/BHS 378

Alignment Tone 381

Using the Link Capacity Test tool 382

Performing Link Test 382

Performing Extrapolated Link Test 386

Link Capacity Test page of AP 387

Link Capacity Test page of BHM/BHS/SM 389

Contents 8
 Using AP Evaluation tool 390

AP Evaluation page 390

Using BHM Evaluation tool 394

BHM Evaluation page of BHS 394

Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool 397

Using the Subscriber Configuration tool 401

Using the Link Status tool 402

Link Status – AP/BHM 402

Link Status – SM/BHS 405

Using BER Results tool 407

Using the Sessions tool 408

Using the Ping Test tool 408

Firmware Upgrade 409

Chapter 3: Operation 412

System information 413

Viewing General Status 413

Viewing Session Status 435

Viewing Remote Subscribers 446

Interpreting messages in the Event Log 446

Viewing the Network Interface 448

Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors 448

System statistics 449

Viewing the Scheduler Statistics 449

Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics 452

Interpreting Bridging Table statistics 453

Interpreting Translation Table statistics 454

Interpreting Ethernet statistics 454

Interpreting RF Control Block statistics 457

Interpreting Sounding statistics for AP 458

Interpreting VLAN statistics 460

Contents 9
 Interpreting Data Channels statistics 461

Interpreting Proportional Scheduler 463

Interpreting MIR/Burst statistics 464

Interpreting Throughput statistics 466

Interpreting Overload statistics 469

Interpreting DHCP Relay statistics 471

Interpreting Filter statistics 472

Viewing ARP statistics 474

Viewing NAT statistics 474

Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics 475

Interpreting Sync Status statistics 477

Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities 477

Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics 479

Interpreting Pass Through Statistics 481

Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics 482

Interpreting syslog statistics 485

CBRS Statistics for AP/SM 485

Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics 488

Interpreting Channel Change History statistics 496

Interpreting Spatial Utilization statistics 497

Radio Recovery 500

Radio Recovery Console– PMP/PTP 450i/450b and PMP 450m 500

Using the Default/Override Plug 502

Chapter 4: Reference information 504

Equipment specifications 504

Specifications for 5 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP 504

Specifications for 3 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP 508

Specifications for PMP 450i Series - AP 511

Specifications for PMP 450 MicroPoP - AP 520

Specifications for PMP/PTP 450b Retro - SM 527

Contents 10
 Specifications for PMP 450i Series - SM 532

Specifications for PTP 450i Series - BH 538

Specifications for PMP 450b 5 GHz Mid-Gain Series - SM 546

Specifications for PMP 450b 5 GHz High Gain Series – SM 551

Specifications for PMP/PTP 450b 3 GHz High Gain Series – SM/BHS 555

Specifications for PMP 450 Series - AP 558

Specifications for PMP 450 Series - SM 563

Specifications for PTP 450 Series - BH 569

PSU specifications 573

Data network specifications 575

Ethernet interface 575

Wireless specifications 576

General wireless specifications 576

Link Range and Throughput 577

Country specific radio regulations 577

Type approvals 577

DFS for 2.4 and 5 GHz Radios 579

Equipment Disposal 581

Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric Equipment 581

Country specific band range maximum transmit power 581

Maximum transmit power 900 MHz band 582

Maximum transmit power 2.4 GHz band 584

Maximum transmit power 3 GHz band 585

Maximum transmit power 4.9 GHz band 587

Maximum transmit power 5.1 GHz band 590

Maximum transmit power 5.2 GHz band 593

Maximum transmit power 5.4 GHz band 597

Maximum transmit power 5.8 GHz band 602

Country specific frequency range 608

Frequency range 900 MHz band 608

Contents 11
 Frequency range 2.4 GHz band 609

Frequency range 3.5 GHz band 609

Frequency range 3.65 GHz band 611

Frequency range 4.9 GHz band 613

Frequency range 5.1 GHz band 615

Frequency range 5.2 GHz band 618

Frequency range 5.4 GHz band 622

Frequency range 5.8 GHz band 629

FCC specific information 636

FCC compliance testing 636

FCC IDs 636

FCC approved antenna list for 450i 647

FCC approved antenna list for 450b Connectorized and 450 MicroPoP 649

Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information 649

900 MHz ISEDC notification 649

4.9 GHz ISEDC notification 649

Utilisation de la bande 4.9 GHz FCC et ISEDC 649

5.2 GHz and 5.4 GHz ISEDC notification 650

Utilisation de la bande 5.2 and 5.4 GHz ISEDC 650

ISEDC notification 5.8 GHz 650

Utilisation de la bande 5.8 GHz ISEDC 650

ISEDC certification numbers 651

Canada approved antenna list 654

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 657

General troubleshooting procedure 657

General planning for troubleshooting 657

General fault isolation process 658

Secondary Steps 659

Troubleshooting procedures 659

Module has lost or does not establish connectivity 660

Contents 12
 NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity 661

SM Does Not Register to an AP 662

Module has lost or does not gain sync 663

Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity 663

CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules 664

Module Software Cannot be Upgraded 664

Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible 665

Power-up troubleshooting 666

Registration and connectivity troubleshooting 667

Logs 667

Persistent Logging 667

PMP 450m Reference information 669

Quality of Service (QoS) Glossary 671

Cambium Networks 681

Contents 13
About This User Guide
This guide describes configuration and operation of the Cambium point-to-point and point-to-multipoint
wireless Ethernet bridges. It covers PMP/PTP 450, 450i, 450b, 450d and PMP 450m platform Series. It is
intended for use by the system designer, system installer and system administrator.

For system configuration, tools and troubleshooting, refer to the following chapters:

l Chapter 1: Configuration

l Chapter 2: Tools

l Chapter 3: Operation

l Chapter 4: Reference information

l Chapter 5: Troubleshooting

Contacting Cambium Networks

Main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com

Sales enquiries: [email protected]

Support/Repair enquiries: https://support.cambiumnetworks.com

Telephone number list: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/contact

Address: Cambium Networks Limited,

Linhay Business Park,
Eastern Road,
Ashburton,
Devon, TQ13 7UP

United Kingdom

Purpose
Cambium Networks Point-to-Multi-Point (PMP)/Point-To-Point (PTP) 450 documents are intended to
instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium PMP/PTP
equipment and ancillary devices of 450 Platform Family. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in
such activities be properly trained.

Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in
system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or anyone acting on
the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or recommendations made in this
document.

Product notation conventions in document

This document covers Cambium 450 Series, 450b series, 450i Series and 450m Series products. The
following notation conventions are followed while referring to product series and product family:

About This User Guide 14

Product notation Description

450 Platform Family Refers to the complete 450 Series family, which includes 450 Series, 450i
Series, 450b Series, 450m Series, 450 MicroPoP Series and 450b Retro Series

450 Series Refers to 450 Series devices in the following configurations:

l PMP 450

o AP [2.4, 3.5, 3.65, 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

o SM [900 MHz and 2.4, 3.5, 3.65, 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

l PTP 450 BHM/ BHS [900 MHz and 3.5, 3.65, 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

l PMP 450d SM [5 GHz]

450i Series Refers to 450i Series devices in the following configurations:

l PMP 450i

o AP [900 MHz and 3, 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

o SM [3 GHz and 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

l PTP 450i BHM/ BHS [3 GHz and 5 GHz]

n Connectorized/Integrated

450b Series Refers to 450b Series devices in the following configurations:

l PMP 450b Mid-Gain

o SM [5 GHz]

n Integrated

l PMP 450b High Gain

o SM [3 GHz and 5 GHz] - Dish

l PTP 450b Mid-Gain

o BHM/BHS [5 GHz]

n Integrated

About This User Guide 15

 Product notation Description

l PTP 450b High Gain

o BHM/BHS [3 GHz and 5 GHz] - Dish

450m Series Refers to 450m Series device configuration:

l PMP 450m AP (5 GHz)

o Integrated

l PMP 450m AP (3 GHz)

o Integrated

450 MicroPoP AP Refers to 450 MicroPoP Series device configuration:

Series
l PMP 450 MicroPoP Omni 5 GHz Integrated
l PMP 450 MicroPoP Sector 5 GHz Integrated
l PMP 450 MicroPoP 5 GHz Connectorized

450b Retro Series Refers to 450b Retro Series device configuration:

l PMP 450b Retro SM 5 GHz Integrated

Cross references
References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in blue text
in electronic versions, are active links to the references.

This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not
numbered but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Feedback
We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure,
content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. To provide feedback, visit our support
website.https://support.cambiumnetworks.com.

Caution

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

l This device may not cause harmful interference, and

l This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation

Important regulatory information

The 450 Platform Family products are certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not
allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands).

About This User Guide 16

Application software
Download the latest 450 Platform Family software and install it in the Outdoor Units (ODUs) before
deploying the equipment. Instructions for installing software are provided in Upgrading the software
version and using CNUT on page 1.

USA specific information

The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires manufacturers to implement special
features to prevent interference to weather radar systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650
MHz. These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz
to 5725 MHz.

Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC
rules; specifically, it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have
been demonstrated to the FCC.

Cambium supplies variants of the 5 GHz 450, 450i, 450b, and 450m Series specifically for operation in
the USA to comply with FCC requirements (KDB 905462 D02 UNII DFS Compliance Procedures New
Rules v02). These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply with FCC rules.

To ensure compliance when using PMP 450 Series and PTP 450 Series, follow the recommendation in
Avoidance of weather radars (USA only).

External antennas
When using a connectorized version of the product, the conducted transmit power may need to be
reduced to ensure the regulatory limit on transmitter EIRP is not exceeded. The installer must have an
understanding of how to compute the effective antenna gain from the actual antenna gain and the feeder
cable losses.

The range of permissible values for maximum antenna gain and feeder cable losses are included in this
user guide together with a sample calculation. The product GUI automatically applies the correct
conducted power limit to ensure that it is not possible for the installation to exceed the EIRP limit, when
the appropriate values for antenna gain and feeder cable losses are entered into the GUI.

Avoidance of weather radars (USA only)

To comply with FCC rules (KDB 443999: Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 -
5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities), units which are installed within 35 km (22
miles) of a Terminal Doppler Weather Radar (TDWR) system (or have a line of sight propagation path to
such a system) must be configured to avoid any frequency within +30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency
of the TDWR device. This requirement applies even if the master is outside the 35 km (22 miles) radius
but communicates with outdoor clients which may be within the 35 km (22 miles) radius of the TDWRs. If
interference is not eliminated, a distance limitation based on line-of-sight from TDWR will need to be
used. Devices with bandwidths greater than 20 MHz may require greater frequency separation.

When planning a link in the USA, visit http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx, enter the location of
the planned link and search for TDWR radars. If a TDWR system is located within 35 km (22 miles) or has
line of sight propagation to the PTP device, perform the following tasks:

l Register the installation on http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx.

l Make a list of channel center frequencies that must be barred, that is, those falling within
+30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR radars.

The 450 Platform Family AP must be configured to not operate on the affected channels.

About This User Guide 17

Canada specific information
Caution

This device complies with ISEDC ’s license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference; and

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

ISEDC requires manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to weather radar
systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz. These features must be implemented in all
products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz.

Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of ISEDC
rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have
been demonstrated to ISEDC .

In order to comply with these ISEDC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the 450 Platform
Family for operation in Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply
with ISEDC rules. In particular, operation of radio channels overlapping the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz
is not allowed and these channels are permanently barred.

In addition, other channels may also need to be barred when operating close to weather radar
installations.

Other variants of the 450 Platform Family are available for use in the rest of the world, but these variants
are not supplied to Canada except under strict controls, when they are needed for export and
deployment outside Canada.

Renseignements specifiques au Canada

Attention

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

ISEDC a demandé aux fabricants de mettre en œuvre des mécanismes spécifiques pour éviter d’interférer
avec des systèmes radar fonctionnant dans la bande 5600 MHz à 5650 MHz. Ces mécanismes doivent
être mis en œuvre dans tous les produits capables de fonctionner à l'extérieur dans la bande 5470 MHz à
5725 MHz.

Les fabricants doivent s'assurer que les produits de radiocommunications ne peuvent pas être configurés
pour fonctionner en dehors des règles ISEDC, en particulier, il ne doit pas être possible de désactiver ou
modifier les fonctions de protection des radars qui ont été démontrés à ISEDC.

Afin de se conformer à ces exigences de ISEDC, Cambium fournit des variantes du 450 Platform Family
exclusivement pour le Canada. Ces variantes ne permettent pas à l’équipement de fonctionner en dehors
des règles de ISEDC. En particulier, le fonctionnement des canaux de radio qui chevauchent la bande
5600-5650 MHz est interdite et ces canaux sont définitivement exclus.

About This User Guide 18

ISEDC approved antennas
The list of antennas used to obtain ISEDC approvals is provided in section Country specific radio
regulations, Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information, Table
233 Canada approved dedicated external antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz.

Antennas externes
Lorsque vous utilisez une version du produit sans antenne intégrée, il peut être nécessaire de réduire la
puissance d'émission pour garantir que la limite réglementaire de puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (PIRE) n'est pas dépassée. L'installateur doit avoir une bonne compréhension de la façon de
calculer le gain de l'antenne réelle et les pertes dans les câbles de connections.

La plage de valeurs admissibles pour un gain maximal de l'antenne et des pertes de câbles de
connections sont inclus dans ce guide d'utilisation avec un exemple de calcul. L'interface utilisateur du
produit applique automatiquement la limite de puissance menée correct afin de s'assurer qu'il ne soit pas
possible pour l'installation de dépasser la limite PIRE, lorsque les valeurs appropriées pour le gain
d'antenne et les pertes de câbles d'alimentation sont entrées dans l’interface utilisateur.

Antennes approuvées par ISEDC

La liste des antennas approveés pour l’operation au Canada est founie dans le chapitre Country specific
radio regulations, Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information
tableaux Table 233 Canada approved dedicated external antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz.

EU Declaration of Conformity
Hereby, Cambium Networks declares that the Cambium 450 Series, 450b Series, 450i Series and 450m
Series Wireless Ethernet Bridge complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at:

https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/eu_dofc

Specific expertise and training for professional installers

To ensure that the 450 Platform Family products – PMP/PTP 450 Series, PMP/PTP 450i Series, PMP
450m Series are installed and configured in compliance with the requirements of ISEDC and the FCC,
installers must have the radio engineering skills and training described in this section.

The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:

https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/

Ethernet networking skills

The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control products
using a web browser interface.

Lightning protection
To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes, the installer must be familiar
with the normal procedures for site selection, bonding and grounding. Installation guidelines for the 450
Platform Family can be found in Chapter 2: System hardware and Chapter 3: System planning of 450
Platform Planning and Installation Guide.

About This User Guide 19

Training
The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation. The specific
requirements applicable to the 450 Platform should be gained by reading:

l Chapter 4: Preparing for installation and Chapter 5: Installation of 450 Platform Planning and
Installation Guide

l Chapter 1: Configuration, Chapter 2: :Tools, and Chapter 3: Operation of 450 Platform

Configuration Guide (this document),

l And by performing sample set ups at base workshop before live deployments.

The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:

https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/

Problems and warranty

Reporting problems
If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this procedure to
investigate and report:

1. Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases.
2. Visit the support website.
3. Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier.
4. Gather information from affected units, such as any available diagnostic downloads.
5. Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support.

Repair and service

If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the
support website (http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support).

Hardware warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium
Networks or a Cambium distributor. Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will conform to the
relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace
the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced
product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days.

To register PMP and PTP products or activate warranties, visit the support website. For warranty
assistance, contact the reseller or distributor. The removal of the tamper-evident seal will void the
warranty.

Caution

Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment or void
warranty. Contact Cambium for service and repair instructions.

Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to

electrostatic discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage.

About This User Guide 20

Security advice
Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the
operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using
these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered are
protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the
ability to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the
parties involved.

In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however
the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies
with the operator of the system.

Warnings, cautions, and notes

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the
Cambium Networks document set.

Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to alert
the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has the following
format:

Warning

Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.

Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems, software, or
individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no danger to personnel. A
caution has the following format:

Caution

Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.

Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to
help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:

Note

Note text.

Caring for the environment

The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Cambium
Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.

About This User Guide 21

In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union (EU)
directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Cambium equipment in
EU countries.

Disposal of Cambium equipment

European Union (EU) Directive 2012/19/EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Do not
dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites. For disposal instructions, refer to

https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/compliance/

Disposal of surplus packaging

Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s responsibility
to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU
environmental law.

In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with
national and regional regulations.

About This User Guide 22

Chapter 1: Configuration
This chapter describes how to use the web interface to configure the 450 Platform link. This chapter
contains the following topics:

l Preparing for configuration

l Connecting to the unit

l Using the web interface

l Quick link setup

l Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces

l Upgrading the software version and using CNUT

l General configuration

l Configuring Unit Settings page

l Setting up time and date

l Configuring synchronization

l Configuring security

l Configuring 802.1X authentication

l Configuring radio parameters

l Setting up SNMP agent

l Configuring syslog

l Configuring remote access

l Monitoring the Link

l Configuring quality of service

l Citizens Broadband Radio Service (CBRS)

l Installation Color Code

l Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66

l Configuring Radio via config file

l Configuring a RADIUS server

Preparing for configuration

This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with unit configuration and
antenna alignment.

Chapter 1: Configuration 23
Safety precautions
All national and local safety standards must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the
antennas.

Warning

Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy. The units
start to radiate RF energy as soon as they are powered up. Respect the safety
standards defined in Legal and Open Sources Guide, in particular the minimum
separation distances.

Observe the following guidelines:

Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is powered.

Always power down the PSU before connecting or disconnecting the drop cable
from the PSU, ODU or LPU.

Regulatory compliance
All applicable radio regulations must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the antennas.
For more information, refer to chapter Compliance with radio regulations in Legal and Open Sources
Guide.

Connecting to the unit

This section describes how to connect the unit to a management PC and power it up.

Configuring the management PC

Use this procedure to configure the local management PC to communicate with the 450 Platform ODU.

Procedure 1 Configuring the management PC

1 Select Properties for the Ethernet port. In Windows 7 this is found in Control Panel > Network and
Internet > Network Connections > Local Area Connection.

2 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP):

Chapter 1: Configuration 24
3 Click Properties.

4 Enter an IP address that is valid for the 169.254.X.X network, avoiding 169.254.0.0 and 169.254.1.1.
A good example is 169.254.1.3:

Chapter 1: Configuration 25
 5 Enter a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0. Leave the default gateway blank.

Connecting to the PC and powering up

Use this procedure to connect a management PC and power up the 450 platform ODU.

Procedure 2 Connecting to the PC and powering up

1 Check that the ODU and PSU are correctly connected.

2 Connect the PC Ethernet port to the LAN port of the PSU using a standard (not crossed) Ethernet
cable.

3 Apply mains or battery power to the PSU. The green Power LED should illuminate continuously.

4 After about several seconds, check that the orange Ethernet LED starts with 10 slow flashes.

5 Check that the Ethernet LED then illuminates continuously.

Using the web interface

This section describes how to log into the 450 Platform Family web interface and use its menus.

Logging into the web interface

Use this procedure to log into the web interface as a system administrator.

Procedure 3 Logging into the web interface

1 Start the web browser from the management PC.

2 Type the IP address of the unit into the address bar. The factory default IP address is 169.254.1.1.
Press ENTER. The web interface menu and System Summary page are displayed:

Chapter 1: Configuration 26
3 On left hand side of home page, the login information is displayed:

Chapter 1: Configuration 27
4 Enter Username (factory default username is admin) and Password (factory default password is
admin) and click Login.

Web GUI

Field Name Description

Main Menu Click an option in side navigation bar (area marked as “1”). Multiple options in sub-
navigation bars appear

Menu Click top sub-navigation bar to choose one configuration page (area marked as “2”)
Options

Parameters To configure the parameters (e.g. area marked as “3”)

Press "Save Changes" to confirm and save the changes

To reboot the ODU

Chapter 1: Configuration 28
Using the menu options
Use the menu navigation bar in the left panel to navigate to each web page. Some of the menu options
are only displayed for specific system configurations. Use below table to locate information about using
each web page.

Table 1: Menu options and web pages

Main Menu options Applicable Description

menu module

General Status All Viewing General Status

Session Status AP, BHM Viewing Session Status

Event Log All Interpreting messages in the Event Log

Network Interface All Viewing the Network Interface

Layer 2 Neighbors All Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors

General All General configuration

IP All Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces

Radio All Configuring radio parameters

SNMP All Setting up SNMP agent

cnMaestro All Configuring cnMaestroTM Connectivity

Quality of Service (QoS) All Configuring quality of service

Security All Configuring security

Time AP, BHM Setting up time and date

VLAN All VLAN configuration for PMP

VLAN configuration for PTP

DiffServ All IPv4 and IPv6 Prioritization

Protocol Filtering All Filtering protocols and ports

Syslog All Configuring syslog

Ping Watchdog All Configuring Ping Watchdog

Unit Setting All Configuring Unit Settings page

Scheduler All Viewing the Scheduler statistics

Chapter 1: Configuration 29
Main Menu options Applicable Description
menu module

Registration AP, BHM Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics

Failures

Bridge Control All Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics

Block

Bridging Table All Interpreting Bridging Table statistics

Ethernet All Interpreting Ethernet statistics

Radio All Interpreting RF Control Block statistics

VLAN All Interpreting VLAN statistics

Data Channels All Interpreting Data Channels statistics

MIR/Burst AP, SM Interpreting MIR/Burst statistics

Throughput AP, BHM Interpreting Throughput statistics

Filter All Interpreting Filter statistics

ARP All Viewing ARP statistics

Overload All Interpreting Overload statistics

Syslog Statistics All Interpreting syslog statistics

Translation Table SM Interpreting Translation Table statistics

DHCP Relay AP Interpreting DHCP Relay statisticson page 1

NAT Stats SM Viewing NAT statistics

NAT DHCP SM Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics

Pass Through AP Interpreting Pass Through Statistics

Statistics

Sync Status AP Interpreting Sync Status statistics

PPPoE SM Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities

SNMPv3 All Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics

Statistics

Frame Utilization AP, BH Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics

Link Capacity All Using the Link Capacity Test tool

Test

Spectrum All Spectrum Analyzer tool

Analyzer

Chapter 1: Configuration 30
Main Menu options Applicable Description
menu module

Remote All Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool

Spectrum
Analyzer

AP/BHM SM, BHS Using AP Evaluation tool

Evaluation
Using BHM Evaluation tool

Subscriber AP Using the Subscriber Configuration tool

Configuration

OFDM Frame All Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool

Calculator

BER results SM, BHS Using BER Results tool

Alignment Tool SM, BHS Using the Alignment Tool

Link Status All Using the Link Status tool

Sessions AP, BHM Using the Sessions tool

Ping Test All Using the Ping Test tool

Change User All Changing a User Setting

Setting

Add user All Adding a User for Access to a module

Delete User All Deleting a User from Access to a module

User All Users account

Quick Start AP, BHM Quick link setup

AP, BHM Quick link setup

Radio Carrier AP, BHM Quick link setup

Frequency

Synchronization AP, BHM Quick link setup

LAN IP Address AP, BHM Quick link setup

Review and Save AP, BHM Quick link setup

Configuration

Chapter 1: Configuration 31
 Main Menu options Applicable Description
menu module

Quick Status SM The PDA web-page includes 320 x 240 pixel formatted
displays of information important to installation and
Spectrum Results SM alignment for installers using legacy PDA devices. All device
(PDA) web pages are compatible with touch devices such as smart
Information SM phones and tablets.

BHM Evaluation SM

AIM SM

Copyright All The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device

Notices copyright information.

All

Quick link setup

This section describes how to use the Quick Start Wizard to complete the essential system configuration
tasks that must be performed on a PMP/PTP configuration.

Initiating Quick Start Wizard

To start with Quick Start Wizard: after logging into the web management interface click the Quick Start
button on the left side of main menu bar. The AP/BHM responds by opening the Quick Start page.

Figure 1: Disarm Installation page (top and bottom of page shown)

Chapter 1: Configuration 32
Quick Start is a wizard that helps you to perform a basic configuration that places an AP/BHM into
service. Only the following parameters must be configured:

l Region Code

l RF Carrier Frequency

l Synchronization

l LAN (Network) IP Address

In each Quick Start page, you can

l specify the settings to satisfy the requirements of the network.

l review the configuration selected.

l save the configuration to non-volatile memory.

Procedure 4 Quick start wizard

1 At the bottom of the Quick Start tab, click Go To Next Page .

2 From the pull-down menu, select the region in which the AP will operate.

Figure 2: Regional Settings tab of AP/BHM

3 Click the Go To Next Page button.

4 From the pull-down menu, select a frequency for the test.

Figure 3: Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 33
5 Click the Go To Next Page button.

6 At the bottom of this tab, select Generate Sync Signal.

Figure 4: Synchronization tab of AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 34
7 Click the Go To Next Page button.

8 At the bottom of the IP address configuration tab, either

l specify an IP Address, a Subnet Mask, and a Gateway IP Address for management

of the AP and leave the DHCP state set to Disabled.

l set the DHCP state to Enabled to have the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP
address automatically configured by a domain name server (DNS).

Figure 5: LAN IP Address tab of the AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 35
 Note

Cambium encourages you to experiment with the interface. Unless you save
a configuration and reboot the AP after you save the configuration, none of
the changes are affected.

9 Click the Go To Next Page button.

10 Ensure that the initial parameters for the AP are set as you intended.

Figure 6: Review and Save Configuration tab of the AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 36
 11 Click Save Changes button.

12 Click the Reboot button.

RESULT: The AP responds with the message Reboot Has Been Initiated…

13 Wait until the indicator LEDs are not red.

14 Trigger your browser to refresh the page until the AP redisplays the General Status tab.

15 Wait until the red indicator LEDs are not lit.

Configuring time settings

To proceed with the test setup, click the Configuration link on the left side of the General Status page.
When the AP responds by opening the Configuration page to the General page, click the Time tab.

Chapter 1: Configuration 37
Figure 7: Time tab of the AP/BHM

To have each log in the AP/BHM correlated to a meaningful time and date, either a reliable network
element must pass time and date to the AP/BHM or you must set the time and date whenever a power
cycle of the AP/BHM has occurred. A network element passes time and date in any of the following
scenarios:

l A connected CMM4 passes time and date (GPS time and date, if received).

l A separate NTP server is addressable from the AP/BHM.

If the AP/BHM should obtain time and date from a CMM4, or a separate NTP server, enter the IP address
of the CMM4 or NTP server on this tab. To force the AP/BHM to obtain time and date before the first (or
next) 15-minute interval query of the NTP server, click Get Time through NTP.

If you enter a time and date, the format for entry is:

Chapter 1: Configuration 38
Figure 8: Time and date entry formats

Time: hh / mm / ss

Date: MM / dd / yyyy

where

hh represents the two-digit hour in the range 00 to 24

mm represents the two-digit minute

ss represents the two-digit second

MM represents the two-digit month

dd represents the two-digit day

yyyy represents the four-digit year

Proceed with the time setup as follows.

Procedure 5 Entering AP/BHM time setup information

1. Enter the appropriate information in the format shown above.

2. Then click the Set Time and Date button.

Note

The time displayed at the top of this page is static unless your device is set to
automatically refresh

Powering the SM/BHS for test

Procedure 6 Powering the SM/BHS for test

1 In one hand, securely hold the top (larger shell) of the SM/BHS. With the other hand, depress the
lever in the back of the base cover (smaller shell). Remove the base cover.

2 Plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the SM PSU port

3 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the jack in the pig tail that hangs from the power
supply

4 Roughly aim the SM/BHS toward the AP/BHM

5 Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet

Chapter 1: Configuration 39
 Warning

From this point until you remove power from the AP/BHM, stay at least as far from
the AP/BHM as the minimum separation distance specified in Calculated distances
and power compliance margins in chapter 11.

6 Repeat the foregoing steps for each SM/BHS that you wish to include in the test.

Viewing the Session Status of the AP/BHM to determine test

registration
Once the SMs/BHS under test are powered on, return to the computing device to determine if the
SM/BHS units have registered to the AP/BHM.

Note

In order for accurate power level readings to be displayed, traffic must be

present on the radio link.

The Session Status tab provides information about each SM/BHS that has registered to the AP/BHM. This
information is useful for managing and troubleshooting a system. All information that you have entered in
the Site Name field of the SM/BHS displays in the Session Status tab of the linked AP/BHM.

The Session Status tab also includes the current active values on each SM( or BHS) (LUID) for MIR, and
VLAN, as well as the source of these values (representing the SM/BHS itself, Authentication Server, or the
AP/BHM and cap, if any—for example, APCAP as shown above).. As an SM/BHS registers to the AP/BHM,
the configuration source that this page displays for the associated LUID may change. After registration,
however, the displayed source is stable and can be trusted.

Idle subscribers may be included or removed from the session status display by enabling or disabling,
respectively, the Show Idle Sessions parameter. Enabling or disabling this parameter only affects the GUI
display of subscribers, not the registration status.

The SessionStatus.xml hyperlink allows user to export session status page from web management
interface of AP/BHM. The session status page will be exported in xml file.

Chapter 1: Configuration 40
Procedure 7 Viewing the AP Session Status page

1 On the AP web management GUI, navigate to Home, Session Status:

Figure 9: Session Status tab of AP

Note

Session status page for BHM is same as AP.

2 Verify that for each SM (or BHS) MAC address (printed on the SM/BHS housing) the AP/BHM has
established a registered session by verifying the “State” status of each entry.

Chapter 1: Configuration 41
The Session Status page of the AP/BHM is explained in Session Status Attributes – AP.

Table 2: Session Status Attributes – AP

Attribute Meaning

Show Idle Idle subscribers may be included or removed from the session status display by
Sessions enabling or disabling, respectively, the Show Idle Sessions parameter. Enabling or
disabling this parameter only affects the GUI display of subscribers, not the
registration status.

Last Session This field displays date and time stamp of last session counter reset.
Counter Reset

Reference EVM Option to configure reference EVM for all connected SMs.
setting option

Last Time Idle This field displays date and time stamp of last Idle SMs Removed. On click of
SMs Removed “Remove Idle SMs” button, all the SMs which are in Idle state are flushed out.

Data See Exporting Session Status page of AP/BHM

Device tab See Device tab

Session tab See Session tab

Power tab See Power tab

Configuration See Configuration tab

tab

Link Quality See Link Quality tab

Chapter 1: Configuration 42
Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces
This task consists of the following sections:

l Configuring the IPv4 interface

l NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ

l IP interface with NAT disabled - SM

l IP interface with NAT enabled - SM

l NAT tab with NAT disabled - SM

l NAT tab with NAT enabled - SM

l NAT DNS Considerations - SM

l DHCP – BHS

l VLAN configuration for PMP

l VLAN page of AP

l VLAN page of SM

l VLAN Membership tab of SM

l VLAN configuration for PTP

l NAT Port Forwarding tab – SM

Configuring the IPv4 interface

The IPv4 interface allows users to connect to the 450 Platform Family web interface, either from a locally
connected computer or from a management network.

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

To configure the IP interface, follow these instructions:

Procedure 8 Configuring the AP/BHM IPv4 interface

1 Select menu option Configuration > IP. The LAN configuration page is displayed:

Chapter 1: Configuration 43
2 Update IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address to meet network requirements (as
specified by the network administrator).

3 Review the other IP interface attributes and update them, if necessary (see ).

4 Click Save. “Reboot Required” message is displayed:

5 Click Reboot button.

Chapter 1: Configuration 44
The IP page of AP/SM/BHM/BHS is explained in below table.

Table 3: IPv4 interface attributes

Attribute Meaning

IP Address Internet Protocol (IP) address. This address is used by family of Internet protocols to
uniquely identify this unit on a network.

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network.

Gateway IP The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A
Address gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks.

DHCP state If Enabled is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable (read only), in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

Chapter 1: Configuration 45
Attribute Meaning

DNS IP Address Canopy devices allow for configuration of a preferred and alternate DNS server IP
address either automatically or manually. Devices must set DNS server IP address
manually when DHCP is disabled for the management interface of the device. DNS
servers may be configured automatically from the DHCP response when DHCP is
enabled for the management interface of the device. Optionally devices may be
configured to set the DNS server IP address manually when DHCP is enabled for the
management interface. The default DNS IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 when configured
manually.

Preferred DNS The first address used for DNS resolution.

Server

Alternate DNS If the Preferred DNS server cannot be reached, the Alternate DNS Server is used.
Server

Domain Name The operator’s management domain name may be configured for DNS. The domain
name configuration can be used for configuration of the servers in the operator’s
network. The default domain name is example.com, and is only used if configured as
such.

Advanced LAN1 Hardcoded default alternate IP address (169.254.1.1) that is available only when
IP connected to the Ethernet port. When enabled, user can configure a second IP
Configuration – address for the bridge which is other than the hardcoded IP address (169.254.1.1).
Default
alternate LAN1
IP address

AUX Ethernet Enabled: Data is enabled for Auxiliary port

Port – AUX
Disabled: Data is disabled for Auxiliary port
Ethernet Port

AUX Ethernet Enabled: PoE out is enable for Auxiliary port

Port – AUX
Disabled: PoE out is disabled for Auxiliary port
Ethernet Port
PoE

LAN2 Network It is recommended not to change this parameter from the default AP/BHM private IP
Interface address of 192.168.101.1. A /24 CIDR subnet is used to communicate with each of the
Configuration SMs/BHS that are registered. The AP/BHM uses a combination of the private IP and
(Radio Private the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS.
Interface) – IP
It is only displayed for AP and BHM.
Address
Table 4: SM/BHS private IP and LUID

SM/BHS LUID Private IP

First SM/BHS registered 2 192.168.101.2

Second SM registered 3 192.168.101.3

Chapter 1: Configuration 46
Configuring the IPv6 interface
The IPv6 interface allows users to connect to the 450 Platform Family web interface, either from a locally
connected computer or from a management network.

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

To configure the IPv6 interface, follow these instructions:

Configuring the AP/BHM IPv6 interface

To enable this feature,

1. Go to Configuration > IP > LAN1 IPv6 Network Interface Configuration.

2. Set the IPv6 parameter as Enabled.

3. Once IPv6 is enabled and the device is rebooted, the device generates a link-local IPv6 address
using the EUI-64 format.

When the IPv6 feature is enabled, the IPv6 LAN interface addresses are displayed on General > Network
Interface page of the radio GUI.

Once the Stateless Auto Address Configuration (SLAAC) IP is received, Network Interface page is
updated with most recent SLAAC IP address and gateway information as follows:

Chapter 1: Configuration 47
IPv6 Trap Addresses
Go to Configuration > SNMP > IPv6 Trap Addresses of radio to configure a maximum of five IPv6 trap
addresses. Any changes made to the IPv6 Trap Addresses requires a reboot.

IPv6 Statistics
Go to Statistics > IPv6 MIB Statistics of radio to view the IPv6 and ICMPv6 MIB statistics.

Chapter 1: Configuration 48
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache
Go to Statistics > IPv6 Neighbor Discover Cache of the AP/SM GUI to view Neighbor Discovery Cache.

Note

The IPv6 feature is supported with HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, Telnet, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3 application protocols.

IPv6 Ping Test

To perform IPv6 ping test,

1. Go to Tools > Ping Test > Ping IPv6 Test Settings of the radio.

2. Configure the IPv6 Address parameter

Chapter 1: Configuration 49
 3. Configure the Count parameter with any value from 3 to 64.

4. Click Perform Ping v6 Test. The IPv6 ping test results are displayed under Ping IPv6 Test Results.

DHCPv6
DHPCv6 can either be enabled explicitly or can be enabled when radio receives Managed bit set in Router
Advertisement (RA).

DHCPv6 Status can be: Disabled/Enabled (explicitly enabled) or Managed (DHCPv6 enabled due to M-bit
been set in RA).

AP Statistics:

When this feature is enabled a new statistics page is available on the AP GUI. To access this page,

Go to Statistics > DHCPv6 Stastistics.

Chapter 1: Configuration 50
DHCPv6 Relay Agent

DHCPv6 relay agent currently supports “Inserting Option 82” only. “Full Relay Operation” mode is
currently not supported with DHCPv6. DHCP Relay Agent configuration is common for both DHCPv4 and
DHCPv6.

DHCPv4 Option 82 sub-options are mapped to DHCPv6 options as follows:

DHCPv4 sub options DHCPv6 options

Sub option 1 (Agent Circuit-ID) Option 18 (Interface-ID)

Sub option 2 (Agent Remote-ID) Option 37 (Remote-Identifier)

Sub option 2 (Agent Remote-ID) Option 37 (Remote-Identifier)

Sub option 9 (Vendor Specific information) Option 17 (Vendor Specific information)

Note

Sub option is replaced with

encapsulated vendor specific option,
option ID '1'

Option 16 (vendor Class) will have radio model

information, for example: “Cambium PMP 450 AP”.

Following is an example of Statistics > DHCP Relay page:

Chapter 1: Configuration 51
DNSv6
DNS information can be obtained 3 different ways in IPv6:

1. Router Advertisement support DNS information as mentioned by RFC 8106. If the router sends
DNSv6 information, radio will display on Network Interface page.
2. Stateless DHCPv6: In this scenario Router Advertisement won't send any DNS information but will
set O-bit. Radio will initiate a DHCPv6 Information Request transaction (RFC 8415) and fetch the
DNS information from server.
3. Stateful DHCPv6: Router Advertisement will be sent with M-bit set, Radio will initiate a complete
DHCPv6 transaction to obtain IPv6 address and DNSv6 information.

Maximum two DNS IPv6 servers are supported. If there is a static entry configured, it will be overridden
with received value.

Note

Currently we only support vendor options DNS Recursive Name Serve and DNS
Suffix Search List.

DNS IPv6 Resolution

DNS test tool can be used to resolve IPv6 address for Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) using DNS
IPv6 Lookup.

Chapter 1: Configuration 52
The IPv6 page of AP/SM/BHM/BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 53
Figure 10: IPv6 interface attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 54
Attribute Meaning

IP Address Internet Protocol (IP) address. This address is used by family of Internet protocols to
uniquely identify this unit on a network.

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network.

Gateway IP The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A
Address gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks.

DHCP state If Enabled is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable (read only), in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

DHCP DNS IP Canopy devices allow for configuration of a preferred and alternate DNS server IP
Address address either automatically or manually. Devices must set DNS server IP address
manually when DHCP is disabled for the management interface of the device. DNS
servers may be configured automatically from the DHCP response when DHCP is
enabled for the management interface of the device. Optionally devices may be
configured to set the DNS server IP address manually when DHCP is enabled for the
management interface. The default DNS IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 when configured
manually.

Preferred DNS The first address used for DNS resolution.

Server

Alternate DNS If the Preferred DNS server cannot be reached, the Alternate DNS Server is used.
Server

Domain Name The operator’s management domain name may be configured for DNS. The domain
name configuration can be used for configuration of the servers in the operator’s
network. The default domain name is example.com, and is only used if configured as
such.

IPv6 Provision to Enable/Disable IPv6 option.

Chapter 1: Configuration 55
 Attribute Meaning

IPv6 Address Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) address. This address is used by family of Internet
protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.

Prefix Length Displays the number of leading bits in the prefix that are valid (from 0 to 128 bits).

Gateway IPv6 This field displays the gateway IPv6 address for the device.
Address

Preferred DNS The first address used for DNS resolution.

Server

Alternate DNS If the Preferred DNS server cannot be reached, the Alternate DNS Server is used.
Server

DHCPv6 If Enabled is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable (read only), in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

Advanced Hardcoded default alternate IP address (169.254.1.1) that is available only when
LAN1 IP connected to the Ethernet port. When enabled, user can configure a second IP
Configuration – address for the bridge which is other than the hardcoded IP address (169.254.1.1).
Default
alternate LAN1
IP address

AUX Ethernet Enabled: Data is enabled for Auxiliary port

Port – AUX
Disabled: Data is disabled for Auxiliary port
Ethernet Port

AUX Ethernet Enabled: PoE out is enable for Auxiliary port

Port – AUX
Disabled: PoE out is disabled for Auxiliary port
Ethernet Port
PoE

LAN2 Network It is recommended not to change this parameter from the default AP/BHM private IP
Interface address of 192.168.101.1. A /24 CIDR subnet is used to communicate with each of the
Configuration SMs/BHS that are registered. The AP/BHM uses a combination of the private IP and
(Radio Private the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS.
Interface) – IP
It is only displayed for AP and BHM.
Address
Table 5: SM/BHS private IP and LUID

SM/BHS LUID Private IP

First SM/BHS registered 2 192.168.101.2

Second SM registered 3 192.168.101.3

Auxiliary port
An additional Ethernet port labeled “Aux” for Auxiliary port is implemented for downstream traffic. This
feature is supported only for PTP/PMP 450i ODUs.

Chapter 1: Configuration 56
To enable the Aux port, follow these instructions:

Procedure 9 Enabling Aux port interface

1 Select menu option Configuration > IP > Aux Network Interface tab.:

2 Click Enable button of Aux Ethernet Port parameter to enable Aux Ethernet port

3 Click Enable button of Aux Ethernet Port PoE parameter to enable Aux port PoE out.

4 Click Save. “Reboot Required” message is displayed.

5 Click Reboot.

Table 6: Aux port attributes

Attribute Meaning

Aux Ethernet Port Enabled: Data is enabled for Auxiliary port

Disabled: Data is disabled for Auxiliary port

Aux Ethernet Port PoE Enabled: PoE out is enable for Auxiliary port

Disabled: PoE out is disabled for Auxiliary port

By disabling this feature, the data at the Auxiliary port will be disabled.

NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ

Applicable PMP: þ SM
products

The system provides NAT (Network Address Translation) for SMs in the following combinations of NAT
and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):

Chapter 1: Configuration 57
 l NAT Disabled

l NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface) and DHCP
Server

l NAT with DHCP Client(DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)

l NAT with DHCP Server

l NAT without DHCP

NAT
NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet or wired side of a SM from being seen directly from the
wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP address for transport traffic (separate from
its address for management), terminates transport traffic and allows you to assign a range of IP
addresses to devices that are connected to the Ethernet or wired side of the SM.

In the Cambium system, NAT supports many protocols, including HTTP, ICMP (Internet Control Message
Protocols), and FTP (File Transfer Protocol). For virtual private network (VPN) implementation, L2TP
over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol)
are supported.

Note

When NAT is enabled, a reduction in throughput is introduced in the system

(due to processing overhead).

DHCP
DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default
gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus, DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP addresses,
and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the Cambium system.

In conjunction with the NAT features, each SM provides the following:

l A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by Ethernet protocol.

l A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP server.

DMZ
In conjunction with the NAT features, a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) allows the allotment of one IP address
behind the SM for a device to logically exist outside the firewall and receive network traffic. The first
three octets of this IP address must be identical to the first three octets of the NAT private IP address.

l A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by Ethernet protocol.

l A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP server.

NAT Disabled
The NAT Disabled implementation is illustrated in below figure.

Chapter 1: Configuration 58
Figure 11: NAT disabled implementation

NAT with DHCP Client and DHCP Server

The NAT with DHCP Client and DHCP server is illustrated in below figure.

Chapter 1: Configuration 59
Figure 12: NAT with DHCP client and DHCP server implementation

Chapter 1: Configuration 60
NAT with DHCP Client
Figure 13: NAT with DHCP client implementation

Chapter 1: Configuration 61
NAT with DHCP Server
Figure 14: NAT with DHCP server implementation

Chapter 1: Configuration 62
NAT without DHCP
Figure 15: NAT without DHCP implementation

NAT and VPNs

VPN technology provides the benefits of a private network during communication over a public network.
One typical use of a VPN is to connect employees remotely (who are at home or in a different city), with
their corporate network through a public Internet. Any of several VPN implementation schemes is
possible. By design, NAT translates or changes addresses, and thus interferes with a VPN that is not
specifically supported by a given NAT implementation.

With NAT enabled, SM supports L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) VPNs and
PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs. With NAT disabled, SM supports all types of VPNs.

IP interface with NAT disabled - SM

The IP page of SM with NAT disabled is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 63
Table 7: IP attributes - SM with NAT disabled

Attribute Meaning

IP Address Enter the non-routable IP address to associate with the Ethernet connection on this
SM. (The default IP address from the factory is 169.254.1.1.) If you forget this parameter,
you must both:

l physically access the module.

l use recovery mode to access the module configuration parameters at

169.254.1.1.

Note

Note or print the IP settings from this page. Ensure that you can readily
associate these IP settings both with the module and with the other data
that you store about the module.

Network Specify whether the IP address of the SM must be visible to only a device connected to
Accessibility the SM by Ethernet (Local) or be visible to the AP/BHM as well (Public).

Subnet Mask Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the SM to communicate on the network. The
default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0.

Gateway IP Enter the appropriate gateway for the SM to communicate with the network. The
Address default gateway is 169.254.0.0.

DHCP state If you select Enabled, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable, but not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

In this tab, DHCP State is settable only if the Network Accessibility parameter in the IP
tab is set to Public. This parameter is also settable in the NAT tab of the Configuration
web page, but only when NAT is enabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 64
 Attribute Meaning

If the DHCP state parameter is set to Enabled in the Configuration > IP sub-menu of the
SM/BHS, do not check the BootpClient option for Packet Filter Types in its Protocol
Filtering tab, because doing so can block the DHCP request. (Filters apply to all
packets that leave the SM via its RF interface, including those that the SM itself
generates.) If you want to keep DHCP enabled and avoid the blocking scenario, select
the Bootp Server option instead. This will result in responses being appropriately
filtered and discarded.

DHCP DNS IP Canopy devices allow for configuration of a preferred and alternate DNS server IP
Address address either automatically or manually. Devices must set DNS server IP address
manually when DHCP is disabled for the management interface of the device. DNS
servers may be configured automatically from the DHCP response when DHCP is
enabled for the management interface of the device. Optionally devices may be
configured to set the DNS server IP address manually when DHCP is enabled for the
management interface. The default DNS IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 when configured
manually.

Preferred The first DNS server used for DNS resolution.

DNS Server

Alternate DNS The second DNS server used for DNS resolution.
Server

Domain Name The operator’s management domain name may be configured for DNS. The domain
name configuration can be used for configuration of the servers in the operator’s
network. The default domain name is example.com, and is only used if configured as
such.

IP interface with NAT enabled - SM

The IP page of SM with NAT enabled is explained in below table.

Table 8: IP attributes - SM with NAT enabled

Attribute Meaning

IP Address Assign an IP address for SM/BHS management through Ethernet access to the SM/BHS.
Set only the first three bytes. The last byte is permanently set to 1. This address becomes
the base for the range of DHCP-assigned addresses.

Subnet Assign a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 or a more restrictive subnet mask. Set only the
Mask last byte of this subnet mask. Each of the first three bytes is permanently set to 255.

NAT tab with NAT disabled - SM

The NAT tab of SM with NAT disabled is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 65
Table 9: NAT attributes - SM with NAT disabled

Chapter 1: Configuration 66
Attribute Meaning

NAT This parameter enables or disables the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature
Enable/Disable for the SM. NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet or wired side of a SM
from being seen directly from the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM
has an IP address for transport traffic separate from its address for management,
terminates transport traffic, and allows you to assign a range of IP addresses to
devices that are connected to the Ethernet or wired side of the SM.

When NAT is enabled, VLANs are not supported on the wired side of that SM. You
can enable NAT in SMs within a sector where VLAN is enabled in the AP/BHM, but
this may constrain network design.

IP Address This field displays the IP address for the SM. DHCP Server will not automatically
assign this address when NAT is disabled.

Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for the SM. DHCP Server will not automatically
assign this address when NAT is disabled.

Gateway IP This field displays the gateway IP address for the SM. DHCP Server will not
Address automatically assign this address when NAT is disabled.

ARP Cache If a router upstream has an ARP cache of longer duration (as some use 30 minutes),
Timeout enter a value of longer duration than the router ARP cache. The default value of this
field is 20 minutes.

TCP Session Where a large network exists behind the SM, you can set this parameter to lower
Garbage than the default value of 120 minutes. This action makes additional resources
Timeout available for greater traffic than the default value accommodates.

UDP Session You may adjust this parameter in the range of 1 to 1440 minutes, based on network
Garbage performance. The default value of this parameter is 4 minutes.
Timeout

Translation Total number of minutes that have elapsed since the last packet transfer between
Table Size the connected device and the SM/BHS.

Note

When NAT is disabled, the following parameters are not required to be configurable:

WAN Interface > Connection Type, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP address

LAN Interface > IP Address

LAN DHCP Server > DHCP Server Enable/Disable, DHCP Server Lease Timeout, Number of IP’s
to Lease, DNS Server Proxy, DNS IP Address, Preferred DNS IP address, Alternate DNS IP
address

Remote Management Interface > Remote Management Interface, IP address, Subnet Mask,
DHCP DNS IP Address, Preferred DNS Server, Alternate DNS Server, Domain Name

NAT Protocol Parameters > ARP Cache Timeout, TCP Session Garbage Timeout, UDP Session
Garbage Timeout, Translation Table Size

Chapter 1: Configuration 67
NAT tab with NAT enabled - SM
The NAT tab of SM with NAT enabled is explained in below table.

Table 10: NAT attributes - SM with NAT enabled

Chapter 1: Configuration 68
Attribute Meaning

NAT See description in NAT attributes - SM with NAT disabled.

Enable/Disable

WAN Interface The WAN interface is the RF-side address for transport traffic.

Connection This parameter may be set to

Type
Static IP—when this is the selection, all three parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask,
and Gateway IP Address) must be properly populated.

DHCP—when this is the selection, the information from the DHCP server configures
the interface.

PPPoE—when this is the selection, the information from the PPPoE server configures
the interface.

Subnet Mask If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
configures the subnet mask of the SM for RF transport traffic.

Gateway IP If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
Address configures the gateway IP address for the SM for RF transport traffic.

Reply to Ping on By default, the radio interface does not respond to pings. If you use a management
WAN Interface system (such as WM) that will occasionally ping the SM, set this parameter to
Enabled.

LAN Interface The LAN interface is both the management access through the Ethernet port and
the Ethernet-side address for transport traffic. When NAT is enabled, this interface is
redundantly shown as the NAT Network Interface Configuration on the IP tab of the
Configuration web page in the SM.

IP Address Assign an IP address for SM/BHS management through Ethernet access to the SM.
This address becomes the base for the range of DHCP-assigned addresses.

Subnet Mask Assign a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 or a more restrictive subnet mask. Set only
the last byte of this subnet mask. Each of the first three bytes is permanently set to
255.

DMZ Enable Either enable or disable DMZ for this SM/BHS.

DMZ IP Address If you enable DMZ in the parameter above, set the last byte of the DMZ host IP
address to use for this SM when DMZ is enabled. Only one such address is allowed.
The first three bytes are identical to those of the NAT private IP address. Ensure that
the device that receives network traffic behind this SM is assigned this address.
The system provides a warning if you enter an address within the range that DHCP
can assign.

DHCP Server This is the server (in the SM) that provides an IP address to the device connected to
the Ethernet port of the SM.

DHCP Server Select either Enabled or Disabled.

Enable/Disable
Enable to:

l Allow this SM to assign IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway IP

addresses to attached devices.

Chapter 1: Configuration 69
Attribute Meaning

l Assign a start address for DHCP.

l Designate how many IP addresses may be temporarily used (leased).

Disable to:

l Restrict SM/BHS from assigning addresses to attached devices.

DHCP Server Based on network performance, enter the number of days between when the DHCP
Lease Timeout server assigns an IP address and when that address expires. The range of values for
this parameter is 1 to 30 days. The default value is 30 days.

DHCP Start IP If you enable DHCP Server below, set the last byte of the starting IP address that the
DHCP server assigns. The first three bytes are identical to those of the NAT private
IP address.

Number of IPs to Enter how many IP addresses the DHCP server is allowed to assign. The default
Lease value is 50 addresses.

DNS Server This parameter enables or disables advertisement of the SM/BHS as the DNS server.
Proxy On initial boot up of a SM with the NAT WAN interface configured as DHCP or
PPPoE, the SM module will not have DNS information immediately. With DNS Server
Proxy disabled, the clients will renew their lease about every minute until the SM has
the DNS information to give out. At this point the SM will go to the full configured
lease time period which is 30 days by default. With DNS Server Proxy enabled, the
SM will give out full term leases with its NAT LAN IP as the DNS server.

DNS IP Address Select either:

Obtain Automatically to allow the system to set the IP address of the DNS server

or

Set Manually to enable yourself to set both a preferred and an alternate DNS IP
address.

Preferred DNS IP Enter the preferred DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is
Address set to Set Manually.

Alternate DNS IP Enter the DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is set to Set
Address Manually and no response is received from the preferred DNS IP address.

Remote To offer greater flexibility in IP address management, the NAT-enabled SM’s

Management configured WAN Interface IP address may be used as the device Remote
Interface Management Interface (unless the SM’s PPPoE client is set to Enabled)

Disable: When this interface is set to “Disable”, the SM is not directly accessible by IP
address. Management access is only possible through either the LAN (Ethernet)
interface or a link from an AP web page into the WAN (RF-side) interface.

Enable (Standalone Config): When this interface is set to “Enable (Standalone

Config)”, to manage the SM/BHS the device must be accessed by the IP addressing
information provided in the Remote Configuration Interface section.

Chapter 1: Configuration 70
Attribute Meaning

Note

When configuring PPPoE over the link, use this configuration option
(PPPoE traffic is routed via the IP addressing specified in section
Remote Configuration Interface).

Enable (Use WAN Interface): When this interface is set to “Enable (Use WAN
Interface)”, the Remote Configuration Interface information is greyed out, and the
SM is managed via the IP addressing specified in section WAN Interface).

Note

When using this configuration, the ports defined in section

Configuration, Port Configuration are consumed by the device. For
example, if FTP Port is configured as 21 by the SM, an FTP server
situated below the SM must use a port other than 21. This also applies
to DMZ devices; any ports specified in section Configuration, Port
Configuration will not be translated through the NAT, they are
consumed by the device’s network stack for management.

Connection This parameter can be set to:

Type
Static IP: when this is the selection, all three parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask,
and Gateway IP Address) must be properly populated.

DHCP: when this is the selection, the information from the DHCP server configures
the interface.

IP Address If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
configures the IP address of the SM for RF management traffic.

Subnet Mask If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
configures the subnet mask of the SM for RF management traffic.

Gateway IP If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
Address configures the gateway IP address for the SM for RF management traffic.

Note or print the IP settings from this page. Ensure that you can readily associate
these IP settings both with the module and with the other data that you store about
the module.

DHCP DNS IP Select either:

Address
Obtain Automatically to allow the system to set the IP address of the DNS server.

or

Set Manually to enable yourself to set both a preferred and an alternate DNS IP
address.

Preferred DNS Enter the preferred DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is
Server set to Set Manually.

Chapter 1: Configuration 71
 Attribute Meaning

Alternate DNS Enter the DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is set to Set
Server Manually and no response is received from the preferred DNS IP address.

Domain Name Domain Name to use for management DNS configuration. This domain name may be
concatenated to DNS names used configured for the remote configuration interface.

ARP Cache If a router upstream has an ARP cache of longer duration (as some use 30 minutes),
Timeout enter a value of longer duration than the router ARP cache. The default value of this
field is 20 (minutes).

TCP Session Where a large network exists behind the SM, you can set this parameter to lower
Garbage than the default value of 120 (minutes). This action makes additional resources
Timeout available for greater traffic than the default value accommodates.

UDP Session You may adjust this parameter in the range of 1 to 1440 minutes, based on network
Garbage performance. The default value of this parameter is 4 (minutes).
Timeout

NAT DNS Considerations - SM

SM DNS behavior is different depending on the accessibility of the SM. When NAT is enabled the DNS
configuration that is discussed in this document is tied to the RF Remote Configuration Interface, which
must be enabled to utilize DNS Client functionality. Note that the WAN DNS settings when NAT is
enabled are unchanged with the addition of the management DNS feature discussed in this document.

Table 11: SM DNS Options with NAT Enabled

NAT Management Interface DHCP DNS Status

Configuration Accessibility Status

NAT Enabled RF Remote Management Interface N/A DNS Disabled

Disabled

RF Remote Management Interface DHCP DNS Static Configuration

Enabled Disabled

DHCP DNS from DHCP or DNS Static

Enabled Configuration

NAT Port Forwarding tab – SM

NAT Port Forwarding allows customers to define an external port as well as an internal port, which could
be the same or different. The limitation of 10 entries also has been removed. If there are any NAT Port
Forwarding rules that have mismatching internal and external ports, they will be removed upon
downgrade to any release before 16.1.1 and these rules will be lost. Any NAT Port Forwarding rules with
matching internal and external ports will be preserved upon downgrading to releases prior to 16.1.1 as well
as imported upon upgrading from releases older than 16.1.1.

After upgrading to 16.1.1, NAT Port Mapping rules will be automatically applied to NAT Port Forwarding
with same external and internal port mapping.

The NAT Port Forwarding tab of the SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 72
Table 12: NAT Port Forwarding attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

Internal IP Enter Internal IP address to access the port.

Internal Port Enter Internal Port to access the port.

External Port Enter External Port to access the port.

Protocol Select protocol for traffic through the port.

DHCP – BHS

Applicable PTP: þ BHM

products

DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default
gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus, DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP addresses,
and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the Cambium system.

In conjunction with the NAT features, each BHS provides:

l A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the BHS by Ethernet
protocol.

l A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the BHS from a network DHCP server.

Reconnecting to the management PC

If the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address of the unit have been updated to meet network
requirements, then reconfigure the local management PC to use an IP address that is valid for the
network. See Configuring the management PC

Once the unit reboots, log in using the new IP address. See Logging into the web interface

VLAN configuration for PMP

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM
products

Chapter 1: Configuration 73
VLAN Remarking
VLAN Remarking feature allows the user to change the VLAN ID and priority of both upstream and
downstream packets at the Ethernet Interface. The remarking configuration is available for:

1. VLAN ID re-marking
2. 802.1p priority re-marking

Note

For Q-in-Q VLAN tagged frame, re-marking is performed on the outer tag.

VLAN ID Remarking

SM supports the ability to re-mark the VLAN ID on both upstream and downstream VLAN frames at the
Ethernet interface. For instance, a configuration can be added to re-mark VLAN ID ‘x’ to VLAN ID ‘y’ as
shown in below table. AP does not support VLAN ID remarking.

Table 13: VLAN Remarking Example

VLAN frame Remarking

direction

Upstream SM receives VLAN ID ‘x’ frame at the Ethernet interface, checks the configuration and
re-marks to VLAN ID ‘y’. So VLAN ID ‘y’ frame comes out of AP’s Ethernet interface.
When SM re-marks, a dynamic entry in VLAN membership table for ‘y’ is added to
allow reception of VLAN ID ‘y’ downstream packet.

Downstream AP receives VLAN ID ‘y’ frame at the Ethernet interface and sends to SM. SM accepts
the frame as it has an entry in the membership table and re-marks to VLAN ID ‘x’. This
reverse re- marking is necessary because the downstream devices do not know of re-
marking and are expecting VLAN ‘x’ frames. This remarking is done just before sending
the packet out on Ethernet interface.

802.1P Remarking

AP/BHM and SM/BHS allow re-marking of 802.1p priority bits for the frames received at the Ethernet
interface. Priority bits are not re-marked for the packets sent out of Ethernet interface (reverse
direction).

Configuration must be added at SM/BHS for upstream frames and at AP/BHM for downstream frames.

VLAN Priority Bits configuration

VLAN Priority Bits Configuration feature allows the user to configure the three 802.1p bits upon assigning
VLAN to an ingress packet. The priority bits configuration is available for:

l Default Port VID

l Provider VIDs
l MAC Address mapped Port VID
l Management VID

Default Port VID

This VID is used for untagged frames and will correspond to the Q-Tag for 802.1Q frames (if VLAN Port
Type is Q), or the C-Tag for 802.1ad frames (if the VLAN Port Type is QinQ).

Chapter 1: Configuration 74
The priority bits used in the Q-tag/C-tag are configurable.

The configuration can be:

l Promote IPv4/IPv6 priority – The priority in the IP header is copied to the Q-tag/C-tag.
l Define priority – Specify the priority in the range of 0 to 7. This value is used as priority in the Q-
tag/C-tag.

MAC Address Mapped VID

If a packet arrives at the SM/BHS that is sourced from a device whose MAC address is in the table, then
the corresponding VID is used for that frame’s Q-tag (Q port) or C-tag (QinQ port). The priority bits used
in the Q-tag/C-tag are configurable similar to default port VID.

Provider VID

The provider VID is used for the S-tag. The priority bits used in the S-tag are configurable similar to
default port VID. Provider VID has an extra priority configuration:

Copy inner tag 802.1p priority – The priority in the C-tag is copied to the S-tag.

Management VID

This VID is used to communicate with AP/BHM and SM/BHS for management purposes. The priority bits
used in the Q-tag are configurable similar to default port VID.

Use AP’s Management VID for ICC connected SM

This feature allows the SM to use the AP’s management VLAN ID when the SM is registered to the AP via
ICC. This feature is useful for the customer who uses a different management VID for the SM and AP and
Zero Touch feature is enabled for configuration. This parameter may be accessed via the Configuration >
VLAN page on the AP’s web management interface.

VLAN page of AP
The VLAN tab of the AP/BHM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 75
Figure 16: AP/BHM VLAN tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

VLAN Specify whether VLAN functionality for the AP and all linked SMs must (Enabled) or
may not (Disabled) be allowed. The default value is Disabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 76
Attribute Meaning

Always use Enable this option before you reboot this AP as a SM to use it to perform spectrum
Local VLAN analysis. Once the spectrum analysis completes, disable this option before you reboot
Config the module as an AP.

Allow Frame Select the type of arriving frames that the AP must tag, using the VID that is stored in
Types the Untagged Ingress VID parameter. The default value is All Frames.

Dynamic Specify whether the AP must (Enabled) or not (Disabled) add the VLAN IDs (VIDs) of
Learning upstream frames to the VID table. (The AP passes frames with VIDs that are stored in
the table both upstream and downstream.). The default value is Enabled.

VLAN Aging Specify how long the AP must keep dynamically learned VIDs. The range of values is 5
Timeout to 1440 (minutes). The default value is 25 (minutes).

Note

VIDs that you enter for the Management VID and VLAN Membership
parameters do not time out.

Management Enter the VID that the operator wishes to use to communicate with the module
VID manager. The range of values is 1 to 4095. The default value is 1.

Default Port Any untagged frames at AP's Ethernet ingress are tagged with the default port VID.
VID

QinQ Modules can be configured with 802.1ad Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) tagging
EtherType which is a way for an operator to put an 802.1Q VLAN inside of an 802.1ad VLAN. A
nested VLAN, which is the original 802.1Q tag and a new second 802.1ad tag, allows
for bridging of VLAN traffic across a network and segregates the broadcast domains
of 802.1Q VLANs. Q-in-Q can be used with PPPoE and/or NAT.

The 802.1ad standard defines the S-VLAN as the Service Provider VLAN and the C-
VLAN as the customer VLAN. The radio software does 2 layer Q-in-Q whereby the C-
VLAN is the 802.1Q tag and the S-VLAN is the second layer Q tag as shown below:

Q-in-Q Ethernet frame

Ethernet S-VLAN EthType C-VLAN EthType IP Data EthType

Header 0x88a8 0x8100 0x0800

The 802.1ad S-VLAN is the outer VLAN that is configurable on the Configuration >
VLAN web page of the AP. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a
default EtherType of 0x88a8 in addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be
configured to aid in interoperability with existing networks that use a different
EtherType than the default.

The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top-level
concept, this operates on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag
on or “popping” a tag off. This means packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q
frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag “pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame (with
the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition from an
802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software
only supports 2 levels of tags.

Chapter 1: Configuration 77
Attribute Meaning

Use AP's This field allows the SM to use the AP’s management VLAN ID when the SM is
Management registered to the AP via ICC.
VID for ICC
connected SM

VLAN Not When VLAN is enabled in the AP, the Active Configuration block provides the
Active following details as read-only information in this tab. In the Cambium fixed wireless
broadband IP network, each device of any type is automatically a permanent member
of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of devices that have VLAN enabled with those
that do not.

VLAN For each VLAN in which you want the AP to be a member, enter the VLAN ID and
Membership then click the Add Member button. Similarly, for any VLAN in which you want the AP
Table to no longer be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then click the Remove Member
Configuration button.

VLAN This field lists the VLANs that an AP is a member of. As the user adds a number
Membership between 1 and 4094, this number is populated here.
table

Source VLAN Enter the VID for which the operator wishes to remark the 802.1p priority for the
(Range: 1- downstream packets. The range of values is 1 to 4094. The default value is 1.
4094)

Remark This is the priority you can assign to the VLAN Tagged packet. Priority of 0 is the
Priority (Range highest.
0-7)

VLAN As the user enters a VLAN and a Remarking priority, this information is added in this
Remarking table.
table

VLAN page of SM
The VLAN tab of SM/BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 78
Table 14: SM VLAN attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 79
Attribute Meaning

VLAN Port Type By default, this is Q, indicating that it is to operate in the existing manner. The
other option is Q-in-Q, which indicates that it must be adding and removing the S-
Tag, and adding a C-Tag if necessary for untagged packets. The VLAN Port type
corresponds to the Ethernet port of the SM/BHS. Currently, the internal
management interfaces will always operate as Q ports.

Accept QinQ This option is valid for the Q-in-Q port so that the user may force blocking of
Frames existing 802.1ad Q-in-Q frames. This way, only untagged or single tagged packets
will come in and out of the Ethernet interface. If a Q-in-Q frame is about ingress or
egress the Ethernet interface and this is disabled, it is dropped and a filter entry
will show up on the VLAN Statistics page as DVLAN Egress or DVLAN Ingress.

Allow Frame Select the type of arriving frames that the SM must tag, using the VID that is
Types stored in the Untagged Ingress VID parameter. The default value is All Frames.

Tagged Frames Only: The SM only tags incoming VLAN-tagged frames

Untagged Frames Only: The SM will only tag incoming untagged frames

Dynamic Learning Specify whether the SM must (Enable) or not (Disable) add the VIDs of upstream
frames (that enter the SM through the wired Ethernet interface) to the VID table.
The default value is Enable.

VLAN Aging Specify how long the SM/BHS must keep dynamically learned VIDs. The range of
Timeout values is 5 to 1440 (minutes). The default value is 25 (minutes).

Note

VIDs that you enter for the Untagged Ingress VID and Management
VID parameters do not time out.

Management VID Enter the VID that the SM/BHS must share with the AP/BHM. The range of values
is 1 to 4095. The default value is 1.

SM Management Specify whether to allow the SM/BHS (Enabled) or the AP/RADIUS (Disabled) to
VID Pass-through control the VLAN settings of this SM. The default value is Enabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 80
Attribute Meaning

When VLAN is enabled in the AP to whom this SM is registered, the Active

Configuration block provides the following details as read-only information in this
tab. In the Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network, each device of any type
is automatically a permanent member of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of
devices that have VLAN enabled with those that do not.

If disabled, MVID traffic is not allowed to or from the SM wired interface. Also, if
Management VID is the same as a Port VID (Default or MAC-based), then this
setting is ignored and assumed to be Enabled.

Default Port VID This is the VID that is used for untagged frames and will correspond to the Q-Tag
for 802.1Q frames (if VLAN Port Type is Q), or the C-Tag for 802.1ad frames (if the
VLAN Port Type is Q-in- Q).

Port VID MAC These parameters allow operators to place specific devices onto different VLANs
Address Mapping (802.1Q tag or 802.1ad C-tag) based on the source MAC address of the packet. If
the MAC address entry is 00-00-00-00-00-00 then that entry is not used. If a
packet arrives at the SM that is sourced from a device whose MAC address is in
the table, then the corresponding VID is used for that frame’s Q-tag (Q port) or C-
tag (Q-in-Q port). If there is no match, then the Default Port VID is used. This table
is also used in the downstream direction for removal of the tag based on the
destination MAC address so that an untagged (for Q port) or Q-Tagged (for Q-in-
Q port) frame is delivered to the end device. You may use wildcards for the non-
OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) portion of the MAC address, which is the
last 3 bytes. MAC addresses contain 6 bytes, the first 3 of which are the OUI of the
vendor that manufactured the device and the last 3 are unique to that vendor OUI.
If you want to cover all devices from a known vendor’s OUI, you have to specify
0xFF for the remaining 3 bytes. So, for example, if you wanted all devices from a
specific vendor with an OUI of 00-95-5b (which is a Netgear OUI) to be on the
same VID of 800, you have to specify an entry with MAC address 00-95-5b-ff-ff-ff.
Then, any device underneath of the SM with MAC addresses starting with 00-95-
5b is put on VLAN 800.

Provider VID The provider VID is used for the S-tag. It is only used if the Port Type is Q-in-Q and
will always be used for the S-tag. If an existing 802.1Q frame arrives, the Provider
VID is what is used for adding and removing of the outer S-tag. If an untagged
frame arrives to a Q-in-Q port, then the Provider VID is the S-tag and the Default
Port VID (or Port VID MAC Address Mapping, if valid) is used for the C-tag.

Support 802.1p This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable 802.1p frames. When
Frames 802.1p feature is enabled on SM, the packets are added with VID=0 and priority
bits are set.

Active This is the value of the parameter of the same name, configured above.
Configuration,
Default Port VID

Active This is the listing of the MAC address VIDs configured in Port VID MAC Address
Configuration, Mapping.
MAC Address VID
Map

Chapter 1: Configuration 81
Attribute Meaning

Active This is the value of the parameter of the same name, configured above.
Configuration,
Management VID

Active This is the value of the parameter of the same name, configured above.
Configuration, SM
Management VID
Pass-Through

Active This is the value of the VLAN Aging Timeout parameter configured above.
Configuration,
Dynamic Aging
Timeout

Active Yes is displayed if the value of the Dynamic Learning parameter above is Enabled.
Configuration, No is displayed if the value of Dynamic Learning is Disabled.
Allow Learning

Active This displays the selection that was made from the drop-down list at the
Configuration, Allow Frame Types parameter above.
Allow Frame Type

Active This is set to Enabled if VLAN Port Type is set to QinQ, and is set to Disabled if
Configuration, VLAN Port Type is set to Q.
QinQ

Active This is the value of the QinQ EtherType configured in the AP.
Configuration,
QinQ EthType

Active This is the value of Accept QinQ Frames, configured above.

Configuration,
Allow QinQ
Tagged Frames

Active This column lists the ID numbers of the VLANs in which this module is a member,
Configuration, whether through assignment or through dynamic learning.
Current VID
Member Set, VID
Number

Active For each VID number in the first column, the entry in this column correlates the
Configuration, way in which the module became and continues to be a member:
Current VID
Permanent—This indicates that the module was assigned the VID number through
Member Set, Type
direct configuration by the operator.

Dynamic—This indicates that the module adopted the VID number through
enabled dynamic learning, when a tagged packet from a SM behind it in the
network or from a customer equipment that is behind the SM in this case, was
read.

Chapter 1: Configuration 82
Attribute Meaning

Active For each VID number in the first column of the table, the entry in this column
Configuration, reflects whether or when the VID number will time out:
Current VID
Permanent type - Number never times out and this is indicated by the digit 0.
Member Set, Age
Dynamic type - Age reflects what is configured in the VLAN Aging Timeout
parameter in the Configuration => VLAN tab of the AP or reflects a fewer number
of minutes that represents the difference between what was configured and what
has elapsed since the VID was learned. Each minute, the Age decreases by one
until, at zero, the AP deletes the learned VID, but can it again from packets sent by
elements that are beneath it in the network.

Note

Values in this Active Configuration block can differ from attempted

values in configurations:

The AP can override the value that the SM has configured for SM
Management VID Pass-Through.

IP Lookup This parameter supports following options.

Direction
l Use Source IP: Mapping is done based on the source IP of the incoming
packet.

l Use Destination IP: Mapping is done based on the Destination IP of the

incoming packet.

IP Address / This parameter specifies the IP Address and the Subnet Mask which needs to be
Subnet Mask matched.

VID This parameter specifies the VLAN which is tagged to the packet.

Priority Mode This parameter specifies the priority precedence to decide if 802.1p or DSCP
Priority bits need to be used when making priority decisions.

Priority This parameter specifies the 802.1p Priority bits in the VLAN tag.

L3 Port VID Map This field displays the Map key, IP address/subnet mask, VID, Priority mode,
Priority, and Hash key information of the tagged packets.

VLAN Membership tab of SM

The Configuration > VLAN > VLAN Membership tab is explained in below table.

Table 15: SM VLAN Membership attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 83
Attribute Meaning

VLAN For each VLAN in which you want the AP to be a member, enter the VLAN ID and
Membership then click the Add Member button. Similarly, for any VLAN in which you want the AP
Table to no longer be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then click the Remove Member
Configuration button.

VLAN configuration for PTP

Applicable PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

VLAN page of BHM

The VLAN tab of BHS is explained in below table.

Table 16: BHM VLAN page attributes

Attribute Meaning

VLAN Specify whether VLAN functionality for the BHM and all linked BHS must be (Enabled)
or may not (Disabled) be allowed. The default value is Disabled.

VLAN Port By default, this is Q, indicating that it is to operate in the existing manner. The other
Type option is Q-in-Q, which indicates that it must be adding and removing the S-Tag, and
adding a C-Tag if necessary for untagged packets. The VLAN Port type corresponds
to the Ethernet port of the BHS. Currently, the internal management interfaces will
always operate as Q ports.

Chapter 1: Configuration 84
Attribute Meaning

Accept QinQ This option is valid for the Q-in-Q port so that the user may force blocking of existing
Frames 802.1ad Q-in-Q frames. This way, only untagged or single tagged packets will come in
and out of the Ethernet interface. If a Q-in-Q frame is about ingress or egress the
Ethernet interface and this is disabled, it is dropped and a filter entry will show up on
the VLAN Statistics page as DVLAN Egress or DVLAN Ingress.

Management Enter the VID that the BHS must share with the BHM. The range of values is 1 to 4095.
VID (Range 1- The default value is 1.
4094)

Default Port This is the VID that is used for untagged frames and corresponds to the Q-Tag for
VID (Range 1- 802.1Q frames (if VLAN Port Type is Q), or the C-Tag for 802.1ad frames (if the VLAN
4094) Port Type is Q-in- Q).

QinQ Ether Modules can be configured with 802.1ad Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) tagging
Type which is a way for an operator to put an 802.1Q VLAN inside of an 802.1ad VLAN. A
nested VLAN, which is the original 802.1Q tag and a new second 802.1ad tag, allows
for bridging of VLAN traffic across a network and segregates the broadcast domains
of 802.1Q VLANs. Q-in-Q can be used with PPPoE and/or NAT.

The 802.1ad standard defines the S-VLAN as the Service Provider VLAN and the C-
VLAN as the customer VLAN. The radio software does 2-layer Q-in-Q whereby the C-
VLAN is the 802.1Q tag and the S-VLAN is the second layer Q tag as shown below:

Ethernet S-VLAN EthType C-VLAN EthType IP Data EthType

Header 0x88a8 0x8100 0x0800

The 802.1ad S-VLAN is the outer VLAN that is configurable on the Configuration >
VLAN web page of the BHM. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a
default EtherType of 0x88a8 in addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be
configured to aid in interoperability with existing networks that use a different
EtherType than the default.

The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top-level
concept, this operates on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag
on or “popping” a tag off. This means packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q
frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag “pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame (with
the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition from an
802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software
only supports 2 levels of tags.

VLAN Not When VLAN is enabled in the BHM, the Active Configuration block provides the
Active following details as read-only information in this tab. In the Cambium fixed wireless
broadband IP network, each device of any type is automatically a permanent member
of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of devices that have VLAN enabled with those
that do not.

VLAN page of BHS

The VLAN tab of BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 85
Table 17: Table 20 BHS VLAN page attributes

Attribute Meaning

VLAN Specify whether VLAN functionality for the BHM and all linked BHS must be (Enabled)
or may not (Disabled) be allowed. The default value is Disabled.

VLAN Port By default, this is Q, indicating that it is to operate in the existing manner. The other
Type option is Q-in-Q, which indicates that it must be adding and removing the S-Tag, and
adding a C-Tag if necessary for untagged packets. The VLAN Port type corresponds
to the Ethernet port of the BHS. Currently, the internal management interfaces will
always operate as Q ports.

Accept QinQ This option is valid for the Q-in-Q port so that the user may force blocking of existing
Frames 802.1ad Q-in-Q frames. This way, only untagged or single tagged packets will come in
and out of the Ethernet interface. If a Q-in-Q frame is about ingress or egress the
Ethernet interface and this is disabled, it is dropped and a filter entry will show up on
the VLAN Statistics page as DVLAN Egress or DVLAN Ingress.

Management Enter the VID that the BHS must share with the BHM. The range of values is 1 to 4095.
VID (Range 1- The default value is 1.
4094)

Default Port This is the VID that is used for untagged frames and corresponds to the Q-Tag for
VID (Range 1- 802.1Q frames (if VLAN Port Type is Q), or the C-Tag for 802.1ad frames (if the VLAN
4094) Port Type is Q-in- Q).

VLAN Not When VLAN is enabled in the BHM, the Active Configuration block provides the
Active following details as read-only information in this tab. In the Cambium fixed wireless
broadband IP network, each device of any type is automatically a permanent member
of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of devices that have VLAN enabled with those
that do not.

PPPoE page of SM

Applicable PMP: þ SM
products

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a protocol that encapsulates PPP frames inside
Ethernet frames (at Ethernet speeds). Benefits to the network operator may include

Chapter 1: Configuration 86
 l Access control

l Service monitoring

l Generation of statistics about activities of the customer

l Re-use of infrastructure and operational practices by operators who already use PPP for other
networks

PPPoE options are configurable for the SM only, and the AP indicates whether or not PPPoE is enabled
for a specific subscriber.

When PPPoE is enabled, once the RF session comes up between the SM and the AP, the SM will
immediately attempt to connect to the PPPoE Server. You can monitor the status of this by viewing the
PPPoE Session Log in the Logs section (Administrator only). Every time the RF session comes up, the SM
will check the status of the link and if it is down, the SM will attempt to redial the link if necessary
depending on the Timer Type. Also, on the Configuration page, the user may ‘Connect’ or ‘Disconnect’
the session manually. This can be used to override the session to force a manual disconnect and/or
reconnect if there is a problem with the session.

In order to enable PPPoE, NAT MUST be enabled on the SM and Translation Bridging MUST be disabled
on the AP. These items are strictly enforced for you when you are trying to enable PPPoE. A message will
indicate any prerequisites not being met. Also, the NAT Public IP DHCP client cannot be enabled, because
the NAT Public IP is received through the IPCP process of the PPPoE discovery stages.

The pre-requisites are:

l
l NAT MUST be enabled on the SM:

l NAT DHCP Client is disabled automatically. The NAT public IP is received from the PPPoE Server.

l NAT Public Network Interface Configuration will not be used and must be left to defaults. Also
NAT Public IP DHCP is disabled if it is enabled.

Translation Bridging MUST be DISABLED on the AP

l This will only be determined if the SM is in session since the SM won’t know the AP configuration
otherwise. If the SM is not in session, PPPoE can be enabled but if the SM goes into session to a
Translation Bridge-enabled AP, then PPPoE will not be enabled.

The PPPoE configuration parameters are explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 87
Table 18: SM PPPoE attributes

Attribute Meaning

Access An optional entry to set a specific access concentrator to connect to for the PPPoE
Concentrator session. If this is blank, the SM will accept the first access concentrator which
matches the service name (if specified). This is limited to 32 characters.

Service Name An optional entry to set a specific service name to connect to for the PPPoE session.
If this is left blank the SM will accept the first service option that comes back from
the access concentrator specified above, if any. This is limited to 32 characters.

Authentication None means that no PPPoE authentication is implemented

Type
CHAP/PAP means that CHAP authentication is attempted first, then PAP
authentication. The same password is used for both types.

User Name This is the CHAP/PAP user name that is used if CHAP/PAP authentication is
selected. If None is selected for authentication, then this field is unused. This is
limited to 32 characters.

Password This is the CHAP/PAP password that is used if PAP authentication is selected. If
None is selected for authentication, then this field is unused. This is limited to 32
characters.

MTU Use MTU Received from PPPoE Server causes the SM to use the MRU of the PPPoE
server received in LCP as the MTU for the PPPoE link.

Use User Defined MTU allows the operator to specify an MTU value to use to
override any MTU that may be determined in the LCP phase of PPPoE session setup.
If this is selected, the user is able to enter an MTU value up to 1492. However, if the
MTU determined in LCP negotiations is less than this user-specified value, the SM will
use the smaller value as its MTU for the PPPoE link.

Chapter 1: Configuration 88
 Attribute Meaning

Timer Type Keep Alive is the default timer type. This timer will enable a keepalive that will check
the status of the link periodically. The user can set a keepalive period. If no data is
seen from the PPPoE server for that period, the link is taken down and a
reconnection attempt is started. For marginal links, the keep alive timer can be useful
so that the session will stay alive over periodic dropouts. The keepalive timer must
be set such that the session can outlast any session drop. Some PPPoE servers will
have a session check timer of their own so that the timeouts of the server and the SM
are in sync, to ensure one side does not drop the session prematurely.

Idle Timeout enables an idle timer that checks the usage of the link from the
customer side. If there is no data seen from the customer for the idle timeout period,
the PPPoE session is dropped. Once data starts flowing from the customer again, the
session is started up again. This timer is useful for users who may not be using the
connection frequently. If the session is idle for long periods of time, this timer will
allow the resources used by the session to be returned to the server. Once the
connection is used again by the customer, the link is reestablished automatically.

Timer Period The length in seconds of the PPPoE keepalive timer.

TCP MSS If this is enabled, then the SM will alter TCP SYN and SYN-ACK packets by changing
Clamping the Maximum Segment Size to be compatible with the current MTU of the PPPoE
link. This way, the user does not have to worry about MTU on the client side for TCP
packets. The MSS is set to the current MTU – 40 (20 bytes for IP headers and 20
bytes for TCP headers). This will cause the application on the client side to not send
any TCP packets larger than the MTU. If the network is exhibiting large packet loss,
try enabling this option. This may not be an option on the PPPoE server itself. The SM
will NOT reassemble IP fragments, so if the MTUs are incorrect on the end stations,
then MSS clamping will solve the problem for TCP connections.

IPv4 and IPv6

IPv4 and IPv6 Prioritization

450 Platform Family provides operators the ability to prioritize IPv6 traffic in addition to IPv4 traffic.
IPv6/IPv4 prioritization can be configured by selecting a CodePoint and the corresponding priority from
the GUI of the AP/BHM and the IPv6/IPv4 packet is set up accordingly. There is no GUI option for
selecting IPv6 or IPv4 priority. Once the priority is set, it is set for IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Priority

IPv4 and IPv6 prioritization is set using the DiffServ tab on the AP/BHM and SM/BHS (located at
Configuration > DiffServ). A priority set to a specific CodePoint will apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic.

Table 19: DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 89
Attribute Meaning

Codepoints 1 The PMP family of APs support four levels of QoS. The mapping of these eight
through 63 priority values to data channels is determined by the number of data channels
configured per SM as shown in the table below:

For example, for an AP that uses the default table shown above has configured 3
QoS levels per SM, would see codepoints 0 through 15 mapped to the Low
Priority data channels, codepoint 16 would be mapped to the Medium Priority
data channels, and so on.

Note that CodePoints 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, and 56 are predefined to the fixed
values shown in DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM above and are not user
configurable. Operator cannot change any of these three fixed priority values.
Among the configurable parameters, the priority values (and therefore the
handling of packets in the high or low priority channel) are set in the AP/BHM for
all downlinks within the sector and in the SM/BHS for each uplink.

CodePoint Select This represents the CodePoint Selection to be modified via Priority Select.

Priority Select The priority setting input for the CodePoint selected in CodePoint Select.

Priority Precedence Allows operator to decide if 802.1p or DiffServ priority bits must be used first
when making priority decisions.

PPPoE Control Operators may configure the AP/BHM to utilize the high priority channel for
Message Priority PPPoE control messages. Configuring the AP/BHM in this fashion can benefit the
continuity of PPPoE connections when there are issues with PPPoE sessions
being dropped in the network. This prioritization may be configured in the
DiffServ tab in the Configuration menu of the AP/BHM.

Provision to Enable/Disable the feature for this SM's link.

MPLS Traffic Class The Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) protocol is used to route traffic based
(TC) 0 through on the priority setting configured each MPLS Traffic Class.
MPLS Traffic Class
MPLS Traffic Class (TC) 0 through MPLS Traffic Class (TC) 7 can be configured
(TC) 7
with 0 through 7 priority settings.

Chapter 1: Configuration 90
IPv4 and IPv6 Filtering
The operator can filter (block) specified IPv6 protocols including IPv4 and ports from leaving the
AP/BHM and SM/BHS and entering the network. This protects the network from both intended and
inadvertent packet loading or probing by network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off
the network, this feature also provides a level of protection to users from each other.

Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Filtering

IPv6 filters are set using the Protocol Filtering tab on the AP/BHM and SM/BHS (at Configuration >
Protocol Filtering). Once a filter is set for a packet type, those packets will not be sent over the RF
interface depending on “Filter Direction” setting.

Table 20: Packet Filter Configuration attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 91
 Attribute Meaning

Packet Filter Types For any box selected, the Protocol and Port Filtering feature blocks the
associated protocol type.

To filter packets in any of the user-defined ports, you must do all of the
following:

l Check the box for User Defined Port n (See Below) in the Packet
Filter Types section of this tab.

l Provide a port number at Port #n. in the User Defined Port

Filtering Configuration section of this tab

l Enable TCP and/or UDP by clicking the associated radio button

Filter Direction Operators may choose to filter upstream (uplink) RF packets or

downstream (downlink) RF packets.

User Defined Port Filtering You can specify ports for which to block subscriber access, regardless
Configuration of whether NAT is enabled.

Upgrading the software version and using CNUT

This section consists of the following procedures:

l Upgrading to a new software version

l Checking the installed software version

Caution

If the link is operational, ensure that the remote end of the link is upgraded first
using the wireless connection, and then the local end can be upgraded.
Otherwise, the remote end may not be accessible.

Use CNUT 4.11.2 or later version and always refer to the software release notes
before upgrading system software. The release notes are available at:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/ptp450

Checking the installed software version

To check the installed software version, follow these instructions:

Procedure 10 Checking the installed software version:

1. Click on General tab under Home menu.

2. Note the installed Software Version (under Device Information):

PMP/PTP 450/450i/450m

3. Go to the support website (see Contacting Cambium Networks) and find Point-to-Multipoint
software updates. Check that the latest 450 Platform Family software version is the same as the

Chapter 1: Configuration 92
 installed Software Version.
4. To upgrade software to the latest version, see Upgrading to a new software version

Upgrading to a new software version

All 450 platform modules are upgraded using the Canopy Network Updater Tool. The Canopy Network
Updater Tool (CNUT) manages and automates the software upgrade process for a Canopy radio, or
CMM4 (but not its 14-port switch) across the network. This eliminates the need for an administrator to
visit each radio in the network (or each AP/BHM while using the Auto update feature) to upgrade the
modules.

Note

Please ensure that you have the most up-to-date version of CNUT by browsing
to the Customer Support Web Page located:
https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/products/software-tools/cambium-
network-updater-tool/

This section includes an example of updating a single unit before deployment. System-wide upgrading
procedures may be found in the CNUT Online Help manual, which can be found on the Cambium support
website (see Contacting Cambium Networks).

CNUT functions
The Canopy Network Updater tool has the following functions:

l Automatically discovers all network elements

l Executes a UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within APs/BHMs.
This command is both secure and convenient:

l For security, the AP/BHM accepts this command from only the IP address that you specify
in the Configuration page of the AP/BHM.

l For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter in the
APs/BHMs to the IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs any
of the update commands.

l CNUT supports HTTP and HTTPS

l Allows you to choose the following among updating:

l Your entire network.

l Only elements that you select.

l Only network branches that you select.

l Provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script that:

l You define.

l Cambium supplies.

l Configurability of any of the following to be the file server for image files:

Chapter 1: Configuration 93
 l The AP/BHM, for traditional file serving via UDP commands and monitoring via UDP
messaging

l CNUT HTTP/HTTPS Server, for upgrading via SNMP commands and monitoring via SNMP
messaging. This also supports an option to either set the image order specifically for this file
server or to allow the AP to determine the order.

l Local TFTP Server, for traditional file serving via UDP commands and monitoring via UDP
messaging. This supports setting the number of simultaneous image transfers per AP/BHM

l The capability to launch a test of connectivity and operational status of the local HTTP, HTTPS and
TFTP file servers

l An interface that supports efficient specification of the proper IP address for the local file server(s)
where Network Updater resides on a multi-homed computer

l An md5 checksum calculator utility for identifying corruption of downloaded image files before
Network Updater is set to apply them.

Network element groups

With the Canopy Network Updater Tool, you can identify element groups composed of network elements
that you select. Identifying these element groups does the following:

l Organizes the display of elements (for example, by region or by AP/BHM cluster).

l Allows to:

l Perform an operation on all elements in the group simultaneously.

l Set group-level defaults for ftp password access and SNMP Community String (defaults
that can be overridden in an individual element when necessary).

Network layers
A typical network contains multiple layers of elements, with each layer farther from the Point of Presence.
For example, SMs (or BHS) are behind an AP/BHM and thus, in this context, at a lower layer than the
AP/BHM. Correctly portraying these layers in Network Updater is essential so that Network Updater can
perform radio and AP/BHM cluster upgrades in an appropriate order.

Script engine
Script Engine is the capability in Network Updater that executes any user-defined script against any
network element or element group. This capability is useful for network management, especially for
scripts that you repetitively execute across your network.

The Autodiscovery capability in Network Updater finds all of your network elements. This comprehensive
discovery:

l Ensures that, when you intend to execute a script against all elements, the script is indeed
executed against all elements.

l Maintains master lists of elements (element groups) against which you selectively execute scripts.

The following scripts are included with CNUT:

Chapter 1: Configuration 94
 l Gather Customer Support Information

l Set Access Point Authentication Mode

l Set Autoupdate Address on APs/BHMs

l Set SNMP Accessibility

l Reset Unit

Software dependencies for CNUT

CNUT functionality requires:

l one of the following operating systems:

l Windows® 2000

l Windows Server 2003

l Windows 7 and Windows 8

l Windows XP or XP Professional

l Red Hat Enterprise Linux (32-bit) Version 4 or 5

l Java™ Runtime Version 2.0 or later (installed by the CNUT installation tool)

CNUT download
CNUT can be downloaded together with each system release that supports CNUT. Software for these
system releases is available from https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/products/software-
tools/cambium-network-updater-tool/, as either:

l A .zip file for use without the CNUT application.

l A .pkg file that the CNUT application can open.

Upgrading a module prior to deployment

To upgrade to a new software version, follow this:

Procedure 11 Upgrading a module prior to deployment

1. Go to the support website (see Contacting Cambium Networks) and find Point-to-Multipoint
software updates. Download and save the required software image.
2. Start CNUT
3. If you don’t start up with a blank new network file in CNUT, then open a new network file with the
New Network Archive operation (located at File >New Network).
4. Enter a new network element to the empty network tree using the Add Elements to Network Root
operation (located at Edit >Add Elements to Network Root).
5. In the Add Elements dialogue, select a type of Access Point or Subscriber Module and enter the IP
address of 169.254.1.1.
6. Make sure that the proper Installation Package is active with the Package Manager dialogue
(located at Update > Manage Packages).

Chapter 1: Configuration 95
 7. To verify connectivity with the radio, perform a Refresh, Discover Entire Network operation
(located at View >Refresh/Discover Entire Network). You must see the details columns for the
new element filled in with ESN and software version information.
8. Initiate the upgrade of the radio using Update Entire Network Root operation (located at Update
>Update Entire Network Root). When this operation finishes, the radio is done being upgraded.

General configuration
The Configuration > General page of the AP/BMH or BHM/BHS contains many of the configurable
parameters that define how the ratios operate in sector or backhaul.

PMP 450m and PMP/PTP 450i Series

General page - PMP 450i AP
The General page of AP is explained in below table.

Table 21: General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 96
Attribute Meaning

Link Speed From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The Auto settings allow the two ends of the link to automatically
negotiate with each other the best possible speed, and check whether the Ethernet
traffic is full duplex or half duplex.

However, some Ethernet links work best when either:

l both ends are set to the same forced selection

l both ends are set to auto-negotiate and both have capability in least one
common speed and traffic type combination.

Ethernet Link This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable Ethernet Link.

Ethernet This parameter allows the operator to configure Ethernet bounce timeout ranging
Bounce from 0 to 60 minutes. Value 0 disables Ethernet bounce timeout.
Timeout

802.3at Type 2 When the PoE Classification functionality is enabled and if Type 2 power is not
PoE Status and present, the PAs do not power up and draw too much power.

PoE By default, the PoE Classification feature is disabled and the PAs will power up
Classification regardless of the classification presented by the power source.
(PMP 450i
This is supported only on 450i series devices.
Series only)
PoE Classification configuration status also can be check under home > General >
Device Information tab:

Chapter 1: Configuration 97
Attribute Meaning

Configuration See Setting the Configuration Source

Source

Sync Input See Configuring synchronization

Free Run See Free Run Before GPS Sync

Before GPS
Sync

Region From the drop-down list, select the region in which the radio is operating.

Country From the drop-down list, select the country in which the radio is operating.

Unlike selections in other parameters, your Country selection requires a Save Changes
and a Reboot cycle before it will force the context-sensitive GUI to display related
options (for example, Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and 2 in the
Configuration > Radio tab).

PMP 450i Series ODUs shipped to the United States is locked to a Region Code
setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must
be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.
Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways:

l Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus

configured antenna gain)
l DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region code, if applicable

For more information on how transmit power limiting and DFS is implemented for
each country, see the PMP 450 Planning Guide.

Webpage Auto Enter the frequency (in seconds) for the web browser to automatically refresh the
Update web-based interface. The default setting is 0. The 0 setting causes the web-based
interface to never be automatically refreshed.

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the
Timeout existing network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer period
than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds
the network.

Caution

An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting may lead to

temporary loss of communication with some end users.

Translation Optionally, you can configure the AP to change the source MAC address in every
Bridging packet it receives from its SMs to the MAC address of the SM that bridged the packet,
before forwarding the packet toward the public network. If you do, then:

Not more than 128 IP devices at any time are valid to send data to the AP from behind
the SM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 98
Attribute Meaning

SM populates the Translation Table tab of its Statistics web page, displaying the MAC
address and IP address of all the valid connected devices.

Each entry in the Translation Table is associated with the number of minutes that
have elapsed since the last packet transfer between the connected device and the
SM.

If 128 are connected and another attempts to connect:

If no Translation Table entry is older than 255 minutes, the attempt is ignored.

If an entry is older than 255 minutes, the oldest entry is removed and the attempt is
successful.

The Send Untranslated ARP parameter in the General tab of the Configuration page
can be:

Disabled, so that the AP overwrites the MAC address in Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) packets before forwarding them.

Enabled, so that the AP forwards ARP packets regardless of whether it has

overwritten the MAC address.

When this feature is disabled, the setting of the Send Untranslated ARP parameter
has no effect, because all packets are forwarded untranslated (with the source MAC
address intact).

Send If the Translation Bridging parameter is set to Enabled, then the Send Untranslated
Untranslated ARP parameter can be:
ARP
Disabled - so that the AP will overwrite the MAC address in Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) packets before forwarding them.

Enabled - so that the AP will forward ARP packets regardless of whether it has
overwritten the MAC address.

If the Translation Bridging parameter is set to Disabled, then the Send Untranslated
ARP parameter has no effect.

SM Isolation Prevent or allow SM-to-SM communication by selecting from the following drop-
down menu items:

Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between
SMs.

Block SM Packets from being forwarded - This prevents both multicast/broadcast

and unicast SM-to-SM communication.

Block and Forward SM Packets to Backbone - This not only prevents

multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the
packets, which otherwise are handled SM to SM, through the Ethernet port of the AP.

Forward Enabled: All unknown Unicast packets (no entry in the AP’s bridge table) received via
Unknown the AP’s Ethernet LAN interface are forwarded to registered SMs. If the target device
Unicast is situated beneath a particular SM, when the device responds the SM and AP will
Packets learn and add the device to their bridge tables so that subsequent packets to that
device is bridged to the proper SM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 99
Attribute Meaning

Disabled: All unknown Unicast packets (no entry in the AP’s bridge table) received via
the AP’s Ethernet LAN interface are discarded at the AP.

Update Enter the address of the server to access for software updates on this AP and
Application registered SMs.
Address

Prioritize TCP To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
ACK parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives
during transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements.
This parameter, when enabled, can be particularly useful when running bi-direction
FTP sessions over the link. If a link is primarily used for video surveillance, it is
recommended to set this parameter to Disable.

Multicast Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast
Destination addresses with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although
Address some switches (CMM4, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the
network, a radio can pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address
parameter value in the connected device that has it populated.

DHCP Relay The AP may act as a DHCP relay for SMs and CPEs underneath it. The AP will make
Agent use of the DHCP Option 82 (DHCP Relay Agent Information) from RFC 3046 when
performing relay functions. The AP offers two types of DHCP relay functionality:

Full Relay Information - Configuring the DHCP Full Relay Operation will take
broadcast DHCP packets and send them to a Unicast server in unicast mode. This way
the DHCP requests and replies can be routed like any other UDP packet.

Only Insert Option 82 - This option leaves the DHCP request on its broadcast domain
as opposed to DHCP Full Relay Operation which will turn it into a unicast packet.

In order to accommodate setting up pools or classes for different VLANs, the Option
82 field will include information to tell the server what VLAN the client is on.

DHCP Server The DHCP relay server may be either a DNS name or a static IP address in dotted
(Name or IP decimal notation. Additionally, the management DNS domain name may be toggled
Address) such that the name of the DHCP relay server only needs to be specified and the DNS
domain name is automatically appended to that name. The default DHCP relay server
addresses are 255.255.255.255 with the appending of the DNS domain name disabled.

Option 82 This parameter specifies the Circuit ID for DHCP Relay Option 82 data. Following
Circuit ID wildcards are supported:

l $apmac$ - AP MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $apmacbi$ - AP MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $smmac$ - SM MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $smmacbi$ - SM MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $apsn$ - AP Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

l $smsn$ - SM Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

Chapter 1: Configuration 100

Attribute Meaning

l $smvid$ - SM Port VID in ascii format, leading 0 included, 4 chars long

l $smvidbi$ - SM Port VID in hex format (2 bytes)

l $smluid$ - SM LUID

Default value is $apmacbi$

Note: Overall expanded Option 82 data is limited to 255 bytes.

Option 82 This parameter specifies the Remote ID for DHCP Relay Option 82 data. Following
Remote ID wildcards are supported:

l $apmac$ - AP MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $apmacbi$ - AP MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $smmac$ - SM MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $smmacbi$ - SM MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $apsn$ - AP Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

l $smsn$ - SM Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

l $smvid$ - SM Port VID in ascii format, leading 0 included, 4 chars long

l $smvidbi$ - SM Port VID in hex format (2 bytes)

l $smluid$ - SM LUID

Default value is $smmacbi$

Note: Overall expanded Option 82 data is limited to 255 bytes.

Option 82 This parameter specifies the Vendor Specific ID for DHCP Relay Option 82 data.
Vendor
Following wildcards are supported:
Specific ID
l $apmac$ - AP MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $apmacbi$ - AP MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $smmac$ - SM MAC adddress in ascii format, no delimiters

l $smmacbi$ - SM MAC address in hex format (6 bytes)

l $apsn$ - AP Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

l $smsn$ - SM Site Name (may be truncated to 32 chars)

l $smvid$ - SM Port VID in ascii format, leading 0 included, 4 chars long

l $smvidbi$ - SM Port VID in hex format (2 bytes)

l $smluid$ - SM LUID

Chapter 1: Configuration 101

 Attribute Meaning

Default value is $smvidbi$

Note: Overall expanded Option 82 data is limited to 255 bytes.

Latitude Physical radio location data may be configured via the Latitude, Longitude and
Height fields. Latitude and Longitude is measured in Decimal Degree while the Height
Longitude
is calculated in Meters.
Height

Report SM Provision to enable/disable flag for this feature.

Reconnection
Failure After
Channel/EIRP
Change

Failure If the percentage of the number of SMs which failed to reconnect after EIRP/channel
Reporting change exceeds this value, a failure will be reported via an alarm and a warning
Threshold for banner.
SM
Reconnection

Failure Report The number of days the AP will print the warning banner and allow the cnMaestro
Duration alarm to be displayed, before clearing them both, in the of absence enough SMs
reconnecting to bring the reconnect failure percentage below the failure threshold.

General page - PMP 450m AP

The General page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 102

Table 22: General page attributes –PMP 450m AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 103

Attribute Meaning

Trial Mode This parameter allows to enable or disable Trial mode for radios with a Limited
key. Once the trial key is applied, the 30-day trial can be enabled or disabled at
any time.

Ethernet Port Ethernet Port selection is applicable to the 450m platform only with two
Selection choices in the drop-down list:

l Main: A selection of main indicates that link connectivity and power to

the 450m is provided through the RF45 connection on the Main port of
the AP

l SFP: A selection of SFP indicates that link connectivity will be provided

through the SFP port on the 450m

Power continues to be provided via the RJ45 Main port (5 GHz 450m only; the 3
GHz 450m utilizes a separate DC connector).

For information about remaining attributes, refer General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP .

General page - PMP 450i SM

The General page of PMP 450i SM is explained in below table. The General page of PMP 450 SM looks the
same as PMP 450i SM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 104

Table 23: General page attributes – PMP 450i SM

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected. The
recommended setting is a single speed selection for all APs and SMs in the operator
network.

Ethernet Link

Ethernet See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Bounce
Timeout

802.3at Type 2 When the PoE Classification functionality is enabled and if Type 2 power is not
PoE Status present, the PAs do not power up and draw too much power.
and
By default, the PoE Classification feature is disabled, and the PAs will power up
regardless of the classification presented by the power source.

Chapter 1: Configuration 105

Attribute Meaning

PoE This is supported only on 450i series ODUs.

Classification
PoE Classification configuration status also can be check under home > General >
Device Information tab:

Remote See General page attributes – PMP 450b SM.

Device Type

Region This parameter allows you to set the region in which the radio will operate.

The SM radio automatically inherits the Region type of the master. This behavior
ignores the value of the Region parameter in the SM, even when the value is None.
Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order to
configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be always set to
the value that corresponds to the local region.

Country This parameter allows you to set the country in which the radio will operate.

The SM radio automatically inherits the Country Code type of the master. This
behavior ignores the value of the Country parameter in the SM, even when the value is
None. Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order
to configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be always set
to the value that corresponds to the local region.

PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU shipped to the United States is locked to a Region Code
setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must
be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.

Webpage See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Auto Update

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the existing
Timeout network infrastructure. Timeout occurs when the AP encounters no activity with the
SM (whose MAC address is the bridge entry) within the interval that this parameter
specifies. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer period than the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Caution

This parameter governs the timeout interval, even if a router in the

system has a longer timeout interval. The default value of this field is 25
(minutes).An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting may lead
to temporary loss of communication with some end users.

Bridge Table This parameter allows to restrict devices to connect to the SM. It is configurable from
Size 4 to 4096.

Chapter 1: Configuration 106

Attribute Meaning

Note

Configure Bridge Table Restriction parameter to Drop packets if MAC

address is not in bridge table option to restrict the number of devices
configured from connecting to SM.

Bridge Table This parameter allows to either allow or restrict devices to connect to SM using the
Restriction following options:

l Drop packets if MAC address is not in bridge table: Select this option to restrict
communication from devices not listed in bridge table.

l Forward packets even if MAC address is not in bridge table: Select this option
to allow communication from any device.

Frame Timing If this SM extends the sync pulse to a BH master or an AP, select either
Pulse Gated
Enable: If this SM loses sync from the AP, then do not propagate a sync pulse to the
BH timing master or another AP. This setting prevents interference in the event that
the SM loses sync.

Disable: If this SM loses sync from the AP, then propagate the sync pulse to the BH
timing master or another AP.

Multicast Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast addresses
Destination with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although some switches
Address (CMM4, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the network, a radio can
pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address parameter value in the
connected device that has it populated.

Latitude Physical radio location data may be configured via the Latitude, Longitude and Height
fields.
Longitude
Latitude and Longitude is measured in Decimal Degree while the Height is calculated
Height in Meters.

General page - PTP 450i BHM

The General page of BHM is explained in below table. The General page of PTP 450 BHM looks the same
as PTP 450i BHM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 107

Table 24: General page attributes – PTP 450i BHM

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed

Ethernet Link See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Ethernet
Bounce
Timeout

802.3at Type 2 When the PoE Classification functionality is enabled and if Type 2 power is not
PoE Status and present, the PAs do not power up and draw too much power.

PoE By default, the PoE Classification feature is disabled and the PAs will power up
Classification regardless of the classification presented by the power source.

This is supported only on 450i Series ODUs.

Chapter 1: Configuration 108

Attribute Meaning

PoE Classification configuration status also can be check under home > General >
Device Information tab:

Sync Input See Configuring synchronization

Free Run See Free Run Before GPS Sync

Before GPS
Sync

Region See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Country

Webpage Auto
Update

Bridge Entry
Timeout

Bridging Select whether you want bridge table filtering active (Enable) or not (Disable) on this
Functionality BH.

Disable: allows user to use redundant BHs without causing network addressing
problems. Through a spanning tree protocol, this reduces the convergence time from
25 minutes to few seconds. However, you must disable bridge table filtering as only a
deliberate part of your overall network design since disabling it allows unwanted
traffic across the wireless interface.

Enable: Allows user to enable bridge functionality.

Note

Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation

with the existing network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout must
be a longer period than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache
timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Update See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Application
Address

Prioritize TCP
ACK

Multicast
Destination
Address

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 109

General page - PTP 450i BHS
The General page of PTP 450i BHS is explained in below table. The General page of PTP 450 BHS looks
the same as PTP 450i BHS.

Table 25: General page attributes – PTP 450i BHS

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Ethernet Link

Ethernet
Bounce
Timeout

802.3at Type 2 When the PoE Classification functionality is enabled and if Type 2 power is not
PoE Status present, the PAs do not power up and draw too much power.
and
By default, the PoE Classification feature is disabled and the PAs will power up
regardless of the classification presented by the power source.

Chapter 1: Configuration 110

Attribute Meaning

PoE This is supported only on 450i Series ODUs.

Classification
PoE Classification configuration status also can be check under home > General >
Device Information tab:

Remote See General page attributes – PMP 450b SM.

Device Type

Region This parameter allows you to set the region in which the radio will operate.

The BHS radio automatically inherits the Region type of the master. This behavior
ignores the value of the Region parameter in the BHS, even when the value is None.
Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order to
configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be always set to
the value that corresponds to the local region.

Country This parameter allows you to set the country in which the radio will operate.

The BHS radio automatically inherits the Country Code type of the master. This
behavior ignores the value of the Country parameter in the BHS, even when the value
is None. Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in
order to configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be
always set to the value that corresponds to the local region.

PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU shipped to the United States is locked to a Region Code
setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must
be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.

Webpage See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Auto Update

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the existing
Timeout network infrastructure. Timeout occurs when the BHM encounters no activity with the
BHS (whose MAC address is the bridge entry) within the interval that this parameter
specifies. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer period than the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Caution

This parameter governs the timeout interval, even if a router in the

system has a longer timeout interval. The default value of this field is 25
(minutes).An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting may lead
to temporary loss of communication with some end users.

Bridging See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Functionality

Frame Timing If this BHS extends the sync pulse to a BH master or an AP, select either
Pulse Gated

Chapter 1: Configuration 111

Attribute Meaning

Enable—If this BHS loses sync from the BHM, then do not propagate a sync pulse to
the BH timing master or other BHM. This setting prevents interference in the event
that the BHS loses sync.

Disable—If this BHS loses sync from the BHM, then propagate the sync pulse to the BH
timing master or other BHM.

Multicast See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Destination
Address

Latitude See General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP

Longitude

Height

PMP/PTP 450b Series

General page – PMP 450b SM
The General page of PMP 450b SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 112

Table 26: General page attributes – PMP 450b SM

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected. The
recommended setting is a single speed selection for all APs and SMs in the
operator network.

Ethernet Link Specify whether to enable or disable Ethernet/802.3 connectivity on the wired
port of the SM. This parameter has no effect on the wireless link. When you select
Enabled/Disabled
Enable, this feature allows traffic on the Ethernet/802.3 port. This is the factory
default state of the port. When you select Disable, this feature prevents traffic on
the port. Typical cases of when you may want to select Disable include:

The subscriber is delinquent with payment(s).

You suspect that the subscriber is sending or flooding undesired broadcast

packets into the network, such as when

l a virus is present in the subscriber’s computing device.

l the subscriber’s home router is improperly configured.

Chapter 1: Configuration 113

Attribute Meaning

Ethernet Bounce This parameter allows the operator to configure Ethernet bounce timeout ranging
Timeout from 0 to 60 minutes. Value 0 disables Ethernet bounce timeout.

Sync Aux Port Set the Sync Aux Port Config parameter to support the desired functionality.
Config Select Alignment Tone to output a stereo tone on the Timing Port/UGPS TRRS
audio connector for link alignment. Select Sync Output to output the GPS timing
pulse on this connector for synchronization of a connected remote AP.

Remote Device The Remote Device Type parameter is available when Sync Aux Port Config is set
Type to Sync Output. Choose Other unless you are using the 450b Timing Port/UGPS
to provide remote synchronization to a PMP/PTP 100 AP/BHM.

Region This parameter allows you to set the region in which the radio will operate.

The SM radio automatically inherits the Region type of the master. This behavior
ignores the value of the Region parameter in the SM, even when the value is None.
Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order
to configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be
always set to the value that corresponds to the local region.

Country This parameter allows you to set the country in which the radio will operate.

The SM radio automatically inherits the Country Code type of the master. This
behavior ignores the value of the Country parameter in the SM, even when the
value is None. Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the
value in order to configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter
must be always set to the value that corresponds to the local region.

PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU shipped to the United States is locked to a Region
Code setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United
States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with
local regulatory requirements.

Webpage Auto Enter the frequency (in seconds) for the web browser to automatically refresh the
Update web-based interface. The default setting is 0. The 0 setting causes the web-based
interface to never be automatically refreshed.

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the
Timeout existing network infrastructure. Timeout occurs when the AP encounters no
activity with the SM (whose MAC address is the bridge entry) within the interval
that this parameter specifies. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer period
than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that
feeds the network.

Caution

This parameter governs the timeout interval, even if a router in the

system has a longer timeout interval. The default value of this field is
25 (minutes).An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting
may lead to temporary loss of communication with some end users.

Bridge Table Size This parameter allows to restrict devices to connect to the SM. It is configurable
from 4 to 4096.

Chapter 1: Configuration 114

Attribute Meaning

Note

Configure Bridge Table Restriction parameter to Drop packets if

MAC address is not in bridge table option to restrict the number of
devices configured from connecting to SM.

Bridge Table This parameter allows to either allow or restrict devices to connect to SM using
Restriction the following options:

l Drop packets if MAC address is not in bridge table: Select this option to
restrict communication from devices not listed in bridge table.

Forward packets even if MAC address is not in bridge table: Select this option to
allow communication from any device.

Frame Timing If this SM extends the sync pulse to a BH master or an AP, select either
Pulse Gated
Enable—If this SM loses sync from the AP, then do not propagate a sync pulse to
the BH timing master or another AP. This setting prevents interference in the
event that the SM loses sync.

Disable—If this SM loses sync from the AP, then propagate the sync pulse to the
BH timing master or another AP.

Multicast Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast
Destination addresses with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although
Address some switches (CMM4, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the
network, a radio can pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address
parameter value in the connected device that has it populated.

Latitude Physical radio location data may be configured via the Latitude, Longitude and
Height fields. Latitude and Longitude is measured in Decimal Degree while the
Longitude
Height is calculated in Meters.
Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 115

PTP 450b BHM
Table 27: General page attributes – PMP 450b BHM

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected. The
recommended setting is a single speed selection for all APs and SMs in the
operator network.

Ethernet Link Specify whether to enable or disable Ethernet/802.3 connectivity on the wired
port of the SM. This parameter has no effect on the wireless link. When you select
Enabled/Disabled
Enable, this feature allows traffic on the Ethernet/802.3 port. This is the factory
default state of the port. When you select Disable, this feature prevents traffic on
the port. Typical cases of when you may want to select Disable include:

The subscriber is delinquent with payment(s).

You suspect that the subscriber is sending or flooding undesired broadcast

packets into the network, such as when

Chapter 1: Configuration 116

Attribute Meaning

l a virus is present in the subscriber’s computing device.

l the subscriber’s home router is improperly configured.

Ethernet Bounce This parameter allows the operator to configure Ethernet bounce timeout ranging
Timeout from 0 to 60 minutes. Value 0 disables Ethernet bounce timeout.

Sync Input See Configuring synchronization.

Free Run Before See Free Run Before GPS Sync

GPS Sync

Sync Aux Port See Sync Aux Port Config

Config

Region From the drop-down list, select the region in which the radio is operating.

Country From the drop-down list, select the country in which the radio is operating.

Unlike selections in other parameters, your Country selection requires a

Save Changes and a Reboot cycle before it will force the context-sensitive GUI to
display related options (for example, Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and 2 in the
Configuration > Radio tab).

PMP 450b Series ODUs shipped to the United States is locked to a Region Code
setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States
must be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local
regulatory requirements.
Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways:

l Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus

configured antenna gain)
l DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region code, if
applicable

For more information on how transmit power limiting and DFS is implemented for
each country, see the PMP 450 Planning Guide.

Webpage Auto Enter the frequency (in seconds) for the web browser to automatically refresh the
Update web-based interface. The default setting is 0. The 0 setting causes the web-based
interface to never be automatically refreshed.

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the
Timeout existing network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer
period than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router
that feeds the network.

Bridging Select whether you want bridge table filtering active (Enable) or not (Disable) on
Functionality this BH.

Disable: allows user to use redundant BHs without causing network addressing
problems. Through a spanning tree protocol, this reduces the convergence time
from 25 minutes to few seconds. However, you must disable bridge table filtering
as only a deliberate part of your overall network design since disabling it allows
unwanted traffic across the wireless interface.

Chapter 1: Configuration 117

Attribute Meaning

Enable: Allows user to enable bridge functionality.

Note

Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network

operation with the existing network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry
Timeout must be a longer period than the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Update Application Enter the address of the server to access for software updates on this BHM and
Address registered BHS.

Prioritize TCP ACK To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set
this parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user
perceives during transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying
acknowledgements.

Multicast Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast
Destination addresses with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although
Address some switches (CMM4, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the
network, a radio can pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address
parameter value in the connected device that has it populated.

Latitude Physical radio location data may be configured via the Latitude, Longitude and
Height fields.
Longitude
Latitude and Longitude is measured in Decimal Degree while the Height is
Height calculated in Meters.

Chapter 1: Configuration 118

PTP 450b BHS
Table 28: General page attributes – PMP 450b BHS

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The Auto settings allow the two ends of the link to automatically
negotiate with each other the best possible speed, and check whether the Ethernet
traffic is full duplex or half duplex.

However, some Ethernet links work best when either:

l both ends are set to the same forced selection

l both ends are set to auto-negotiate and both have capability in least one
common speed and traffic type combination.

Ethernet Link This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable Ethernet Link.

Ethernet This parameter allows the operator to configure Ethernet bounce timeout ranging
Bounce from 0 to 60 minutes. Value 0 disables Ethernet bounce timeout.
Timeout

Chapter 1: Configuration 119

Attribute Meaning

Sync Aux Port Set the Sync Aux Port Config parameter to support the desired functionality. Select
Config Alignment Tone to output a stereo tone on the Timing Port/UGPS TRRS audio
connector for link alignment. Select Sync Output to output the GPS timing pulse on
this connector for synchronization of a connected remote AP.

Remote The Remote Device Type parameter is available when Sync Aux Port Config is set to
Device Type Sync Output. Choose Other unless you are using the 450b Timing Port/UGPS to
provide remote synchronization to a PMP/PTP 100 AP/BHM.

Region This parameter allows you to set the region in which the radio will operate.

The BHS radio automatically inherits the Region type of the master. This behavior
ignores the value of the Region parameter in the BHS, even when the value is None.
Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order to
configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be always set to
the value that corresponds to the local region.

Country This parameter allows you to set the country in which the radio will operate.

The BHS radio automatically inherits the Country Code type of the master. This
behavior ignores the value of the Country parameter in the BHS, even when the value
is None. Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in
order to configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter must be
always set to the value that corresponds to the local region.

PMP/PTP 450b Series ODU shipped to the United States is locked to a Region Code
setting of “United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must
be configured with the corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.

Webpage Enter the frequency (in seconds) for the web browser to automatically refresh the
Auto Update web-based interface. The default setting is 0. The 0 setting causes the web-based
interface to never be automatically refreshed.

Bridge Entry Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the existing
Timeout network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout must be a longer period than the
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the
network.

Bridging Select whether you want bridge table filtering active (Enable) or not (Disable) on this
Functionality BH.

Disable: allows user to use redundant BHs without causing network addressing
problems. Through a spanning tree protocol, this reduces the convergence time from
25 minutes to few seconds. However, you must disable bridge table filtering as only a
deliberate part of your overall network design since disabling it allows unwanted
traffic across the wireless interface.

Enable: Allows user to enable bridge functionality.

Note

Chapter 1: Configuration 120

Attribute Meaning

Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation

with the existing network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout must
be a longer period than the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache
timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Frame Timing If this BHS extends the sync pulse to a BH master or an AP, select either
Pulse Gated
Enable—If this BHS loses sync from the AP, then do not propagate a sync pulse to the
BH timing master or another AP. This setting prevents interference in the event that
the BHS loses sync.

Disable—If this BHS loses sync from the BHM, then propagate the sync pulse to the BH
timing master or another AP.

Multicast Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast addresses
Destination with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although some switches
Address (CMM4, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the network, a radio can
pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address parameter value in the
connected device that has it populated.

Latitude Physical radio location data may be configured via the Latitude, Longitude and Height
fields.
Longitude
Latitude and Longitude is measured in Decimal Degree while the Height is calculated
Height in Meters.

General page – PMP 450b Retro SM

Figure 17: General page attributes - PMP 450b Retro SM

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed

Ethernet Link

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Configuration Source

Sync Input

Free Run Before GPS Sync

Chapter 1: Configuration 121

Attribute Meaning

Region

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

Translation Bridging

Send Untranslated ARP

SM Isolation

Forward Unknown Unicast

Packets

Update Application Address

Prioritize TCP ACK

Multicast Destination
Address

DHCP Relay Agent

DHCP Server (Name or IP

Address)

Option 82 Circuit ID

Option 82 Remote ID

Option 82 Vendor Specific ID

Latitude

Longitude

Height

PMP/PTP 450 Series

Note

Refer General page attributes – PMP/PTP 450i AP and General page attributes –
PMP 450i SM for PMP 450 AP/SM General page parameters details.

Chapter 1: Configuration 122

General page - PMP 450 AP
Figure 18: General page attributes - PMP 450 AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 123

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed See General page attributes – PMP 450i SM

Ethernet Link

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Configuration Source

Sync Input

Free Run Before GPS Sync

Region

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

Translation Bridging

Send Untranslated ARP

SM Isolation

Forward Unknown Unicast

Packets

Update Application Address

Prioritize TCP ACK

Multicast Destination Address

DHCP Relay Agent

DHCP Server (Name or IP

Address)

Option 82 Circuit ID

Option 82 Remote ID

Option 82 Vendor Specific ID

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 124

General page - PMP 450 SM
Figure 19: General page attributes - PMP 450 SM

Chapter 1: Configuration 125

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed

Ethernet Link Enable/Disable

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Remote Device Type

Region

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

See General page attributes – PMP 450i SM
Bridge Table Size

Bridge Table Restriction

Frame Timing Pulse Gated

Multicast Destination Address

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 126

General page – PTP 450 BHM
Figure 20: General page attributes - PTP 450 BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 127

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed See General page attributes – PTP 450i BHM

Ethernet Link

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Sync Input

Free Run Before GPS Sync

Region

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

Bridging Functionality

Update Application Address

Prioritize TCP ACK

Multicast Destination Address

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 128

General page – PTP 450 BHS
Figure 21: General page attributes - PTP 450 BHS

Chapter 1: Configuration 129

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed See General page attributes – PTP 450i BHS

Ethernet Link

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Remote Device Type

Region

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

Bridging Functionality

Frame Timing Pulse Gated

Multicast Destination Address

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Chapter 1: Configuration 130

General page – PMP 450 MicroPoP AP
Figure 22: General page attributes - PMP 450 MicroPoP AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 131

Attribute Meaning

Link Speed See General page attributes – PMP 450i SM

Ethernet Link

Ethernet Bounce Timeout

Configuration Source

Sync Input

Free Run Before GPS Sync

GNSS Mode GPS:

GLONASS:

Galileo:

Beidou:

Chapter 1: Configuration 132

 Attribute Meaning

Region See General page attributes – PMP 450i SM

Country

Webpage Auto Update

Bridge Entry Timeout

Translation Bridging

Send Untranslated ARP

SM Isolation

Forward Unknown Unicast

Packets

Update Application Address

Prioritize TCP ACK

Multicast Destination
Address

DHCP Relay Agent

DHCP Server (Name or IP

Address)

Option 82 Circuit ID

Option 82 Remote ID

Option 82 Vendor Specific ID

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Configuring Unit Settings page

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS
products

The Unit Settings page of the 450 Platform Family contains following options:

l Unit-Wide Changes

l Download Configuration File

l Upload and Apply Configuration File (for AP and BHM)

l LED Panel Settings (for SM and BHS)

Chapter 1: Configuration 133

 Note

LED Panel setting is applicable for SM and BHS only.

Upload and Apply Configuration File attributes are not supported for SM and BHS.

The 450 Platform Family also supports import and export of configuration from the AP/BHM/SM/BHS as
a text file. The configuration file is in JSON format. The logged in user must be an ADMINISTRATOR in
order to export or import the configuration file.

The exported configuration file contains the complete configuration including all the default values. To
keep a backup of the current configuration, the file can be saved as-is and imported later.

The configuration file supports encrypted password. The exported configuration file will contain
encrypted password. The import of configuration can have either encrypted or plain text password in
Configuration fie. A new tab Encrypt the Password is added under Encrypted Password tab to generate
encrypted password for a given password.

The Import and Export procedure of configuration file is described in Import and Export of config file.

LED Panel Mode has options select Revised mode and Legacy mode. The Legacy mode configures the
radio to operate with standard LED behavior.

Unit Settings page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM

The Unit Setting page of AP/BHM is explained in below table.

Table 29: Unit Settings attributes – 450 Platform Family AP/BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 134

Attribute Meaning

Set to Factory If Enabled is checked, then the default mode functions is enabled. When the module is
Defaults Upon rebooted with Default mode enabled, it can be accessed at the IP address 169.254.1.1
Default Mode and no password, and all parameter values are reset to defaults. A subscriber,
Detection technician, or other person who gains physical access to the module and uses an
override cannot see or learn the settings that were previously configured in it.

If Disabled is checked, then the default mode functions are disabled.

Caution

When Set to Factory Defaults Upon Default Mode is set to Enable, the
radio does not select all of the frequencies for Radio Frequency Scan
Selection List. It needs to be selected manually.

Undo Unit- When you click this button, any changes that you made in any tab but did not commit
Wide Saved by a reboot of the module are undone.
Changes

Set to Factory When you click this button, all configurable parameters on all tabs are reset to the
Defaults factory settings.

Note

This can be reverted by selecting "Undo Unit-Wide Saved Changes",

before rebooting the radio, though this is not recommended.

Password This allows to provide encrypted password for a given password. On click of ‘Encrypt
the password’ button, the Encrypted Password field will display encrypted value of
entered plain text password in ‘Password’ field.

Configuration This allows to download the configuration file of the radio. This configuration file
File contains the complete configuration including all the default values. The configuration
file is highlighted as downloadable link and the naming convention is “<mac address
of AP>.cfg”.

Apply This allows to import and apply configuration to the AP.

Configuration
Chose File: Select the file to upload the configuration. The configuration file is named
File
as “<file name>.cfg”.

Upload: Import the configuration to the AP.

Apply Configuration File: Apply the imported configuration file to the AP. The
imported configuration file may either contain a full device configuration or a partial
device configuration. If a partial configuration file is imported, only the items
contained in the file will be updated, the rest of the device configuration parameters
will remain the same. Operators may also include a special flag in the configure file to
instruct the device to first revert to factory defaults then to apply the imported
configuration.

Chapter 1: Configuration 135

 Attribute Meaning

Status of This section shows the results of the upload.

Configuration
file

Unit Settings page of PMP/PTP 450i SM/BHS

The Unit Settings page of PMP/PTP 450i SM/BHS is explained in below table.

Table 30: SM Unit Settings attributes

Attribute Meaning

Set to Factory Defaults Upon Default See Unit Settings attributes – 450 Platform Family AP/BHM
Plug Detection

LED Panel Settings Legacy Mode configures the radio to operate with standard
LED behavior.

Undo Unit-Wide Saved Changes See Unit Settings attributes – 450 Platform Family AP/BHM

Password

Set to Factory Defaults

Configuration File

Status of Configuration file

Chapter 1: Configuration 136

Setting up time and date
Time page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM

Applicable products PMP: þ AP PTP: þ BHM

The Time page of 450 Platform Family AP/BHM is explained in below table.

Table 31: 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM Time attributes

Attribute Meaning

NTP Server The management DNS domain name may be toggled such that the name of the NTP
(Name or IP server only needs to be specified and the DNS domain name is automatically appended
Address) to that name.

NTP Server 1 To have each log in the AP/BHM correlated to a meaningful time and date, either a
(Name or IP reliable network element must pass time and date to the AP/BHM or must set the time
Address) and date whenever a power cycle of the AP/BHM has occurred. A network element
passes time and date in any of the following scenarios:
NTP Server 2
(Name or IP l A connected CMM4 passes time and date (GPS time and date, if received).
Address) l A connected CMM4 passes the time and date (GPS time and date, if received),
but only if both the CMMr is operating on CMMr Release 2.1 or later release.
(These releases include NTP server functionality.)

Chapter 1: Configuration 137

Attribute Meaning

NTP Server 3 l A separate NTP server (including APs/BHMs receiving NTP data) is addressable
(Name or IP from the AP/BHM.
Address)
If the AP/BHM needs to obtain time and date from a CMM4, or a separate NTP server,
enter the IP address or DNS name of the CMM4 or NTP server on this tab. To force the
AP/BHM to obtain time and date before the first (or next) 15-minute interval query of
the NTP server, click Get Time via NTP.

The polling of the NTP servers is done in a sequential fashion, and the polling status of
each server is displayed in the NTP Update Log section of the Time Configuration page.
An entry of 0.0.0.0 in any of the NTP Server fields indicates an unused server
configuration.

NTP Server Lists the IP addresses of servers used for NTP retrieval.
(s) in Use

Time Zone The Time Zone option may be used to offset the received NTP time to match the
operator’s local time zone. When set on the AP/BHM, the offset is set for the entire
sector SMs (or BHS) are notified of the current Time Zone upon initial registration). If a
Time Zone change is applied, the SMs (or BHS) is notified of the change in a best effort
fashion, meaning some SMs//BHSs may not pick up the change until the next re-
registration. Time Zone changes are noted in the Event Log of the AP/BHM and
SM/BHS.

System Time The current time used by the system.

Last NTP The last time that the system time was set via NTP.
Time Update

Time This field may be used to manually set the system time of the radio.

Date This field may be used to manually set the system date of the radio.

NTP Update This field shows NTP clock update log. It includes NTP clock update Date and Time
Log stamp along with server name.

Configuring synchronization
Applicable PMP: þ AP PTP: þ BHM
products

Sync Input
This section describes synchronization options for PMP and PTP configuration.

Chapter 1: Configuration 138

Figure 23: Sync Setting configuration

The Sync Input parameter can be configured under Sync Setting tab of Configure > General page (see
General configuration).

PMP/PTP 450i Series has following synchronization input options:

l AutoSync
l AutoSync + Free Run
l Generate Sync

AutoSync
For 450i AP/BHM, 450b BHM and 450m AP, the AP/BHM automatically receives sync from one of the
following sources:

l GPS Sync over Timing Port (UGPS, cnPulse, co-located AP GPS sync output, or “Remote” Device
feed from a registered SM’s GPS sync output)
l GPS Sync over Power Port (CMM4), CMM5, cnPulse module ODU Sync Port.

For 450 AP, the internal GPS is available in addition to the above sync sources. For a 450 BHM the only
available sync source is the Timing Port, as GPS Sync Over Power Port is not supported.

Upon AP/BHM power on with the Free Run Before GPS Sync parameter set to disabled, the AP/BHM
does not transmit until a valid synchronization pulse is received from one of the sources above. If there is
a loss of GPS synchronization pulse after sync is initially established, within two seconds the AP/BHM
automatically attempts to source GPS signaling from another source.

In case of PMP, when there are synchronization sources on both the timing port and the power port, the
power port GPS source is chosen first.

If no valid GPS signal is received, the AP/BHM ceases transmission and SM/BHS registration is lost until a
valid GPS signal is received again on the AP or BHM.

Note

After a reboot of 450m AP, the sync acquisition takes a little longer than it had
on 450i (anywhere from 40 seconds to 120 seconds difference).

When the Sync Input field is set to Autosync or Autosync + Free Run, other options become available to
be set e.g. UGPS Power and other fields. This is true on APs and BHMs.

Chapter 1: Configuration 139

AutoSync + Free Run
This mode operates similarly to mode “AutoSync”, but if a previously received synchronization signal is
lost and no GPS signaling alternative is achieved, the AP/BHM automatically changes to synchronization
mode “Generate Sync - Free Run”. While BHS/SM registration is maintained, in this mode there is no
synchronization of APs/BHMs that can “hear” each other; the AP/BHM will only generate a sync signal for
the local AP/BHM and its associated SMs/BHS. Once a valid GPS signal is obtained again, the AP/BHM
automatically switches to receiving synchronization via the GPS source and SM/BHS registration is
maintained.

Note

In mode AutoSync + Free Run with the Free Run Before GPS Sync parameter set to disabled,
if a GPS signal is never achieved initially, the system will not switch to “Free Run” mode, and
SMs/BHS will not register to the AP/BHM. A valid GPS signal must be present initially for the
AP to switch into “Free Run” mode (and to begin self-generating a synchronization pulse).

Also, when an AP/BHM is operating in “Free Run” mode, over a short time it will no longer
be synchronized with co-located or nearby APs/BHMs (within radio range). Due to this lack
of transmit and receive synchronization across APs/BHMs or across systems, performance
while in “Free Run” mode may be degraded until the APs/BHMs operating in “Free Run”
mode regain a external GPS synchronization source. Careful attention is required to ensure
that all systems are properly receiving an external GPS synchronization pulse, and please
consider “Free Run” mode as an emergency option.

Generate Sync (Factory default)

This option may be used when the AP/BHM is not receiving GPS synchronization pulses from either a
CMM4/CMM5 or UGPS/cnPulse module, and there are no other APs/BHMs active within the link range.
Using this option will not synchronize transmission of APs/BHMs that can “hear” each other; it will only
generate a sync signal for the local AP/BHM and its associated SMs/BHS.

Note

When an AP/BHM has its "Regional Code" set to "None", The radio will not
provide valid Sync Pulse Information.

There is a RED warning that the radio will not transmit, but the user might
expect to see a valid sync if the radio is connected to a working CMM4 or UGPS.

Free Run Before GPS Sync

This option is available when the Sync Input parameter is configured for either AutoSync mode or
AutoSync + Free Run mode. When Free Run Before GPS Sync is set to Enabled, if the radio does not
detect a valid GPS synchronization pulse after booting up then it will operate in Generate Sync – Free
Run mode until a valid source is detected. While the AP/BHM is in Generate Sync – Free Run mode
SMs/BHS will be able to register, but there is no synchronization of APs/BHMs that can “hear” each other;
the AP/BHM will only generate a sync signal for the local AP/BHM and its associated SMs/BHS. Once a
valid synchronization source is found, the AP/BHM automatically switches to receiving synchronization
from the source and SM/BHS registration is maintained. If Free Run Before GPS Sync is set to Disabled,
the AP/BHM does not transmit and SMs/BHS will be unable to register until a valid GPS synchronization
source is connected.

Chapter 1: Configuration 140

Device Type
This parameter determines whether the device is configured as a Remote AP or BHM, receiving GPS sync
from a co-located AP/BHM GPS sync output or Remote Device feed from a registered SM’s or BHS’s GPS
sync output, or as a Standard AP or BHM. This parameter applies in AutoSync or AutoSync + Free Run
modes only. Synchronization behavior is as follows:

Standard: The AutoSync mechanism will source GPS synchronization from the AP’s Aux/Timing port, the
AP’s power port, or from the device on-board GPS module (if present).

Remote: The AutoSync mechanism will source GPS synchronization from the AP’s Aux/Timing port or
from the device on-board GPS module (if present). GPS synchronization pulses on the Power Port are
ignored.

Verify GPS Message Checksum

The Verify GPS Message Checksum parameter enables or disables validation of incoming GPS location
messages from a UGPS or cnPulse module connected to the AP’s Aux Port. When enabled the AP will
discard messages found to have an incorrect checksum and will increment the Invalid Message Count
display of the Sync Status tab of the Home GUI page accordingly.

Sync Aux Port Config

The Sync Aux Port Config parameter controls how the Timing Port/UPGS port is used on the AP or BHM.
This parameter replaces the Sync Out to Aux Port parameter from earlier software releases.

On the 450m AP, 450i AP/BHM, and 450 AP/BHM, this parameter takes effect when operating in
AutoSync or AutoSync + Free Run modes. The available options are Sync Input or Sync Output,
equivalent to Disabled and Enabled respectively for the Sync Out to Aux Port parameter:

l When configured for Sync Input, the AP will accept GPS sync in via the Timing Port/UGPS
connector from a UGPS, cnPulse, co-located AP GPS sync output, or "Remote" Device feed from a
registered SM's GPS sync output.
l When configured for Sync Output, the AP will output the GPS timing pulse on the Timing
Port/UGPS connector. In this configuration the AP may serve as a GPS synchronization source for
a co-located AP.

The 450b series radios are equipped with a 4-pin TRRS audio Timing Port/UGPS connector in place of
the RJ45 or RJ12 connectors used on the 450m/450i/450 series. On the 450b BHM, the available Sync
Aux Port Config options are Sync Input, Sync Output, and Alignment Tone:

l Sync Input and Sync Output behave the same as described above for the 450m, 450i and 450
platforms.

l The Alignment Tone option is available only on the 450b BHM. When this option is selected, the
BHM will output a tone to both the left and right channels of a pair of stereo headphones plugged
into the TRRS audio jack whenever a BHS session is active.

Note

when Sync Aux Port Config is set to Sync Output, the 450b BHM will still
generate an alignment tone but it will be audible only on the right stereo
channel. When Sync Input is selected the 450b BHM will not generate the
alignment tone on either stereo channel.

Chapter 1: Configuration 141

Aux Port Power to UGPS
The 450 series APs are capable of supplying power to a connected UGPS or cnPulse module via the
Aux/Timing Port. Enable the Aux Port Power to UGPS parameter to output power on the port.

Note

The AP is able to receive GPS sync pulses and satellite data via the Aux Port
regardless of whether this parameter is Enabled or Disabled. However, on the
450m AP and 450i AP/BHM, the satellite data is displayed on the Sync Status
page only when the Aux Port power is enabled.

Caution

When a UGPS module is used to provide GPS sync to two 450m or 450i APs
simultaneously, it is recommended to install a separate power supply for the
UGPS to prevent the possibility of sync interruption upon reboot of the APs.

Configuring security
Perform this task to configure the 450 Platform system in accordance with the network operator’s
security policy. Choose from the following procedures:

l Managing module access by password to configure the unit access password and access level
l See Radio Recovery. to ensure that APs are properly secured from external networks
l Encrypting radio transmissions to configure the unit to operate with AES wireless link security
l Requiring SM Authentication to set up the AP to require SMs to authenticate via the AP, WM, or
RADIUS server
l Filtering protocols and ports to filter (block) specified protocols and ports from leaving the
system
l Encrypting downlink broadcasts to encrypt downlink broadcast transmissions
l Isolating SMs to prevent SMs in the same sector from directly communicating with each other
l Filtering management through Ethernet to prevent management access to the SM via the radio’s
Ethernet port
l Allowing management only from specified IP addresses to only allow radio management interface
access from specified IP addresses
l Restricting radio Telnet access over the RF interface to restrict Telnet access to the AP
l Configuring SNMP Access
l Configuring Security

Managing module access by password

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

See Managing module access by password in Planning and installation Guide.

Chapter 1: Configuration 142

Adding a User for Access to a module
The Account > Add User page allows to create a new user for accessing 450 Platform Family -
AP/SM/BHM/BHS. The Add User page is explained in below table.

Table 32: Add User page of account page - AP/ SM/BH

Attribute Meaning

User Name User Account name.

Level Select appropriate level for new account. It can be INSTALLER, ADMINISTRATOR or
TECHNICIAN. See Managing module Access by passwords in Planning and Installation
Guide.

New Assign the password for new user account

Password

Confirm This new password must be confirmed in the “Confirm Password” field.
Password

User Mode User Mode is used to create an account which are mainly used for viewing the
configurations.

The local and remote Read-Only user account can be created by “Admin”, “Installer” or
“Tech” logins. To create a Read-Only user, the “read-only” check box needs to be
checked.

Note

The Read-Only user cannot perform any service impacting operations like
creating read-only accounts, editing and viewing read-only user accounts,
changes in login page, read-only user login, Telnet access, SNMP, RADIUS and
upgrade/downgrade.

Deleting a User from Access to a module

The Account > Delete User page provides a drop-down list of configured users from which to select the
user you want to delete. The Delete User page is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 143

Table 33: Delete User page - 450 Platform Family - AP/ SM/BH

Attribute Meaning

User Select a user from drop-down list which has to be deleted and click
Delete button.

Accounts that cannot be deleted are:

l the current user's own account.

l the last remaining account of ADMINISTRATOR level.

Changing a User Setting

The Account > Change User Setting page allows to update password, mode update and general status
permission for a user.

From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at the
ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using Update Password tab of Change Users Setting page.

The Change User Setting page is explained in below table.

Table 34: Change User Setting page - 450 Platform Family AP/ SM/BH

Chapter 1: Configuration 144

 Attribute Meaning

Update Password This tab provides a drop-down list of configured users from which a user is selected
tab to change password.

Update Mode tab This tab facilitates to convert a configured user to a Read-Only user.

General Status This tab enables and disables visibility of General Status Page for all Guest users.
Permission tab
To display of Radio data on SMs/BHS main Login page for Guest login, it can be
enabled or disabled in Security tab of Configuration page.

Figure 24: Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PMP

Figure 25: BHM Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PTP

Users account
The Account > Users page allows to view all configured users account for accessing the module.

The Users page is explained in below table.

Table 35: User page –450 Platform Family AP/SM/BH

Attribute Meaning

Username User access account name

Permission Permission of configured user – INSTALLER, ADMINISTRATOR or TECHNICIAN

Mode This field indicate access mode of user – Read-Write or Read-Only.

Overriding Forgotten IP Addresses or Passwords on AP and SM

See Radio Recovery.

Isolating from the internet – APs/BHMs

Applicable products PMP: þ AP PTP: þ BHM

See Isolating AP/BHM from the Internet in Planning and Installation Guide.

Chapter 1: Configuration 145

Encrypting radio transmissions

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

See Encryption radio transmission in Planning and Installation Guide.

Requiring SM Authentication

Applicable products PMP: þ AP þ SM

Through the use of a shared AP key, or an external RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)
server, it enhances network security by requiring SMs to authenticate when they register.

For descriptions of each of the configurable security parameters on the AP, see Configuring Security. For
descriptions of each of the configurable security parameters on the SM.

Operators may use the AP’s Authentication Mode field to select from among the following authentication
modes:

l Disabled—the AP requires no SMs to authenticate (factory default setting).

l Authentication Server —the AP requires any SM that attempts registration to be authenticated in

Wireless Manager before registration

l AP PreShared Key - The AP acts as the authentication server to its SMs and will make use of a
user-configurable pre-shared authentication key. The operator enters this key on both the AP and
all SMs desired to register to that AP. There is also an option of leaving the AP and SMs at their
default setting of using the “Default Key”. Due to the nature of the authentication operation, if you
want to set a specific authentication key, then you MUST configure the key on all of the SMs and
reboot them BEFORE enabling the key and option on the AP. Otherwise, if you configure the AP
first, none of the SMs is able to register.

l RADIUS AAA - When RADIUS AAA is selected, up to 3 Authentication Server (RADIUS Server) IP
addresses and Shared Secrets can be configured. The IP address(s) configured here must match
the IP address(s) of the RADIUS server(s). The shared secret(s) configured here must match the
shared secret(s) configured in the RADIUS server(s). Servers 2 and 3 are meant for backup and
reliability, not for splitting the database. If Server 1 doesn’t respond, Server 2 is tried, and then
server 3. If Server 1 rejects authentication, the SM is denied entry to the network, and does not
progress trying the other servers.

For more information on configuring the PMP 450 Platform network to utilize a RADIUS server, see
Configuring a RADIUS server.

Filtering protocols and ports

Applicable PMP: þ AP þ SM PTP: þ BHM þ BMS

products

Chapter 1: Configuration 146

The filtering protocols and ports allows to configure filters for specified protocols and ports from leaving
the AP/SM/BHM/BHS and entering the network. See Filtering protocols ans ports in Planning and
Installation Guide.

Filters page of 450 Platform Family AP/BHM

The Filters page of 450 Platform Family - AP/BHM is explained in below table.

Table 36: AP/BHM Filters attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 147

Attribute Meaning

Packet Filter For any box selected, the Protocol and Port Filtering feature blocks the associated
Types protocol type.

To filter packets in any of the user-defined ports, must do all of the following:

Check the box for User Defined Port n (See Below) in the Packet Filter Types section
of this tab.

In the User Defined Port Filtering Configuration section of this tab:

l provide a port number at Port #n.

l enable TCP and/or UDP by clicking the associated radio button

Filter Direction Operators may choose to filter upstream (uplink) RF packets or downstream
(downlink) RF packets.

User Defined You can specify ports for which to block subscriber access, regardless of whether
Port Filtering NAT is enabled.
Configuration

RF Telnet RF Telnet Access restricts Telnet access to the AP/BHM from a device situated below
Access a network SM/BHS (downstream from the AP/BHM). This is a security enhancement
to restrict RF-interface sourced AP access specifically to the LAN1 IP address and
LAN2 IP address (Radio Private Address, typically 192.168.101.[LUID]). This restriction
disallows unauthorized users from running Telnet commands on the AP/BHM that can
change AP/BHM configuration or modifying network-critical components such as
routing and ARP tables.

PPPoE PADI Enabled: the AP/BHM allows downstream and upstream transmission of PPPoE PADI
Downlink packets. By default, PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding is set to Enabled.
Forwarding
Disabled: the AP/BHM disallows PPPoE PADI packets from entering the Ethernet
interface and exiting the RF interface (downstream to the SM/BHS). PPPoE PADI
packets are still allowed to enter the AP’s RF interface and exit the AP’s/BHM’s
Ethernet interface (upstream).

Filter Control Provision to Enable/Disable MAC Address Filtering.

Filter Default If the Filter Default Action is set to Allow all, any frame whose source MAC address or
Action OUI is:

l in the MAC address filters table and Action is set to Deny, will be blocked from
passing through.

l in the MAC address filters table and Action is set to Allow, will be allowed to
pass through.

Chapter 1: Configuration 148

 Attribute Meaning

l not in the MAC address filters table will be allowed to pass through.

If the Filter Default Action is set to Deny all, any frame whose source MAC Address or
OUI is:

l in the MAC address filters table and Action is set to Deny, will be blocked from
passing through.

l in the MAC address filters table and Action is set to Allow, will be allowed to
pass through.

l not in the MAC address filters table will be blocked from passing through.

Source MAC Indicates the unique MAC address or the manufacturer's OUI. You can add the MAC
Address or OUI address or OUI in any of the following formats:

l aa:bb:cc or aa-bb-cc or aabbcc

l aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff or aabbccddeeff

Protocol filtering page of SM/BHS

The Protocol Filtering page of SM/BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 149

Table 37: SM/BHS Protocol Filtering attributes

Attribute Meaning

Packet Filter Configuration tab See AP/BHM Filters attributes

User Defined Port Filtering Configuration tab See AP/BHM Filters attributes

Port configuration
450 Platform Family ODUs support access to various communication protocols and only the ports
required for these protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may change the port

Chapter 1: Configuration 150

numbers for these protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP.

The Port Configuration page of the AP/SM/BHM/BHS is explained in below table.

Table 38: Port Configuration attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BMS

Attribute Meaning

FTP Port The listen port on the device used for FTP communication.

HTTP Port The listen port on the device used for HTTP communication.

HTTPS Port The listen port on the device used for HTTPS communication

Radius Port The destination port used by the device for RADIUS communication.

Radius Accounting The destination port used by the device for RADIUS accounting
Port communication.

SNMP Port The listen port on the device used for SNMP communication.

SNMP Trap Port The destination port used by the device to which SNMP traps are sent.

Syslog Server Port The destination port used by the device to which Syslog messaging is sent.

Encrypting downlink broadcasts

See Encryption downlink broadcast in Installation and Planning Guide.

Isolating SMs
See Isolating SMs in Installation and Planning Guide.

Filtering management through Ethernet

See Filtering management through Ethernet in Installation and Planning Guide.

Allowing management only from specified IP addresses

See Allowing management only from specified IP address in Installation and Planning Guide.

Restricting radio Telnet access over the RF interface

RF Telnet Access restricts Telnet access to the AP from a device situated below a network SM
(downstream from the AP). This is a security enhancement to restrict RF-interface sourced AP access

Chapter 1: Configuration 151

specifically to the LAN1 IP address and LAN2 IP address (Radio Private Address, typically 192.168.101.
[LUID]). This restriction disallows unauthorized users from running Telnet commands on the AP that can
change AP configuration or modifying network-critical components such as routing and ARP tables.

The RF Telnet Access may be configured via the AP GUI or via SNMP commands, and RF Telnet Access is
set to “Enabled” by default. Once RF Telnet Access is set to “Disabled”, if there is a Telnet session
attempt to the AP originating from a device situated below the SM (or any downstream device), the
attempt is dropped. This also includes Telnet session attempts originated from the SM’s management
interface (if a user has initiated a Telnet session to a SM and attempts to Telnet from the SM to the AP). In
addition, if there are any active Telnet connections to the AP originating from a device situated below the
SM (or any downstream device), the connection is dropped. This behavior must be considered if system
administrators use Telnet downstream from an AP (from a registered SM) to modify system parameters.

Setting RF Telnet Access to “Disabled” does not affect devices situated above the AP from accessing the
AP via Telnet, including servers running the CNUT (Canopy Network Updater tool) application. Also,
setting RF Telnet Access to “Disabled” does not affect any Telnet access into upstream devices (situated
above or adjacent to the AP) through the AP (see RF Telnet Access Restrictions (orange) and Flow
through (green)).

The figure below depicts a user attempting two telnet sessions. One is targeted for the AP (orange) and
one is targeted for the network upstream from the AP (green). If RF Telnet Access is set to “Disabled”
(factory default setting), the Telnet attempt from the user to the AP is blocked, but the attempt from the
user to Network is allowed to pass through the Cambium network.

Figure 26: RF Telnet Access Restrictions (orange) and Flow through (green)

Key Security Considerations when using the RF Telnet Access Feature

To ensure that the network is fully protected from unauthorized AP Telnet sessions, the following topics
must be considered:

Securing AP Clusters
When working with a cluster of AP units, to eliminate potential security holes allowing Telnet access,
ensure that the RF Telnet Access parameter is set to “Disabled” for every AP in the cluster. In addition,
since users situated below the AP are able to pass Telnet sessions up through the SM and AP to the
upstream network (while AP RF Telnet Access is set to “Disabled”), ensure that all CMM4 or other
networking equipment is secured with strong passwords. Otherwise, users may Telnet to the CMM4 or
other networking equipment, and subsequently access network APs (see RF Telnet Access Restriction
(orange) and Potential Security Hole (green)) via their Ethernet interfaces (since RF Telnet Access only
prevents Telnet sessions originating from the AP’s wireless interface).

Chapter 1: Configuration 152

Figure 27: RF Telnet Access Restriction (orange) and Potential Security Hole (green)

As a common practice, AP administrator usernames and passwords must be secured with strong, non-
default passwords.

Restricting AP RF Telnet Access

AP Telnet access via the RF interface may be configured in two ways – the AP GUI and SNMP.

Controlling RF Telnet Access via the AP GUI

To restrict all Telnet access to the AP via the RF interface from downstream devices, follow these
instructions using the AP GUI:

Procedure 12 Restricting RF Telnet access:

1 Log into the AP GUI using administrator credentials

2 On the AP GUI, navigate to Configuration > Protocol Filtering

3 Under GUI heading “Telnet Access over RF Interface”, set RF Telnet Access to Disabled

4 Click the Save button

5 Once the Save button is clicked, all RF Telnet Access to the AP from devices situated below the
AP is blocked.

Note

The factory default setting for RF Telnet Access is disabled and PPPoE PADI
Downlink Forwarding is enabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 153

Configuring SNMP Access
The SNMPv3 interface provides a more secure method to perform SNMP operations. This standard
provides services for authentication, data integrity and message encryption over SNMP. Refer to
Planning of SNMPv3 operation in Planning and Installation Guide.

Note

The factory default setting for SNMP is “SNMPv2c Only”.

Procedure 13 Configuring SNMPv3:

1. Log into the AP GUI using administrator credentials

2. On the AP/SM GUI, navigate to Configuration > Security page
3. Under GUI heading Security Mode, set SNMP to SNMPv3 Only

4. Click the Save Changes button

5. Go to Configuration >SNMP Page
6. Under GUI heading “SNMPv3 setting”, set Engine ID, SNMPv3 Security Level, SNMPv3
Authentication Protocol, SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol, SNMPv3 Read-Only User, SNMPv3 Read/Write
User, SNMPv3 Trap Configuration parameters:

Engine ID:

Each radio (AP/SM/BHM/BHS) has a distinct SNMP authoritative engine identified by a unique Engine ID.
While the Engine ID is configurable to the operator it is expected that the operator follows the guidelines
of the SNMPEngineID defined in the SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB (RFC 3411). The default Engine ID is the
MAC address of the device.

Chapter 1: Configuration 154

SNMPv3 security level

The authentication allows authentication of SNMPv3 user and privacy allows for encryption of SNMPv3
message.

SNMPv3 Security Protocol

450 Platform family supports MD5, SHA-1 and SHA-256 authentications.

SHA-1

System release 20.0 introduces SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm 1), is a cryptographic hash function which
takes an input and produces a 160-bit (20-byte) hash value known as a message digest.

SHA-256

System release 20.0 introduces SHA-256 (Secure Hash Algorithm 2) is a cryptographic hash functions
designed by the United States National Security Agency (NSA). SHA-2 includes significant changes from
its predecessor, SHA-1. The SHA-256 hash function is implemented in some widely used security
applications and protocols, including TLS and SSL, PGP, SSH, S/MIME, and IPsec.

To enable this feature:

Go to Configuration > SNMP page > SNMPv3 Settings.

SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol

450 Platform family supports CBC-DES and CFB-AES privacy protocols

System release 20.0 introduces AES encryption (Advanced Encryption Standard), is a symmetric block
cipher chosen by the U.S. government to protect classified information and is implemented in software
and hardware throughout the world to encrypt sensitive data. The algorithm described by AES is a
symmetric-key algorithm, meaning the same key is used for both encrypting and decrypting the data.

To enable this feature:

Go to Configuration > SNMP page > SNMPv3 Settings.

SNMPv3 Read-Only and Read/Write User

The user can be defined by configurable attributes. The attributes and default values are:

Read-only user

Chapter 1: Configuration 155

 l Authentication Password = authCanopyro
l Privacy Password = privacyCanopyro
l sername = Canopyro

Read-write user (by default read-write user is disabled)

l Authentication Password = authCanopy

l Username = Canopy
l Privacy Password = privacyCanopy

SNMPv3 Trap Configuration

The traps may be sent from radios in SNMPv3 format based on parameter settings. It can be configured
for Disabled, Enabled for Read-Only User, Enable for Read/Write User.

Configuring Security

Security Page 450 Platform Family AP

The security page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 156

Table 39: Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 157

Attribute Meaning

Authentication Operators may use this field to select from among the following authentication
Mode modes:

Disabled: Tthe AP requires no SMs to authenticate. (Factory default).

Authentication Server: The AP/BHM requires any SM/BHS that attempts registration
to be authenticated in Wireless Manager before registration.

Chapter 1: Configuration 158

Attribute Meaning

AP PreShared Key: The AP/BHM acts as the authentication server to its SMs/BHS
and will make use of a user-configurable pre-shared authentication key. The
operator enters this key on both the AP/BHM and all SMs/BHS desired to register to
that AP/BHM. There is also an option of leaving the AP/BHM and SMs/BHS at their
default setting of using the “Default Key”. Due to the nature of the authentication
operation, if you want to set a specific authentication key, then you MUST configure
the key on all of the SMs/BHS and reboot them BEFORE enabling the key and option
on the AP/BHM. Otherwise, if you configure the AP/BHM first, none of the SMs/BHS
is able to register.

RADIUS AAA– When RADIUS AAA is selected, up to 3 Authentication Server

(RADIUS Server) IP addresses and Shared Secrets can be configured. The IP address
(s) configured here must match the IP address(s) of the RADIUS server(s). The
shared secret(s) configured here must match the shared secret(s) configured in the
RADIUS server(s). Servers 2 and 3 are meant for backup and reliability, not for
splitting the database. If Server 1 doesn’t respond, Server 2 is tried, and then server 3.
If Server 1 rejects authentication, the SM is denied entry to the network, and does not
progress trying the other servers.

Authentication The management DNS domain name may be toggled such that the name of the
Server DNS authentication server only needs to be specified and the DNS domain name is
Usage automatically appended to that name.

Authentication Enter the IP address or server name of the authentication server (RADIUS or WM)
Server 1 to 5 and the Shared Secret configured in the authentication server. When Authentication
Mode RADIUS AAA is selected, the default value of Shared Secret is
“CanopySharedSecret”. The Shared Secret may consist of up to 32 ASCII characters.

Radius Port This field allows the operator to configure a custom port for RADIUS server
communication. The default value is 1812.

Authentication This authentication key is a 32-character hexadecimal string used when

Key 128-bit Authentication Mode is set to AP PreShared Key. By default, this key is set to
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF.

Select Key 128- This option allows operators to choose which authentication key is used:
bit
Use Key above means that the key specified in Authentication Key is used for
authentication

Use Default Key means that a default key (based off the SM’s MAC address) is used
for authentication

Disable AES This option allows to disable the AES-128 encryption. When AES-128 Encryption is
128-bit disabled, it prevents the use of AES-128 when encryption is enabled. Since changes
to other attributes (e.g. PreSharedKey authentication settings) could cause a need
for 128-bit Auth and AES-128 upon next registration, Disable AES 128-bit parameter
is prevented from being changed on the “Security” webpage while the “Reboot
Required” warning is present at the top of the Web GUI pages. The recommendation
is to complete other changes first and to ensure that all links at an AP are running
AES-256 before disabling the use of AES-128 on all units (AP and SMs) in the sector.

Chapter 1: Configuration 159

Attribute Meaning

When saving and loading a configuration file, Disable AES 128 is saved and loaded as
a normal attribute. It will not take effect until a reboot is triggered. Since enabling
this attribute could have the effect of preventing a link coming up, care should be
taken on networks that enable this attribute on only some units.

Select one of the following options to either disable or use AES-128 encryption.

l AES-128 Encryption Disabled:

l AES-128 Encryption Available

Authentication This authentication key is a 64-character hexadecimal string used when

Key 256-bit Authentication Mode is set to AP PreShared Key. By default, this key is set to
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

FFFFFFFFFFF.

Note: The AES-256 parameters are visible only when the feature key is purchased.

Select Key 256- This option allows operators to choose which authentication key is used:
bit
Use Key above means that the key specified in Authentication Key is used for
authentication

Use Default Key means that a default key (based off of the SM’s MAC address) is
used for authentication

Note: The AES-256 parameters are visible only when the feature key is purchased.

Dynamic Enable CoA and Disconnect Message: Allows to control configuration parameters of
Authorization SM using RADIUS CoA and Disconnect Message feature.
Extensions for
Disable CoA and Disconnect Message: Disables RADIUS CoA and Disconnect
RADIUS
Message feature.

To enable CoA and Disconnect feature, the Authentication Mode should be set to
RADIUS AAA.

Bypass Enabled: SM authentication is disabled when SM connects via ICC (Installation Color
Authentication Code).
for ICC SMs
Disabled: SM authentication is enabled.

Encryption Specify the type of airlink security to apply to this AP. The encryption setting must
Setting match the encryption setting of the SMs.

None provides no encryption on the air link.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that

uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security.
AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

Note: This parameter is applicable to BHM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 160

Attribute Meaning

SM Display of Allows operators to suppress the display of data about this AP/BHM on the AP/BHM
AP Evaluation Evaluation tab of the Tools page in all SMs/BHS that register. The factory default
Data setting for SM Display of AP Evaluation Data or BHS Display of BHM Evaluation Data
is enabled display.
Or
PMP 450/450i Series – SM display of AP Evaluation Data parameter
BHS Display of
BHM Evaluation
Data

PTP 450/450i Series – BHS display of BHM Evaluation Data parameter

Web, Telnet, Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or ftp
FTP Session access to the AP/BHM.
Timeout

IP Access You can permit access to the AP/BHM from any IP address (IP Access Filtering
Control Disabled) or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you
specify (IP Access Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then
you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted from any IP address

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 1 to 3 you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted to the AP from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
three.

If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is permitted.

Web Access The Radio supports secured and non-secured web access protocols. Select suitable
web access from drop-down list:

l HTTP Only – provides non-secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
http://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTPS Only – provides a secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
https://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTP and HTTPS – If enabled, the radio can be accessed via both HTTP and
HTTPS.

SNMP This option allows to configure SNMP agent protocol version. It can be selected from
drop-down list:

l Disable SNMP - To disable SNMP agent.

l SNMPv2c Only – Enables SNMP v2c protocol.
l SNMPv3 Only – Enables SNMP v3 protocol. It is a secured communication
protocol.
l SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 – It enables both the protocols.

Chapter 1: Configuration 161

Attribute Meaning

Telnet This option allows to Enable and Disable Telnet access to the Radio.

FTP This option allows to Enable and Disable FTP access to the Radio.

TFTP This option allows to Enable and Disable TFTP access to the Radio.

NTP Server This option allows to Enable and Disable NTP server access to the Radio.

SSH Server This option allows to Enable and Diable SSH server access to the Radio. Once user is
logged in via SSH, the Command Line Interface (CLI) which is the same as Telnet will
be presented to user.

Cross-site Default: CSRF token is not added to HTTP POST requests.

Request
Disable: CSRF token is not added to HTTP POST requests.
Forgery (CSRF)
Protection Enable: CSRF token is added to HTTP POST requests.

Upload Users can import a certificate in PKCS12 format which contains a private key and
Certificate File certificate signed CA. Private key can be password protected and a password field is
also given to user while importing.

Certificate After successful import, the certificate information will be displayed

Site Information This option allows to Enable or Disable displaying site information with Guest users.
viewable to
Guest Users

Site Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module.

Site Contact Enter contact information for the module administrator.

Site Location Enter information about the physical location of the module.

Enable Security Enable: The Security Banner Notice will be displayed before login.
Banner during
Disable: The Security Banner Notice will not be displayed before login.
Login

Security Banner User can enter ASCII (0-9a-zA-Z newline, line-feed are allowed) text up-to 1300
Notice characters.

User must Enable: Login area (username and password) will be disabled unless user accepts
accept security the security banner.
banner before
Disable: User can’t login to radio without accepting security banner.
login

TLS 1.2 and 1.3

Software release 20.0 supports web server using TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 for HTTPS connections. Protocol
version will be selected after handshake.

User Certificate Import

Security page – 450 Platform Family BHM

The security page of AP/BHM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 162

Table 40: Security attributes –450 Platform Family BHM

Chapter 1: Configuration 163

Attribute Meaning

Authentication Mode Operators may use this field to select from among the following
authentication modes:

Authentication Required: the BHS requires to be authenticated.

Authentication Disabled: the BHM requires no BHS to authenticate.

(Factory default).

Authentication Key 128-bit Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter
details

24 Hour Encryption Refresh Operators may use this field to select from among the following
options:

Enabled: Allows BHS re-registration every 24 hours.

Disabled: Disables 24-hour encryption refresh.

This parameter is disabled by default.

Chapter 1: Configuration 164

 Attribute Meaning

Encryption Setting Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter
details
BHS Display of BHM Evaluation
Data

Web, Telnet, FTP Session

Timeout

IP Access Control

Allowed Source IP 1 to 3

Web Access

SNMP

Telnet

FTP

TFTP

NTP Server

Site Information viewable to Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter
Guest Users details

Site Name

Site Contact

Site Location

Enable Security Banner during

Login

Security Banner Notice

User must accept security

banner before login

Security page - 450 Platform Family SM

The security page of 450 Platform Family SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 165

Table 41: Security attributes –450 Platform Family SM

Chapter 1: Configuration 166

Chapter 1: Configuration 167
Attribute Meaning

Authentication Only if the AP to which this SM will register requires authentication, specify the 128-
Key 128-bit bit key that the SM will use when authenticating. For alpha characters in this 32-
character hex key, use only upper case.

Select Key 128- Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter details.
bit

Disable AES 128-

bit

Chapter 1: Configuration 168

Attribute Meaning

Authentication
Key 256-bit

Select Key 256-

bit

Enforce The SM may enforce authentication types of AAA and AP Pre-sharedKey. The SM
Authentication will not finish the registration process if the AP is not using the configured
authentication method (and the SM locks out the AP for 15 minutes).

Phase 1 The protocols supported for the Phase 1 (Outside Identity) phase of authentication
are EAPTTLS (Extensible Authentication Protocol Tunneled Transport Layer
Security) or MSCHAPv2 (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol
version 2).

Phase 2 Select the desired Phase 2 (Inside Identity) authentication protocol from the Phase 2
options of PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol), and MSCHAP (Microsoft’s version of CHAP, version 2 is
used). The protocol must be consistent with the authentication protocol configured
on the RADIUS server.

Identity/Realm If Realms are being used, select Enable Realm and configure an outer identity in the
Identity field and a Realm in the Realm field. These must match the Phase 1/Outer
Identity and Realm configured in the RADIUS server. The default Identity is
“anonymous”. The Identity can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings)
alphanumeric characters. The default Realm is “canopy.net”. The Realm can also be
up to 128 non-special alphanumeric characters.

Configure an outer Identity in the Username field. This must match the Phase 1/Outer
Identity username configured in the RADIUS server. The default Phase 1/Outer
Identity Username is “anonymous”. The Username can be up to 128 non-special (no
diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters.

Username Enter a Username for the SM. This must match the username configured for the SM
on the RADIUS server. The default Username is the SM’s MAC address. The
Username can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric
characters.

Password Enter the desired password for the SM in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
The Password must match the password configured for the SM on the RADIUS
server. The default Password is “password”. The Password can be up to 128 non-
special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters

Upload To upload a certificate manually to a SM, first load it in a known place on your PC or
Certificate File network drive, then click on a Delete button on one of the Certificate description
blocks to delete a certificate to provide space for your certificate. Click on Choose
File, browse to the location of the certificate, and click the Import Certificate button,
and then reboot the radio to use the new certificate.

When a certificate is in use, after the SM successfully registers to an AP, an indication

of In Use will appear in the description block of the certificate being used.

Chapter 1: Configuration 169

Attribute Meaning

The public certificates installed on the SMs are used with the private certificate on
the RADIUS server to provide a public/private key encryption system.

Up to 2 certificates can be resident on a SM. An installed certificate can be deleted

by clicking the Delete button in the certificate’s description block on the
Configuration > Security tab. To restore the 2 default certificates, click the Use
Default Certificates button in the RADIUS Certificate Settings parameter block and
reboot the radio.

Encryption Specify the type of airlink security to apply to this SM. The encryption setting must
Setting match the encryption setting of the AP.

None provides no encryption on the air link.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that

uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security.
AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

Web, Telnet, Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or
FTP Session FTP access to the SM.
Timeout

Ethernet Access If you want to prevent any device that is connected to the Ethernet port of the SM
from accessing the management interface of the SM, select Ethernet Access
Disabled. This selection disables access through this port to via HTTP (the GUI),
SNMP, telnet, FTP, and TFTP. With this selection, management access is available
through only the RF interface via either an IP address (if Network Accessibility is set
to Public on the SM) or the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab of the AP.

Note

This setting does not prevent a device connected to the Ethernet port
from accessing the management interface of other SMs in the network.
To prevent this, use the IP Access Filtering Enabled selection in the IP
Access Control parameter of the SMs in the network. See IP Access
Control below.

If you want to allow management access through the Ethernet port, select
Ethernet Access Enabled. This is the factory default setting for this parameter.

IP Access You can permit access to the SM from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
Control or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP
Access Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then you must
populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no access
permitted from any IP address

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 1 to 3 you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted to the SM from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
three.

Chapter 1: Configuration 170

Attribute Meaning

If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter,
then no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is
permitted.

A subnet mask may be defined for each entry to allow for filtering control based on a
range of IP addresses.

Web Access The Radio supports secured and non-secured web access protocols. Select suitable
web access from drop-down list:

l HTTP Only – provides non-secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
http://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTPS Only – provides a secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
https://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTP and HTTPS – If enabled, the radio can be accessed via both http and
https.

SNMP This option allows to configure SNMP agent protocol version. It can be selected from
drop-down list :

l Disable SNMP - To disable SNMP agent.

l SNMPv2c Only – Enables SNMP v2c protocol.
l SNMPv3 Only – Enables SNMP v3 protocol. It is secured communication
protocol.
l SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 – It enables both the protocols.

Telnet This option allows to Enable and Disable Telnet access to the Radio.

FTP This option allows to Enable and Disable FTP access to the Radio.

TFTP This option allows to Enable and Disable TFTP access to the Radio.

Site Information This option allows to Enable or Disable displaying site information with Guest users.
viewable to
Guest Users

Site Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module.

Site Contact Enter contact information for the module administrator.

Site Location Enter information about the physical location of the module.

Enable Security Enable: The Security Banner Notice will be displayed before login.
Banner during
Disable: The Security Banner Notice will not be displayed before login.
Login

Security Banner User can enter ASCII (0-9a-zA-Z newline, line-feed are allowed) text up-to 1300
Notice characters.

User must Enable: login area (username and password) will be disabled unless user accepts the
accept security security banner.
banner before
Disable: User can’t login to radio without accepting security banner.
login

Chapter 1: Configuration 171

Security page –450 Platform Family BHS
The Security page of 450 Platform Family BHS is explained in below table.

Table 42: Security attributes - 450 Platform Family BHS

Chapter 1: Configuration 172

Attribute Meaning

Authentication Only if the BHM to which this BHS registers requires an authentication, specify the
Key key that the BHS will use when authenticating. For alpha characters in this hex key,
use only upper case.

Chapter 1: Configuration 173

Attribute Meaning

Disable AES Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter details.
128-bit

Authentication
Key 256-bit

Web, Telnet, Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or
FTP Session FTP access to the BHS.
Timeout

IP Access You can permit access to the BHS from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
Control or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP
Access Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then you must
populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no access
permitted from any IP address

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 1 to 3 you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted to the BHS from any IP address. You may populate as many as
all three.

If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is permitted.

A subnet mask may be defined for each entry to allow for filtering control based on a
range of IP addresses.

Web Access The Radio supports secured and non-secured web access protocols. Select suitable
web access from drop-down list:

l HTTP Only – provides non-secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
http://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTPS Only – provides a secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
https://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTP and HTTPS – If enabled, the radio can be accessed via both http and
https.

SNMP This option allows to configure SNMP agent protocol version. It can be selected from
drop-down list:

l Disable SNMP - To disable SNMP agent.

l SNMPv2c Only – Enables SNMP v2c protocol.
l SNMPv3 Only – Enables SNMP v3 protocol. It is secured communication
protocol.
l SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 – It enables both the protocols.

Telnet This option allows to Enable and Disable Telnet access to the Radio.

FTP This option allows to Enable and Disable FTP access to the Radio.

TFTP This option allows to Enable and Disable TFTP access to the Radio.

Chapter 1: Configuration 174

 Attribute Meaning

Site Information Refer Security attributes –450 Platform Family AP for parameter details.
viewable to
Guest Users

Site Name

Site Contact

Site Location

Enable Security
Banner during
Login

Security Banner
Notice

User must
accept security
banner before
login

Configuring 802.1X authentication

IEEE 802.1x standard defines a client and server-based access control and authentication protocol. This
protocol restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports.

The authentication server authenticates each client connected to SM's ethernet port and enables the port
before making available any services offered by the SM, AP, and the network. Until the client is
authenticated, 802.1x access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPoL)
traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic
can pass through the port.

Two types of authentication mode are supported:

l Port based authentication: This mode needs to be used when single host is connected to the SM. If
the authentication is successful by the host connected to the SM, SM port is enabled, and all traffic
will pass through.
l MAC Address Based Authentication: This mode needs to be used when multiple hosts are
connected to the SM. Each host needs to be authenticated by 802.1X protocol to access the
network. The traffic is filtered based on the source MAC Address of the host, only the traffic from
authenticated host will be allowed to access the network.

802.1X authentication page of AP

The 802.1X Authentication page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 175

Table 43: 802.1X authentication attributes –450 Platform Family AP

Attribute Meaning

802.1X This parameter is used to enable or disable 802.1Xauthentication. It is disabled by

Authentication default.

802.1X This parameter is enabled when server address is in fully qualified domain name
Authentication format.
Server DNS Usage

Shared Secret This parameter specifies the the shared secret which is configured for this client on
RADIUS server. Maximum length of this parameter is 32 characters.

802.1X This parameter specifies either a dotted decimal notation (IP address) or fully
Authentication qualified domain name (www.google.com). Maximum length of this parameter is
Server 256 characters.

802.1x authentication page of SM

The 802.1X Authentication page of SM is explained in below table.

Table 44: 802.1X authentication attributes –450 Platform Family SM

Attribute Meaning

802.1x Bridging This parameter specifies the bridging mode used by SM. It is disabled by default.
Mode
Following are the available options for this parameter.

l Disable 802.1x: Disable 802.1x authentication.

l Require 802.1x for all traffic: 802.1x authentication should be successful for
any traffic to pass through the SM (i.e. Authenticator).
l Require 802.1x for all non-management traffic: Management traffic will be
allowed to pass through the SM without 802.1x Authentication.

802.1x This parameter specifies the authentication mode used by SM.

Authentication
Mode l Port Based Authentication: SM port is activated once the 802.1x
authentication is successful. This configuration needs to be used when single

Chapter 1: Configuration 176

Attribute Meaning

host is connected behind SM. If authentication is successful, SM port is

enabled, and all traffic will pass through.
l MAC Address Based Authentication: This option needs to be used when
multiple hosts are connected behind an SM. Each host needs to be
authenticated by 802.1x protocol to access the network. The traffic is filtered
based on the source MAC address of the host, only the traffic from
authenticated host will be allowed to access the network.

802.1x VLAN This parameter specifies the number of VLAN configurations. It ranges from 1 to
(Range : 1 — 4094.
4094)
VLAN configuration is used for sending 802.1x packet on the configured VLAN. If a
customer excepts EAPoL packets on a VLAN, customer needs to configure the
VLAN. Once VLAN is configured, all EAPoL packets are exchanged on the
configured VLAN. VLAN 1 is the default configuration which is equivalent to
untagged traffic.

Configuring radio parameters

l PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

l PMP/PTP 450i Series – Configuring Radio

l PMP/PTP 450b Series - configuring radio

l PMP/PTP 450 Series – configuring radio

l Custom Frequencies page

l DFS for 5 GHz Radios

l MIMO-A mode of operation

l Improved PPS performance of 450 Platform Family

PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Radio page - PMP 450m AP 5 GHz
The Radio tab of the PMP 450m AP contains some of the configurable parameters that define how an AP
operates.

Note

Only the frequencies available for your region and the selected Channel
bandwidth are displayed.

Chapter 1: Configuration 177

Table 45: PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Frequency Band Select the desired operating frequency band.

Frequency Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this parameter is
Carrier None. For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list on the radio GUI.

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel
Bandwidth bandwidth must match between the AP and the SM. The supported Channel
Bandwidths are 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, 30 MHz, and 40 MHz.

Chapter 1: Configuration 178

Attribute Meaning

Note:

40 MHz is not supported on PMP 450 AP, but is supported on PMP 450
SMs.

Frame Period Select the Frame Period of the radio. The supported Frame Periods are:

5 ms and 2.5 ms.

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot)
is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of
throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

Color Code Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and
the AP must match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a
management feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the
SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code value
is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

Subscriber This timer may be utilized to initiate SM rescans in order to register to an AP

Color Code configured with the SM‘s primary color code.
Rescan (When
The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan (if this AP is not configured with the
not on a Primary
SM‘s primary color code). This timer will only fire once – if the Subscriber Color Code
Color Code)
Wait Period for Idle timer is configured with a nonzero value and the Subscriber
Color Code Rescan expires, the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle is started.
If the Subscriber Color Code Wait Period for Idle timer is configured with a zero
value and the Subscriber Color Code Rescan timer expires, the SM will immediately
go into rescan mode

Subscriber The time (in minutes) for a subscriber to rescan while idle (if this AP is not
Color Code configured with the SM’s primary color code). This timer will fire periodic events. The
Wait Period for fired event determines if any RF unicast traffic (either inbound or outbound) has
Idle occurred since the last event. If the results of the event determine that no RF unicast
traffic has occurred (SM is idle), then the subscriber will rescan.

Installation With this feature enabled on the AP and SM, operators may install and remotely
Color Code configure SMs without having to configure matching color codes between the
modules. While the SM is accessible for configuration from above the AP (for remote
provisioning) and below the SM (for local site provisioning), no user data is passed
over the radio link. When using the Installation Color Code feature, ensure that the
SM is configured with the factory default Color Code configuration (Color Code 1 is
“0”, Color Code 2-10 set to “0” and “Disable”). The status of the Installation Color
Code can be viewed on the AP Eval web GUI page, and when the SM is registered
using the Installation Color Code the message “SM is registered via ICC – Bridging
Disabled!” is displayed in red on every SM GUI page. The Installation Color Code
parameter is configurable without a radio reboot for both the AP and SM. If a SM is
registered via Installation Color Code and the feature is then disabled, operators will
need to reboot the SM or force it to reregister (i.e. using Rescan APs functionality on
the AP Eval page).

Chapter 1: Configuration 179

Attribute Meaning

Sector ID This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Sector ID at a configurable value from
0 to 15.

MIMO Rate This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Rate Adapt Algorithm to MIMO-A/B,
Adapt MIMO-B only, or MIMO-A only.
Algorithm

Downlink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate at
Maximum a configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The
Modulation Rate Rate Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.

Uplink Maximum This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Modulation Rate configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 6X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.

Max Range Enter the number of miles or kilometers for the furthest distance from which a SM is
allowed to register to this AP. Do not set the distance to any greater number of
miles. A greater distance

l does not increase the power of transmission from the AP.

l can reduce aggregate throughput.

For example, with a 20 MHz channel and 2.5 ms frame, every additional 2.24 miles
reduces the data air time by one symbol (around 1% of the frame).

Regardless of this distance, the SM must meet the minimum requirements for an
acceptable link. The parameters have to be selected so that there is no overlap
between one AP transmitting and another AP receiving. A co-location tool is
provided to help with selecting sets of parameters that allow co-location.

The default value of this parameter is 2 miles (3.2 km).

Downlink Data Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (data
transmitted from the AP to the subscriber). For example, if the aggregate (uplink
and downlink total) throughput on the AP is 90 Mb, then 75% specified for this
parameter allocates 67.5 Mb for the downlink and 22.5 Mb for the uplink. The default
for this parameter is 75%.

For 5 GHz APs or 3 GHz AP that has the Co-located Frame Configuration Option
disabled, this parameter must be set in the range of 15% - 85%, otherwise, the invalid
input is not accepted and the previously-entered valid setting is used.

For 3 GHz APs that have the Co-located Frame Configuration Option enabled, this
allowed range is further restricted to the range that avoids interference/overlap with
the nearby LTE or 5G-NR sectors.

Note

In order to prevent self-interference, the frame configuration needs to

align which includes Downlink Data, Max Range and Contention slots.
For DFS regions, the maximum Downlink % for a 5.4 GHz radio is 75%
only.

Chapter 1: Configuration 180

Attribute Meaning

Contention This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention slots configured by the
Slots operator. The SM uses reserved Contention slots and unused data slots for
bandwidth requests. See Contention slots on page Contention slots.

Broadcast For PMP systems broadcast packets are not acknowledged. So, they are sent at the
Repeat Count lowest modulation rate 1X. This setting adds an automatic retransmission to
broadcast packets to give SMs that have poor signal a higher chance to get the
packet.

EIRP This field indicates the combined power level at which the AP will transmit, based on
the Country Code. It also includes the antenna gain and array gain.

SM Receive Each SM’s Transmitter Output Power is automatically set by the AP. The AP monitors
Target Level the received power from each SM, and adjusts each SM’s Transmitter Output Power
so that the received power at the AP from that SM is not greater what is set in this
field. This value represents the transmitted and received power (combined power)
perceived on the SM.

Adjacent For some frequency bands and products, this setting is needed if AP is operating on
Channel adjacent channels with zero guard band.
Support

Multicast Data This pull-down menu of the Multicast Data Control screen helps in configuring
Channel multicast packets to be transmitted over a dedicated channel at a configurable rate
of 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X or 6X. The default value is “Disable”. If set to the default value, all
multicast packets are transmitted over the Broadcast VC data path.

Multicast This value is the number of packets that are repeated for every multicast VC packet
Repeat Count received on the AP (located under Radio tab of Configuration). Multicast (like
Broadcast) packets go over a VC that is shared by all SMs, so there is no guaranteed
delivery. The repeat count is an attempt to improve the odds of the packets getting
over the link. If the user has issues with packets getting dropped, they can use this
parameter to improve the performance at the cost of the overall throughput possible
on that channel. The default value is 0.

Multicast This value is the committed information rate for the multicast downlink VC (located
Downlink CIR under the Radio tab of Configuration). The default value is 0 kbps. The range of this
parameter is based on the number of repeat counts. The higher the repeat count, the
lower the range for the multicast downlink CIR.

SM Registration This parameter allows to configure the limit for maximum number of SMs that can
Limit register to a PMP AP. The configurable range is from 1 to 238.

Note

SM trying to register after the maximum configured limit has been

reached is locked out for 15 minutes and a message is displayed at the
SM.

Receive Quality To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number of
Debug fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per channel
(polarization).

Chapter 1: Configuration 181

Attribute Meaning

Note

Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second
processing.

SM Link Test Set to Enabled to allow only SM initiated link tests that pass user traffic.
Mode
Set to Disabled to allow all SM initiated link tests.
Restriction

Force Channel Enabling this parameter forces channel reassessment for all registered SMs. This is
Reassessment generally used for demonstrations and other engineering purposes.

Near Field This parameter enables operation in the near field. This is only available when the
Operation EIRP is set to 22 dBm or below.

Near Filed When Near Field Operation is enabled, the Near Field Range is used to apply
Range compensation to the unit’s calibration to support operation in the near field.

Chapter 1: Configuration 182

Radio page - PMP 450m AP 3 GHz
Figure 28: PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 3 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 183

Attribute Meaning

Frequency Band Refer PMP 450m Series – configuring radiofor parameter details

Frequency Carrier

Channel Bandwidth

Frame Period

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Subscriber Color Code Rescan

(When not on a Primary Color
Code)

Subscriber Color Code Wait

Period for Idle

Installation Color Code

Sector ID

MIMO Rate Adapt Algorithm

Downlink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum Modulation

Rate

Max Range

Downlink Data

Contention Slots (a.k.a.

Control Slots)

Broadcast Repeat Count

Co-located Frame If this 3 GHz sector is operating near other LTE sectors or other 5G-NR
Configuration Option sectors on the same channel, it is important to enable this colocation
option. This will time shift the PMP frame start to in alignment with the
LTE or 5G-NR sector operating in the area. The particular LTE or 5G-
NR configurations that Cambium can colocate with are as follows:

l For 2.5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with 5G-NR

configuration DDDSU is possible

l For 5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with 5G-NR configuration

DDDSUUDDDD is possible (shown on the GUI selection as
DDDDDDDSUU). The proper number of RF-NR Guard Symbols
needs to be selected then also.

Chapter 1: Configuration 184

Attribute Meaning

l For 5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with LTE frame

configurations 0, 1, and 2 is possible. The special subframe and
cyclic prefix configurations need to be selected as well.

l Two more detailed technical documents describing co-location

between Cambium Networks PMP sectors, LTE, and 5G-NR
sectors can be found here:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/colocationtool/

EIRP Refer PMP 450m Series – configuring radiofor parameter details

SM Receive Target Level

Adjacent Channel Support

Multicast Data Channel

Multicast Repeat Count

Multicast Downlink CIR

SM Registration Limit

Receive Quality Debug

SM Link Test Mode Restriction

Force Channel Reassessment

Near Field Operation

Note

APs that were already configured for co-location prior to System Release 22.0 upgrade see
their cyclic prefix defaulted to Normal and the S Frame Configuration defaulted to 7. This
should be checked and changed as needed. Note that there is also a slight possibility that
the downlink data percentage might be auto-adjusted based on this SSF value of 7 to an
undesired value. This should also be checked and adjusted as needed. These corrections can
be done directly on the AP. If a large number of sectors need to be adjusted, a small
configuration template can be pushed from cnMaestro. A zip file containing 4 sample
templates can be found on the Cambium Networks support site:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450

This zip file contains, in addition to a template that corrects just the special subframe after
the upgrade, a template to enable co-location and set the special subframe configuration
after the upgrade, a template to enable co-location prior to the upgrade, and a template to
disable/backout co-location.

PMP/PTP 450i Series – Configuring Radio

Radio page - PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP 5 GHz
The Radio tab of the PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP contains some of the configurable
parameters that define how an AP operates.

Chapter 1: Configuration 185

Table 46: PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 186

Attribute Meaning

Device Setting To configure the radio as an Access Point, select AP.

To configure the radio as a Subscriber Module, select SM.

Frequency Band See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Frequency Carrier

Alternate Whenever the radio detects a radar pulse in either Channel Availability Check or
Frequency Carrier In-Service Monitoring Modes on carrier frequency it moves the operation to a
1 and 2 frequency configured as Alternate Frequency Carrier 1. If the radio detects a radar
pulse on Alternate Frequency Carrier 1, it moves the operation to a frequency
configured as Alternate Frequency Carrier 2. If the radio detects a radar pulse on
Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 it moves the operation back to carrier frequency.
So, there are three options in round-robin formation.

These parameters are displayed based on Regional Settings. Refer Country

Channel See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Bandwidth

Frame Period

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Subscriber Color
Code Rescan
(When not on a
Primary Color
Code)

Subscriber Color
Code Wait Period
for Idle

Installation Color
Code

Sector ID

MIMO Rate Adapt See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Algorithm

Downlink
Maximum
Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Nomadic Mode Allows the movement of SMs within a sector. A feature key is required to enable
this feature at the AP. This mode must also be enabled for the subset of SMs that
an operator wishes to use with this mode.

Chapter 1: Configuration 187

Attribute Meaning

Max Range 450 MicroPoP has a limit of 2 miles.

To unlock from MicroPoP to MicroPoP Unlimited, a feature key must be purchased

to remove this limitation.

Downlink Data See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Contention Slots This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention slots configured by the
(a.k.a. Control operator. The SM uses reserved Contention slots and unused data slots for
Slots) bandwidth requests. See Contention slots

Auto Contention This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable Auto Contention.

Broadcast Repeat The default is 2 repeats (in addition to the original broadcast packet, for a total of
Count 3 packets sent for everyone needed), and is settable to 1 or 0 repeats (2 or 1
packets for every broadcast).

ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) is not present in downlink broadcast packets,

since it can cause unnecessary uplink traffic from every SM for each broadcast
packet. For successful transport without ARQ, the AP repeats downlink broadcast
packets. The SMs filter out all repeated broadcast packets and, thus, do not
transport further.

The default of 2 repeats is optimum for typical uses of the network as an internet
access system. In applications with heavy download broadcast such as video
distribution, overall throughput is significantly improved by setting the repeat
count to 1 or 0. This avoids flooding the downlink with repeat broadcast packets.

Transmit Power This value represents the combined power of the AP’s two transmitters.

Nations and regions may regulate transmitter output power. For example

l 900 MHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz modules are available as connectorized
radios, which require the operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory
compliance.

The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to

l maintain awareness of applicable regulations.

l calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module.
l confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or regional
regulations.
l confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the
module to factory defaults.

External Gain This value needs to correspond to the published gain of the antenna used to
ensure the radio will meet regulatory requirements.

SM Receive Target See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Level

Adjacent Channel For some frequency bands and products, this setting is needed if AP is operating
Support on adjacent channels with zero guard band.

Chapter 1: Configuration 188

Attribute Meaning

Multicast Data This pull-down menu of the Multicast Data Control screen helps in configuring
Channel multicast packets to be transmitted over a dedicated channel at a configurable
rate of 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X or 6X. The default value is “Disable”. If set to the default
value, all multicast packets are transmitted over the Broadcast VC data path.

Multicast Repeat This value is the number of packets that are repeated for every multicast VC
Count packet received on the AP (located under Radio tab of Configuration). Multicast
(like Broadcast) packets go over a VC that is shared by all SMs, so there is no
guaranteed delivery. The repeat count is an attempt to improve the odds of the
packets getting over the link. If the user has issues with packets getting dropped,
they can use this parameter to improve the performance at the cost of the overall
throughput possible on that channel. The default value is 0.

Multicast This value is the committed information rate for the multicast downlink VC
Downlink CIR (located under the Radio tab of Configuration). The default value is 0 kbps. The
range of this parameter is based on the number of repeat counts. The higher the
repeat count, the lower the range for the multicast downlink CIR.

SM Registration This parameter allows to configure the limit for maximum number of SMs that can
Limit register to a PMP AP. The configurable range is from 1 to 238.

450 MicroPoP has a limit of 20 SMs. To unlock from MicroPoP to MicroPoP

Unlimited, a feature key must be purchased to remove this limitation.

Note

SM trying to register after the maximum configured limit has been

reached is locked out for 15 minutes and a message is displayed at
the SM.

SM Registration All: This field allows to control registration of all type 450 Platform Family SM
including 450 Series SM (450i/450b/450/430) or 450i Series SM.

450i Only: This field allows to control registration of 450i Series SM only

Receive Quality To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number of
Debug fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM) and per channel
(polarization).

Note

Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second
processing.

Frame Alignment Mode Behavior (non-900 MHz radios) Behavior (FSK 900 MHz radios)
Legacy Mode
OFF By default, frame start is aligned By default, frame start is aligned
with devices with Timing Port with FSK 900 MHz devices with
synchronization Timing Port synchronization

Chapter 1: Configuration 189

Attribute Meaning

Mode Behavior (non-900 MHz radios) Behavior (FSK 900 MHz radios)

If the synchronization source If the synchronization source

changes (due to Autosync or changes (due to Autosync or
otherwise) the radio will otherwise) the radio will
dynamically adjust its frame start dynamically adjust its frame start
to maintain alignment with the to maintain alignment with the
default frame start timing default frame start timing

ON The radio will align with devices The radio will align with FSK 900
running software versions from MHz devices running software
(Mode
12.0 to 13.4. versions from 12.0 to 13.4.
1)

ON N/A The radio will align with FSK 900

MHz devices with software
(Mode
versions 11.2 or older.
2)

SM Link Test Mode Set to Enabled to allow only SM initiated link tests that pass user traffic.
Restriction
Set to Disabled to allow all SM initiated link tests.

Radio page - PMP 450i AP 3 GHz

The Radio tab of the PMP 450i AP 3 GHz is shown in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 190

Figure 29: PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 3 GHz

Note

Refer PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz and
PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz for parameter details.

Chapter 1: Configuration 191

 Note

Only the frequencies available for your region and the selected Channel
bandwidth are displayed.

Radio page - PMP 450i AP 900 MHz

The Radio tab of the PMP 450i AP 900 MHz is described in below table.

Table 47: PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 900 MHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 192

Attribute Meaning

Device To configure the radio as an Access Point, select AP.

Setting
To configure the radio as a Subscriber Module, select SM.

Frequency Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this parameter is
Carrier None. For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list on the radio GUI.

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel
Bandwidth bandwidth must match between the AP and the SM. The supported Channel
Bandwidths are 5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz.

Frame Period Refer PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for parameter details

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Subscriber
Color Code
Rescan
(When not on
a Primary
Color Code)

Subscriber
Color Code
Wait Period
for Idle

Installation
Color Code

Sector ID

MIMO Rate
Adapt
Algorithm

Downlink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate

Chapter 1: Configuration 193

Attribute Meaning

Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Uplink This pull- down menu helps in configuring the Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Nomadic Allows the movement of SMs within a sector. A feature key is required to enable this
Mode feature at the AP. This mode must also be enabled for the subset of SMs that an
operator wishes to use with this mode.

Max Range Refer PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for parameter details

Downlink
Data

Contention
Slot (a.k.a.
Control Slots)

Auto
Contention

Broadcast
Repeat Count

Transmitter
Output
Power

External Gain

SM Receive
Target Level

Multicast Refer Radio page - PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP 5 GHz for parameter
Data Channel details

Multicast Refer PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for parameter details
Repeat Count

Multicast
Downlink CIR

SM
Registration
Limit

Receive
Quality
Debug

Pager Reject In 900 MHz, Pager Reject filter is placed on the AP to block Pager signals which could
Filter cause interference to the whole band. The Pager signals typically operate in the 928-

Chapter 1: Configuration 194

Attribute Meaning

930 frequency range. When the filter is enabled, the signals of 920 MHz and above are
attenuated which enables better reception of signals in the rest of the band. Note that
the AP/SM should not be configured on the frequencies of 920 MHz and above when
this filter is enabled.

Frame Refer PMP 450m AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for parameter details
Alignment
Legacy Mode

SM Link Test
Mode
Restriction

Radio page – PMP 450i SM 5 GHz

The Radio page of PMP 450i SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 195

Table 48: PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 196

Chapter 1: Configuration 197
Attribute Meaning

Custom Check the frequencies that SM has to scan for AP transmissions. See Radio Frequency
Radio Scan Selection List
Frequency
Scan
Selection
List

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.

Bandwidth
Scan Note

Selecting multiple channel bandwidths will increase registration and re-

registration times.

Cyclic Prefix The cyclic prefix for which AP scanning is executed.

AP Selection Operators may configure the method by which a scanning SM selects an AP. By default,
Method AP Selection Method is set to “Optimize for Throughput”, which has been the mode of
operation in releases prior to 12.0.3.1.

Power Level: AP selection based solely on power level

Chapter 1: Configuration 198

Attribute Meaning

Note

For operation with a PMP 450m AP, select the Power Level option

or

Optimize for Throughput: AP selection based on throughput optimization – the selection

decision is based on power level (which affects the modulation state), channel
bandwidth (which affects throughput) and number of SM registrations to the AP (which
affects system contention performance).

Color Code 1 Color code allows you to force the SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the
SM can communicate with multiple APs. For registration to occur, the color code of the
SM and the AP must match. Specify a value from 0 to 254.

Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature,
typically for assigning each sector a different color code. The default setting for the
color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color
codes).

SMs may be configured with up to 20 color codes. These color codes can be tagged as
Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary, or Disable. When the SM is scanning for APs, it will first
attempt to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s primary color codes. Failing
that, the SM will continue scanning and attempt to register to an AP that matches one of
the SM’s secondary color codes. Failing that, the SM will continue scanning and attempt
to register to an AP that matches one of the SM’s tertiary color codes. This is all done in
the scanning mode of the SM and will repeat until a registration has occurred.

Color codes in the same priority group are treated equally. For example, all APs
matching one of the SM’s primary color codes are analyzed equally. Likewise, this
evaluation is done for the secondary and tertiary groups in order. The analysis for
selecting an AP within a priority group is based on various inputs, including signal
strength and number of SMs already registered to each AP.

The first color code in the configuration is the pre-Release 9.5 color code. Thus, it is
always a primary color code for legacy reasons.

The color codes can be disabled, with the exception of the first color code.

Installation With this feature enabled on the AP and SM, operators may install and remotely
Color Code configure SMs without having to configure matching color codes between the modules.
When using the Installation Color Code feature, ensure that the SM is configured with
the factory default Color Code configuration (Color Code 1 is “0”, Color Code 2-10 set to
“0” and “Disable”). The status of the Installation Color Code can be viewed on the AP
Eval web GUI page, and when the SM is registered using the Installation Color Code the
message “SM is registered via ICC – Bridging Disabled!” is displayed in red on every SM
GUI page. The Installation Color Code parameter is configurable without a radio reboot
for both the AP and SM.

Large Data SM and BH have a configurable option used to prevent packet loss in the uplink due to
Channel bursting IP traffic. This is designed for IP burst traffic particular to video surveillance
data Q applications.

Chapter 1: Configuration 199

Attribute Meaning

Color Code The Color Code parameter in the Additional Color Codes section allows additional
primary, secondary or tertiary color codes to be configured or disabled on the SM. Refer
to Color Code 1 above for full details.

MIMO Rate This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Rate Adapt Algorithm to MIMO-A/B,
Adapt MIMO-B only, or MIMO-A only.
Algorithm

Downlink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 6X, or 8X. The default value is “8X”.
Modulation
Rate

Uplink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 6X, or 8X. The default value is “8X”.
Modulation
Rate

Nomadic Allows the movement of SMs within a sector. A feature key is required to enable this
Mode feature at the AP. This mode must also be enabled for the subset of SMs that an
operator wishes to use with this mode.

External This value represents the antenna gain.

Gain
For ODUs with integrated antenna, this is set at the correct value in the factory.

For Connectorized ODUs with external antenna, the user must set this value to the
overall antenna gain, including any RF cable loss between the ODU and the antenna.

Enable Max This field allows to enable or disable maximum transmission power.
Tx Power

Reference This parameter records the reference downlink EVM (Error Vector Maginitude). This
Downlink value is used to calculate the downlink LQI when the AP is configured to use the EVM-
EVM based Link Quality Metric.

The reference value can be entered manually by the user or set to the current measured
value by clicking the Populate EVM button.

Current Displays the current measured downlink EVM.

Downlink
EVM

Reference This parameter records the reference uplink EVM. This value is used to calculate the
Uplink EVM uplink LQI when the AP is configured to use the EVM-based Link Quality Metric.

The reference value can be entered manually by the user or set to the current measured
value by clicking the Populate EVM button.

Current Displays the current measured uplink EVM (Error Vector Magnitude).
Uplink EVM

Access Point Displays the MAC address of the AP that the SM was registered to when the Reference
MAC Downlink EVM and Reference Uplink EVM values were set.
Address

Chapter 1: Configuration 200

Attribute Meaning

Channel Displays the channel frequency that the SM was using when the Reference EVM values
Frequency were set.

Channel Displays the channel bandwidth that the SM was using when the Reference EVM values
Bandwidth were set.

Receive To aid in link performance monitoring, the AP and SM now report the number of
Quality fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 8-QAM, 16-QAM, 32 -QAM, 64-QAM and
Debug 128-QAM) and per channel (polarization).

Note

Due to CPU load, this will slightly degrade packet per second processing.

Note

The frequencies that a user can select are controlled by the country or a region
and the Channel Bandwidth selected. There can be a case where a user adds a
custom frequency (from the Custom Frequencies page on page Custom
Frequencies page ) and cannot see it in the pull down menu.

Radio page - PMP 450i SM 3 GHz

The Radio tab of the PMP 450i SM 3 GHz is shown in below table.

Table 54 PMP 450i SM Radio attributes - 3 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 201

Chapter 1: Configuration 202
 Note

Refer PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz for parameter details.

Radio page - PTP 450i BHM 5 GHz

The Radio page of PTP 450i BHM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 203

Table 49: PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Link Mode For point-to-point operation (PTP), select Backhaul.

For point-to-multipoint operation (PMP), select Multipoint.

Timing Mode For backhaul master (BHM), select Timing Master.

Chapter 1: Configuration 204

Attribute Meaning

For backhaul slave (BHS), select Timing Slave.

Frequency Select the operating frequency band of the radio. The supported bands are 4.9 GHz, 5.4
Band GHz and 5.7 GHz.

Frequency Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this parameter is
Carrier None. For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list on the radio GUI.

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel
Bandwidth bandwidth must match between the BHM and the BHS.

Frame Period Select the Frame Period of the radio. The supported Frame Periods are: 5 ms and 2.5
ms.

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is
repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of
throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

Color Code Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the BHM and
the BHS must match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a
management feature, typically for assigning each link a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a BHS to register to only a specific BHM. The default
setting for the color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all
255 color codes).

Sector ID This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Sector ID at a configurable value from 0
to 15.

Large Data Enable Large Data Channel data Q for applications that burst data high rates. Large Qs
Channel data may decrease effective throughput for TCP application.
Q Disable Large Data Channel data Q if application need not handle bursts of data. Large
Qs may decrease effective throughput for TCP application.

MIMO Rate This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Rate Adapt Algorithm to MIMO-A/B,
Adapt MIMO-B only, or MIMO-A only.
Algorithm

Downlink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Uplink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Minimum This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Minimum Modulation Rate at a
Modulation configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “1X”. If the Rate
Rate Adapt Algorithm is below this limit, then bridging is disabled. This is used if PTP
network can route the traffic through another path.

Nomadic Enabling of nomadic mode allows movement of SM's within a sector. A feature key is

Chapter 1: Configuration 205

Attribute Meaning

Mode required to enable this at the AP. This mode must also be enabled for the subset of SM's
that an operator wishes to use with this mode.

Downlink Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames
Data transmitted from the BHM to the subscriber). For example, if the aggregate (uplink and
downlink total) throughput on the BHM is 132 Mbps, then 75% specified for this
parameter allocates 99 Mbps for the downlink and 33 Mbps for the uplink. The default
for this parameter is 50%. This parameter must be set in the range of 15% - 85%,
otherwise the invalid input will not be accepted and the previously-entered valid setting
is used.

Note

In order to prevent self-interference, the frame configuration needs to

align. This includes Downlink Data, Max Range and Contention slots.

Transmit This value represents the combined power of the BHM’s two transmitters.
Power
Nations and regions may regulate transmit power. For example

l PTP 450i Series modules are available as connectorized radios, which require the
operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance.

The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to:

l Maintain awareness of applicable regulations.

l Calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module.
l Confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or regional
regulations.

Confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the module to factory
defaults.

External Gain This value needs to correspond to the published gain of the antenna used to ensure the
radio will meet regulatory requirements.

BHS TX When enabled, BHM controls the transmit power of BHS.

Power
When Disabled, BHS tranmit power is independent of BHM.
Control

BHS Receive The BHM monitors the received power from BHS, and adjusts each BHS’s Transmitter
Target Level Output Power so that the received power at the BHM from that BHS is not greater what
is set in this field. This value represents the transmitted and received power (combined
power) perceived on the BHS.

Receive To aid in link performance monitoring, the BHM and BHS now report the number of
Quality fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM) and per
Debug channel (polarization).

Note

Due to CPU load, this slightly degrades the packet during per second
processing.

Chapter 1: Configuration 206

Attribute Meaning

Frame See PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz
Alignment
Legacy Mode

Radio page – PTP 450i BHS 5 GHz

The Radio page of PTP 450i BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 207

Table 50: PTP 450i BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 208

Chapter 1: Configuration 209
Attribute Meaning

Link Mode For point-to-point operation (PTP), select Backhaul.

For point-to-multipoint operation (PMP), select Multipoint.

Timing Mode For backhaul master (BHM), select Timing Master.

For backhaul slave (BHS), select Timing Slave.

Custom Check any frequency that you want the BHS to scan for BHM transmissions. See Radio
Radio Frequency Scan Selection List
Frequency
Scan
Selection
List

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.

Bandwidth
Scan Note

Selecting multiple channel bandwidths will increase registration and re-

registration times.

Cyclic Prefix The cyclic prefix for which BHM scanning is executed.

Color Code Color code allows to force the BHS to register to only a specific BHM, even where the
BHS can communicate with multiple BHMs. For registration to occur, the color code of
the BHS and the BHM must match. Specify a value from 0 to 254.

Only one color code can be configured on the BHS.

Large Data BHM and BHS have a configurable option used to prevent packet loss in the uplink due
Channel to bursting IP traffic. This is designed for IP burst traffic particular to video surveillance
data Q applications.

MIMO Rate This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Rate Adapt Algorithm to MIMO-A/B,
Adapt MIMO-B only, or MIMO-A only.
Algorithm

Downlink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Uplink This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate at a
Maximum configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “8X”. The Rate
Modulation Adapt Algorithm does not allow the modulation to go beyond this limit.
Rate

Minimum This pull-down menu helps in configuring the Minimum Modulation Rate at a
Modulation configurable rate of 1X, 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X or 8X. The default value is “1X”. If the Rate
Rate Adapt Algorithm is below this limit, then bridging is disabled. This is used if PTP network
can route the traffic through another path.

Nomadic Allows the movement of SMs within a sector. A feature key is required to enable this
Mode feature at the AP. This mode must also be enabled for the subset of SMs that an
operator wishes to use with this mode.

Chapter 1: Configuration 210

Attribute Meaning

Transmit Refer PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz

Power

External
Gain

Reference
Downlink
EVM

Current
Downlink
EVM
Refer PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz.
Reference
Uplink EVM

Current
Uplink EVM

Access Point
MAC
Address

Channel
Frequency

Channel
Bandwidth

Receive To aid in link performance monitoring, the BHM and BHS now report the number of
Quality fragments received per modulation (i.e. QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM) and per
Debug channel (polarization).

PMP/PTP 450b Series - configuring radio

Radio page – PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain and Retro SM 5 GHz
The Radio page of PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain and Retro SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 211

Table 51: PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain and Retro SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 212

Attribute Meaning

Link Mode Refer Radio page – PTP 450 i BHS 5 GHz for
parameter description.
Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

Channel Bandwidth Scan

Cyclic Prefix Scan

AP Selection Method

Color Code 1

Installation Color Code

Large Data Channel data Q

Color Code

MIMO Rate Adapt Algorithm

Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate

Nomadic Mode

Chapter 1: Configuration 213

Attribute Meaning

External Gain Fixed

Enable Max Tx Power

Reference Downlink EVM

Current Downlink EVM

Reference Uplink EVM

Current Uplink EVM

Access Point MAC Address

Channel Frequency

Channel Bandwidth

Receive Quality Debug

Radio page – PMP/PTP 450b High Gain SM 3 GHz

The Radio page of PMP/PTP 450b High Gain SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 214

Table 52: PMP/PTP 450b High Gain SM Radio attributes – 3 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 215

Chapter 1: Configuration 216
Attribute Meaning

Link Mode

Custom Radio
Frequency Scan
Selection List

Channel Bandwidth
Scan

Cyclic Prefix

AP Selection Method

Color Code 1

Installation Color
Code Refer PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain and Retro SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz
Large Data Channel
data Q

Color Code

MIMO Rate Adapt

Algorithm

Downlink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Nomadic Mode

External Gain Fixed This value represents the fixed antenna gain. The fixed antenna gain for High
Gain is +20 dBi.

For ODUs with integrated antenna, this is set at the correct value in the factory.

For Connectorized ODUs with external antenna, the user must set this value to
the overall antenna gain, including any RF cable loss between the ODU and the
antenna.

Enable Max Tx Refer PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain and Retro SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz
Power

Chapter 1: Configuration 217

Attribute Meaning

Reference Downlink
EVM

Current Downlink
EVM

Reference Uplink
EVM

Current Uplink EVM Refer PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz.

Access Point MAC

Address

Channel Frequency

Channel Bandwidth

Receive Quality
Debug

Radio page – PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain BHM 5 GHz

The Radio page of the PMP/PTP 450b BHM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 218

Table 53: PMP/PTP 450b BHM Radio attributes - 5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Link Mode See PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz

Timing Mode

Chapter 1: Configuration 219

Attribute Meaning

Frequency Band See PMP 450m Series – configuring radio

Frequency
Carrier

Channel
Bandwidth

Frame Period

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Sector ID

Large Data
Channel data Q

MIMO Rate
Adapt Algorithm

Downlink
Maximum
Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Minimum
Modulation Rate

Nomadic Mode

Downlink Data

Transmitter See PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz

Power

External Gain This value represents the fixed antenna gain. The fixed antenna gain for Mid-Gain is
Fixed 16 dBi and High Gain is 23 dBi.

For ODUs with integrated antenna, this is set at the correct value in the factory.

For Connectorized ODUs with external antenna, the user must set this value to the
overall antenna gain, including any RF cable loss between the ODU and the
antenna.

Receive Quality See PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz
Debug

Frame Alignment
Legacy Mode
See PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 220

Radio page – PMP/PTP 450b Mid-Gain/High Gain BHS 5 GHz
The Radio page of PMP 450b BHS is explained in the below table.

Table 54: PMP/PTP 450b BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 221

Chapter 1: Configuration 222
Attribute Meaning

Link Mode See PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz

Timing Mode

Custom Radio
Frequency Scan
Selection List

Channel Bandwidth
Scan

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Large Data Channel

data Q

MIMO Rate Adapt

Algorithm
See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz
Downlink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum
Modulation Rate

Minimum Modulation
rate

Nomadic Mode

Transmit Power

External Gain Fixed This value represents the fixed antenna gain. The fixed antenna gain for Mid-
Gain is 16 dBi and High Gain is 23 dBi.

For ODUs with integrated antenna, this is set at the correct value in the factory.

For Connectorized ODUs with external antenna, the user must set this value to
the overall antenna gain, including any RF cable loss between the ODU and the
antenna.

Chapter 1: Configuration 223

 Attribute Meaning

Reference Downlink
EVM

Current Downlink
EVM

Reference Uplink
EVM

Current Uplink EVM Refer PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz.

Access Point MAC

Address

Channel Frequency

Channel Bandwidth

Receive Quality
Debug

Note

The frequencies that a user can select are controlled by the country or a region
and the Channel Bandwidth selected. There can be a case where a user adds a
custom frequency (from the Custom Frequencies page ) and cannot see it in the
pull down menu.

PMP/PTP 450 Series – configuring radio

Radio page - PMP 450 AP 5 GHz
The Radio tab of the AP for 5 GHz is as shown in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 224

Table 55: PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 225

Attribute Meaning

See PMP 45 450i AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for all parameters details.

Note

The PMP 450 AP supports up to 119 Data Channels (instead of 238 Data Channels) when
configured for 30 MHz channel bandwidth or 5 ms Frame Period. This limitation is not applicable
for PMP 450i/450m Series.

Chapter 1: Configuration 226

Radio page - PMP 450 AP 3.65 GHz
Figure 30: PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.65 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 227

Attribute Meaning

Device Setting Refer PMP 450m Series – configuring radiofor parameter details

Frequency Band

Frequency Carrier

Channel Bandwidth

Frame Period

Cyclic Prefix

Color Code

Subscriber Color Code Rescan

(When not on a Primary Color
Code)

Subscriber Color Code Wait

Period for Idle

Installation Color Code

Sector ID

MIMO Rate Adapt Algorithm

Downlink Maximum Modulation

Rate

Uplink Maximum Modulation

Rate

Nomadic Mode

Max Range

Downlink Data

Contention Slots (a.k.a. Control

Slots)

Auto Contention

Broadcast Repeat Count

Co-located Frame If this 3 GHz sector is operating near other LTE sectors or other 5G-
Configuration Option NR sectors on the same channel, it is important to enable this co-
location option. This will time shift the PMP frame start to in
alignment with the LTE or 5G-NR sector operating in the area. The
particular LTE or 5G-NR configurations that Cambium can co-locate
with are as follows:

l For 2.5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with 5G-NR

configuration DDDSU is possible

Chapter 1: Configuration 228

Attribute Meaning

l For 5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with 5G-NR

configuration DDDSUUDDDD is possible (shown on the GUI
selection as DDDDDDDSUU). The proper number of RF-NR
Guard Symbols needs to be selected then also.

l For 5 ms PMP frame sizes, colocation with LTE frame

configurations 0, 1, and 2 is possible. The special subframe and
cyclic prefix configurations need to be selected as well.

l Two more detailed technical documents describing co-

location between Cambium Networks PMP sectors, LTE, and
5G-NR sectors can be found here:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/colocationtool/

Transmit Power Refer PMP 450m Series – configuring radiofor parameter details

External Gain

SM Receive Target Level

Adjacent Channel Support

Multicast Data Channel

Multicast Repeat Count

Multicast Downlink CIR

SM Registration Limit

Receive Quality Debug

Frame Alignment Legacy Mode

SM Link Test Mode Restriction

Note

When the Channel bandwidth is updated from 20 MHz to 30 MHz not more than 59
subscribers can be registered.

Note

The PMP 450 AP supports up to 119 Data Channels (instead of 238 Data Channels) when
configured for 30 MHz channel bandwidth or 5 ms Frame Period. This limitation is not
applicable for PMP 450i/450m Series.

Note

The CBRS deployments on legacy 450 APs have a limit of only 119 data channels for all
bandwidth and frame size configurations (instead of the 238 data channel limit of a 450i or
450m AP).

Chapter 1: Configuration 229

 Even with the 119 data channel restriction, legacy 450 AP CBRS deployments run the risk of
overloading the APs CPU. This can cause brief outages due to difficulties maintaining and
reestablishing DNS connections to keep the CBRS heartbeats active with the SAS.
Operators that experience such issues should either reduce the number of SMs deployed
under this AP, restrict the traffic load on those SMs, or replace the legacy 450 AP with a
450i or 450m model.

Note

APs that were already configured for co-location prior to System Release 22.0 upgrade see
their cyclic prefix defaulted to Normal and the S Frame Configuration defaulted to 7. This
should be checked and changed as needed. Note that there is also a slight possibility that
the downlink data percentage might be auto-adjusted based on this SSF value of 7 to an
undesired value. This should also be checked and adjusted as needed. These corrections can
be done directly on the AP. If a large number of sectors need to be adjusted, a small
configuration template can be pushed from cnMaestro. A zip file containing 4 sample
templates can be found on the Cambium Networks support site:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450

This zip file contains, in addition to a template that corrects just the special subframe after
the upgrade, a template to enable co-location and set the special subframe configuration
after the upgrade, a template to enable co-location prior to the upgrade, and a template to
disable/backout co-location.

Chapter 1: Configuration 230

Radio page - PMP 450 AP 3.5 GHz
Figure 31: PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 231

Attribute Meaning

See PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for all parameters details.

Note

The PMP 450 AP supports up to 119 Data Channels (instead of 238 Data Channels) when
configured for 30 MHz channel bandwidth or 5 ms Frame Period. This limitation is not applicable
for PMP 450i/450m Series.

Chapter 1: Configuration 232

Radio page - PMP 450 AP 2.4 GHz
Table 56: Table 64 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 2.4 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 233

Attribute Meaning

See PMP 450i or 450 MicroPoP Unlimited AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz for all parameters details.

Note

The PMP 450 AP supports up to 119 Data Channels (instead of 238 Data Channels) when
configured for 30 MHz channel bandwidth or 5 ms Frame Period. This limitation is not applicable
for PMP 450i/450m Series.

Chapter 1: Configuration 234

Radio page - PMP 450 SM 5 GHz
Table 57: PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 235

Attribute Meaning

Custom Radio Frequency Check the frequencies that SM has to scan for AP transmissions. See
Scan Selection List Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Note

The frequencies that a user can select are controlled by the country or a region
and the Channel Bandwidth selected. There can be a case where a user adds a
custom frequency (from the Custom Frequencies page ) and cannot see it in the
pull down menu.

Chapter 1: Configuration 236

Radio page - PMP 450 SM 3.65 GHz
Table 58: PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.65 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 237

Attribute Meaning

Custom Radio Frequency Check the frequencies that SM has to scan for AP transmissions. See
Scan Selection List Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Note

The frequencies that a user can select are controlled by the country or a region
and the Channel Bandwidth selected. There can be a case where a user adds a
custom frequency (from the Custom Frequencies page ) and cannot see it in the
pull down menu.

Chapter 1: Configuration 238

Radio page - PMP 450 SM 3.5 GHz
Table 59: PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 239

Attribute Meaning

Custom Radio Frequency Check the frequencies that SM has to scan for AP transmissions. See
Scan Selection List Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Note

The frequencies that a user can select are controlled by the country or a region
and the Channel Bandwidth selected. There can be a case where a user adds a
custom frequency (from the Custom Frequencies page ) and cannot see it in the
pull down menu.

Chapter 1: Configuration 240

Radio page - PMP 450 SM 2.4 GHz
Table 60: PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 2.4 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 241

Attribute Meaning

Custom Radio Frequency Check the frequencies that SM has to scan for AP transmissions. See
Scan Selection List Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz

Radio page - PMP 450 SM 900 MHz

Table 61: PMP 450 SM Radio attributes –900 MHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 242

Attribute Meaning

Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

Channel Bandwidth Scan

Cyclic Prefix

AP Selection Method

Color Code 1

Installation Color Code

Large Data Channel data Q

Color Code

MIMO Rate Adapt Algorithm

Downlink Maximum Modulation Rate

Uplink Maximum Modulation Rate

Nomadic Mode
See PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz.
External Gain

Enable Max Tx Power

Reference Downlink EVM

Current Downlink EVM

Reference Uplink EVM

Current Uplink EVM

Access Point MAC Address

Channel Frequency

Channel Bandwidth

Receive Quality Debug

Chapter 1: Configuration 243

Radio page - PTP 450 BHM 5 GHz
Table 62: PTP 450 BHM Radio attributes –5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Refer PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz for all parameters details.

Chapter 1: Configuration 244

Radio page - PTP 450 BHS 5 GHz
Table 63: PTP 450 BHS Radio attributes –5 GHz

Chapter 1: Configuration 245

 Attribute Meaning

Refer PTP 450i BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz for all parameters details.

Note

The PMP 450 AP supports up to 119 Data Channels (instead of 238 Data Channels) when
configured for 30 MHz channel bandwidth or 5 ms Frame Period. This limitation is not applicable
for PMP 450i/450m Series.

Radio Frequency Scan Selection List

The SM or BHS scans complete spectrum as per Full Spectrum Band Scan feature. SMs or BHS first boot
into the smallest selected channel bandwidth (10 MHz, if selected) and scan all selected frequencies
across both the 5.4 GHz and 5.7 GHz frequency bands.

After this scan, if a wider channel bandwidth is selected (20 MHz), the SM/BHS automatically changes to
20 MHz channel bandwidth and then scans for APs/BHSs. After the SM/BHS finishes this final scan it will
evaluate the best AP/BHM with which to register. If required for registration, the SM/BHS changes its
channel bandwidth back to 10 MHz to match the best AP/BHM.

Chapter 1: Configuration 246

The SM/BHS will attempt to connect to an AP/BHM based on power level (which affects the modulation
state), channel bandwidth (which affects throughput) and number of SM/BHS registrations to the
AP/BHM (which affects system contention performance).

If it is desired to prioritize a certain AP/BHM over other available APs/BHMs, operators may use the Color
Code Priority feature on the SM/BHS. Utilization of the Color Code feature on the AP/BHM is
recommended to further constrain the AP selection.

If the SM does not find any suitable APs/BHMs for registration after scanning all channel bandwidths, the
SM restarts the scanning process beginning with the smallest configured channel bandwidth.

Selecting multiple frequencies and multiple channel bandwidths impacts the SM/BHS scanning time. The
biggest consumption of time is in the changing of the SM/BHS channel bandwidth setting.

The worst case scanning time is approximately two minutes after boot up (SM/BHS with all frequencies
and channel bandwidths selected and registering to an AP/BHM at 10 MHz). If only one channel
bandwidth is selected the time to scan all the available frequencies and register to an AP/BHM is
approximately one minute after boot up.

Other scanning features such as Color Code, Installation Color Code, and RADIUS authentication are
unaffected by the Full Band Scan feature.

Dedicated Multicast Data Channel

A Multicast Data Channel allows to configure multicast packets to be transmitted over a dedicated
channel at a configurable rate of 2X, 3X, 4X, 5X or 6X. This feature is available only for the PMP 450 and
PMP 450i and is not backward compatible with PMP 430 series of radios.

To configure Multicast Data Channel, the AP must have this enabled. This can be enabled in the “Multicast
Data Control” section (under Configuration -> Radio page). The default value is “Disable”. If set to the
default value, all multicast packets are transmitted over the Broadcast Data Channel data path. To
enable, select the data rate that is desired for the Multicast Data Channel Data Rate parameter and click
Save Changes button. The radio requires no reboot after any changes to this parameter.

The Multicast Data Channel allows three different parameters to be configured on the AP. These can be
changed on the fly and are saved on the flash memory.

Note

If the Multicast Data Channel Data Rate is set to a modulation that the radio is not currently
capable of or operates in non-permitted channel conditions, multicast data is sent but not
received.

Ex: If Multicast Data Channel Data Rate is set to 6x and the channel conditions only permit 4x
mode of operation, then multicast data is sent at 6x modulation but the SM will not receive the
data.

Note

l Actual Multicast CIR honored by the AP = Configured Multicast CIR/ (Multicast Repeat
Count + 1).
l Increasing the Multicast data rate has no impact on the Unicast data rate.
l For multicast and unicast traffic mix scenario examples, see .

Chapter 1: Configuration 247

Table 64: Example for mix of multicast and unicast traffic scenarios

Repeat Multicast Data Rate Unicast Data Rate Aggregate DL Data Rate
Count (Mbps) (Mbps) (Mbps)

0 10 40 50

1 5 40 45

2 3.33 40 43.33

The statistics have been added to the Data Channel page (under Statistics > Data Channel). The table
displays the multicast row on the PMP 450 Platform Family AP. The SM displays the multicast row if it is a
PMP 450 Platform Family.

Chapter 1: Configuration 248

Figure 32: Data Channel statistics

The AP and SM display Transmit and Receive Multicast Data Count (under the Statistics > Scheduler
page), as shown in below figure.

Figure 33: Multicast scheduler statistics

Custom Frequencies page

In addition to the Radio tab, AP/SM/BH has another tab called Custom Frequencies as shown in 450
Platform Family AP/SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 5 GHz.

The custom frequency tab allows to configure custom frequency at 1 kHz raster. It means that the custom
frequencies can be at granularity of 1 kHz e.g. 4910.123 MHz, 4922.333 MHz, 4933.421 MHz etc.

Chapter 1: Configuration 249

 Note

Ensure that a customer frequency exists before using SNMP to set the radio to a
Custom Frequency.

Table 65: 450 Platform Family AP/SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Custom Custom frequencies with a channel raster of 1 kHz can be added from the available
Frequency range by keying in the frequency and then clicking the Add Frequency button. Click
Configuration Remove Frequency button to delete a specific frequency keyed in the text box.

Click Default Frequencies button to add a pre-defined list of frequencies that can be
used in this band. This list can be reduced or increased by manually removing or
adding other custom frequencies.

Custom Displays the complete list of user configured custom frequencies.

Frequencies

Chapter 1: Configuration 250

Table 66: PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.65 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Custom Custom frequencies with a channel raster of 1 kHz can be added from the available
Frequency range by keying in the frequency and then clicking the Add Frequency button. Click
Configuration Remove Frequency button to delete a specific frequency keyed in the text box.

Click Default Frequencies button to add a pre-defined list of frequencies that can be
used in this band. This list can be reduced or increased by manually removing or
adding other custom frequencies.

Custom Displays the complete list of user configured custom frequencies.

Frequencies

Chapter 1: Configuration 251

Table 67: PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.5 GHz

Attribute Meaning

Custom Custom frequencies with a channel raster of 1 kHz can be added from the available
Frequency range by keying in the frequency and then clicking the Add Frequency button. Click
Configuration Remove Frequency button to delete a specific frequency keyed in the text box.

Click Default Frequencies button to add a pre-defined list of frequencies that can be
used in this band. This list can be reduced or increased by manually removing or
adding other custom frequencies.

DFS for 5 GHz Radios

Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 5 GHz
unlicensed systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation. DFS and other regulatory
requirements drive the settings for the following parameters, as discussed in this section:

l Country Code

l Primary Frequency

Chapter 1: Configuration 252

 l Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 Frequencies

l External Antenna Gain

On the AP, the Home > DFS Status page shows current DFS status of all three frequencies and a DFS log
of past DFS events.

Figure 34: AP DFS Status

DFS operation
The ODUs use region-specific DFS based on the Country Code selected on the module’s Configuration,
General page. By directing installers and technicians to set the Country Code correctly, the operator
gains confidence the module is operating according to national or regional regulations without having to
deal with the details for each region.

The details of DFS operation for each Country Code, including whether DFS is active on the AP, SM, and
which DFS regulations apply is shown in Country & Bands DFS setting.

Contention slots
Contention slots are symbols at the end of the uplink subframe that are reserved for random access
(network entry and bandwidth requests) and cannot be used for data transmission. These symbols form
the contention space.

The frame is 2.5 ms or 5 ms long, and it is divided into a downlink subframe (data transmitted from the AP
to the SM) and an uplink subframe (data transmitted from the SM to the AP).

Figure 35: Frame structure

The symbols in the uplink subframe can be scheduled or unscheduled. All scheduled symbols come
before all unscheduled symbols. The number of scheduled and unscheduled symbols changes frame by
frame depending on the amount of uplink requests received by the AP.

Chapter 1: Configuration 253

The contention slots number is selected by the operator and indicates the number of symbols that are
reserved in the unscheduled portion of the uplink. The total number of unscheduled symbols in each
frame is the sum of the contention slots and any additional symbol that was not used in uplink data
transmission. This means that the unscheduled portion of the uplink can be as small as the number of
contention slots, or as big as the whole uplink. This allows SMs in sectors with a small number of
contention slots configured to still successfully transmit bandwidth requests using unused data slots.

Random access
When an SM needs to send an unscheduled message (for network entry or a bandwidth request), it
randomly selects one symbol out of the unscheduled portion of the uplink subframe and uses that symbol
for transmission. The higher the number of unscheduled symbols, the lower the probability two or more
SMs will select the same symbol for transmission and their messages will collide. When two messages
collide at the AP receiver, most likely neither will be decoded correctly, and both SMs need to start the
random-access process one more time. If this happens frequently, the latency of the system increases.

A higher number of contention slots give higher probability that an SM’s bandwidth request will be
correctly received when the system is heavily loaded, but with the tradeoff that sector capacity is
reduced, so there will be less capacity to handle the request. The sector capacity reduction is about 200
kbps for each contention slot configured in a 20 MHz channel at QPSK modulation, for 2.5 ms frame sizes.
The reduction in sector capacity is proportionally higher at MIMO modulations, as shown in the following
table.

Table 68: Throughput penalty per modulation

Modulation mode Throughput penalty for each additional contention slot

2.5 ms frame 5 ms frame

QPSK (1X) 204 kbps 102 kbps

QPSK MIMO (2X) 409 kbps 204 kbps

16-QAM MIMO (4X) 819 kbps 409 kbps

64-QAM MIMO (6X) 1.22 Mbps 614 kbps

256-QAM MIMO (8X) 1.63 Mbps 819 kbps

Throughput penalty per modulation shows that the throughput penalty for each additional contention
slot increases with modulation mode. The reason is that at higher modulation modes more fragments can
be transmitted in a symbol. If additional symbols are reserved for random access, the number of
fragments that cannot be sent in these symbols is higher at higher modulations, and therefore the
throughput penalty is higher. However, the penalty expressed as a percentage of the throughput is the
same for each modulation mode. For example, if a frame has 80 total symbols, each additional symbol
reserved for random access reduces the sector throughput by 1.25%, regardless of the modulation mode.

Selection of contention slots parameter

The number of contention slots has to be selected according to the specific deployment parameters in
each sector. If the number of contention slots is too small, then latency increases in high traffic periods. If
the number of contention slots is too high, then the maximum capacity is unnecessarily reduced.

The two main contributing factors to the selection of the number of contention slots are the number of
SMs in a sector, and the type of traffic in the sector.

Chapter 1: Configuration 254

The System Release 16.1 introduces Auto Contention Slots that usually eliminates the need to configure
optimal number of contention slots. When this feature is enabled, AP dynamically adjusts the number of
contention slots resulting in improved uplink performance.

However, if using Nomadic Mode, in some cases it might be desirable to disable the Auto contention
feature to increase the number of contention slots in use. The Nomadic Mode feature is introduced with
System Release 21.0 and is supported for all AP/BHM types except 450m.

Note

Auto Contention Slots feature is not currently supported on PMP 450m AP.

Note

Contention Slots configuration parameter is used to determine the number of

Downlink/Uplink+Contention slots in a Frame. Therefore, there is no need to change
Contention Slots parameter, unless AP’s Tx/Rx configuration is changed which
should be consistent for the entire site for co-location.

Number of SMs in a sector

If the number of SMs in a sector is large, it is recommended to increase the number of contention slots, in
order to reduce the probability of two or more requests colliding. The suggested contention slot settings
as a function of the number of active data channels in the sector, and the frame size, are shown below:

Table 69: Contention slot settings

Number of SMs Controls Slots recommendation Control Slots Recommendation

2.5 ms 5.0 ms

1 to 10 3 3

11 to 50 4 8

51 to 150 6 12

151 and above 8 15

Note

The above table has been updated with the System Release 22.0 documentation release to
suggest the higher number of contention slots for 5.0 ms frame configurations. This
documentation revision is not because of any software changes, but due to a more careful
analysis of recent field and test data.

Type of traffic in a sector

Besides the number of SMs, the other main factor in contention slots selection is the type of traffic. If the
sector experiences a lot of uplink traffic composed of small packets, for example in a sector that serves
several VoIP streams, the average number of bandwidth requests transmitted by each SM is high.
Another scenario with constant uplink traffic is video surveillance, which also generate a large number of
uplink bandwidth requests.

In these cases, the probability of two or more SMs transmitting a request in the same symbol is high.
When this happens, the latency of the system increases, and it is recommended to increase the number
of contention slots from the number in Contention slot settings. If an AP is experiencing latency or SM-

Chapter 1: Configuration 255

servicing issues, increasing the number of contention slots may increase system performance, depending
on traffic mix over time.

Recommendation on Contention Slots number selection

1. Calculate the number of active SMs in the sector.
2. Evaluate the traffic mix that is expected in the sector, more specifically the expected percentage
of real-time traffic (ex. VoIP, gaming, video conferencing, and video surveillance).
3. If the expected amount of real-time traffic is small, select the number of contention slots
according to Contention slot settings.
4. If the expected amount of real-time traffic is large, select a number of contention slots larger than
the number in Contention slot settings.
5. Monitor latency in your system. If the percentage of real-time traffic increases and the sector
experiences increasing latency and SM-servicing issues, increase the number of contention slots
from the current setting.
This is the reason why the maximum number of contention slots is 15, even if Table 2 shows 8
contention slots for more than 150 data channels. If the number of data channels is more than 150
and a significant portion of the traffic is real-time, the frequency with which bandwidth request
messages are transmitted requires a higher number of contention slots, potentially as high as 15. A
sector with a high number of video surveillance cameras would also require a larger number of
contention slots to reduce the probability of collision between requests.
6. Monitor the percentage of BW requests successfully received and the UL frame utilization: if the
frame utilization is high (close to 100%), then it is not recommended to change the number of
contention slots, even if the percentage success rate of BW requests is low. However, if the
percentage success rate of BW requests is low and the frame utilization is also low, then increasing
the number of contention slots is recommended.

Cluster of APs
It is recommended to use care when changing the contention slots configuration of only some APs in a
cluster, because changes affect the effective downlink/uplink ratio and can cause co-location issues.
In a typical cluster, each AP should be configured with the same number of contention slots to assure
proper timing in the send and receive cycles. The number of contention slots is used by the frame
calculator to define the downlink and uplink times, which should not overlap from one AP to another.
However, if the traffic experienced by two APs in the same cluster is different (for example, one supports
significantly more VoIP traffic), the number of contention slots selected for each AP may not be the
same. For APs in a cluster of mismatched contention slots setting, it is recommended to use the frame
calculator to verify that send and receive times do not overlap (see the Frame calculator for co-location).

Note

Change contention slot configuration in an operating, stable system cautiously

and with a back-out plan. After changing a contention slot configuration,
monitor the system closely for problems as well as improvements in system
performance.

Frame calculator for co-location

The frame calculator is a tool available for the PMP 450 series systems, that calculates the length of the
transmit and receive times, together with the number of downlink and uplink symbols, for a given set of
configuration parameters. The frame calculator can be used to verify that co-location of APs using
different contention slots settings does not create overlapping transmit and receive times.

Chapter 1: Configuration 256

Basic rules
For co-location of AP1 and AP2, we want to ensure that AP1 stops transmitting before AP2 starts
receiving, and that AP2 stops transmitting before AP1 starts receiving.

These are the rules that have to be satisfied for a correct co-location of the two APs:

l AP1 Receive Start > AP2 Transmit End

l AP2 Receive Start > AP1 Transmit End

Steps for co-location

Let us assume that in a cluster of multiple APs with all the same settings, one AP’s settings are modified
with a different number of contention slots.

1. Obtain all configuration settings for the APs that do not change parameters (duty cycle,
contention slots, max distance)
2. Input these configuration parameters into the OFDM Frame Calculator tool found under “Tools”.
3. Click “Calculate”
4. Note the following values from the results:
l AP Antenna Receive Start: ____________________
l AP Antenna Transmit End: ____________________
5. Access the AP that needs to have a different contention slots setting and use the frame calculator
tool found under “Tools”
6. Input the configuration parameters for this AP (same duty cycle and max distance as the other
APs, different contention slots)
7. Click “Calculate”
8. Note the following values from the results:
l AP Antenna Receive Start: ____________________
l AP Antenna Transmit End: ____________________
9. Check that the two following equations are both true:
l AP2 Receive Start > AP1 Transmit End
l AP1 Receive Start > AP2 Transmit End
10. If one or both equations are not true, adjust the duty cycle until they become true (or the max
distance if possible).

Example
Let us assume that all APs in a cluster have the same Max range settings, a 2.5 ms frame length and a 20
MHz channel BW, but the operator has fine-tuned the DL duty % per AP as follows:

AP1:

Max range: 2 miles

Contention slots: 3

DL duty cycle = 75%

AP2:

Max range: 2 miles

Contention slots: 3

Chapter 1: Configuration 257

DL duty cycle = 80%

Running the frame calculator as explained in the Steps for co-location, the AP1 Antenna Transmit End and
Antenna Receive start times are:

l AP1 Antenna Transmit End = 1.6440 ms

l AP1 Antenna Receive Start = 1.7972 ms

AP2’s Antenna Transmit End and Antenna Receive start times are:

l AP2 Antenna Transmit End = 1.7411 ms

l AP2 Antenna Receive Start = 1.8943 ms

The settings in AP1 in the cluster are now modified by changing the number of contention slots from 3 to
7, for example because this sector is constantly experiencing a higher volume of VoIP traffic.

Running the frame calculator again, the new AP1 Antenna Transmit End and Antenna Receive start times
are:

l AP1 Antenna Transmit End = 1.5711 ms

l AP1 Antenna Receive Start = 1.7243 ms

The two equations above have to be checked for correct co-location:

l AP1 Antenna Receive Start > AP2 Antenna Transmit End à 1.7243 ms >1.7411 ms NOT OK

l AP2 Antenna Receive Start > AP1 Antenna Transmit End à 1.8943 ms >1.5711ms OK

The first of the two equations are not true. AP2 is still transmitting when AP1 has already started
receiving. This creates interference at the AP1 receiver.

To avoid this interference scenario, the duty cycle of AP2 can be further adjusted slightly. For example,
changing the duty cycle of AP2 from 80% to 79% changes the AP2 Antenna Transmit End and Antenna
Receive start times as follows:

l AP2 Antenna Transmit End = 1.7168 ms

l AP2 Antenna Receive Start = 1.8700 ms

The two equations have to be checked again for co-location:

l AP1 Antenna Receive Start > AP2 Transmit End à 1.7243 ms >1.7168 ms OK

l AP2 Receive Start > AP1 Transmit End à 1.8700 ms >1.5711 ms OK

Now both equations are true and the APs can be co-located.

Cambium co-location tool

As an alternative to using the frame calculator on the AP GUI, cambium provides a co-location tool for
these calculations. This tool is a free download available on the Cambium website:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/colocationtool/#r2

Chapter 1: Configuration 258

MIMO-A mode of operation
450 Platform Family supports MIMO-B mode using the following modulation levels: QPSK, 8-QAM, 16-
QAM, 32-QAM, 64-QAM, 128-QAM and 256-QAM. System Release 13.2 introduces MIMO-A mode of
operation using the same modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode. With MIMO-B, the radio sends different
streams of data over the two antennas whereas with MIMO-A, the radio uses a scheme that tries to
optimize coverage by transmitting the same data over both antennas. This redundancy improves the
signal to noise ratio at the receiver making it more robust, at the cost of throughput.

In addition to introducing MIMO-A modes, improvements have been made to the existing rate adapt
algorithm to switch between MIMO-A and MIMO-B seamlessly without any intervention or added
configuration by the operator. The various modulation levels used by the 450 Platform Family are shown
in below table.

Table 70: 450 Platform Family Modulation levels

Rate MIMO-B MIMO-A

QPSK 2X MIMO-B 1X MIMO-A

8-QAM 3X MIMO-B

16-QAM 4X MIMO-B 2X MIMO-A

32-QAM 5XMIMO-B

64-QAM 6X MIMO-B 3X MIMO-A

128-QAM 7X MIMO-B

256-QAM 8X MIMO-B 4X MIMO-A

System Performance
For System Performance details of all the 450 Platform Family ODUs, refer to the tools listed below:

Link Capacity Planner for PMP/PTP 450 and 450i:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/capacityplanner/

LINKPlanner for PMP/PTP 450/450i and PMP 450m:

Chapter 1: Configuration 259

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/linkplanner/

Table 71: Co-channel Interference per (CCI) modulation level

Modulation of Victim Modulation of Interferer Channel BW (MHz) CCI

1X (QPSK MIMO-A) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 7 dB

2X (16-QAM MIMO-A) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 14 dB

3X (64-QAM MIMO-A) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 22 dB

4X (256-QAM MIMO-A) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 30 dB

2X (QPSK MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 10 dB

3X (8-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 13 dB

4X (16-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 17 dB

5X (32-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 21 dB

6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 25 dB

7X (128-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 29 dB

8X (256-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 33 dB

Table 72: Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) per modulation level

Modulation of Victim Modulation of Interferer Channel BW (MHz) ACI Guard Band

1X (QPSK MIMO-A) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

2X (QPSK MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

3X (8-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

4X (16-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

5X (32-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -16 dB None

7X (128-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -13 dB None

8X (256-QAM MIMO-B) 6X (64-QAM MIMO-B) 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 40 -10 dB None

Guard Band
When synchronized, no Guard Bands are needed for the 450, 450i, and 450m Series.

l For PMP 450 AP (3.6 GHz) and 450 series APs with 450b SM (5 GHz) connected, Configuration->
Radio -> Power Control -> Adjacent Channel Support must be enabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 260

Improved PPS performance of 450 Platform Family
The 450m, 450i, and 450b Series provides improved packets per second (PPS) performance compared
to 450 Series.

Through hardware and software enhancements, the PPS performance of the PMP 450i Series AP and
PMP 450b SM has been improved to more than 100,000 packets/second, measured through a standard
RFC2544 test using 64 bytes packets. With this enhancement, operators are able to provide higher
bandwidth including better VoIP and video services to end customers using existing SM deployments.

PMP 450m is capable of supporting more than 100k PPS (packets per second).

Setting up SNMP agent

Operators may use SNMP commands to set configuration parameters and retrieve data from the AP and
SM modules. Also, if enabled, when an event occurs, the SNMP agent on the 450 Platform Family sends a
trap to whatever SNMP trap receivers configured in the management network.

l SNMPv2c
l SNMPv3

Configuring SM/BHS’s IP over-the-air access

To access the SM/BHS management interface from a device situated above the AP, the SM/BHS’s
Network Accessibility parameter (under the web GUI at Configuration > IP) may be set to Public.

Table 73: LAN1 Network Interface Configuration tab of IP page attributes

Attribute Meaning

IP Address Internet Protocol (IP) address. This address is used by family of Internet protocols to
uniquely identify this unit on a network.

Network Specify whether the IP address of the SM/BHS must be visible to only a device
Accessibility connected to the SM/BHS by Ethernet (Local) or be visible to the AP/BHM as well
(Public).

Subnet Mask If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
configures the subnet mask of the SM/BHS for RF management traffic.

Chapter 1: Configuration 261

Attribute Meaning

Gateway IP If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
Address configures the gateway IP address for the SM/BHS for RF management traffic.

DHCP state If Enabled is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable (read only), in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

DNS IP Canopy devices allow for configuration of a preferred and alternate DNS server IP
Address address either automatically or manually. Devices must set DNS server IP address
manually when DHCP is disabled for the management interface of the device. The
default DNS IP addresses are 0.0.0.0 when configured manually.

Preferred The first address used for DNS resolution.

DNS Server

Alternate DNS If the Preferred DNS server cannot be reached, the Alternate DNS Server is used.
Server

Domain Name The operator’s management domain name may be configured for DNS. The domain
name configuration can be used for configuration of the servers in the operator’s
network. The default domain name is example.com, and is only used if configured as
such.

Configuring SNMP
The SNMP page configuration is explained below.

Note

The SNMP page for AP, SM, BHM and BHS has the same parameter attributes.

SNMP page – AP/SM/BHM/BHS

The SNMP page is explained in below table.

Table 74: SNMP page attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 262

Chapter 1: Configuration 263
Attribute Meaning

SNMP Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS) to
Community access SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. The default string is
String 1 Canopy.

SNMP You can designate the SNMP Community String 1 to be the password for WM, for
Community example, to have Read / Write access to the module via SNMP or for all SNMP access
String 1 to the module to be Read Only.
Permissions

SNMP Specify an additional control string that can allow a Network Management Station
Community (NMS) to read SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. The default
String 2 (Read string is Canopyro. This password will never authenticate a user or an NMS to
Only) read/write access.

Chapter 1: Configuration 264

Attribute Meaning

The Community String value is clear text and is readable by a packet monitor.
Additional security derives from the configuration of the Accessing Subnet, Trap
Address, and Permission parameters.

Engine ID The Engine ID may be between 5 and 32 hex characters. The hex character input is
driven by RFC 3411 recommendations on the Engine ID. The default Engine ID is the
MAC address of the device

SNMPv3 Specify security model where users are defined and authenticated before granting
Security Level access to any SNMP service. Each device can configure the security level of SNMPv3
to No authentication/No privacy, Authentication/No privacy, or
Authentication/Privacy.

SNMPv3 The SNMPv3 authentication protocol is supported with:

Authentication
Protocol l MD5
l SHA-1
l SHA-256

SNMPv3 Privacy The SNMPv3 privacy protocol is supported with:

Protocol
l CBC-DES
l CFB-AES

SNMPv3 Read- This field allows for a read-only user per devices. The default values for the Read-
Only User Only users is:

l Username = Canopyro
l Authentication Password = authCanopyro
l Privacy Password = privacyCanopyro

SNMPv3 Read-write user by default is disabled. The default values for the Read/Write users
Read/Write is:
User
l Username = Canopy
l Authentication Password = authCanopy
l Privacy Password = privacyCanopy

Additional This field allows to configure the Additional SNMP v3 User 1. The configurations
SNMP v3 User 1 include:

l Enable/Disable User: These fields allow to enable or disable the user using the
Enable User or Disable User radio buttons.
l Authorizaton Key: This field allows to configure an authorization key for the
user.
l Privacy Key: This field allows to configure a privacy key for the user.

Note

Set SNMP v3 Security Level field to: auth, priv to enable the
Authorization Key and Privacy Key fields.

Chapter 1: Configuration 265

Attribute Meaning

Enabled User can be set with following privacy settings:

l ReadWrite User
l ReadOnly User

Additional This field allows to configure the Additional SNMP v3 User 2.

SNMP v3 User 2
The configurations include:

l Enable/Disable User: These fields allow to enable or disable the user using the
Enable User or Disable User radio buttons.
l Authorizaton Key: This field allows to configure an authorization key for the
user.
l Privacy Key: This field allows to configure a privacy key for the user.

Note

Set SNMP v3 Security Level field to: auth, priv to enable the
Authorization Key and Privacy Key fields.

Enabled User can be set with following Privacy settings:

l ReadWrite User
l ReadOnly User

Additional This field allows to configure the Additional SNMP v3 User 3.

SNMP v3 User 3
The configurations include:

l Enable/Disable User: These fields allow to enable or disable the user using the
Enable User or Disable User radio buttons.
l Authorizaton Key: This field allows to configure an authorization key for the
user.
l Privacy Key: This field allows to configure a privacy key for the user.

Note

Set SNMP v3 Security Level field to: auth, priv to enable the
Authorization Key and Privacy Key fields.

Enabled User can be set with following Privacy settings:

l ReadWrite User
l ReadOnly User

SNMPv3 Trap When enabling transmission of SNMPv3 traps the read-only or read-write user
Configuration credentials must be used and selected properly in order for the SNMP manager to
correctly interpret the traps. By default transmission of SNMPv3 traps is disabled
and all traps sent from the radios are in SNMPv2c format.

Accessing IP / Specify the addresses that are allowed to send SNMP requests to this AP. The NMS
Subnet Mask 1 to has an address that is among these addresses (this subnet). You must enter both
10
l The network IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Chapter 1: Configuration 266

Attribute Meaning

l The CIDR (Classless Interdomain Routing) prefix length in the form /xx

For example:

l the /16 in 198.32.0.0/16 specifies a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 (the first 16 bits
in the address range are identical among all members of the subnet).

l 192.168.102.0 specifies that any device whose IP address is in the range

192.168.102.0 to 192.168.102.254 can send SNMP requests to the AP, presuming
that the device supplies the correct Community String value.

The default treatment is to allow all networks access. For more information on CIDR,
execute an Internet search on “Classless Interdomain Routing.” You are allowed to
specify as many as 10 different accessing IP address, subnet mask combinations.

RECOMMENDATION:
The subscriber can access the SM/BHS by changing the subscriber device to the
accessing subnet. This hazard exists because the Community String and Accessing
Subnet are both visible parameters. To avoid this hazard, configure the SM/BHS to
filter (block) SNMP requests.

SNMP Trap The management DNS domain name may be toggled such that the name of the trap
Server DNS server only needs to be specified and the DNS domain name is automatically
Usage appended to that name. The default SNMP trap server addresses for all 10 available
servers is 0.0.0.0 with the appending of the DNS domain name disabled.

Trap Address 1 Specify ten or fewer IP addresses (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) or DNS names to which SNMP
to 10 traps must be sent. Traps inform Wireless Manager or an NMS that something has
occurred. For example, trap information is sent

l after a reboot of the module.

l when an NMS attempts to access agent information but either
l supplied an inappropriate community string or SNMP version number.
l is associated with a subnet to which access is disallowed.

Trap Enable, If the sync status traps (sync lost and sync regained) have to be sent to Wireless
Sync Status Manager or an NMS, select Enabled. If these traps have to be suppressed, select
Disabled.

Trap Enable, If you want session status traps sent to Wireless Manager or an NMS, select Enabled.
Session Status

LQI Traps This field enables and disables traps for LQI.

LQI threshold to It is configured in percentage. The LQI trap is raised if the LQI values goes below the
raise trap (delta configured threshold to raise trap from reference LQI. For example, if the LQI
from reference threshold to raise trap is set as 30, the LQI trap will be raised once the LQI goes
LQI value) below 70% (100-30).

Chapter 1: Configuration 267

 Attribute Meaning

LQI threshold to It is configured in percentage. The LQI trap is cleared if the LQI values goes above
clear trap (delta the configured threshold to clear trap from reference LQI. For example, if the LQI
from reference threshold to clear trap is set as 25, the LQI trap will be clear once the LQI goes above
LQI value) 75% (100-25).

Minimum It is minimum observation period to raise and clear the traps after LQI threshold. It
observation can be configured between 1 to 15 minutes.
period

Site Information Operators can enable or disable site information from appearing when a user is in
Viewable to GUEST account mode.
Guest Users

Site Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module. This parameter is written into
the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Wireless Manager or an NMS.
The buffer size for this field is 128 characters.

Site Contact Enter contact information for the module administrator. This parameter is written
into the sysContact SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Wireless Manager or an
NMS. The buffer size for this field is 128 characters.

Site Location Enter information about the physical location of the module. This parameter is
written into the sysLocation SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Wireless
Manager or an NMS. The buffer size for this field is 128 characters.

Configuring syslog
450 Platform Family includes:

l Syslog event logging

l Configuring system logging

Syslog event logging

Following events are logged in syslog as explained in below table.

Table 75: Syslog parameters

Attribute Meaning

Timestamp All syslog messages captured from the radio have a timestamp.

Configuration Changes This includes any device setting that has changed and includes the old
or new parameter value, including the device reboots.

User Login and Logout Syslog records each user login and logout, with username.

Add or Delete of user Syslog captures any user accounts that are added or deleted.
accounts through GUI and
SNMP

Spectrum Analysis Syslog records a message every time Spectrum Analysis runs.

Chapter 1: Configuration 268

 Attribute Meaning

Note

Since the AP/BHM must be set to a SM/BHS for Spectrum

Analysis, syslog messages are not reported from the
radio until the scan is done and the radio mode is
switched back to AP/BHM.

Link Test Syslog records a message every time a Link Test is run.

Clear Statistics Syslog sends a message when Statistics are cleared. This is done
individually for each statistics page that is cleared.

SM Register or De-register Syslog records a message when a SM registers or deregisters.

BHS Connect or Disconnect Syslog records a message when a BHS connects or disconnects.

Configuring system logging

To configure system logging, select the menu option Configuration > Syslog.

Syslog page of AP/BHM

The Syslog Configuration page for AP/BHM is shown in below table.

Table 76: Syslog Configuration attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Syslog DNS To configure the AP/BHM to append or not append the DNS server name to the
Server Usage syslog server name.

Syslog Server The dotted decimal or DNS name of the syslog server address.

Syslog Server The syslog server port (default 514) to which syslog messaging is sent.
Port

AP Syslog When enabled, syslog messages are sent from the AP/BHM.
Transmit

Or BHM Syslog
Transmit

Chapter 1: Configuration 269

Attribute Meaning

SM Syslog When enabled, syslog messages are sent from all the registered SMs/BHS, unless
Transmit they are individually set to override this.

Or BHS Syslog
Transmit

Syslog Minimum This provides a selection for the minimum syslog message severity that is sent to
Level the syslog server. Values range from fatal (highest severity and least verbose) to
info (lowest severity, maximum verbosity).

For example: If the Syslog Minimum Level is set to notice, then only messages with
severity notice and above are sent.

Syslog page of SM
To configure system logging, select the menu option Configuration > Syslog. The Syslog Configuration
page is shown in below table.

Figure 36: Syslog Configuration attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

Syslog This control determines whether the SM will attempt to use the syslog server
Configuration definition from the AP, or whether it will use a local server definition.
Source
When set to AP preferred, use local when AP configuration unavailable, and if the SM
can register with an AP, then it uses the syslog server defined on that AP. If the SM
cannot register then it will syslog to its locally defined syslog server through its wired
connection, if any.

When set to Local only the SM ignores the AP’s definition of the syslog server and
allows the syslog server to be configured individually for each SM.

Syslog DNS To configure the SM to append or not the DNS server name to the syslog server name.
Server Usage

Syslog Server The dotted decimal or DNS name of the syslog server address.

Syslog Server The syslog server port (default 514) to which syslog messaging is sent.
Port

Chapter 1: Configuration 270

Attribute Meaning

Syslog Controls the SMs ability to transmit syslog messages. When set to “Learn from AP”
Transmission the AP will control whether this SM transmits syslog messages. When set to “enable”
or “disable” the SM will control whether it sends syslog messages. This allows an
operator to override the AP settings for individual SMs in a sector.

Syslog This control determines whether the SM attempts to use the minimum syslog level
Minimum Level defined by the AP, or whether it uses a local defined value using the “Syslog Minimum
Source Level” parameter.

When set to “AP preferred, use local when AP configuration unavailable”, and if the
SM can register with an AP, then it uses the Syslog Minimum Level defined on that AP.
If the SM cannot register then it uses its own Syslog Minimum Level setting.

When set to “Local only” the SM will always use its own Syslog Minimum Level setting
and ignores the AP’s setting.

Syslog This provides a selection for the minimum syslog message severity that is sent to the
Minimum Level syslog server. Values range from fatal (highest severity and least verbose) to info
(lowest severity, maximum verbosity).

For example: If the Syslog Minimum Level is set to notice, then only messages with
severity notice and above are sent.

Syslog page of BHS

The Syslog Configuration page is shown in below table.

Table 77: Syslog Configuration attributes - BHS

Attribute Meaning

Syslog This control determines whether the BHS will attempt to use the syslog server
Configuration definition from the BHM, or whether it will use a local server definition.
Source
l When set to BHM preferred, use local when BHM configuration unavailable, and
if the BHS can register with a BHM, then it uses the syslog server defined on
that BHM. If the BHS cannot register then it will syslog to its locally defined

Chapter 1: Configuration 271

 Attribute Meaning

syslog server through its wired connection, if any.

l When set to Local only the BHS ignores the BHM’s definition of the syslog
server and allows the syslog server to be configured individually for each BHS.

Syslog DNS To configure the BHS to append or not to append the DNS server name to the syslog
Server Usage server name.

Syslog Server The dotted decimal or DNS name of the syslog server address.

Syslog Server The syslog server port (default 514) to which syslog messaging is sent.
Port

Syslog Controls the BHSs ability to transmit syslog messages. When set to Learn from BHM
Transmission the BHM will control whether this BHS transmits syslog messages. When set to enable
or disable the BHS will control whether it sends syslog messages. This allows an
operator to override the BHM settings for individual BHSs in a sector.

Syslog This control determines whether the BHS attempts to use the minimum syslog level
Minimum Level defined by the BHM, or whether it uses a local defined value using the Syslog
Source Minimum Level parameter.

l When set to BHM preferred, use local when BHM configuration unavailable, and
if the BHS can register with a BHM, then it uses the Syslog Minimum Level
defined on that BHM. If the BHS cannot register then it uses its own Syslog
Minimum Level setting.

When set to Local only the BHS will always use its own Syslog Minimum Level setting
and ignores the BHM’s setting.

Syslog This provides a selection for the minimum syslog message severity that is sent to the
Minimum Level syslog server. Values range from fatal (highest severity and least verbose) to info
(lowest severity, maximum verbosity).

For example: If the Syslog Minimum Level is set to notice, then only messages with
severity notice and above are sent.

Configuring remote access

Accessing SM/BHS over-the-air by Web Proxy
The SM/BHS may be accessed via the AP/BHM management GUI by navigating to Home > Session Status
(or Home > Remote Subscribers for AP only) and clicking on the SM’s hyperlink.

For example, to access one of the SMs, click LUID: 002 – [0a-00-3e-37-b9-fd], as shown in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 272

Figure 37: AP Session Status page

The SessionStatus.xml hyper link allows user to export all displayed SM data in Session Status table into
an xml file.

To access any one of the SMs, click 450 Platform Family - SM hyperlink, as shown in below figure.

Figure 38: AP Remote Subscribers page

Monitoring the Link

Link monitoring procedure
After configuring the link, either an operator in the network office or the SM/BHS INSTALLER user in the
field (if read access to the AP/BHM is available to the INSTALLER) must perform the following
procedure. Who is authorized and able to do this depends on local operator password policy,
management VLAN setup and operational practices.

To monitor the link for performance, follow these instructions:

Procedure 14 Monitoring the AP-SM link

Chapter 1: Configuration 273

1 Access the web interface of the AP/BHM

2 In the left-side menu of the AP/BHM interface, select Home.

3 Click the Session Status tab.

Figure 39: Session Status page

4 The Device tab of Session Status List display all displayed SMs – MAC address, PMP/PTP
Hardware, Software Version, FPGA Version and State

5 Click Session Count tab of Session Status List to display values for Session Count, Reg Count, and
Re-Reg Count.

l Session Count: This field displays how many sessions the SM/BHS has had with the
AP/BHM. Typically, this is the sum of Reg Count and Re-Reg Count. However, the result of
internal calculation may display here as a value that slightly differs from the sum.

l Reg Count: When a SM/BHS makes a Registration Request, the AP/BHM checks its local
session database to see whether it was registered earlier. If the AP/BHM concludes that the
SM/BHS is not currently in session database and it is valid Registration Request, then the
request increments the value of this field.

l Re-Reg Count: When a SM/BHS makes a Registration Request, the AP/BHM checks its local
session database to see whether it was registered earlier. If the AP/BHM concludes that the
SM/BHS is currently in session database, then the request increments the value of this field.

l Typically, a Re-Reg is the case where both

l SM/BHS attempts to reregister for having lost communication with the AP/BHM.

l AP/BHM has not yet observed the link to the SM/BHS as being down.

See Session tab.

6 Click Power tab of Session Status list to display Downlink Rate, AP Rx Power (dBm), Signal
Strength Radio (dB) for Uplink and Signal to Noise Radio (dB) for Uplink.

See Power tab.

Chapter 1: Configuration 274

 7 Click Configuration tab of Session Status list to get QoS configuration details:

l Sustained Data Rate (kbps)

l Burst Allocation (kbit)
l Max Burst Rate (kbit)
l Low Priority CIR (kbps)

8 Briefly monitor these values, occasionally refreshing this page by clicking another tab and then the
Session Status tab again.

9 If these values are low (for example, 1, 1, and 0, respectively, meaning that the SM/BHS registered
and started a stable session once) and are not changing:

l Consider the installation successful.

l Monitor these values from the network office over the next several hours and days.

If these values are greater than 1, 1, and 0, or they increase while you are monitoring them,
troubleshoot the link. (For example, Use Receive Power Level for aiming and then use Link Tests
to confirm alignment).

Refer Viewing Session Status on page 1 for more details.

Exporting Session Status page of AP/BHM

The SessionStatus.xml hyper link allows user to export all displayed SMs or BHS data in Session Status
table into an xml file.

Figure 40: Exporting Session Status page of PMP 450m AP

In case of PMP, if the session status page does not list any SM, the SessionStatus.xml will still be visible
but the file would be empty. The file will contain data from all of the 5 different tables.

Export from command line

The scripts users can also get this file from command line, you have to authenticate successfully in order
to download the file.

http://169.254.1.1/SessionStatus.xml?CanopyUsername=test&CanopyPassword=test

Configuring quality of service

Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters
Point-to-multipoint links use the following MIR parameters for bandwidth management:

l Sustained Uplink Data Rate (kbps)

l Uplink Burst Allocation (kb)

Chapter 1: Configuration 275

 l Sustained Downlink Data Rate (kbps)
l Downlink Burst Allocation (kb)
l Max Burst Downlink Data Rate (kbps)
l Max Burst Uplink Data Rate (kbps)

Set each of these parameters per AP or per SM independently.

Note

You can refer below whitepaper for 450 Platform Family Max Burst MIR:

http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/resources/pmp-450-maxburst/

Token Bucket Algorithm

The software uses a token bucket algorithm that has the following features:

l Stores credits (tokens) for the SM to spend on bandwidth for reception or transmission.

l Drains tokens during reception or transmission.

l Refills with tokens at the sustained rate set by the network operator.

For each token, the SM can send toward the network in the uplink (or the AP can send toward the SM in
the downlink) an equivalent number of kilobits. Two buckets determine the permitted throughput: one in
the SM for uplink and one in the AP for downlink.

The applicable set of Uplink Burst Allocation and Downlink Burst Allocation parameters determine the
number of tokens that can fill each bucket. When the SM transmits (or the AP transmits) a packet, the
equivalent number of tokens is removed from the uplink (or downlink) bucket.

Except when full, the bucket is continuously being refilled with tokens at rates that the applicable set of
Sustained Uplink Data Rate and Sustained Downlink Data Rate parameters specify. The bucket often
drains at a rate that is much faster than the sustained data rate but can refill at only the sustained data
rate. Thus, the effects of the allocation and rate parameters on packet delay are as follows:

l The burst allocation affects how many kilobits are processed before packet delay is imposed.

l The sustained data rate affects the packet delay that is imposed.

MIR Data Entry Checking

Uplink and downlink MIR is enforced as shown in below figure.

Note

In these figures, entry refers to the setting in the data rate parameter, not the
burst allocation parameter.

Chapter 1: Configuration 276

Figure 41: Uplink and downlink rate caps adjusted to apply aggregate cap

For example, in the SM, if you set the Sustained Uplink Data Rate parameter to 2,000 kbps and the
Sustained Downlink Data Rate parameter to 10,000 kbps, then the uplink and downlink MIR that is
enforced for the SM can be calculated as shown in below figure.

Figure 42: Uplink and downlink rate cap adjustment example

In this example case, the derived 1,167-kbps uplink and 5,833-kbps downlink MIR sum to the fixed 7,000-
kbps aggregate cap of the SM.

Committed Information Rate (CIR)

The Committed Information Rate (CIR) capability feature enables the service provider to guarantee to
any subscriber that bandwidth will never decrease to below a specified minimum unless CIR is
oversubscribed or RF conditions are degraded. CIR is oversubscribed when there is not enough available
bandwidth to support CIR configuration for all subscribers. In this condition, SMs which are configured
with a nonzero CIR will all operate at the maximum data rate supported by the link (subject to Maximum
Information Rate and Burst Rate/Allocations). SMs which are configured with a CIR of 0 kbps will not
transmit until CIR-configured SMs have completed transmission. CIR may be configured independently
for low priority traffic, medium priority traffic, high priority traffic, and ultra high priority traffic.

Note

CIR settings only apply to the Legacy scheduler. Starting in release 16.1 a new
Proportional scheduler can optionally be enabled via Configuration -> Quality of
Service -> Scheduler setting. If Proportional Scheduler is set, CIR's are not used.

CIR parameters may be configured in the following ways:

l Web-based management GUI

l SNMP

Chapter 1: Configuration 277

 l Authentication Server (RADIUS) - when an SM successfully registers and authenticates, CIR
information is retrieved from the RADIUS server.

Active CIR configuration can be verified via the AP’s Home > Session Status page.

Bandwidth from the SM Perspective

In the SM, normal web browsing, e-mail, small file transfers and short streaming video are rarely rate
limited with practical bandwidth management (QoS) settings. When the SM processes large downloads
such as software upgrades and long streaming video or a series of medium-size downloads, the bucket
rapidly drains, the burst limit is reached, and some packets are delayed. The subscriber experience is
more affected in cases where the traffic is more latency sensitive.

Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

If the Burst Allocation is set to 1200 kb and the Sustained Data Rate is set to 128 kbps, a data burst of
1000 kb is transmitted at full speed because the Burst Allocation is set high enough. After the burst, the
bucket experiences a significant refill at the Sustained Data Rate. This configuration uses the advantage
of the settable Burst Allocation.

If both the Burst Allocation and the Sustained Data Rate are set to 128 kb, a burst is limited to the Burst
Allocation value. This configuration does not take advantage of the settable Burst Allocation.

If the Burst Allocation is set to 128 kb and the Sustained Data Rate is set to 256 kbps, the actual rate is the
burst allocation (but in kbps). As above, this configuration does not take advantage of the settable Burst
Allocation.

SM Prioritization
Note

This feature is not supported on PMP 450m.

SM Prioritization provides a way to designate a subset of a PMP sector's SMs with a guaranteed portion
of air interface resources - slots, which are handled first during scheduling. SMs by default are configured
in the SM Prioritization Low Group, and can be configured for the SM Prioritization High Group if desired.

The selection of which prioritization group each SM is configured in Configuration > Quality of Service
tab > SM Prioritization Configuration on the SM GUI, as shown in below figure.

Figure 43: SM Prioritization on SM

The feature does not take effect, however, until SM Prioritization is enabled on the AP, because the
scheduler runs on the AP. Prioritization Allocation percentages per group are configured on the AP to
determine how many timeslot resources are dedicated to each priority group.

Enabling of the feature and allocation percentages per group are configured in Configuration -> Quality
of Service tab -> SM Prioritization Configuration on the AP GUI as shown in SM Prioritization on AP.

With Cambium’s SM prioritization feature, we guarantee a percentage of slot resources to each

prioritization group. If the resource allocation demands of the SMs in the High Priority allocation group

Chapter 1: Configuration 278

are met without allocating all of that group’s allocation percentage, the remaining resources can be used
for any unmet demands for SMs in the Low Group. Similarly, if the resource allocation demands of the
SMs in the Low Priority allocation group are met without allocating all of that group’s allocation
percentage, the remaining resources can be used for any unmet demands for SMs in the High Group. If
the sector has 100% utilization, the resource allocation per group will equal the percentages configured
on the AP. This feature can be used to provide guaranteed frame allocation to high priority clients, such
as business customers. Although SM Prioritization Group 1 is called the “High Priority” group, and SM
Prioritization Group 2 is called the “Low Priority” group, this does not mean that 1 group is scheduled
resources before the other group. The intention is, by adjusting the number of SMs in the High Priority
group and the allocation percentages per group, the SMs in the High Priority group will have a higher
“slots/SMs” ratio.

The following figure shows the SM Prioritization configuration at the AP with this feature enabled.

Figure 44: SM Prioritization on AP

In the example shown in SM Prioritization on AP, 2 of the 8 SMs have been configured for the High
Priority Group. The other 6 are in the Low Priority group. 45% of the air interface timeslot resources have
been allocated to the Low Priority group. If, for example, all SMs are fully active and all resources in this
sector are fully utilized, then 55% of the air interface slot resources will be shared between the 2 High
Priority SMs, per direction, and the remaining 45% of the resources will be shared between the other 6
SMs.

If, on the other hand, only 40% of the resources are needed to meet the scheduling demands of the 2
High Priority SMs, the additional 15% that was pre-allocated to the High Priority group can then be used
for the Low Priority group, maintaining 100% slot utilization in the sector.

SM Prioritization with CIR

When the SM Prioritization feature is used with CIR, Cambium’s scheduler will first prioritize scheduling of
data channels configured with a CIR, but only within the limits of that SMs Prioritization Group allocation.
In the example configuration shown in SM Prioritization on AP, there are 6 SMs in the Low Prioritization
group. If 3 of those 6 SMs each have a 1Mbps CIR configured, the Cambium scheduler will attempt to
meet this 1Mbps CIR per SM before scheduling the other 3 SMs. But if both prioritization groups are
overloaded, this 3Mbps committed load on these 3 SMs will only be achieved if it can be done with 55% of
the resources or less – per direction.

Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ)

Note

This feature is not supported on PMP 450m.

This feature lets the user assign a percentage of air interface resources to each of the Data Channel
levels. The WFQ apply both to the DL and the UL. Note that there is no BC/MC traffic in the UL direction.

Chapter 1: Configuration 279

One of the benefits of WFQ is that the configuration can be accomplished at the AP rather than at each
individual SMs. This feature can be used with or in place of existing CIR settings. Unlike CIR, which is set in
kbps independent of the modulation rate, the WFQ feature operates on a percentage of air interface
resources, or timeslots.

Weighted Fair Queuing Configuration is an example of a WFQ configuration on the AP. This can be found
in Configuration > Quality of Service tab > Weighted Fair Queuing Configuration on the AP GUI.

In this particular sector, we have 30 Data channels spread across 8 registered SM’s. 4 levels of QoS have
been configured on 7 of the SM’s, 2 levels of QoS have been configured on 1 of the SM’s.

Figure 45: Weighted Fair Queuing Configuration

The above figure shows that 4% of the air interface resources have been reserved for
Broadcast/Multicast traffic, 22% of the available air interface timeslot have been reserved for the lowest
priority traffic, 22% for medium priority traffic, 26% for high priority traffic, and 26% for the highest
priority traffic (Ultra High Priority).

If, at any point in the time, the aggregate traffic load across all SMs on 1 QoS level is less than that level’s
Weighted Fair Queue allocation, then those unused slots will be allocated for traffic in other QoS levels,
based on strict priority.

For example, if, during peak traffic hours, the Ultra High, High, and Low priority Data channels were
experiencing heavy traffic loads, but the medium priority aggregate traffic load was light and only used
10% of the scheduling slots in a particular direction, the remaining unused 12% of the slots would be
allocated first to the Ultra High priority traffic in queue. When all the Ultra High priority traffic has been
scheduled, then any remaining unused slots would be used for High Priority traffic. Finally, after High
Priority traffic has been serviced, any remaining slots would be used for Low Priority traffic. The “Low
Priority” in the sub-heading “Low Priority SM’s WFQ Configuration” shown above simply indicates that
the SM Prioritization feature is turned off in this example above. The “Valid” indication in this screenshot
is a simple software check to make sure that the configured percentages add up to 100%.

WFQ with CIR

Note

This feature is not supported on PMP 450m.

Chapter 1: Configuration 280

The WFQ feature can be used with, or as a replacement for, configuring Committed Information Rates
(CIR) per data channel. When the WFQ feature is used with CIR’s, Cambium’s scheduler will first prioritize
scheduling of the Data channels configured with a CIR, but only within the limits of that QoS level’s WFQ
allocation.

Using the example configuration show in Weighted Fair Queuing Configuration, there are 8 high priority
Data channels. If 5 of those 8 Data channels have a CIR configured, then the Cambium scheduler will
prioritize traffic on those 5 Data channels up to their CIR limits, for those 26% of the timeslots allocated to
that QoS level. Operators should try to avoid oversubscription of CIR’s. But if CIR’s have been
oversubscribed at any 1 QoS level such that the desired CIR rates cannot be met within the limits of that
level’s WFQ allocation, the scheduler will use unallocated slots from another QoS level in strict priority
order.

From the prior example, if there is less than 22% of timeslots worth of traffic on the medium priority Data
channels, those unused slots would be allocated to Ultra High Priority traffic on Data channels that had
not met their CIR commitment within the WFQ allocation, then on High Priority Data channels that had
not met their CIR commitment within WFQ allocation, then on Low Priority Data channels that had not
met their CIR commitment with WFQ allocation, then on Ultra High Priority traffic above and beyond any
CIR configurations, and so on.

WFQ with SM Prioritization

Note

This feature is not supported on PMP 450m.

WFQ with SM Prioritization shows a WFQ configuration with the SM Prioritization feature also enabled.

Figure 46: WFQ with SM Prioritization

Chapter 1: Configuration 281

In the example shown in WFQ with SM Prioritization, 2 of the 8 SMs have been configured for the High
Priority Group. The other 6 are in the Low Priority group. 45% of air interface timeslot resources have
been allocated to the Low priority group. The same allocation rules described above still apply to the
WFQ allocation, but now these allocations are done within the confines of each Prioritization group. So, in
this configuration shown in WFQ with SM Prioritization, the 2 Medium Priority QoS level Data channels in
the High Priority SM Prioritization Group together share 12% of the committed air interface resources per
direction. (.55 x .22 = .12) The same CIR allocation rules apply. The Cambium scheduler will attempt to
meet those CIR allocations within the confines of that 12% allocation. If the traffic load on those 2 data
channels is light, for example using only 5% of the available slots, then the remaining 7% of resources can
be used for other traffic in a strict priority manner. (i.e. attempt to honor CIR’s first, then Ultra High
Priority traffic, then High Priority traffic, and so on, as described previously).

Proportional Scheduler
This feature, also known as the Rate Plan feature, allows a user to set Plans per SM in units of Kbps. The
proportional scheduler maintains the proportions of the SMs’ plans when the sector is congested. A
default plan setting per direction also exists on the AP and is used in case an SM is not configured with a
Plan (for example, the SM is not upgraded to system release 16.1 yet).

Figure 47: Scheduler Settings on AP

When selecting the Proportional scheduler, CIR is no longer applicable.

In system release 16.1, the SM supports a Proportional Scheduler setting section in the Configuration->
Quality of Service (QoS) page. These settings are applicable only if the AP is configured to use the
Proportional scheduler.

Figure 48: Proportional Scheduler Settings on SM

The above 6 settings parameters are described in detail in the Quality of Service (QoS) page of SM later
in this document.

The proportional scheduler works in conjunction with the Weighted Fair Queuing feature (in the products
that support it), but preserving the plans ratios takes precedence in the scheduler decisions over
honoring the WFQ percentages

Chapter 1: Configuration 282

High Priority Bandwidth Traffic
To support low-latency traffic such as VoIP (Voice over IP) or video, or critical traffic such as control
packets, the system implements priority data channels. Prior to PMP 450 Release 15.2, the system allowed
for a single High Priority Channel to be configured per SM and per direction, in addition to the default low
priority channel. This channel did not affect the inherent latencies in the system but allowed high-priority
traffic to be immediately served. The high-priority pipe separates low-latency traffic from traffic that is
latency tolerant, such as standard web traffic and file downloads.

From system release 15.2, the system supports up to 4 QoS levels, or data channels, per SM. These are
called Low, Medium, High, and Ultra High data channels.

The number of data channels available on the AP is still limited to 238 in release 15.2 This could be 238
SM’s each configured with a single Low Priority channel, or, for example, 59 SMs with 4 data channels
configured and 1 SM with 2 data channels configured.

A module prioritizes traffic by:

l reading the 802.1p field of the 802.1Q header in a received packet, where VLAN is enabled on the
module.
l comparing the 6-bit Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) field in the ToS byte of a received
packet to a corresponding value in the Diffserv tab of the Configuration page of the module.

Modules monitor ToS bytes with DSCP fields, but with the following differences:

l The 6-bit length of the field allows it to specify one of 64 service differentiations.
l These correlate to 64 individual (CodePoint) parameters in the Diffserv tab of the Configuration
page.
l The 8 Class Selector code points are fixed in code and not user settable.
l For any or all of the remaining 56 CodePoint parameters, you can specify a value of
l 0, 1 for low-priority handling.
l 2, 3 for medium-priority handling.
l 4,5 for high-priority handling.
l 6, 7 for ultra-high-priority handling.

The above mapping applies if 4 QoS levels are configured. If fewer than that are configured, see the
mapping table in the IPv4 and IPv6 Prioritization of this document.

Note

Ensure that your Differentiated Services domain boundary nodes mark any
entering packet, as needed, so that it specifies the appropriate Code Point for
that traffic and domain. This prevents theft of service level.

An example of the Diffserv page in the Configuration menu and parameter descriptions are provided
under DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM on page DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM. This tab and its rules are
identical from module type to module type. However, any of the 61 configurable Code Points can be set
to a different value from module to module, thus defining unique per-hop behavior for some traffic.

This tab in the AP sets the priorities for the various packets in the downstream (sent from the public
network). This tab in the SM sets the priorities for the various packets in the upstream (sent to the public
network).

Typically, some SMs attach to older devices that use the ToS byte as originally formatted, and others to
newer devices that use the DSCP field. The default values in the Diffserv page allow your modules to
prioritize traffic from the older devices roughly the same as they traditionally have. However, these

Chapter 1: Configuration 283

default values may result in more high-priority traffic as DSCP fields from the newer devices are read and
handled. So, after making changes in the Diffserv page, carefully monitor the high-priority channel for
high packet rates

l In SMs that you have identified as those to initially set and watch.
l Across your network when you have broadly implemented Code Point values, such as via SNMP.

Traffic Scheduling
The characteristics of traffic scheduling in a sector are summarized in below table.

Table 78: Characteristics of traffic scheduling

Category Factor Treatment

Throughput Aggregate throughput, less additional overhead 132 Mbps for 20 MHz

Higher for 30 MHz or 40 MHz

and lower for smaller
bandwidths.

Latency Number of frames required for the scheduling 1

process

Round-trip latency 6 ms

AP broadcast the download schedule No

Priority Data Allocation for uplink high-priority data channel Dynamic, based on amount of
Channels traffic on amount of traffic at these higher QoS high-priority traffic
levels.

Allocation for downlink high-priority data channel Dynamic, based on amount of

traffic on amount of traffic at these higher QoS high-priority traffic
levels

Order of transmission 1- Ultra High Priority data

channels below CIR limit

2- High Priority data channel's

below CIR limit

3- Medium Priority data

channels below CIR limit

4- Low Priority data channels

below CIR limit

5- Ultra High Priority data

channels above CIR limit

6- High Priority data channels

above CIR limit

7- Medium Priority data

channels above CIR limit

8- Low Priority data channels

above CIR limit

Chapter 1: Configuration 284

 Note

This strict priority transmission order is only true in all cases if the SM Prioritization and
Weighted Fair Queue features are disabled. If either feature is enabled, see the description
of those features in this document for how they impact and interact with this transmission
order.

Setting the Configuration Source

The AP includes a Configuration Source parameter, which sets where SMs that register to the AP are
controlled for MIR, CIR, VLAN, and the high-priority channel as follows. The Configuration Source
parameter affects the source of:

l all MIR settings:

l Sustained Uplink Data Rate

l Uplink Burst Allocation

l Max Burst Uplink Data Rate

l Sustained Downlink Data Rate

l Downlink Burst Allocation

l Max Burst Downlink Data Rate

l all CIR settings:

l Low Priority Uplink CIR

l Low Priority Downlink CIR

l Medium Priority Uplink CIR

l Medium Priority Downlink CIR

l High Priority Uplink CIR

l High Priority Downlink CIR

l Ultra High Priority Uplink CIR

l Ultra High Priority Downlink CIR

l all SM VLAN settings

l Dynamic Learning

l Allow Only Tagged Frames

l VLAN Aging Timeout

l Untagged Ingress VID

Chapter 1: Configuration 285

 l Management VID

l VLAN Membership

l the High Priority Channel setting

Table 79: Recommended combined settings for typical operations

Most operators who use… must set this in this web in the AP to…
parameter… page/tab…

no authentication server Authentication Mode Configuration/ Disabled

Security

Configuration Source Configuration/ SM

General

Wireless Manager (Authentication Authentication Mode Configuration/ Authentication

Server) Security Server

Configuration Source Configuration/ Authentication

General Server

RADIUS AAA server Authentication Mode Configuration/ RADIUS AAA

Security

Configuration Source Configuration/ Authentication

General Server

Table 80: Where feature values are obtained for an SM registered under an AP with Authentication Mode
set to something other than "DISABLED"

Configuration Values are obtained from

Source Setting
in the AP MIR Values VLAN Values Data Channel Count per SM

Authentication Authentication Authentication Server Authentication Server

Server Server

SM SM SM SM

Authentication Authentication Authentication Server, then Authentication Server, then

Server+SM Server SM SM

Note

Where Authentication Server, then SM is the indication, parameters for which

Authentication Server does not send values are obtained from the SM. This is the
case where the Authentication Server is operating on an Authentication Server
release that did not support the feature. This is also the case where the feature
enable/disable flag in Authentication Server is set to disabled. The values are
those previously set or, if none ever were, then the default values.

Where Authentication Server is the indication, values in the SM are disregarded.

Where SM is the indication, values that Authentication Server sends for the SM
are disregarded.

Chapter 1: Configuration 286

For any SM registered under an AP with Authentication Mode set to something other than "DISABLED",
the listed settings are derived as shown in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 287

Table 81: MIR, VLAN, HPC, and CIR Configuration Sources, Authentication Disabled

Configuration Values are obtained from

Source Setting
in the AP MIR VLAN Data Channel Count per SM CIR
Values Values Values

Authentication AP AP
Server

SM SM SM SM SM

Authentication SM SM SM SM
Server+SM

Note

For the case where configuration source is set to Authentication Server, the Data Channel
Count per SM, and the CIR values for those data channels, is defaulted to Low Priority data
Channel only with no CIR’s configured.

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of Service (QoS) page of AP
The QoS page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 288

Table 82: QoS page attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Sustained Downlink Specify the rate at which the AP is replenished with credits (tokens) for
Data Rate transmission to each of the SMs in its sector. This default imposes no restriction
on the uplink. See Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings.

Chapter 1: Configuration 289

Attribute Meaning

l Configuration Source

Sustained Uplink Data Specify the rate that each SM registered to this AP is replenished with credits
Rate for transmission. This default imposes no restriction on the uplink. See

l Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Downlink Burst Specify the maximum amount of data to allow the AP to transmit to any
Allocation registered SM before the AP is replenished with transmission credits at the
Sustained Downlink Data Rate. See

l Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Uplink Burst Specify the maximum amount of data to allow each SM to transmit before
Allocation being recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transmit
more. See Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Max Burst Downlink These parameters allow operators to specify the data rate at which an SM is
Data Rate allowed to transmit (until burst allocation limit is reached) before being
recharged at the Sustained Downlink Data Rate with credits to transit more.
When set to 0 (default), the burst rate is unlimited.

Max Burst Uplink These parameters allow operators to specify the data rate at which an SM is
Data Rate allowed to transmit (until burst allocation limit is reached) before being
recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transit more. When
set to 0 (default), the burst rate is unlimited.

Broadcast Downlink Broadcast Downlink CIR (Committed Information Rate, a minimum) supports
CIR system designs where downlink broadcast is desired to have higher priority
than other traffic. For many other system designs, especially typical internet
access networks, leave the Broadcast Downlink CIR at the default.

Broadcast Downlink CIR is closely related to the Broadcast Repeat Count

parameter, which is settable in the Radio tab of the Configuration page in the
AP: when the Broadcast Repeat Count is changed, the total of available
bandwidth is also changed, since packets are being sent one, two, or three
times, according to the setting in the Broadcast Repeat Count parameter.

Scheduler This parameter allows the operator to either select the Proportional scheduler
or the Legacy scheduler.

Chapter 1: Configuration 290

Attribute Meaning

Default Downlink Plan This parameter allows the operator to configure the default downlink plan. The
value range for this parameter is 1 – 310000 kbps.

Note: Configure this parameter when an SM is not configured with a plan or an

SM is still running software older than system release 16.1.

Default Uplink Plan This parameter allows the operator to configure the default uplink plan. The
value range for this parameter is 1 – 310000 kbps.

Note: Configure this parameter when an SM is not configured with a plan or an

SM is still running software older than system release 16.1.

Priority Precedence Allows operator to decide if 802.1p or DiffServ priority bits must be used first
when making priority decisions.

PPPoE Control Operators may configure the SM to utilize the high priority channel for PPPoE
Message Priority control messages. Configuring the SM in this fashion can benefit the continuity
of PPPoE connections when there are issues with PPPoE sessions being
dropped in the network. This prioritization may be configured in the DiffServ
tab in the Configuration menu of the SM.

Prioritize TCP ACK To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set
this parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user
perceives during transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying
acknowledgements.

Management Data This parameter allows to set the priority level of the VC used by Management
Priority Level data.

Low: Management data uses low priority VC.

High: Management data uses highest priority VC

SM Prioritization Low This parameter displays the number and percentage of SMs allocated with low
Group Count prioritization.

SM Prioritization High This parameter displays the number and percentage of SMs allocated with high
Group Count prioritization.

SM Prioritization To associate a group of SMs at the same prioritization level with a guaranteed
percentage of time for data to/from SMs in the group, enable this parameter.

Low Prioritization Allocation and High Prioritization Allocation parameters are

visible when SM Prioritization is enabled.

Note: SM Prioritization is not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Low Prioritization This parameter configures the percentage of timeslots dedicated to low
Allocation prioritization group of SMs

High Prioritization Once the Low Prioritization Allocation parameter is configured, this parameter
Allocation automatically allocates the percentage of slots dedicated to high prioritization
group of SMs such that the sum of parameters Low Prioritization Allocation
and High Prioritization Allocation is 100%.

Chapter 1: Configuration 291

Attribute Meaning

Data Channel Count - This parameter displays the percentage of time committed to transfer data
Low Priority to/from VCs at Low Priority QoS level.

Data Channel Count - This parameter displays the percentage of time committed to transfer data
Medium Priority to/from VCs at Medium Priority QoS level.

Data Channel Count - This parameter displays the percentage of time committed to transfer data
High Priority to/from VCs at High Priority QoS level.

Data Channel Count - This parameter displays the percentage of time committed to transfer data
Ultra High Priority to/from VCs at Ultra High Priority QoS level.

Weighted Fair To provide a committed frame space for all QoS levels, enable this parameter.
Queuing

WFQ Configuration (SM Prioritization Low Group):

If the percentage of Low Priority SMs is configured as 100%, or SM Prioritization is disabled, or the WFQ
feature is disabled, then the GUI displays the following set of five WFQ configuration parameters

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - broadcast/multicast.
Broadcast/Multicast

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Low low priority QoS level.
Priority

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Medium medium priority QoS level.
Priority

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - High high priority QoS level.
Priority

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Ultra ultra high priority QoS level.
High Priority

WFQ Configuration (SM Prioritization High Group):

If SM Prioritization is enabled and the percentage of Low Priority SMs is configured as anything less
than 100%, which means that the percentage of High Priority SMs is not 0, and the WFQ feature is
enabled, then the GUI displays the WFQ Configuration (SM Prioritization Low Group) and the following
set of five WFQ configuration parameters for High group.

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Low low priority QoS level.
Priority

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Medium medium priority QoS level.
Priority

Chapter 1: Configuration 292

 Attribute Meaning

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - High high priority QoS level.
Priority

Data Channel This parameter allows to configure the percentage of frame space allocated for
Allocation - Ultra ultra high priority QoS level.
High Priority

Speed Test Server IP This feature allows AP to prioritize traffic to/from a unique IP address . AP
prioritizes any packets to/from a unique IP address in the downlink direction.

Quality of Service (QoS) page of SM

The QoS page of SM is explained in below table.

Figure 49: QoS page attributes - SM

Chapter 1: Configuration 293

Attribute Meaning

Sustained Specify the rate that this SM is replenished with credits for transmission. This default
Uplink Data imposes no restriction on the uplink. See Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters
Rate
l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Sustained Specify the rate at which the AP is replenished with credits (tokens) for transmission to
Downlink Data this SM. This default imposes no restriction on the uplink. See Maximum Information
Rate Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Downlink Specify the maximum amount of data to allow the AP to transmit to this SM before the
Burst AP is replenished at the Sustained Downlink Data Rate with transmission credits. See
Allocation Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Uplink Burst Specify the maximum amount of data to allow this SM to transmit before being
Allocation recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transmit more. See
Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters

l Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings

l Configuration Source

Chapter 1: Configuration 294

Attribute Meaning

Max Burst These parameters allow operators to specify the data rate at which a SM is allowed to
Downlink Data transmit (until burst allocation limit is reached) before being recharged at the
Rate Sustained Downlink Data Rate with credits to transit more. When set to 0 (default), the
burst rate is unlimited.

Max Burst These parameters allow operators to specify the data rate at which a SM is allowed to
Uplink Data transmit (until burst allocation limit is reached) before being recharged at the
Rate Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transit more. When set to 0 (default), the
burst rate is unlimited.

Enable This parameter allows the operator to specify if Broadcast and Multicast data is rate-
Broadcast / limited. This data rate can be entered in Kbps or PPS (Packets Per Second).
Multicast Data
Rate

Broadcast / This parameter allows the operator to specify a data rate at which Broadcast and
Multicast Data Multicast traffic is sent via the radio link.
Rate

Number of This parameter allows the operator to specify the number of priority channels to be
Data Channels used for data transmission which is configurable from 1 to 4.

l 1: Select 1 to enable Low Priority channel.

l 2: Select 2 to enable Low and High Priority channels.

l 3: Select 3 to enable Low, Medium, and High Priority channels.

l 4: Select 4 to enable all channels.

For each enabled channel, configure the respective Downlink CIR and Uplink CIR.

Low Priority This parameter shows whether low priority data channel is enabled or not. Its value is
Channel derived based on the number of data channels selected.

This parameter is enabled by default.

Low Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which low priority traffic is sent over the
Downlink CIR downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Low Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which low priority traffic is sent over the uplink
Uplink CIR (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Medium This parameter shows whether medium priority data channel is enabled or not. Its
Priority value is derived based on the number of data channels selected.
Channel

Chapter 1: Configuration 295

Attribute Meaning

Medium This field indicates the minimum rate at which medium priority traffic is sent over the
Priority downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).
Downlink CIR
l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Medium This field indicates the minimum rate at which medium priority traffic is sent over the
Priority Uplink uplink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).
CIR
l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

High Priority This parameter shows whether high priority data channel is enabled or not. Its value is
Channel derived based on the number of data channels selected.

High Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which high priority traffic is sent over the
Downlink CIR downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

High Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which high priority traffic is sent over the
Uplink CIR uplink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Ultra High This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable one of the data channels with
Priority the highest priority bandwidth.
Channel

Downlink Plan This parameter allows the operator to configure the default downlink plan. The value
range for this parameter is 1 – 310000 kbps.

Uplink Plan This parameter allows the operator to configure the default uplink plan. The value
range for this parameter is 1 – 310000 kbps.

Weight This parameter ranges from 0.1 to 9.9 to prioritize SM services. This is a scaling factor
to be applied to the Downlink and Uplink plan.

Note: There is only one weight used for a plan in both directions. The default value for
this parameter is 1.0.

User Lock This parameter contains the following three modes.

Modulation
Disable: When disabled, the Proportional scheduler allocates resources to meet the
configured plan. When there is congestion, the Proportional scheduler allocates a
reduced value proportional to the other plans regardless of the modulation. If the
modulation of one SM degrades, the resources allocated to meet this SM’s plan
increases, affecting the overall sector capacity. The reduced capacity is divided among
all SMs proportional to their plans affecting all SMs.

Chapter 1: Configuration 296

Attribute Meaning

Enable: When enabled, the Locked Modulation drop-down list is enabled supporting
values from 1x to 8x.

Enable Below Threshold: When enabled, the Threshold Modulation drop-down list is
enabled supporting values from 2x to 8x. In this mode, the proportional scheduler
behaves as per the Disabled mode until SM’s modulation is above the configured
Threshold Modulation. If the modulation goes below the Threshold Modulation, then
proportional scheduler behaves as per the Enabled mode using the Threshold
Modulation as Locked Modulation.

Locked Using Locked Modulation, the proportional scheduler guarantees an amount of

Modulation resources required to transfer data corresponding to the configured plan. If the SM’s
modulation decreases, the resource allocation is not changed but the SM’s throughput
is reduced which is no longer proportional to the configured plan. Therefore, the SM’s
plan is scaled down proportional to the reduced modulation resulting in not affecting
other SMs’ throughput based on one SM’s modulation degrading.

Threshold Using Threshold Modulation, if one SM’s modulation degrades, then all other SMs’
Modulation throughputs are affected as long as the degraded modulation is above the threshold.
Once the modulation goes below the threshold, the reaources are no longer increased
for that SM, effectively capping the effect to other SMs.

Priority Allows operator to decide if 802.1p or DiffServ priority bits must be used first when
Precedence making priority decisions.

PPPoE Operators may configure the SM to utilize the high priority channel for PPPoE control
Control messages. Configuring the SM in this fashion can benefit the continuity of PPPoE
Message connections when there are issues with PPPoE sessions being dropped in the network.
Priority This prioritization may be configured in the DiffServ tab in the Configuration menu of
the SM.

Prioritize TCP To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
ACK parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives during
transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements. This
parameter, when enabled, can be particularly useful when running bi-direction FTP
sessions over the link. If a link is primarily used for video surveillance, it is
recommended to configure this parameter to Disabled.

Prioritization This parameter allows to configure the SM with high or low prioritization.
Group

Prioritized This feature allows SM to prioritize traffic to a unique IP address. SM prioritizes any
Speed Test packets to a unique IP address in the uplink direction. SMs learn the Speed Test
Servers server’s IP address from the AP.

Quality of Service (QoS) page of BHM

The QoS page of BHM is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 297

Table 83: QoS page attributes - BHM

Attribute Meaning

PPPoE Control Operators may configure the BHM to utilize the high priority channel for PPPoE
Message control messages. Configuring the BHM in this fashion can benefit the continuity of
Priority PPPoE connections when there are issues with PPPoE sessions being dropped in the
network. This prioritization may be configured in the DiffServ tab in the Configuration
menu of the BHS.

Prioritize TCP To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
ACK parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives
during transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements.
This parameter, when enabled, can be particularly useful when running bi-direction
FTP sessions over the link. If a link is primarily used for video surveillance, it is
recommended to configure this parameter to Disabled.

Management This parameter allows to set the priority level of the VC used by Management data.
Data Priority
Low: Management data uses low priority VC.
Level
High: Management data uses highest priority VC

Speed Test This feature allows BHM to prioritize traffic from a unique IP address. BHM prioritizes
Server IP any packets from a unique IP address in the downlink direction.

Quality of Service (QoS) page of BHS

The QoS page of BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 1: Configuration 298

Table 84: QoS page attributes - BHS

Attribute Meaning

Number of This parameter allows the operator to specify the number of priority channels to be
Data Channels used for data transmission which is configurable from 1 to 4.

l 1: Select 1 to enable Low Priority channel.

l 2: Select 2 to enable Low and High Priority channels.

l 3: Select 3 to enable Low, Medium, and High Priority channels.

l 4: Select 4 to enable all channels.

For each enabled channel, configure the respective Downlink CIR and Uplink CIR.

Low Priority This parameter shows whether low priority data channel is enabled or not. Its value is
Channel derived based on the number of data channels selected.

Chapter 1: Configuration 299

Attribute Meaning

This parameter is enabled by default.

Low Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which low priority traffic is sent over the
Downlink CIR downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Low Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which low priority traffic is sent over the
Uplink CIR uplink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Medium This parameter shows whether medium priority data channel is enabled or not. Its
Priority value is derived based on the number of data channels selected.
Channel

Medium This field indicates the minimum rate at which medium priority traffic is sent over the
Priority downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).
Downlink CIR
l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Medium This field indicates the minimum rate at which medium priority traffic is sent over the
Priority Uplink uplink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).
CIR
l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

High Priority This parameter shows whether high priority data channel is enabled or not. Its value is
Channel derived based on the number of data channels selected.

High Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which high priority traffic is sent over the
Downlink CIR downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

High Priority This field indicates the minimum rate at which high priority traffic is sent over the
Uplink CIR uplink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is degraded).

l Committed Information Rate (CIR)

Note: CIR values are not applicable for proportional scheduler.

Ultra High This parameter allows the operator to enable or disable one of the data channels with
Priority the highest priority bandwidth.
Channel

Chapter 1: Configuration 300

Attribute Meaning

Priority Allows operator to decide if 802.1p or DiffServ priority bits must be used first when
Precedence making priority decisions.

PPPoE Control Operators may configure the BHS to utilize the high priority channel for PPPoE
Message control messages. Configuring the BHS in this fashion can benefit the continuity of
Priority PPPoE connections when there are issues with PPPoE sessions being dropped in the
network. This prioritization may be configured in the DiffServ tab in the Configuration
menu of the BHS.

Prioritize TCP To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
ACK parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives
during transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements.
This parameter, when enabled, can be particularly useful when running bi-direction
FTP sessions over the link. If a link is primarily used for video surveillance, it is
recommended to configure this parameter to Disabled.

Prioritized This feature allows BHS to prioritize traffic to a unique IP address. BHS prioritizes any
Speed Test packets to a unique IP address in the uplink direction. BHS learn the Speed Test
Servers server’s IP address from the BHM.

Citizens Broadband Radio Service (CBRS)

Citizens Broadband Radio Service subscription for the CBRS-compliant devices in 3.6 GHz band (3550
MHz to 3700 MHz).

Note

Assuming the user follows the Cambium recommended procedures for using the CBRS
cnMaestro Management tool and then syncing those parameters to the radio, nothing at all
needs to be set by the operator directly on this Configuration CBRS radio page. All of this
will be pushed or pulled from cnMaestro. Definitions are being included for completeness.

PMP 450 Series AP/BHM - CBRS configuration

PMP 450 series CBRS configuration page of AP/BHM is explained in the below table:

Chapter 1: Configuration 301

Table 85: PMP 450Series AP/BHM - CBRS Configuration

Attribute Meaning

Citizen Enable/Disable the CBRS operation until the device is valid.

Broadband
Radio Service

Log Level Log level can be increased to Debug or decreased to Error level accordingly and logs
will appear.

l Debug: Logs used to help in debugging.

l Info:Logs the message correspond to normal applicationbehavior.
l Error:Logs the issues thataffect the usage orperformance ofthesystem.

Reboot for This attribute applies only the 450m AP. System Release 20.2’s multigrant feature
Channel supports automatic bandwidth changes as individual multigrants are terminated or
Bandwidth suspended or authorized. Disabling this flag will prevent the 450m from automatically
Change making these bandwidth changes on the fly. The 450m is the only Cambium AP that
requires a reboot to apply a bandwidth change.

Alternate This CBRS feature flag enables the AP to automatically search for new channels for the
Channel sector to operate on when the existing channels are suspended due to DPA activation,
Selection or terminated without a suggested EIRP to use from the SAS.

Chapter 1: Configuration 302

Attribute Meaning

For PMP 450m operators that wish to avoid unexpected reboots due to grant
terminations or suspensions, this feature flag could be left enabled, while the Reboot
for Channel Bandwidth Change flag is disabled. Then, if some or all of the multigrants
held by the AP are suspended or terminated, an alternate channel selection (channel
hunt) is triggered, but only to channels of the same operating bandwidth. This avoids
the potential of an unexpected reboot, but at the possible risk of no such channel being
found, in which case the AP will remain off the air until a suspension is automatically
cleared or operator action is taken. Additionally, a channel hunt to a channel of the
same bandwidth may result in poorer performance than a channel hunt to a cleaner
channel of smaller bandwidth.

Change When enabled, this feature allows the AP to automatically find and move to a new
Channel if channel or decrease the bandwidth, when more than the SM Percentage Threshold for
Only SMs are Channel Change percentage of SMs have been impacted by termination or suspension,
Impacted even though the AP itself has not been impacted.

Not applicable for PTP configurations.

SM Displays the percentage of SMs that need to be impacted by termination or suspension

Percentage for the feature to be invoked, even though the AP itself has not been impacted.
Threshold for
Note that the Alternate Channel Selection feature must also be enabled for the AP to
Channel
hunt for a new channel due to the Change Channel if SMs are Impacted feature. If an
Change
operator elects to run with Alternate Channel Selection enabled but Change Channel if
SMs are impacted feature is disabled, the AP still performs automatic channel selection,
but only in cases where the AP is directly impacted by terminations or suspensions.

If the Alternate Channel Selection feature is disabled, but the Change Channel if SMs
are Impacted feature is enabled, if enough SMs are impacted by terminations or
suspensions, the AP still reduces the Bandwidth if authorized grants are available, but it
will not hunt for a new channel.

Not applicable for PTP configurations.

Original When this feature is triggered via SM suspensions, the AP continues to heartbeat the
Channel original channels for itself and all the SMs, while operating on the temporary channels
Restore Time or reduced bandwidth for at least this length of a period after moving to these
temporary channels or reducing bandwidth. When this timer expires, the AP can move
back to the original channels and/or bandwidth if enough suspended SMs have
become authorized on the original channels.

Not applicable for PTP configurations.

User ID User ID assigned by SAS is part of the Registration request message

Include User For operators using Federated Wireless or Commscope SAS, this option will be
ID available and set to Enabled by default. By appending it to the Co-Existence
parameters sent to the SAS, it seperates and allows the SAS to handle the possibility of
2 operators accidently picking the same CoExistence parameters. If an operator wishes
to frequency coordinate on the same channel with another operator or between PMP
and LTE technology, this parameter can be disabled and the Co-Existence group
parameters set the same - coordinated. For Google, these parameters are unique to an
organization, so this parameter is not available for operators using Google SAS. See
Cambium 20.3 training slides for more information.

Chapter 1: Configuration 303

Attribute Meaning

Coexistence This parameter is also known as the identifier of a Common Channel Group (CCG) in
Sector ID CBRS Alliance or Principal Subordinate Single Frequency Group (SFG) in WinnForum
Release 2 . The Google SAS portal currently calls it "Same Frequency" in the Frequency
Management subsection of the per-device Configuration Tab as well as at the top of
the per-device Coex tab. Although this can be edited, it defaults to the MAC address of
the AP/BHM of this sector. The purpose of the sector ID is, it helps the SAS identify
which SM’s are grouped with a particular AP (same frequency and bandwidth as the
AP).

Coexistence This parameter defines a CBRS interference coordination group. It is called Spectrum
Spectrum Reuse in WInnForum Release 2, or Interference Coordination Group (ICG) in CBRS
Reuse ID Alliance. The Google SAS portal urrently calls it "Frequency Reuse" in the Frequency
Management subsection of the per-device Configuration tab as well as at the top of the
per-device Coex tab. Multiple sectors can be assigned the same Reuse ID. ASAS will not
attempt to coordinate interference between devices using the same Reuse ID. For
example, an operator using 2 non-overlapping center frequencies in what is typically
called an ABAB deployment could assign 1 Reuse ID to all sectors using center
frequency “A”, and a second Reuse ID to all sectors using center frequency “B”.

CPI Encoded CPI information is the set of encoded installation parameters by CPI and the signed
Data installation parameter provided by the CPI. It receives the parameter with a registration
message from the SAS.

l Delete CPI Data: CPI data can be deleted by selecting the Delete CPI Data.
l Restore CPI Data: CPI data can be restored by selecting the Restore CPI Data.

CPI Data Displays the status of the CPI data is in use or unchanged.
Status

Latitude Displays latitude of the device location in degrees.

Longitude Displays longitude of the CBSD antenna location in degrees.

Height Displays device antenna height in meters.

Height Type Should be AGL or AMSL as follows:

l AGL height is measured relative to the ground level.

l AMSL height is measured relative to the mean sea level.

Horizontal Displays positive number in meters to indicate the accuracy of the device antenna
Accuracy horizontal location.

Vertical Displays positive number in meters to indicate the accuracy of the device antenna
Accuracy vertical location.

Azimuth Displays Boresight direction of the horizontal plane of the antenna in degrees with
respect to true north.

Downtilt Displays the antenna down tilt in degrees.

Gain Integrated antenna gain: Peak gain of the integrated antenna.

External antenna gain: peak gain of the external antenna connected to a device.

Chapter 1: Configuration 304

Attribute Meaning

Beamwidth Displays the beamwidth of the antenna in the horizontal plane in degrees.

EIRP Display max Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIPR) capability of the device.
Capability

CPI ID The assigned CPI ID unique to the installer that is certifying the CBRS installation.

CPI Name The entered name of the Certified professional installer.

Install Thetime of thecertifiedinstallation for this radio.

Certification
Time

PMP 450 Series SM/BHS-CBRS configuration

PMP 450 series CBRS configuration page of SM/BHS is explained in the below table:

Table 86: PMP 450SeriesSM/BHS CBRS Configuration

Chapter 1: Configuration 305

 Attribute Meaning

CPI Encoded Data Refer table PMP 450Series AP/BHM – CBRS

Configuration for parameter descriptions
CPI Data Status

Latitude

Longitude

Height

Height Type

Horizontal Accuracy

Vertical Accuracy

Azimuth

Downtilt

Gain

Beamwidth

EIRP Capability

CPI ID

CPI Name

Install Certification Time

Installation Color Code

With this feature enabled on the AP and SM, operators may install and remotely configure SMs without
having to configure matching color codes between the modules. While the SM is accessible for
configuration from above the AP (for remote provisioning) and below the SM (for local site provisioning),
no user data is passed over the radio link. When using the Installation Color Code feature, ensure that the
SM is configured with the factory default Color Code configuration (Color Code 1 is “0”, Color Code 2-10
set to “0” and “Disable”). The status of the Installation Color Code can be viewed on the AP Eval web GUI
page, and when the SM is registered using the Installation Color Code the message “SM is registered via
ICC – Bridging Disabled!” is displayed in red on every SM GUI page. The Installation Color Code parameter
is configurable without a radio reboot for both the AP and SM. If an SM is registered via Installation Color
Code and the feature is then disabled, operators will need to reboot the SM or force it to reregister (i.e.
using the Rescan APs functionality on the AP Eval page).

Chapter 1: Configuration 306

Figure 50: Installation Color Code of AP

Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66

This feature allows an SM to get its configuration via DHCP option 66. This can be used for the initial
configuration of an SM as well as managing the configuration of SMs on an ongoing basis. Here is how it
works in brief:

l When the SM boots up, if it is set to use DHCP client, it will send out a DHCP Discover packet which
includes a request for DHCP Option 66.
l In case of a brand new SM out of the box, the DHCP Discover packet is sent out if the SM connects
to an AP using Installation Color Code (ICC), even though DHCP client is not enabled in factory
default config.
l An appropriately configured DHCP server will respond with a DHCP Offer and include a URL in
response to the Option 66 request. The URL should point to the configuration file.
l The device will download the configuration file and apply it. The device will reboot automatically if
needed. (Note: this requires “rebootIfRequired” flag to be added to the config file. See Creating a
Golden config file

Configuration Steps
Procedure 15 Zero Touch Configuration steps:

1 Create the golden config file(s)

2 Host it on an TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS server

3 Configure the DHCP server to return the URL of the golden config file in option 66

When the SM boots up, it will get the URL for the golden config from the DHCP server via option 66,
download it and apply it.

If all the SMs are configured exactly the same, then you can create just new golden config file that can be
used with all SMs.

If the SMs are not configured the same, see if it is possible to group the SMs such that SMs with the same
configuration are served by the same DHCP pool. User can then create multiple golden config files and
configure the DHCP server to use the appropriate config file for each pool.

User can also create one config file per SM. This provides the most flexibility, but is practical only if you
have a software tool/script to generate the config files for each MAC address. The files should be named

Chapter 1: Configuration 307

<mac>.cfg where <mac> is the MAC address of the SM, and stored in the same directory on the file
server. The DHCP server should be configured to return the directory name ending with a ‘/’ in option 66.
The SM will automatically add “<mac>.cfg” to the path and get its config file.

If some configuration is unique per SM, but rest of the configuration is common, the SMs can be staged
with the unique part, and use option 66 to manage the common part. For example, if each SM needs to
have its coordinates set, don’t include the coordinates in the golden config file. Instead, configure the
coordinates for each SM manually. Manage the rest of the configuration using DHCP option 66.

Creating a Golden config file

The easiest way to create the golden config file is to configure an SM, export its configuration and edit it.
To export the configuration file from the GUI of the SM, go to “Configuration > Unit Settings” tab, go to
the “Download Configuration File” section and click on the “<mac>.cfg” link. This will give you a text file
in JSON format. You can edit this file in a text editor but it’s easier to use a JSON editor like
https://www.jsoneditoronline.org/.

Strip down the config file to remove sections and entries that don’t care about, and keep only the items
that require changes. If there are many required changes, it can easily get confusing. To identify the exact
items changes, first reset the SM to factory default, export the config file, make the necessary changes,
export a second config file, then use a tool like WinMerge (http://winmerge.org/) to identify the
differences.

The config file contains the following informational entries at the top level.

“cfgUtcTimestamp”: “cfgUtcTimestamp”,

“swVersion”: “CANOPY 15.1 SM-AES”,

“cfgFileString”: “Canopy configuration file”,

“srcMacAddress”: “0a-00-3e-a2-c2-74”,

“deviceType”: “5.4/5.7GHz MIMO OFDM - Subscriber Module”,

“cfgFileVersion”: “1.0”

The “cfgUtcTimestamp”, “swVersion”, “srcMacAddress” and “deviceType” lines can be deleted. Do not
delete the “cfgFileString” and “cfgFileVersion” entries.

Next, create an object named “configFileParameters” at the top level. Under that, add a parameter called
“rebootIfRequired” and set it to true. This tells the SM to reboot automatically if a reboot is needed to
apply the new configuration.

A sample configuration file that has been edited for use via DHCP option 66 is given below.

“userParameters”: {

“smNetworkConfig”: {

“networkAccess”: 1

},

“location”: {

“siteName”: “Test site”

},

“smRadioConfig”: {

Chapter 1: Configuration 308

 “frequencyScanList”: [

5475000,

5480000

],

“colorCodeList”: [

“colorCode”: 42,

“priority”: 1

},

“networkConfig”: {

“lanDhcpState”: 1

},

“cfgFileVersion”: “1.0”,

“cfgFileString”: “Canopy configuration file”,

“configFileParameters”: {

“rebootIfRequired”: true

When configuration is imported, only the items that exist in the configuration file are modified.
Parameters that are not in the imported file are not changed. If user wish to revert those settings to their
factory default values, please add a “setToDefaults” item under “configFileParameters” section with a
value of true.

“cfgFileVersion”: “1.0”,

“cfgFileString”: “Canopy configuration file”,

“configFileParameters”: {

“rebootIfRequired”: true,

“setToDefaults”: true

In case, the SM needs to fetch the configuration file on each boot up even when not connecting to AP via
ICC, set “Network Accessibility” to “Public” and “DHCP State” to “Enabled” in the “Configuration > IP”
page before exporting the configuration.

Chapter 1: Configuration 309

Hosting the config file
Copy the golden configuration file to an FTP, TFTP, HTTP or HTTPS server. This location can be password
protected; you just have to include the user name and password in the URL.

DHCP server configuration

Configure DHCP server to return the full URL to the golden config file as the value of DHCP option 66.

The following example explains how to make the change for Windows Server 2008. Adapt it to your
specific DHCP server.

Procedure 16 DHCP server configuration

1 Click “Start > Administrative Tools > DHCP”

2 If you have multiple “Scopes” defined, identify the correct “Scope” that will serve IP addresses for
the SMs

3 Right click on “Scope Option” under the correct “Scope” and select “Configure Options”

4 In the “Scope Options” dialog, scroll down to “066 Boot Server Host Name”, select the checkbox
and enter the full URL to the golden config file as the “String value”. Then click “OK”.

Chapter 1: Configuration 310

 5 In the DHCP snap-in window, right click and “Refresh” to see the DHCP option 66 in the list of
DHCP options

Supported URL Formats

FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS URLs are supported. Some examples are given below.

l ftp://10.120.163.253/canopy.cfg

l ftp://admin:[email protected]/canopy.cfg (login as admin with password admin123)

l tftp://10.120.163.253/canopy.cfg

l http://10.120.163.253/golden-config.cfg

l https://10.120.163.253/smconfig/golden-config.cfg

User can also specify the URL pointing to a directory and not a specific file. Terminate the URL with a ‘/’
to indicate that it is a directory and not a file. Use this format when each SM has its own individual config
file. The directory should contain files named “<mac>.cfg”, one for each SM.

For example:

ftp://10.120.163.253/smconfig/

In this case, the SM will append “<mac>.cfg” to the path and try to get that file. For example, if the SM’s
MAC address is 0a-00-3e-a2-c2-74, it will request for ftp://10.120.163.253/smconfig/0a003ea2c274.cfg.
This mechanism can be used to serve individual config file for each SM.

Troubleshooting
1 Ensure that the___14 SM is running 13.3 or newer version of software.

2 If the SM has factory default config, confirm ICC is enabled on the AP, so the SM can connect to it.

3 If the SM is connecting to the AP using a color code other than ICC, make sure the SM has
“Network Accessibility” set to “Public” and “DHCP State” set to “Enabled” in the “Configuration >
IP” page.

4 Make sure the golden config file does not turn off “Network Accessibility” or “DHCP State”. If it
does, the SM will no longer request the config file when it is rebooted.

5 Check the event log of the SM to see the status of the configuration file import including any
errors that prevented it from importing the file.

6 Capture the DHCP Offer packet from the DHCP server to the SM and verify that Option 66 has the
expected URL.

Chapter 1: Configuration 311

Configuring Radio via config file
The 450 Platform Family supports export and import of a configuration file from the AP or SM as a text
file. The configuration file is in JSON format.

To export or import the configuration file, the logged in user needs to be an ADMINISTRATOR and it
must not be a “read-only” account.

The exported configuration file contains the complete configuration including all the default values. To
keep a backup of the current configuration, the file can be saved as-is and imported later.

While importing a configuration file, it can be either imported the full configuration or a sparse
configuration containing only the items that need to be changed. If a sparse configuration file is
imported, only the items in the file will be imported. Other configuration will remain unchanged. There
could also be used a special flag in the configuration file to tell the device to apply the configuration
starting from factory default (ReferProcedure 19 Special Headers for configuration file).

Import and Export of config file

The config file import and export is supported in Configuration > Unit Settings page. The procedure for
importing and exporting config file is explained below.

Chapter 1: Configuration 312

Figure 51: Configuration File upload and download page

The DHCP server configuration procedure is as follows:

Procedure 17 DHCP server configuration

1 Login to the GUI and go to Configuration > Unit Settings.

2 Under Download Configuration File tab, click on the “<mac>.cfg” link, where <mac> is the MAC
address of the device (for example, “01003ea2c274.cfg”).

3 Save the file to the local disk.

The below procedure is to be followed for Importing a config file

Procedure 18 Import the configuration from the GUI

1 Login to the GUI and go to Configuration → Unit Settings.

2 Click on “Browse” button under “Upload and Apply Configuration File” tab and select the
configuration file from disk.

3 Click “Upload” followed by “Apply Configuration File” button click.

4 The “Status of Configuration File” section will show the results of the upload.

5 Review it to make sure there are no errors. Then click on “Reboot” to reboot with the imported
configuration

The special headers for config file is explained below:

Procedure 19 Special Headers for configuration file

1 A “configFileParameters” section can be added to the header to control the behavior of the device
when importing configuration.

2 The “setToDefaults” when set to “true” tell the device to reset to factory default configuration and
apply the configuration in the file on top of that. So any attribute not in the configuration file will
be set to its factory default value. By default, the configuration in the file is merged with the
existing configuration on the device.

Chapter 1: Configuration 313

 The “rebootIfRequired” flag when set to “true” tell the device to reboot automatically if needed to
apply the configuration change. By default, the device will not reboot automatically.

“cfgFileString”: “Canopy configuration file”,

“cfgFileVersion”: “1.0”,

“configFileParameters”: {

“setToDefaults”:true,

“rebootIfRequired”:true,

Configuring cnMaestroTM Connectivity

450 Platform Family network can be onboarded, configured and managed using cnMaestro™ Cloud or On
Premises Server.

Onboarding
Onboarding can be done in one of several ways:

l Using Cambium ID and Onboarding key

l Using Manufacturer’s Serial Number (Only if it starts with an “M” and is 12 characters long)

l On Premises Zero Touch onboarding of AP/SM using DHCP option 43 and 15

l PMP SM Zero touch onboarding to the cnMaestro server where PMP AP is onboarded.

To configure the PMP devices, enable Remote Management under Configuration->cnMaestro as shown in
below figure.

Figure 52: Configuring cnMaestro

Chapter 1: Configuration 314

Attribute Meaning

Remote This field enables/disables remote management of 450 Platform Family

Management products.

cnMaestro URL This field allows to enter cnMaestro URL e.g.

https://cloud.cambiumnetworks.com

Or cnMaestro on premises URL

Connection Status This field indicates cnMaestro connectivity status.

Cambium ID This field allows to enter Cambium ID for onboarding 450 Platform devices.

Onboarding Key This field allows to enter Onboarding Key for onboarding.

AccountID This field indicates Account ID of the customer.

Device Agent This field shows device agent version.

Version

Prerequisites for onboarding to cnMaestro™

l Devices types must be PMP 450m Series, PMP/PTP 450 Series, PMP/PTP 450i/450b Series or
PMP 430 Series SMs (interoperability mode only).

l Minimum required software version of 14.2.1. Device software images can be downloaded from
http://support.cambiumnetworks.com or from the On Premises cnMaestro server by navigating to
Operate >Software Update->Manage Images. Select

l Device type to display the available images and then click the download icon as shown in below
figure.

Figure 53: Software Upgrade from cnMaestro™

Chapter 1: Configuration 315

 l IP connectivity between PMP Device and the cnMaestro server is established. Ensure Port 443 is
open in the firewall as this port is used for secure communication between the PMP device and the
cnMaestro server through web sockets. In addition, if the PMP device and cnMaestro™ server are
on different subnets, proper routes should be established for communication.

l For PMP AP, a valid DNS setting is required so that the AP will be able to resolve the cnMaestro
URL. DNS settings can be verified by performing a DNS lookup under Tools->DNS Test on the AP
as shown in below figure.

Chapter 1: Configuration 316

Figure 54: DNS Test for cnMaestro™ connectivity

l If the SM is in Bridge mode, then LAN1 must have public equestility with a public IP assigned and
corresponding DNS setting.

l If the SM is in NAT mode, then Remote Management should be enabled with the standalone
configuration option and DNS settings.

Knowledge Based articles for onboarding

For onboarding the devices to cloud server and troubleshooting the onboarding issues in cloud server
please see the following link:

http://community.cambiumnetworks.com/t5/cnMaestro/Device-On-boarding/td-p/51484

For onboarding the devices to on Premises server and configuring the DHCP server options for on
boarding please see the following link:

http://community.cambiumnetworks.com/t5/cnMaestro/Device-Onboarding-and-Linux-DHCP-Options-
for-cnMaestro-On/m-p/55187#U55187

Order of Device Onboarding

The device discovery order is as follows in On Permises cnMaestro™ Server. If any of the options is not
configured, the discovery method will fallback to the next option:

1. Static cnMaestro URL

2. Zero Touch token (on boarding of PMP SMs when the corresponding AP is on boarded)
3. DHCP Option 43
4. DHCP Option 15
5. https://cloud.cambiumnetworks.com

Device Agent Logs

For debugging any onboarding issues please check the device agent logs by navigating to Logs->Device
Agent Logs on the PMP device GUI as shown in Device Agent Logs. In addition, a tech support dump can
for the PMP device can be obtained from cnMaestro™ by navigating to Monitor->Tools menu after

Chapter 1: Configuration 317

selecting the particular PMP device in the tree and clicking the tech support file icon. This can be send to
Cambium support for further troubleshooting.

Figure 55: Device Agent Logs

CBRS Log
The CBRS Log page shows detailed information on each CBRS grant per device. Only 1 device is shown
on the page at a time. The device can be selected in the "Current CBSD" pull down as shown in the figure
below.

Chapter 1: Configuration 318

Figure 56: CBRS Log

Monitoring Tools for PMP Devices on cnMaestro™

cnMaestro™ as of this release offers several debugging tools for PMP devices. Some examples are:

l Pictorial view of network hierarchy

l Device status
l Tech support file
l Throughput
l Alarms
l Reboot
l Debug Logs
l Network connectivity – ping and DNS lookup

Chapter 1: Configuration 319

Figure 57: Example cnMaestro™ screenshot

For more information on these tools please see

http://community.cambiumnetworks.com/t5/cnMaestro/How-to-use-the-cnMaestro-Tools-for-
Troubleshooting-Device-or/m-p/54503#U54503

Zero Touch on boarding of the PMP SMs when the corresponding

AP is on boarded
First a link should be established between the PMP AP and SM either by configuring manually or using the
ICC. Once the AP and SM link is established, the AP must be onboarded to cnMaestro™ using one of
several ways detailed above under the Onboarding section. Once the AP is onboarded to cnMaestro™
Cloud or On premises cnMaestro™server, the SMs under the AP will automatically onboard to cnMaestro™
using a Zero touch token that is communicated between the AP and SMs. This is applicable to existing
SMs registered to the AP as well as new SMs registering to the AP for the first time. The SMs appear on
the onboarding queue of cnMaestro™ and the operator must “Approve” the devices in order to manage
them.

The following operations for PMP Devices are available on cnMaestro™:

l Monitor the device details in the Dashboard page by navigating to the Monitor > Dashboard menu
and selecting the PMP AP/SM in the tree.
l Monitor notifications related to the PMP AP/SM by navigating to the Monitor > Notifications Menu
and selecting the PMP AP/SM in the tree.
l Monitor device statistics on the statistics page by navigating to the Monitor > Statistics menu and
selecting the PMP AP/SM in the tree, then selecting the PMP AP or PMP SM in the Device type
dropdown.
l Monitor Performance graphs related to the PMP AP/SM by navigating to the Monitor >
Performance menu and selecting the required performance graph (i.e Throughput, SMs,
Modulation) and selecting the PMP AP/SM in the tree.
l Troubleshoot the device on the Troubleshooting page by navigating to the Monitor > Tools menu
and selecting the PMP AP/SM in the tree.
l Configure the devices by navigating to the Configure >Devices menu and selecting the PMP
AP/SM in the tree and selecting the config template that needs to be pushed to the device.
Configuration templates need to be created before the configuration can be pushed to the device.
The template can be created by copying the existing configuration from the view device
configuration link provided in the same page and then modifying the template as needed and then
pushing to the same device or other similar devices. Template needs to be properly reviewed for
IP Address and other critical parameters to avoid stranding SMs (resulting in a truck roll) by

Chapter 1: Configuration 320

 pushing an incorrect configuration. Configuration templates can be created by navigating to the
Configure->Templates page and selecting the PMP device type while creating the template.
l Once on 14.2.1, PMP devices can be upgraded to future supported versions from cnMaestro™ by
navigating to the Operate > Software Update page and selecting the “PMP Sectors” option from
the device type drop-down and the version to which the device needs to be upgraded. It is
recommended to upgrade the AP first, then the SMs.
l PMP Device Inventory details can be reviewed by navigating to the Monitor > Inventory page.

Configuring a RADIUS server

Configuring a RADIUS server in a PMP 450 Platform network is optional, but can provide added security,
increase ease of network management and provide usage-based billing data.

Understanding RADIUS for PMP 450 Platform Family

PMP 450 Platform modules include support for the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)
protocol supporting Authentication and Accounting.

RADIUS Functions
RADIUS protocol support provides the following functions

l SM Authentication allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be
configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from connecting to
“rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but is not used for APs.
l SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), CIR
(Committed Information Rate), Medium Priority, High Priority, and Ultra High Priority Data
channels, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when a SM registers to an
AP.
l User Authentication allows users to configure a separate User authentication server along with the
SM authentication server. If firmware is upgraded while using this functionality and no User
authentication servers are configured, then AP continues to use the SM authentication server for
User authentication
l SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing. This
accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session
disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP.
l Centralized AP and SM user name and password management allows AP and SM usernames and
access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally administered in the RADIUS
server instead of on each radio and tracks access events (logon/logoff) for each username on the
RADIUS server. This accounting does not track and report specific configuration actions
performed on radios or pull statistics such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an
Element Management System (EMS) such as Cambium Networks Wireless Manager. This
accounting is not the ability to perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end
user/customer account.
l Framed IP allows operators to use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing to SM
modules (framed IP address).

Tested RADIUS Servers

The Canopy RADIUS implementation has been tested and is supported on

l FreeRADIUS, Version 2.1.8

l Aradial RADIUS, Version 5.1.12

Chapter 1: Configuration 321

 l Microsoft RADIUS (Windows Server 2012 R2 version)
l Cisco ACS, Version 5.7.0.15

Note

Aradial 5.3 has a bug that prevents “remote device login”, so doesn’t support the
user name and password management feature.

Choosing Authentication Mode and Configuring for

Authentication Servers - AP
On the AP’s Configuration > Security tab, select the RADIUS AAA Authentication Mode. The following
describes the other Authentication Mode options for reference, and then the RADIUS AAA option.

l Disabled: Requires no authentication. Any SM (except a SM that itself has been configured to
require RADIUS authentication by enabling Enforce Authentication as described below) is allowed
to register to the AP.

l Authentication Server: Authentication Server in this instance refers to Wireless Manager in BAM-
only mode. Authentication is required for a SM to register to the AP. Only SMs listed by MAC
address in the Wireless Manager database is allowed to register to the AP.

l AP Pre-Shared Key: Canopy offers a pre-shared key authentication option. In this case, an identical
key must be entered in the Authentication Key field on the AP’s Configuration > Security tab and
in the Authentication Key field on each desired SM’s Configuration > Security tab.

l RADIUS AAA: To support RADIUS authentication of SMs, on the AP’s Configuration > Security tab
select RADIUS AAA. Only properly configured SMs with a valid certificate is allowed to register to
the AP.

When RADIUS AAA is selected, up to 3 Authentication Server (RADIUS Server) IP addresses and Shared
Secrets can be configured. The IP address(s) configured here must match the IP address(s) of the
RADIUS server(s). The shared secret(s) configured here must match the shared secret(s) configured in
the RADIUS server(s). Servers 2 and 3 are meant for backup and reliability, not splitting the database. If
Server 1 doesn’t respond, Server 2 is tried, and then server 3. If Server 1 rejects authentication, the SM is
denied entry to the network, and does not progress trying the other servers.

The default IP address is 0.0.0.0. The default Shared Secret is “CanopySharedSecret”. The Shared Secret
can be up to 32 ASCII characters (no diacritical marks or ligatures, for example).

Chapter 1: Configuration 322

Figure 58: Security tab attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 323

Attribute Meaning

Authentication Operators may use this field to select the following authentication modes:
Mode
Disabled—the AP requires no SMs to authenticate.

Authentication Server —the AP requires any SM that attempts registration to be

authenticated in Wireless Manager before registration.

AP PreShared Key - The AP acts as the authentication server to its SMs and will make
use of a user-configurable pre-shared authentication key. The operator enters this
key on both the AP and all SMs desired to register to that AP. There is also an option
of leaving the AP and SMs at their default setting of using the “Default Key”. Due to
the nature of the authentication operation, if you want to set a specific
authentication key, then you MUST configure the key on all of the SMs and reboot
them BEFORE enabling the key and option on the AP. Otherwise, if you configure
the AP first, none of the SMs is able to register.

RADIUS AAA - When RADIUS AAA is selected, up to 3 Authentication Server

(RADIUS Server) IP addresses and Shared Secrets can be configured. The IP address
(s) configured here must match the IP address(s) of the RADIUS server(s). The
shared secret(s) configured here must match the shared secret(s) configured in the
RADIUS server(s). Servers 2 and 3 are meant for backup and reliability, not for
splitting the database. If Server 1 doesn’t respond, Server 2 is tried, and then server 3.
If Server 1 rejects authentication, the SM is denied entry to the network and does not
progress trying the other servers.

Authentication The management DNS domain name may be toggled such that the name of the
Server DNS authentication server only needs to be specified and the DNS domain name is
Usage automatically appended to that name.

Authentication Enter the IP address or server name of the authentication server (RADIUS or WM)
Server 1 and the Shared Secret configured in the authentication server. When Authentication
Mode RADIUS AAA is selected, the default value of Shared Secret is
Authentication “CanopySharedSecret”. The Shared Secret may consist of up to 32 ASCII characters.
Server 2

Authentication
Server 3

Authentication
Server 4 (BAM
Only)

Authentication
Server 5 (BAM
Only)

Radius Port This field allows the operator to configure a custom port for RADIUS server
communication. The default value is 1812.

Authentication The authentication key is a 32-character hexadecimal string used when

Key Authentication Mode is set to AP Pre-Shared Key. By default, this key is set to
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF.

Selection Key This option allows operators to choose which authentication key is used:

Chapter 1: Configuration 324

Attribute Meaning

Use Key above means that the key specified in Authentication Key is used for
authentication

Use Default Key means that a default key (based off of the SM’s MAC address) is
used for authentication

Encryption Key Specify the type of airlink security to apply to this AP. The encryption setting must
match the encryption setting of the SMs.

None provides no encryption on the air link.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that

uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security.
AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

SM Display of You can use this field to suppress the display of data about this AP on the AP
AP Evaluation Evaluation tab of the Tools page in all SMs that register.
Data

Web, Telnet, Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or ftp
FTP Session access to the AP.
Timeout

IP Access You can permit access to the AP from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
Control or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP
Access Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then you must
populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no access
permitted from any IP address

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 1 you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted to the AP from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
three.

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 2 no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is permitted.

Allowed Source
IP 3

Web Access The Radio supports secured and non-secured web access protocols. Select suitable
web access from drop-down list:

l HTTP Only – provides non-secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
http://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTPS Only – provides a secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
https://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTP and HTTPS – If enabled, the radio can be accessed via bothHTTP and
HTTPS..

SNMP This option allows to configure SNMP agent protocol version. It can be selected from
drop-down list :

Chapter 1: Configuration 325

 Attribute Meaning

l Disable SNMP - To disable SNMP agent.

l SNMPv2c Only – Enables SNMP v2c protocol.
l SNMPv3 Only – Enables SNMP v3 protocol. It is secured communication
protocol.
l SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 – It enables both the protocols.

Telnet This option allows to Enable and Disable Telnet access to the Radio.

FTP This option allows to Enable and Disable FTP access to the Radio.

TFTP This option allows to Enable and Disable TFTP access to the Radio.

NTP server This option allows to Enable and Disable NTP server access to the Radio.

SM Authentication Mode – Require RADIUS or Follow AP

If it is desired that a SM will only authenticate to an AP that is using RADIUS, on the SM’s Configuration
Security tab set Enforce Authentication to AAA. With this enabled, SM does not register to an AP that
has any Authentication Mode other than RADIUS AAA selected.

If it is desired that a SM use the authentication method configured on the AP it is registering to, set
Enforce Authentication to Disabled. With Enforce Authentication disabled, a SM will attempt to register
using whichever Authentication Mode is configured on the AP it is attempting to register to.

Note

Having SMs to use RADIUS by enabling Enforce Authentication avoids the

security issue of SMs possibly registering to “rogue” APs, which have
authentication disabled.

Chapter 1: Configuration 326

Table 87: SM Security tab attributes

Chapter 1: Configuration 327

Attribute Meaning

Authentication The authentication key is a 32-character hexadecimal string used when

Key Authentication Mode is set to AP PreShared Key. By default, this key is set to
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF.

Select Key This option allows operators to choose which authentication key is used:

Use Key above means that the key specified in Authentication Key is used for
authentication

Use Default Key means that a default key (based off of the SM’s MAC address) is
used for authentication

Enforce The SM may enforce authentication types of AAA and AP Pre-sharedKey. The SM
Authentication will not finish the registration process if the AP is not using the configured
authentication method (and the SM locks out the AP for 15 minutes). Enforce
Authentication default setting is Disable.

Phase 1 The protocols supported for the Phase 1 (Outside Identity) phase of authentication
are EAPTTLS (Extensible Authentication Protocol Tunneled Transport Layer
Security) or MSCHAPv2 (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol
version 2).

Phase 2 Select the desired Phase 2 (Inside Identity) authentication protocol from the Phase 2
options of PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol), and MSCHAP (Microsoft’s version of CHAP, version 2 is
used). The protocol must be consistent with the authentication protocol configured
on the RADIUS server.

Identity/Realm If Realms are being used, select Enable Realm and configure an outer identity in the
Identity field and a Realm in the Realm field. These must match the Phase 1/Outer
Identity and Realm configured in the RADIUS server. The default Identity is
“anonymous”. The Identity can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings)
alphanumeric characters. The default Realm is “canopy.net”. The Realm can also be
up to 128 non-special alphanumeric characters.

Chapter 1: Configuration 328

Attribute Meaning

Configure an outer Identity in the Username field. This must match the Phase 1/Outer
Identity username configured in the RADIUS server. The default Phase 1/Outer
Identity Username is “anonymous”. The Username can be up to 128 non-special (no
diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters.

Username Enter a Username for the SM. This must match the username configured for the SM
on the RADIUS server. The default Username is the SM’s MAC address. The
Username can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric
characters.

Password Enter the desired password for the SM in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
The Password must match the password configured for the SM on the RADIUS
Confirm server. The default Password is “password”. The Password can be up to 128 non-
Password special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters.

Upload To upload a certificate manually to a SM, first load it in a known place on your PC or
Certificate File network drive, then click on a Delete button on one of the Certificate description
blocks to delete a certificate to provide space for your certificate. Click on Choose
File, browse to the location of the certificate, and click the Import Certificate button,
and then reboot the radio to use the new certificate.

When a certificate is in use, after the SM successfully registers to an AP, an indication

of In Use will appear in the description block of the certificate being used.

The public certificates installed on the SMs are used with the private certificate on
the RADIUS server to provide a public/private key encryption system.

Up to 2 certificates can be resident on a SM. An installed certificate can be deleted

by clicking the Delete button in the certificate’s description block on the
Configuration > Security tab. To restore the 2 default certificates, click the Use
Default Certificates button in the RADIUS Certificate Settings parameter block and
reboot the radio.

Encryption Specify the type of airlink security to apply to this AP. The encryption setting must
Setting match the encryption setting of the SMs.

None provides no encryption on the air link.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that

uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security.
AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

Web, Telnet, Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet or ftp
FTP Session access to the AP.
Timeout

Ethernet Access If you want to prevent any device that is connected to the Ethernet port of the SM
from accessing the management interface of the SM, select Ethernet Access
Disabled. This selection disables access through this port to via HTTP (the GUI),
SNMP, telnet, FTP, and TFTP. With this selection, management access is available
through only the RF interface via either an IP address (if Network Accessibility is set
to Public on the SM) or the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab of the AP.
See IP Access Control below.

Chapter 1: Configuration 329

 Attribute Meaning

If you want to allow management access through the Ethernet port, select
Ethernet Access Enabled. This is the factory default setting for this parameter.

IP Access You can permit access to the AP from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
Control or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP
Access Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then you must
populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no access
permitted from any IP address

Allowed Source If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
IP 1 you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have
no access permitted to the AP from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
Allowed Source three.
IP 2
If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter,
Allowed Source then no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is
IP 3 permitted.

Web Access The Radio supports secured and non-secured web access protocols. Select suitable
web access from drop-down list:

l HTTP Only – provides non-secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
http://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTPS Only – provides a secured web access. The radio to be accessed via
https://<IP of Radio>.
l HTTP and HTTPS – If enabled, the radio can be accessed via both HTTP and
HTTPS.

SNMP This option allows to configure SNMP agent protocol version. It can be selected from
drop-down list :

l Disable SNMP - To disable SNMP agent.

l SNMPv2c Only – Enables SNMP v2c protocol.
l SNMPv3 Only – Enables SNMP v3 protocol. It is secured communication
protocol.
l SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 – It enables both the protocols.

Telnet This option allows to Enable and Disable Telnet access to the Radio.

FTP This option allows to Enable and Disable FTP access to the Radio.

TFTP This option allows to Enable and Disable TFTP access to the Radio.

SM - Phase 1 (Outside Identity) parameters and settings

The protocols supported for the Phase 1 (Outside Identity) phase of authentication are

eapttls (Extensible Authentication Protocol Tunneled Transport Layer Security) and eapMSChapV2
(Extensible Authentication Protocol – Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol).

Configure an outer Identity in the Username field. This must match the Phase 1/Outer Identity username
configured in the RADIUS server. The default Phase 1/Outer Identity Username is “anonymous”. The
Username can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters. If Realms are
being used in the RADIUS system (eapttls only), select Enable Realm and configure an outer identity in

Chapter 1: Configuration 330

the Identity field and a Realm in the Realm field. These must match the Phase 1/Outer Identity and Realm
configured in the RADIUS server. The default Identity is “anonymous”. The Identity can be up to 128 non-
special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters. The default Realm is “canopy.net”. The Realm
can also be up to 128 non-special alphanumeric characters.

SM - Phase 2 (Inside Identity) parameters and settings

If using eapttls for Phase 1 authentication, select the desired Phase 2 (Inside Identity) authentication
protocol from the Phase 2 options of PAP (Password Authentication Protocol), CHAP (Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol), and MSCHAPv2 (Microsoft’s version of CHAP). The protocol must
be consistent with the authentication protocol configured on the RADIUS server. Enter a Username for
the SM. This must match the username configured for the SM on the RADIUS server. The default
Username is the SM’s MAC address. The Username can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings)
alphanumeric characters.

Enter the desired password for the SM in the Password and Confirm Password fields. The Password must
match the password configured for the SM on the RADIUS server. The default Password is “password”.
The Password can be up to 128 non-special (no diacritical markings) alphanumeric characters.

Handling Certificates
Managing SM Certificates via the SM GUI
The default public Canopy certificates are loaded into SMs upon factory software installation. The default
certificates are not secure and are intended for use during lab and field trials as part of gaining
experience with the RADIUS functionalities or as an option during debug. For secure operation, an
operator will want to create or procure their own certificates. Resetting a SM to its factory defaults will
remove the current certificates and restore the default certificates.

Up to two certificates can be resident on a SM. An installed certificate can be deleted by clicking the
Delete button in the certificate’s description block on the Configuration > Security tab. To restore the 2
default certificates, click the Use Default Certificates button in the RADIUS Certificate Settings parameter
block and reboot the radio.

To upload a certificate manually to a SM, first load it in a known place on your PC or network drive, then
click on a Delete button on one of the Certificate description blocks to delete a certificate to provide
space for your certificate. Click on Choose File, browse to the location of the certificate, and click the
Import Certificate button, and then reboot the radio to use the new certificate.

When a certificate is in use, after the SM successfully registers to an AP, an indication of In Use will appear
in the description block of the certificate being used.

The public certificates installed on the SMs are used with the private certificate on the RADIUS server to
provide a public/private key encryption system.

Note

Root certificates of more than one level (Example - a certificate from someone
who received their CA from Verisign) fails. Certificates must be either root or
self-signed.

Chapter 1: Configuration 331

Figure 59: SM Certificate Management

Configuring RADIUS servers for SM authentication

Your RADIUS server must be configured to use the following:

l EAPTTLS or MSCHAPv2 as the Phase 1/Outer Identity protocol.

l If Enable Realm is selected on the SM’s Configuration > Security tab, then the same Realm appears
there (or access to it).
l The same Phase 2 (Inner Identity) protocol as configured on the SM’s Configuration > Security tab
under Phase 2 options.
l The username and password for each SM configured on each SM’s Configuration > Security tab.
l An IP address and NAS shared secret that is the same as the IP address and Shared Secret
configured on the AP’s Configuration > Security tab for that RADIUS server.
l A server private certificate, server key, and CA certificate that complement the public certificates
distributed to the SMs, as well as the Canopy dictionary file that defines Vendor Specific Attributes
(VSAa). Default certificate files and the dictionary file are available from the software site:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450 after entering your name, email address,
and either Customer Contract Number or the MAC address of a module covered under the 12
month warranty.

Chapter 1: Configuration 332

Optionally, operators may configure the RADIUS server response messages (Accept or Reject) so that
the user has information as to why they have been rejected. The AP displays the RADIUS Authentication
Reply message strings in the Session Status list as part of each SM’s information. The SM will show this
string (listed as Authentication Response on the SM GUI) on the main Status page in the Subscriber
Module Stats section.

Note

Aradial AAA servers only support operator-configurable Authentication Accept

responses, not Authentication Reject responses.

Assigning SM management IP addressing via RADIUS

Operators may use a RADIUS AAA server to assign management IP addressing to SM modules (framed IP
address). SMs now interpret attributes Framed-IP-Address, Framed-IP-Netmask, and Cambium-Canopy-
Gateway from RADIUS. The RADIUS dictionary file has been updated to include the Cambium-Canopy-
Gateway attribute and is available on the Cambium Software Support website.

In order for these attributes to be assigned and used by the SM, the following must be true:

l The system is configured for AAA authentication

l The SM is not configured for DHCP on its management interface. If DHCP is enabled and these
attributes are configured in the RADIUS server, the attributes is ignored by the SM.

l The SM management interface must be configured to be publically accessible. If the SM is

configured to have local accessibility, the management interface will still be assigned the framed
addressing, and the SM iscome publicly accessible via the assigned framed IP addressing.

l When using these attributes, for the addressing to be implemented by the SM operators must
configure Framed-IP-Address in RADIUS. If Framed-IP-Address is not configured but Framed-IP-
Netmask and/or Cambium-Canopy-Gateway is configured, the attributes is ignored. In the case
where only the Framed-IP-Address is configured, Framed-IP-Netmask defaults to 255.255.0.0
(NAT disabled) / 255.255.255.0 (NAT enabled) and Cambium-Canopy-Gateway defaults to
0.0.0.0.

Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration

Canopy Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) along with VSA numbers and other details are listed in
RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs). The associated SM GUI page, tab and parameter are listed to
aid cross-referencing and understanding of the VSAs.

A RADIUS dictionary file is available from the software site:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450

The RADIUS dictionary file defines the VSAs and their values and is usually imported into the RADIUS
server as part of server and database setup.

Note

Beginning with System Release 12.0.2, two RADIUS dictionary files are available on the
Cambium website – “RADIUS Dictionary file – Cambium” and “RADIUS Dictionary file –
Motorola”.

In addition to a renaming of attributes, the Cambium-branded dictionary file contains two

new VSAs for controlling uplink and downlink Maximum Burst Data Rate (these VSAs are
listed below in RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs)).

Chapter 1: Configuration 333

 If you are transitioning from the Motorola-branded dictionary file to the Cambium-branded
dictionary file, ensure that all RADIUS profiles containing Motorola-Canopy attribute
references are updated to include Cambium-Canopy attribute references (for all applicable
VSAs listed in RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs)). Also, ensure that all RADIUS
configuration files reference the new dictionary file (as an alternative, operators may
rename the Cambium-branded dictionary file to the filename currently in use by the RADIUS
server). Once the profiles are updated and the new Cambium-branded dictionary file is
installed on the RADIUS server, restart the RADIUS server to ensure that the new VSAs and
attribute names are enabled.

Table 88: RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs)

Name Number Type Required Value

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.1 integer N 0-65535 kbps

LPULCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Low Priority Uplink CIR 0 kbps 32
bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.2 integer N 0-65535 kbps

LPDLCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Low Priority Downlink 0 kbps 32

CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.3 integer N 0-65535 kbps

HPULCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > High Priority Uplink CIR 0 kbps 32
bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.4 integer N 0-65535 kbps

HPDLCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > High Priority Downlink 0 kbps 32

CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.5 integer N 0-disable, 1-enable

HPENABLE

Configuration > Quality of Service > High Priority Channel 0 32

Enable/Disable bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.6 integer N 0-100000 kbps

ULBR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Sustained Uplink Data dependent on radio feature set 32
Rate bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.7 integer N 0-2500000 kbps

ULBL

Configuration > Quality of Service > Uplink Burst Allocation dependent on radio feature set 32
bits

Chapter 1: Configuration 334

Name Number Type Required Value

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.8 integer N 0-100000 kbps

DLBR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Sustained Downlink Data dependent on radio feature set 32
Rate bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.9 integer N 0-2500000 kbps

DLBL

Configuration > Quality of Service > Downlink Burst dependent on radio feature set 32
Allocation bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.14 integer N 0-disable, 1-enable

VLLEARNEN

Configuration > VLAN > Dynamic Learning 1 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.15 integer N 0-all, 1-tagged, 2-untagged

VLFRAMES

Configuration > VLAN > Allow Frame Types 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.16 integer N VLAN Membership (1-4094)

VLIDSET

Configuration > VLAN Membership 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.20 integer N 5 - 1440 minutes

VLAGETO

Configuration > VLAN > VLAN Aging Timeout 25 mins 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.21 integer N 1 – 4094

VLIGVID

Configuration > VLAN > Default Port VID 1 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.22 integer N 1 – 4094

VLMGVID

Configuration > VLAN > Management VID 1 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.23 integer N 0-disable, 1-enable

VLSMMGPASS

Configuration > VLAN > SM Management VID Pass-through 1 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.24 integer N 0-100000 kbps, 0=disabled

BCASTMIR

Chapter 1: Configuration 335

Name Number Type Required Value

Configuration > Quality of Service > Broadcast/Multicast dependent on radio feature set 32
Uplink Data Rate bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.25 ipaddr N -

Gateway

Configuration > IP > Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 -

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.26 integer N 0-100000 kbps

ULMB

Configuration > Quality of Service > Max Burst Uplink Data 0 32

Rate bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.27 integer N 0-100000 kbps

DLMB

Configuration > Quality of Service > Max Burst Downlink 0 32

Data Rate bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.28 integer N

BCASTMIRUNITS

Configuration > QoS > Broadcast Downlink CIR 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.29 string N

ConfigFileImportUrl

Configuration > Unit Settings 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.30 string N

ConfigFileExportUrl

Configuration > Unit Settings 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.31 integer N 1-Enable

DHCP-State

Configuration > IP > DHCP state 1 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.32 integer N 0-Low, 1-High 32

SMPrioritizationGroup bits

Configuration > Quality of Service > Prioritization Group 0

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.35 integer N 1-4

DATACHANCOUNT

Configuration > Quality of Service > Number of Data 1 32

Channels bits

Chapter 1: Configuration 336

Name Number Type Required Value

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.36 integer N 0 - 65534 Kbps

MPULCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Medium Priority Uplink 0 32

CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.37 integer N 0 - 65534 Kbps

MPDLCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Medium Priority 0 32

Downlink CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.39 integer N 0 - 65534 Kbps

UHPULCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Ultra High Priority Uplink 0 32

CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.40 integer N 0 - 65534 Kbps

UHPDLCIR

Configuration > Quality of Service > Ultra High Priority 0 32

Downlink CIR bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.50 integer N 1-Technician, 2-Installer, 3-

UserLevel Administrator

Account > Add User > Level 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.51 integer N 1=Read-Only 0=Read-Write

UserMode

Account > Add User > User Mode 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.52 integer N 0-7

PortMap-Priority

Configuration > VLAN > Port VID MAC Address Mapping -> 0 32
Priority bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.53 integer N 1 - 4094 32

PortMap-VLANID bits

Configuration > VLAN > Port VID MAC Address Mapping -> 1
VID

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.54 string N 12 - 17

PortMap-MacAddr

Configuration > VLAN > Port VID MAC Address Mapping -> 00-00-00-00-00-00 -
MAC Address

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.55 integer N 1 — 310000 kbps

RatePlan-DL

Chapter 1: Configuration 337

Name Number Type Required Value

Configuration > Quality of Service > Downlink Plan 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.56 integer N 1 — 310000 kbps

RatePlan-UL

Configuration > Quality of Service > Uplink Plan 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.57 integer N 0.1 - 9.9

RatePlan-Weight

Configuration > Quality of Service > Weight 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.58 integer N 0-Disabled, 1-Enabled, 2-Enable

RatePlan-UserLckMod below threshold

Configuration > Quality of Service > User Lock Modulation 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.59 integer N 8=8x,6=6x,4=4x,3=3x,2=2x,1=1x

RatePlan-LockMod

Configuration > Quality of Service > Locked Modulation 8 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.60 integer N 8=8x,6=6x,4=4x,3=3x,2=2x

RatePlan-ThreMod

Configuration > Quality of Service > Threshold Modulation 8 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.61 integer N 0-disable, 1-enable

SMVlan8021pSupport

Configuration > VLAN > Support 802.1p Frames (VID 0) 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.62 integer N 1-Technician, 2-Installer, 3-

UserLevel-AP Administrator

Account > Add User > Level 0 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.63 integer N 1=Read-Only 0=Read- Write

UserMode-AP

Account > Add User > User Mode 25 mins 32

bits

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.64 integer N 1-Technician, 2-Installer, 3-

UserLevel-SM Administrator

Account > Add User > Level 1 32

bits

Chapter 1: Configuration 338

 Name Number Type Required Value

Cambium-Canopy- 26.161.65 integer N 1=Read-Only 0=Read- Write

UserMode-SM

Account > Add User > User Mode 1 32

bits

(*) Contains key for encrypting packets sent by the NAS to the remote host (for Microsoft Point-to-Point
Encryption Protocol).

Note

VSA numbering:

l 26 connotes Vendor Specific Attribute, per RFC 2865

l 26.311 is Microsoft Vendor Code, per IANA

Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration using Zero Touch

feature
The RADIUS VSA (Vendor Specific Attributes) is updated for Zero Touch feature. This feature enables
the ability for a SM to get its configuration via RADIUS VSA. The RADIUS VSA is updated for an URL
which points to the configuration file of SM (see RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) for list of
VSA).

The RADIUS will push the vendor specific attribute to SM after successful authentication. The VSA
contains URL of config file which will redirect SM to download configuration. If there is any change in SM
confirmation, the SM will reboot automatically after applying the configuration.

The RADIUS VSA attributes concerning Zero Touch are as follows:

The updated RADIUS dictionary can be downloaded from below link:

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450/

Note

The feature is not applicable to the AP.

Using RADIUS for centralized AP and SM user name and password

management
AP – Technician/Installer/Administrator Authentication
To control technician, installer, and administrator access to the AP from a centralized RADIUS server:

Procedure 20 Centralized user name and password management for AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 339

 1 Set Authentication Mode on the AP’s Configuration > Security tab to RADIUS AAA

2 Set User Authentication Mode on the AP’s Account > User Authentication tab (the tab only
appears after the AP is set to RADIUS authentication) to Remote or Remote then Local.

l Local: The local SM is checked for accounts. No centralized RADIUS accounting (access
control) is performed.
l Remote: Authentication by the centralized RADIUS server is required to gain access to the
SM if the SM is registered to an AP that has RADIUS AAA Authentication Mode selected. For
up to 2 minutes a test pattern is displayed until the server responds or times out.
l Remote then Local: Authentication using the centralized RADIUS server is attempted. If the
server sends a reject message, then the setting of Allow Local Login after Reject from AAA
determines if the local user database is checked or not. If the configured servers do not
respond within 2 minutes, then the local user database is used. The successful login method
is displayed in the navigation column of the SM.

User administration and authentication separation

On the AP, it is possible to configure up to three User Authentication servers, along with their Shared
Secret. If none of the User Authentication servers are configured, the AP continues to use SM
Authorization servers for User Authentication.

If at least one of the IP addresses is configured, all Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
requests now follow the newly configured User Authorization server.

To configure separate User Authentication and SM Authentication:

Procedure 21 User administration and authentication separation

1 Go to the AP’s Account > User Authentication And Access Tracking tab

2 Set User Authentication Mode to Remote or Remote then Local.

3 Set User Authentication Method to EAP-MD5 or EAP-PEAP-MSCHAPv2

4 Configure the Shared Secrets and IP Addresses of:

User Authentication Server 1

User Authentication Server 2

User Authentication Server 3

Note: If none of the above User Authentication servers are configured, only SM authentication will
be performed.

5 Under RADIUS Certificate Settings, click Browse to upload the RADIUS Certificate files.

Chapter 1: Configuration 340

Figure 60: User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes

Attribute Meaning

User l Local: The local SM is checked for accounts. No centralized RADIUS

Authentication accounting (access control) is performed.
Mode

Chapter 1: Configuration 341

Attribute Meaning

l Remote: Authentication by the centralized RADIUS server is required to gain

access to the AP. For up to 2 minutes a test pattern is displayed until the
server responds or times out.

l Remote then Local: Authentication using the centralized RADIUS server is

attempted. If the server sends a reject message, then the setting of Allow
Local Login after Reject from AAA determines if the local user database is
checked or not. If the configured servers do not respond within 2 minutes,
then the local user database is used. The successful login method is displayed
in the navigation column of the AP.

User The user authentication method employed by the radios:

Authentication
Method l EAP-MD5
l EAP-PEAP-MSCHAPv2

Allow Local If a user authentication is rejected from the AAA server, the user is allowed to login
Login after locally to the radio’s management interface.
Reject from
AAA

User The IP address and the shared secret key of the User authentication RADIUS server 1.
Authentication
Server 1

User The IP address and the shared secret key of the User Authentication Server 2
Authentication configured in RADIUS Server.
Server 2

User The IP address and the shared secret key of the User Authentication Server 3
Authentication configured in RADIUS Server.
Server 3

RADIUS Import Cetificate – browse and select the file to be uploaded and click on “Import
Certificate Certificate” to import a new certificate.
Settings
Use Default Certificates – use the preloaded default certificates.

User Cerificate provided by default for User authentication.

Authentication
Certificate 1

User Cerificate provided by default for User authentication.

Authentication
Certificate 2

Radius The destination port on the AAA server used for Radius accounting communication.
Accounting Port

Accounting Disable – no accounting messages are sent to the RADIUS server.

Messages
deviceAccess – accounting messages regarding device access are sent to the
RADIUS server (see Device data accounting RADIUS attributes).

Chapter 1: Configuration 342

Attribute Meaning

DataUsage – accounting messages regarding data usage are sent to the RADIUS
server (see Device data accounting RADIUS attributes).

All – accounting messages regarding device access and data usage are sent to the
RADIUS server.

Accounting The interval for which accounting data messages are sent from the radio to the
Data Usage RADIUS server. If 0 is configured for this parameter, no data usage messages are
Interval sent.

SM Re- The interval for which the SM will re-authenticate to the RADIUS server.
authentication
Interval

Account Status Displays the account status.

SM – Technician/Installer/Administrator Authentication
The centralized user name and password management for SM is same as AP. Follow AP –
Technician/Installer/Administrator Authentication on page AP – Technician/Installer/Administrator
Authentication procedure.

Note

Remote access control is enabled only after the SM registers to an AP that has
Authentication Mode set to RADIUS AAA. Local access control will always be
used before registration and is used after registration if the AP is not configured
for RADIUS.

Figure 61: User Authentication and Access Tracking tab of the SM

Chapter 1: Configuration 343

Table 89: SM User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes

Attribute Meaning

User l Local: The local SM is checked for accounts. No centralized RADIUS

Authentication accounting (access control) is performed.
Mode l Remote: Authentication by the centralized RADIUS server is required to gain
access to the SM if the SM is registered to an AP that has RADIUS AAA
Authentication Mode selected. For up to 2 minutes a test pattern is displayed
until the server responds or times out.
l Remote then Local: Authentication using the centralized RADIUS server is
attempted. If the server sends a reject message, then the setting of Allow
Local Login after Reject from AAA determines if the local user database is
checked or not. If the configured servers do not respond within 2 minutes,
then the local user database is used. The successful login method is displayed
in the navigation column of the SM.

Allow Local If a user authentication is rejected from the AAA server, the user is allowed to login
Login after locally to the radio’s management interface. It is applicable ONLY when the User
Reject from Authentication Mode is set to “Remote then Local”.
AAA
Note

When the radio User Authentication Mode is set to “Local” or “Remote”,

the Allow Local Login after Reject from AAA does not any effect.

Accounting l disable – no accounting messages are sent to the RADIUS server

Messages l deviceccess – accounting messages are sent to the RADIUS server regarding
device access (see Device data accounting RADIUS attributes).

Access Tracking
To track logon and logoff times on individual radios by technicians, installers, and administrators, on the
AP or SM’s Account > User Authentication and Access Tracking tab under Accounting (Access Tracking)

Chapter 1: Configuration 344

set Accounting Messages to “deviceAccess”.

Device Access Tracking is enabled separately from User Authentication Mode. A given AP or SM can be
configured for both, either, or neither.

RADIUS Device Data Accounting

PMP 450 Platform systems include support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing.
This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session
disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP. The attributes
included in the RADIUS accounting messages are shown in the table below.

Table 90: Device data accounting RADIUS attributes

Sender Message Attribute Value Description

AP Accounting- Acct-Status- 1 - Start This message is sent

Request Type every time a SM
registers with an AP,
Acct- Unique per AP session. Initial value is and after the SM stats
Session-Id SM MAC, and increments after every are cleared.
start message sent of an in session
SM.

Event- UTC time the event occurred on the

Timestamp AP

Chapter 1: Configuration 345

Sender Message Attribute Value Description

AP Accounting- Acct-Status- 2 - Stop This message is sent

Request Type every time a SM
becomes
Acct- Unique per AP session. Initial value is unregistered with an
Session-Id SM MAC, and increments after every AP, and when the SM
start message sent of an in session stats are cleared.
SM.

Acct-Input- Sum of the input octets received at

Octets the SM over the Low Priority data
channel as well as any Medium, High,
and Ultra High Priority data channels
configured.. Will not include
broadcast.

Acct- Sum of the output octets sent from

Output- the SM over the Low Priority data
Octets channel as well as any Medium, High,
and Ultra High Priority data channels
configured..

Acct-Input- Number of times the Acct-Input-

Gigawords Octets counter has wrapped around
2^32 over the course of the session

Acct- Number of times the Acct-Output-

Output- Octets counter has wrapped around
Gigawords 2^32 over the course of the session

Acct-Input- Sum of unicast and multicast packets

Packets that are sent to a particular SM over
the regular data VC and the high
priority data VC (if enabled). It will
not include broadcast.

Acct- Sum of unicast and multicast packets

Output- that are sent from a particular SM
Packets over the Low Priority data channel as
well as any Medium, High, and Ultra
High Priority data channels
configured..

Acct- Uptime of the SM session.

Session-
Time

Acct- Reason code for session termination

Terminate-
Cause

Chapter 1: Configuration 346

 Sender Message Attribute Value Description

AP Accounting- Acct-Status- 3 - Interim-Update This message is sent

Request Type periodically per the
operator
Acct- Unique per AP session. Initial value is configuration on the
Session-Id SM MAC, and increments after every AP in seconds.
start message sent of an in session
SM. Interim update counts
are cumulative over
Acct-Input- Sum of the input octets sent to the the course of the
Octets SM over the Low Priority data session
channel as well as any Medium, High,
and Ultra High Priority data channels
configured.. Will not include
broadcast.

Acct- Sum of the output octets set from the

Output- SM over the Low Priority data
Octets channel as well as any Medium, High,
and Ultra High Priority data channels
configured.

Acct-Input- Number of times the Acct-Input-

Gigawords Octets counter has wrapped around
2^32 over the course of the session

Acct- Number of times the Acct-Output-

Output- Octets counter has wrapped around
Gigawords 2^32 over the course of the session

Acct- Uptime of the SM session.

Session-
Time

Acct-Input- Sum of unicast and multicast packets

Packets that are sent to a particular SM over
the regular data channel and the high
priority data VC (if enabled). It will
not include broadcast.

Acct- Sum of unicast and multicast packets

Output- that are sent from a particular SM
Packets over the regular data VC and the high
priority data VC (if enabled).

The data accounting configuration is located on the AP’s Accounts > User Authentication and Access
Tracking GUI menu, and the AP’s Authentication Mode must be set to Radius AAA for the menu to
appear. The accounting may be configured via the AP GUI as shown in the figures below. By default
accounting messages are not sent and the operator has the choice of configuring to send only Device
Access accounting messages (when a user logs in or out of the radio), only Data Usage messages, or
both. When Data Accounting is enabled, the operator must specify the interval of when the data
accounting messages are sent (0 – disabled, or in the range of 30-10080 minutes). The default interval is
30 minutes.

Chapter 1: Configuration 347

Figure 62: RADIUS accounting messages configuration

The data accounting message data is based on the SM statistics that the AP maintains, and these
statistics may be cleared on the AP by an operator. If an operator clears these messages and data
accounting is enabled, an accounting stop message is sent followed by an accounting start message to
notify the AAA of the change.

If an operator clears the VC statistics on the device through the management GUI, a RADIUS stop
message and data start message is issued for each device affected. The start and stop messages will only
be sent once every 5 minutes, so if an operator clears these statistics multiple times within 5 minutes,
only one set of data stop/start messages is sent. This may result in inaccurate data accumulation results.

RADIUS Device Re-authentication

PMP 450 Platform systems include support for periodic SM re-authentication in a network without
requiring the SM to re-register (and drop the session). The re-authentication may be configured to occur
in the range of every 30 minutes to weekly.

Figure 63: Device re-authentication configuration

The re-authentication interval is only configurable on the AP. When this feature is enabled, each SM that
enters the network will re-authenticate each the interval time has expired without dropping the session.
The response that the SM receives from the AAA server upon re-authentication is one of the following:

l Success: The SM continues normal operation

l Reject: The SM de-registers and will attempt network entry again after 1 minute and then if
rejected will attempt re-entry every

minutes

l Timeout or other error: The SM remains in session and attempt 5 times to re-authenticate with the
RADIUS-REQUEST message. If these attempts fail, then the SM will go out of session and proceed
to re-authenticate after 5 minutes, then every 15 minutes.

Although re-authentication is an independent feature, it was designed to work alongside with the
RADIUS data usage accounting messages. If a user is over their data usage limit the network operator
can reject the user from staying in the network. Operators may configure the RADIUS ‘Reply-Message’
attribute with an applicable message (i.e. “Data Usage Limit Reached”) that is sent to the subscriber
module and displayed on the general page.

Chapter 1: Configuration 348

RADIUS Change of Authorization and Disconnect Message
Prior to this feature, SM will get configuration parameters from a RADIUS server during authentication
process. This feature allows an administrator to control configuration parameters in the SM while SM is in
session. The configuration changes in SM are done using RADIUS Change of Authorization method (RFC
3576) on the existing RADIUS authentication framework for AP and SM. A typical use case could be
changing the QOS parameters after a certain amount of bandwidth usage by a SM.

Figure 64: RADIUS CoA configuration for AP

The RADIUS CoA feature enables initiating a bi-directional communication from the RADIUS server(s) to
the AP and SM.

The AP listens on UDP port 3799 and accepts CoA requests from the configured RADIUS servers. This
CoA request should contain SM MAC address in ‘User-Name’ attribute as identifier and all other attributes
which control the SM config parameters. For security reasons, a timestamp also needs to be added as
‘Event-Timestamp’ attribute. Hence the time should also be synchronized between the RADIUS server(s)
and the AP to fit within a window of 300 seconds.

Once the configuration changes are applied on the SM, CoA-ACK message is sent back to RADIUS server.
If the validation fails, the AP sends a CoA-NACK response to the RADIUS server with proper error code.

A Disconnect-Message is sent by the RADIUS server to NAS in order to terminate a user session on a NAS
and discard all associated session context. It is used when the authentication AAA server wants to
disconnect the user after the session has been accepted by the RADIUS.

In response of Disconnect-Request from RADIUS server, the NAS sends a Disconnect-ACK if all
associated session context is discarded, or a Disconnect-NACK, if the NAS is unable to disconnect the
session.

Note

The RADIUS CoA feature will only enabled if Authentication mode is set to RADIUS AAA.

Chapter 1: Configuration 349

Microsoft RADIUS support
This feature allows to configure Microsoft RADIUS (Network Policy and Access Services a.k.a NPS) as
Authentication server for SM and User authentication.

l For SM Authentication, SM will user PEAP-MSCHAPv2 since NPS doesn’t support TTLS protocol.

l For User Authentication, the Canopy software will use EAP-MD5 but the user has to do certain
configuration in order to enable EAP-MD5 on NPS.

Note

All this configuration has been tested on Windows Server 2012 R2 version.

This feature is not supported on hardware board type P9 or lower platforms.

SM Authentication Configuration
There are no new configurations on AP. However, SM has to be configured for PEAP authentication
protocol.

1. Go to Configuration > Security page

2. Select “eappeap” for Phase 1 attribute under tab AAA Authentication Settings.

Figure 65: EAPPEAP settings

The Phase 2 will change automatically to MSCHAPv2 on select of Phase 1 attribute as EAP-PEAP. Other
parameters of Phase 2 protocols like PAP/CHAP will be disabled.

Windows Server Configuration

Import Certificate

The SM certificate has to be imported to Windows Server for certificate authentication.

l Copy the certificate which is configured in SM under Configuration > Security -> Certificate1 to
Windows Server machine.
l Right click and select ‘Install Certificate’. This will install the certificate and it’s ready for use. This
certificate will be used while configuring PEAP-MSCHAPv2 in NPS.

NPS Configuration (https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/network/bb545879.aspx)

Following items should be configured in NPS Console:

l RADIUS Client

l https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc732929

l Connection Request Policies

Chapter 1: Configuration 350

 l https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc730866

l Choose ‘Wireless-Other’ in NAS-Port-Type

l Network Policy

l https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc755309

l Choose ‘Wireless-Other’ in NAS-Port-Type.

l While configuring PEAP, select the above imported certificate.

Chapter 1: Configuration 351

Figure 66: Importing certificate in NPS

User Authentication Configuration

Enabling EAP-MD5

As mentioned earlier, Microsoft has deprecated the support for MD5 from versions of Windows. To
enable MD5, the following steps to be followed:

1. Follow the instructions:

Optionally, the registry file can be downloaded. It can be installed by double-click it in

Windows Registry.

https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/922574/en-us?wa=wsignin1.0

2. From NPS Console Network Policy > <Policy Name> > Properties > Constrains > Authentication
Method and click Add. Select MD5 and click OK.

Chapter 1: Configuration 352

Figure 67: Selecting MD5 from NPS console

User Configuration in Active Directory

Next open ‘Active Directory Users and Computers’ and create user.

Make sure user property is configured as shown below.

Chapter 1: Configuration 353

Figure 68: User configuration

RADIUS VSA Configuration

Before using VSA, the Cambium-Canopy-UserLevel(50) VSA must be configured with some access level
say ADMIN(3).

Follow below link for configuring VSA:

https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc731611

The Cambium’s vendor code is 161.

Chapter 1: Configuration 354

Figure 69: RADIUS VSA configuration

Accounting
User can enable accounting in NPS under NPS Console > Accounting > Configure Accounting.

For more details refer https://technet.microsoft.com/library/dd197475

Cisco ACS RADIUS Server Support

This briefly explains how to configure Cisco ACS RADIUS server for PEAP-MSCHAPv2 authentication.
The configuration had been tested on CISCO ACS Version : 5.7.0.15

Adding RADIUS client

Figure 70: Adding RADIUS client

Chapter 1: Configuration 355

Creating Users
Figure 71: Creating users

Creating RADIUS instance

Figure 72: Creating RADIUS instance

Chapter 1: Configuration 356

RADIUS protocols
Figure 73: RADIUS protocols

Chapter 1: Configuration 357

Service selection

Figure 74: Service selection

Adding Trusted CA
Figure 75: Adding Trusted CA

Note that certificate has to be in DER form, so if you have in PEM format convert using openssl.

Openssl.exe x509 -in <path-to->/cacert_aaasvr.pem -outform DER -out <path-to>/cacert_aaasvr.der

Installing Server Certificate

After installing trusted CA, you need to add a server certificate which will be used for TLS tunnel.
Generally you have to install same certificate which is installed in your AP, so that AP can trust the radius
server.

Figure 76: Installing Server Certificate

Chapter 1: Configuration 358

Monitoring Logs
Figure 77: Monitoring logs

Configuring VSA
Before using VSA , user has to add Cambium Vendor Specific Attribute

Navigate to System Administration > Configuration > Dictionaries > Protocols > RADIUS > RADIUS
VSA > Motorola

If Motorola is not present you can create Vendor with ID 161 and add all the VSA one by one.

Chapter 1: Configuration 359

Figure 78: VSA list

Using VSA for users

Navigate to Access Policies > Access Services > Cambium ACS > Authorization

1. Change condition to User name

Chapter 1: Configuration 360

 2. Next click Create and then click Select see diagram below

3. Click Create from the screen you get following screen

Chose some name and then move to RADIUS Attributes tab

4. Fill attribute which all you want for that particular user

Chapter 1: Configuration 361

Important: Click Add for each attribute and when done click Submit.

5. Now you are ready to use this Authorization profile for the use
Select and Press OK.

Chapter 1: Configuration 362

 6. Finally press Save Changes and you are ready to use it.

Configuring Ping Watchdog

This feature allows administrator to automatically reboot an AP/SM when there is a network issue to
avoid power on reset of radios. This feature is disabled by default.

To enable Ping Watchdog feature, select the menu option Configuration > Ping Watchdog, and configure
the parameters listed in the following table.

Table 91: Ping Watchdog attributes

Attribute Meaning

Ping Watchdog This filed enables or disbales Ping Watchdog feature.

IP Address To Ping This field specifies the IPV4 address of the device which needs to be pinged.

Ping Interval This field specifies the time interval at which ping needs to be initiated. The time
interval needs to be specified in seconds.

Ping Failure Count This field specifies the count of ping failures at which reboot needs to be initiated.
To Reboot

Chapter 1: Configuration 363

Chapter 2: Tools
The AP and SM GUIs provide several tools to analyze the operating environment, system performance
and networking, including:

l Using Spectrum Analyzer tool on page Using Spectrum Analyzer tool

l Using the Alignment Tool on page Using the Alignment Tool

l Using the Link Capacity Test tool on page Using the Link Capacity Test tool

l Using AP Evaluation tool on page Using AP Evaluation tool

l Using BHM Evaluation tool on page Using BHM Evaluation tool

l Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool on page Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool

l Using the Subscriber Configuration tool on page Using the Subscriber Configuration tool

l Using the Link Status tool on page Using the Link Status tool

l Using BER Results tool on page Using BER Results tool

l Using the Sessions tool on page Using the Sessions tool

l Using the Ping Test tool on page Using the Ping Test tool

Using Spectrum Analyzer tool

The integrated spectrum analyzer can be very useful as a tool for troubleshooting and RF planning, but is
not intended to replicate the accuracy and programmability of a high-end spectrum analyzer, which
sometime can be used for other purposes.

The AP/BHM and SM/BHS perform spectrum analysis together in the Sector Spectrum Analyzer tool.

Caution

On start of the Spectrum Analyzer on a module, it enters a scan mode and drops
any RF connection it may have had. When choosing Start Timed Spectrum
Analysis, the scan is run for time specified in the Duration configuration
parameter. When choosing Start Continuous Spectrum Analysis, the scan is run
continuously for 24 hours, or until stopped manually (using the Stop Spectrum
Analysis button).

Any module can be used to see the frequency and power level of any detectable signal that is within, just
above, or just below the frequency band range of the module.

Note

Vary the days and times when you analyze the spectrum in an area. The RF
environment can change throughout the day or throughout the week.

Chapter 2: Tools 364

Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies
The neighbor frequencies can be analyzed using Spectrum Analyzer tool. Following modules allow user
to:

l Use a BHS or BHM for PTP and SM or AP for PMP as a Spectrum Analyzer.
l View a graphical display that shows power level in RSSI and dBm at 5 MHz increments throughout
the frequency band range, regardless of limited selections in the Custom Radio Frequency Scan
Selection List parameter of the SM/BHS.
l Select an AP/BHM channel that minimizes interference from other RF equipment.

Caution

The following procedure causes the SM/BHS to drop any active RF link. If a link
is dropped when the spectrum analysis begins, the link can be re-established
when either a 15 minute interval has elapsed or the spectrum analyzer feature is
disabled.

Temporarily deploy a SM/BHS for each frequency band range that need to monitor and access the
Spectrum Analyzer tab in the Tools web page of the module.

l Using Spectrum Analyzer tool

l Using the Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool

Spectrum Analyzer tool

Analyzing the spectrum
To use the built-in spectrum analyzer functionality of the AP/SM/BH, proceed as follows:

Procedure 22 Analyzing the spectrum

1 Predetermine a power source and interface that works for the AP/SM/BH in the area to be
analyzed.

2 Take the AP/SM/BH, power source and interface device to the area.

3 Access the Tools > Spectrum Analyzer web page of the AP/SM/BH.

4 Enter Duration in Timed Spectrum Analyzer Tab. Default value is 10 Seconds

5 Click Start Timed Sector Spectrum Analysis

6 The results are displayed:

Figure 79: Spectrum analysis - Results

Chapter 2: Tools 365

 Note

AP/SM/BH scans for extra 40 seconds in addition to configured Duration

7 Travel to another location in the area to BHS.

8 Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis

9 Repeat Steps 4 and 6 until the area has been adequately scanned and logged.

As with any other data that pertains to your business, a decision today to put the data into a retrievable
database may grow in value to you over time.

Chapter 2: Tools 366

 Note

Wherever the operator finds the measured noise level is greater than the
sensitivity of the radio that is plan to deploy, use the noise level (rather than the
link budget) for your link feasibility calculations.

The AP/SM/BH perform spectrum analysis together in the Sector Spectrum

Analyzer feature.

Graphical spectrum analyzer display

The AP/SM/BH display the graphical spectrum analyzer. An example of the Spectrum Analyzer page is
shown in Spectrum analysis - Results.

The navigation feature includes:

l Results may be panned left and right through the scanned spectrum by clicking and dragging the
graph left and right

l Results may be zoomed in and out using mouse

When the mouse is positioned over a bar, the receive power level, frequency, maximum and mean
receive power levels are displayed above the graph

To keep the displayed data current, either set “Auto Refresh” on the module’s Configuration > General.

Spectrum Analyzer page of AP

The Spectrum Analyzer page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 367

Table 92: Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Display Data Both means that the vertical and horizontal paths are displayed or an individual
Path path may be selected to display only a single-path reading.

Data For ease of parsing data and to facilitate automation, the spectrum analyzer results
may be saved as an XML file. To save the results in an XML formatted file, right-click
the “SpectrumAnalysis.xml” link and save the file.

Display Instantaneous means that each reading (vertical bar) is displayed with two
horizontal lines above it representing the max power level received (top horizontal
line) and the average power level received (lower horizontal line) at that frequency.

Averaging means that each reading (vertical bar) is displayed with an associated
horizontal line above it representing the max power level received at that
frequency.

Chapter 2: Tools 368

Attribute Meaning

Min and Max Enter minimum and maximum frequencies to be scanned.

Frequencies in
kHz

Set Min And Max On the button press, it sets minimum and maximum allowed frequencies for
to Full Scan scanning.

Set Min And Max On the button press, it sets minimum and maximum frequencies to ± 40 MHz of
to Center Scan center frequency for scanning.
+/-40 MHz

Registered SM This field displays the MAC address and Site Name of the registered SM.
Count

Maximum Count This field displays the maximum number of registered SMs.
of Registered
SMs

Scanning This field allows selecting scanning bandwidth for AP and all the registered SMs.
Bandwidth
Note: This feature is not supported in PMP 450m APs.

Duration This field allows operators to configure a specified time for which the spectrum is
scanned. If the entire spectrum is scanned prior to the end of the configured
duration, the analyzer will restart at the beginning of the spectrum.

Perform This field when enabled performs Spectrum Analysis on every boot up for one scan.
Spectrum
Analysis on Boot
Up for One Scan

Continuous Start Continuous Spectrum Analysis button ensures that when the SM is powered
Spectrum on, it automatically scans the spectrum for 10 seconds. These results may then be
Analyzer accessed via the Tools > Spectrum Analyzer GUI page.

Spectrum Analyzer page of SM

The Spectrum Analyzer page of SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 369

Table 93: Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

Display Data Path Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Data

Display

Min and Max Frequencies in To scan min to max range of frequencies, enter min and max frequencies
kHz in kHz and press Set Min and Max to Full Scan button.

To scan +/- 40 MHz from center frequency, enter center frequency in kHz
and press Set Min And Max To Center Scan +/- 40 MHz button.

Session Status This field displays current session status and rates. The session states can
be Scanning, Syncing, Registering or Registered.

Registered AP This field displays the information of AP to which this device is registered.

Scanning Bandwidth This field allows to select the scanning bandwidth when running
Spectrum Analysis.

Duration Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP .

Chapter 2: Tools 370

Attribute Meaning

Perform Spectrum Analysis This field when enabled performs Spectrum Analysis on every boot up for
on Boot Up for One Scan one scan.

Power Up Mode With No This field indicates whether the link has to operate in Aim mode or in
802.3 Link operational mode on power up.

Continuous Spectrum Start Continuous Spectrum Analysis button starts the SM in Spectrum
Analyzer Analysis until manually stopped, or it has scanned for 24 hours.

Spectrum Analyzer page of BHM

The Spectrum Analyzer page of BHM is explained in below table.

Table 94: Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHM

Chapter 2: Tools 371

Attribute Meaning

Data Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Display

Duration

Min and Max Enter minimum and maximum frequencies to be scanned.

Frequencies in
kHz

Set Min And Max On the button press, it sets minimum and maximum allowed frequencies for
to Full Scan scanning.

Set Min And Max On the button press, it sets minimum and maximum frequencies to +/- 40 MHz of
to Center Scan +/- center frequency for scanning.
40 MHz

Timing Slave This field displays the status of any registered Timing Slave.
Status

Scanning This field allows to select scanning bandwidth for both BHM and BHS.
Bandwidth

Duration This field allows operators to configure a specified time for which the spectrum is
scanned. If the entire spectrum is scanned prior to the end of the configured
duration, the analyzer will restart at the beginning of the spectrum.

Perform Spectrum This field when enabled performs Spectrum Analysis on every boot up for one
Analysis on Boot scan.
Up for One Scan

Continuous Start Continuous Spectrum Analysis button starts the SM in Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum until manually stopped, or it has scanned for 24 hours.
Analyzer

Spectrum Analyzer page of BHS

The Spectrum Analyzer page of BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 372

Table 95: Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHS

Attribute Meaning

Data Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Display

Session Status This field displays current session status and rates. The session states
can be Scanning, Syncing, Registering or Registered.

Registered Backhaul This field displays MAC address of BHM and PTP model number

Duration Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Perform Spectrum Analysis This field allows to Enable or Disable to start Spectrum Analysis on
on Boot Up for one scan boot up of module for one scan.

Continuous Spectrum Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP on page Spectrum

Analyzer Analyzer page attributes - AP

Chapter 2: Tools 373

Spectrum Analyzer page result of PMP 450 SM
Figure 80: Spectrum Analyzer page result – PMP 450 SM

Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool

The Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool in the AP/BHM provides additional flexibility in the use of the
spectrum analyzer in the SM/BHS. Set the duration of 10 to 1000 seconds, then click the Start Remote

Chapter 2: Tools 374

Spectrum Analysis button to launch the analysis from that SM/BHS.

In PMP configuration, a SM must be selected from the drop-down list before launching Start Remote
Spectrum Analysis.

Analyzing the spectrum remotely

Procedure 23 Remote Spectrum Analyzer procedure

1 The AP/BHM de-registers the target SM/BHS.

2 The SM/BHS scans (for the duration set in the AP/BHM tool) to collect data for the bar graph.

3 The SM/BHS re-registers to the AP/BHM.

4 The AP/BHM displays the bar graph.

The bar graph is an HTML file, but can be changed to an XML file, which is then easy to analyze using
scripts that you may write for parsing the data. To transform the file to XML, click the
“SpectrumAnalysis.xml” link below the spectrum results. Although the resulting display appears mostly
unchanged, the bar graph is now coded in XML. You can now right-click on the bar graph for a Save
Target As option to save the Spectrum Analysis.xml file.

Remote Spectrum Analyzer page of AP

The Remote Spectrum Analyzer page of AP is explained in below table.

Table 96: Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - AP

Chapter 2: Tools 375

Attribute Meaning

Registered This field displays the number of SMs that were registered to the AP before the SA was
SM Count started. This helps the user know all the SMs re-registered after performing a SA.

Maximum This field displays the largest number of SMs that have been simultaneously registered in
Count of the AP since it was last rebooted. This count can provide some insight into sector history
Registered and provide comparison between current and maximum SM counts at a glance.
SMs

Current The currently selected SM. This is used on multiple pages.

Subscriber
Module

Duration This field allows operators to configure a specified time for which the spectrum is
scanned. If the entire spectrum is scanned prior to the end of the configured duration,
the analyzer will restart at the beginning of the spectrum.

Scanning This parameter defines the size of the channel scanned when running the analyzer.
Bandwidth

Remote Spectrum Analyzer page of BHM

The Remote Spectrum Analyzer page of BHM is explained in below table.

Table 97: Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - BHM

Chapter 2: Tools 376

 Attribute Meaning

Duration Refer Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP

Note

To get best performance of the link, the user has to ensure the maximum
Receive Power Level during alignment by pointing correctly. The proper
alignment is important to prevent interference in other cells. The achieving
Receive Power Level green (>- 70 dBm) is not sufficient for the link.

Using the Alignment Tool

The SM’s or BHS’s Alignment Tool may be used to maximize Receive Power Level, Signal Strength Ratio
and Signal to Noise Ratio to ensure a stable link. The Tool provides color coded readings to facilitate in
judging link quality.

Figure 81: Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level > -70 dBm

Figure 82: Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level between -70 to -80 dBm

Chapter 2: Tools 377

Figure 83: Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level < -80 dBm

Aiming page and Diagnostic LED – SM/BHS

The SM’s/BHS’s Alignment Tool (located in GUI Tools -> Aiming) may be used to configure the
SM’s/BHS’s LED panel to indicate received signal strength and to display decoded beacon
information/power levels. The SM/BHS LEDs provide different status based on the mode of the SM/BHS.
A SM/BHS in “operating” mode will register and pass traffic normally. A SM/BHS in “aiming” mode will
not register or pass traffic, but will display (via LED panel) the strength of received radio signals (based
on radio channel selected via Tools ->Aiming). See SM/BHS LEDs in Planning and Installation Guide.

Note

For accurate power level readings to be displayed, traffic must be present on the
radio link.

Refer SM/BHS LED description in Planning and Installation Guide for SM/BHS LED details.

Aiming page of SM
The Aiming page is similar to Spectrum Analyzer where it scans the spectrum but it does not establish
any session with any APs. It has two modes – Single Frequency Only and Normal Frequency Scan List.

The Aiming page of SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 378

Table 98: Aiming page attributes – SM

Attribute Meaning

Aiming Single Frequency Only: scans only selected single frequency.

Mode
Normal Frequency Scan List: scans: scans all frequency of scan list.

Single Select a particular frequency from drop-down menu for scanning.

Frequency

Scan Radio Enabled: the radio is configured to “aiming” or “alignment” mode, wherein the LED panel
Frequency displays an indication of receive power level. See SM/BHS LED description in Planning
Only Mode and Installation Guide.

Disabled: the radio is configured to “operating” mode, wherein the SM registers and
passes traffic normally.

Aiming The Aiming Results are displayed in two sections – Current entry and Other entries.
Results
Frequency: this field indicates the frequency of the AP which is transmitting the beacon
information.

Power: This field indicates the current receive power level (vertical channel) for the
frequency configured in parameter Radio Frequency.

Chapter 2: Tools 379

Attribute Meaning

Users: This field indicates the number of SMs currently registered to the AP which is
transmitting the beacon information.

ESN: This field indicates the MAC, or hardware address of the AP/BHM which is
transmitting the beacon information.

Color Code: This field displays a value from 0 to 254 indicating the AP’s configured color
code. For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Color
code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature, typically for
assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the SM
can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code value is 0.
This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

Multipoint or Backhaul: this field indicates type of configuration - point-Multipoint (PMP)

or Backhaul (PTP).

Aiming page of BHS

The Alignment page of BHS is explained in below table.

Table 99: Aiming page attributes - BHS

Attribute Meaning

Refer Aiming page attributes – SM for attribute details.

Chapter 2: Tools 380

 Note

The Alignment Tone cable for a 450i Series uses an RJ-45 to headset cable
whereas the 450 Series alignment tone cable uses an RJ-12 to headset cable.

Alignment Tone
For coarse alignment of the SM/BHS, use the Alignment Tool located at Tools ->Alignment Tool.
Optionally, connect a headset alignment tone kit to the AUX/SYNC port of the SM/BHS and listen to the
alignment tone, which indicates greater SM/BHS receive signal power by pitch. By adjusting the
SM’s/BHS’s position until the highest frequency pitch is obtained operators and installers can be
confident that the SM/BHS is properly positioned. For information on device GUI tools available for
alignment, see sections Aiming page and Diagnostic LED – SM/BHS, Using the Link Capacity Test tooland
Using AP Evaluation tool.

Figure 84: PMP/PTP 450i Series link alignment tone

Alignment Tool Headset and alignment tone adapters can be ordered from Cambium and Best-Tronics
(http://btpa.com/Cambium-Products/) respectively using the following part numbers:

Table 100: Alignment Tool Headsets and Alignment tone adapter third party product details

Reference Product description

ACATHS-01A Alignment tool headset for the PMP/PTP 450 and 450i Series products

BT-1277 Headset alignment cable (RJ-45) for the PMP/PTP 450i Series products

BT-0674 Headset alignment cable (RJ-12) for the PMP/PTP 450 Series products.

Chapter 2: Tools 381

Using the Link Capacity Test tool
The Link Capacity Test tab allows you to measure the throughput and efficiency of the RF link between
two modules. Many factors, including packet length, affect throughput.

The Link Capacity Test tool has following modes:

l Link Test with Multiple VCs: Tests radio-to-radio communication across selected or all registered
VCs, but does not bridge traffic (PMP 450m Series AP only).
l Link Test without Bridging: Tests radio-to-radio communication, but does not bridge traffic.
l Link Test with Bridging: Bridges traffic to “simulated” Ethernet ports, providing a status of the
bridged link.
l Link Test with Bridging and MIR: Bridges the traffic during test and also adheres to any MIR
(Maximum Information Rate) settings for the link.
l Extrapolated Link Test: Estimates the link capacity by sending few packets and measuring link
quality.

The Link Capacity Test tab contains the settable parameter Packet Length with a range of 64 to 1714
bytes. This allows you to compare throughput levels that result from various packet sizes.

The Current Results Status also displayed date and time of last performed Link Capacity Test. If there is
any change in time zone, the date and time will be adjusted accordingly.

Note

The Extrapolated Link Test can be run by Read-Only login also.

Performing Link Test

The link test is a tool that allows the user to test the performance of the RF link. Packets are added to one
or more queues in the AP in order to fill the frame. Throughput and efficiency are then calculated during
the test. The 450 and 450i APs offer link test options to one SM at a time. The 450m AP offers the option
of a link test to multiple VCs at the same time. This allows the user to test throughput in MU-MIMO mode,
in which multiple SMs are served at the same time.

This new link test can be found under Tools > Link Capacity Test

Link Test with Multiple LUIDs

Note

The “Link Test with Multiple LUIDs” Link Capacity Test is supported for PMP
450m Series AP only.

Figure 85: Link Capacity Test – PMP 450m Series AP

Procedure 24 Performing a Link Capacity Test - Link Test with Multiple LUIDs

Chapter 2: Tools 382

Link Test Configurations parameters

1 Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools web page of the module.

2 Set Link Test Mode attribute to Link Test with Multiple LUIDs.

3 Set Link with Multiple Data Channels attribute to Link Test Low Priority Data Channels, Link
Test Low and Medium Priority Data Channels, Link Test Low, Medium and High Priority Data
Channels, or Link Test All Data Channels.

4 Set the MU-MIMO attribute to Enabled or Disabled.

Note: The MU-MIMO feature is enabled on the Low Priority Data Channel only

5 Set the Ignore Configured CIR attribute to Enabled or Disabled.

6 Set the User Traffic During Link Test attribute to Block User Traffic or Allow User Traffic.

Link Test Settings parameters

7 Enter LUID List (applicable for PMP 450m AP only)

The Current Subscriber Module and LUID List are valid only when selecting Link Test with
Multiple LUIDs.

l Current Subscriber Module: select the LUID to perform the link test with
l LUID list: select a list or range of LUIDs to include in the link test with multiple LUIDs

If left blank, all LUIDs will be included in the link test

8 Type into the Duration field how long (in seconds) the RF link must be tested.

9 Select the Direction attribute to Bi-directional, Uplink Only, or Downlink Only.

10 Type into the Number of Packets field a value of 0 to flood the link for the duration of the
test.

11 Type into the Packet Length field a value of 1714 to send 1714-byte packets during the test.

12 Click the Start Test button.

Chapter 2: Tools 383

Figure 86: Link Test with Multiple LUIDs

Link Test without Bridging, Link Test with Bridging or Link Test with Bridging
and MIR
Figure 87: Link Test without Bridging

Chapter 2: Tools 384

Figure 88: Link Test with Bridging and MIR

Refer Link Test with Multiple LUIDs for Link Test procedure.

Chapter 2: Tools 385

Figure 89: Link Test without Bridging (1518-byte packet length)

Performing Extrapolated Link Test

The Extrapolated Link Test estimates the link capacity by sending few packets and measuring link quality.
Once the test is initiated, the radio starts session at the lower modulation, 1X, as traffic is passed
successfully across the link, the radio decides to try the next modulation, 2X. This process repeats until it
finds best throughput to estimate capacity of link.

Chapter 2: Tools 386

The procedure for performing Extrapolated Link Test is as follows:

Procedure 25 Performing an Extrapolated Link Test

1 Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools web page of the module.

2 Select Link Test Mode Extrapolated Link Test

3 Click the Start Test button.

4 In the Current Results Status block of this tab, view the results of the test.

Figure 90: Extrapolated Link Test results

Link Capacity Test page of AP

The Link Capacity Test page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 387

Table 101: Link Capacity Test page attributes – 450m AP

Attribute Meaning

Link Test Mode Select Link Test Mode from drop-down menu:

l Link Test with Multiple LUIDs (PMP 450m Series AP only)

l Link Test without Bridging

l Link Test with Bridging

l Link Test with Bridging and MIR

l Extrapolated Link Test

Signal to Noise Enable this attribute to display Signal-to-Noise information for the downlink and
Ratio uplink when running the link test.
Calculation
during Link
Test

SM Link Test Enable this parameter to restrict SM link test mode.

Mode
Restriction

Link Test with This parameter is used to enable or disable usage of either all available data channels
All Available or low priority data channel only during the link test.
Data Channels

Chapter 2: Tools 388

Attribute Meaning

MU-MIMO This parameter determines whether the DL flood test packets use MU-MIMO grouping
or not.

Note: This field is applicable only when the “Link Test Mode” field is set to “Link Test
with Multiple LUIDs” option.

Note: This field is applicable for PMP 450m APs only.

Display results If “Link test with multiple VC’s” is run and a subset of registered VC’s enters into the
for untested VC List field, then enabling this field produces a table that displays results for VC’s
Data Channels with traffic which are in session; but not tested as part of the link test.

Note: This field is applicable for PMP 450m flood tests only.

Ignore Enable this parameter to schedule flood data regardless of the CIR configuration for
Configured CIR each SM. For system release 16.1 and beyond, the exact impact of this setting depends
on which scheduler "mode" has been configured by the operator on the AP's QoS
page.

Enabled: ‘Run Link Test with Multiple LUID's using Legacy scheduler, ignoring
configured CIR's. Legacy scheduler is used here regardless of which scheduling mode
has been configured.

Disabled: If Legacy scheduler is enabled, test with legacy scheduler, using configured
CIR's. If Proportional scheduler is enabled, test with proportional scheduler.

Current The SM with which the Link Capacity Test is run. This field is only applicable for AP
Subscriber (not SM page).
Module

LUID List This field is displayed for PMP 450m Series AP. It is only applicable for “Link Test with
Multiple LUIDs” Test mode.

Enter LUID List (e.g. 18 or above for low priority LUIDs and 255 or above for high
priority LUIDs or 0 for all registered LUIDs) which needs to be used for link test traffic.

Duration This field allows operators to configure a specified time for which the spectrum is
scanned. If the entire spectrum is scanned prior to the end of the configured duration,
the analyzer will restart at the beginning of the spectrum.

Direction Configure the direction of the link test. Specify Downlink or Uplink to run the test only
in the corresponding direction only. Specific Bi-Directional to run the test in both
directions.

Number of The total number of packets to be sent during the Link Capacity Test. When Link Test
Packets Mode is set to Link Test Without Bridging this field is not configurable.

Packet Length The size of the packets in Bytes to send during the Link Capacity Test

Link Capacity Test page of BHM/BHS/SM

The Link Capacity Test page of BHM/BHS is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 389

Figure 91: Link Capacity Test page attributes – BHM/BHS

Attribute Meaning

Link Test Mode See Link Capacity Test page attributes – 450m AP

Signal to Noise Ratio Calculation during Link Test

Link Test with All Available Data Channels

Duration

Direction

Number of Packets

Packet Length

Using AP Evaluation tool

The AP Evaluation tab on Tools web page of the SM provides information about the AP that the SM sees.

Note

The data for this page may be suppressed by the SM Display of AP Evaluation
Data setting in the Configuration > Security tab of the AP.

The AP Eval results can be accessed via SNMP and config file.

AP Evaluation page
The AP Evaluation page of AP is explained in below table.

Chapter 2: Tools 390

Table 102: AP Evaluation tab attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Index This field displays the index value that the system assigns (for only this page) to
the AP where this SM is registered.

Frequency This field displays the frequency that the AP transmits.

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel
Bandwidth bandwidth must match between the AP and the SM.

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol
(slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle
before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefixes mean that for every 16 bits
of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used. The Cyclic Prefix 1/16
only can be selected at this time.

Chapter 2: Tools 391

Attribute Meaning

ESN This field displays the MAC address (electronic serial number) of the AP.
For operator convenience during SM aiming, this tab retains each detected ESN
for up to 15 minutes. If the broadcast frequency of a detected AP changes during a
15-minute interval in the aiming operation, then a multiple instance of the same
ESN is possible in the list. Eventually, the earlier instance expires and disappears
and the later instance remains to the end of its interval, but you can ignore the
early instance(s) whenever two or more are present.

Region This field displays the AP’s configured Country Code setting.

Power Level This field displays the SM’s combined received power level from the AP’s
transmission.

Beacon Count A count of the beacons seen in a given time period.

FECEn This field contains the SNMP value from the AP that indicates whether the
Forward Error Correction feature is enabled.

0: FEC is disabled

1: FEC is enabled

Type Multipoint indicates that the listing is for an AP.

Age This is a counter for the number of minutes that the AP has been inactive. At 15
minutes of inactivity for the AP, this field is removed from the AP Evaluation tab in
the SM.

Lockout This field displays how many times the SM has been temporarily locked out of
making registration attempts.

RegFail This field displays how many registration attempts by this SM failed.

Range This field displays the distance in feet for this link. To derive the distance in meters,
multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048.

MaxRange This field indicates the configured value for the AP’s Max Range parameter.

TxBER A 1 in this field indicates the AP is sending Radio BER.

Ebcast A 1 in this field indicates the AP or BHM is encrypting broadcast packets. A 0

indicates it is not.

Session Count This field displays how many sessions the SM (or BHS) has had with the AP (or
BHM). Typically, this is the sum of Reg Count and Re-Reg Count. However, the
result of internal calculation may display here as a value that slightly differs from
the sum.

In the case of a multipoint link, if the number of sessions is significantly greater

than the number for other SMs, then this may indicate a link problem or an
interference problem.

NoLUIDs This field indicates how many times the AP has needed to reject a registration
request from a SM because its capacity to make LUID assignments is full. This then
locks the SM out of making any valid attempt for the next 15 minutes. It is
extremely unlikely that a non-zero number would be displayed here.

Chapter 2: Tools 392

Attribute Meaning

OutOfRange This field indicates how many times the AP has rejected a registration request
from a SM because the SM is a further distance away than the range that is
currently configured in the AP. This then locks the SM out of making any valid
attempt for the next 15 minutes.

AuthFail This field displays how many times authentication attempts from this SM have
failed in the AP.

EncryptFail This field displays how many times an encryption mismatch has occurred between
the SM and the AP.

Rescan Req This field displays how many times a re-range request has occurred for the BHM
that is being evaluated in the AP Eval page of a BHS.

SMLimitReached This field displays 0 if additional SMs may be registered to the AP. If a 1 is
displayed, the AP will not accept additional SM registrations.

NoVC’s This counter is incremented when the SM is registering to an AP which determines

that no VC resources are available for allocation. This could be a primary data
channel (a low priority data channel) or one of the other possible data channel
priorities (a Medium priority data channel, or High priority data channel, or Ultra
High priority data channel)

VCRsvFail This counter is incremented when the SM is registering to an AP which has a VC

resource available for allocation but cannot reserve the resource for allocation.

VCActFail This counter is incremented when the SM is registering to an AP which has a VC

resource available for allocation and has reserved the VC, but cannot activate the
resource for allocation.

AP Gain This field displays the total external gain (antenna) used by the AP.

RcvT This field displays the AP’s configured receive target for receiving SM
transmissions (this field affects automatic SM power adjust).

Sector ID This field displays the value of the Sector ID field that is provisioned for the AP.

Color Code This field displays a value from 0 to 254 indicating the AP’s configured color code.
For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Color
code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature,
typically for assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a SM to register to only a specific AP, even where
the SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code
value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

BeaconVersion This field indicates that the beacon is OFDM (value of 1).

Sector User Count This field displays how many SMs are registered on the AP.

NumULHalfSlots This is the number of uplink slots in the frame for this AP.

NumDLHalfSlots This is the number of downlink slots in the frame for this.

Chapter 2: Tools 393

Attribute Meaning

NumULContSlots This field displays how many Contention Slots are being used in the uplink portion
of the frame.

WhiteSched Flag to display if schedule whitening is supported via FPGA

ICC This field lists the SMs that have registered to the AP with their Installation Color
Code (ICC), Primary CC, Secondary CC or Tertiary CC.

SM PPPoE This filed provides information to the user whether the SM is supporting PPPoE or
not.

Frame Period This field displays the configured Frame Period of the radio.

Last Registered Primary Color Code AP

MAC Address This field displays the last registered AP’s MAC address.

Frequency This field displays the last registered AP’s frequency.

Channel This field displays the last registered AP’s channel bandwidth.
Bandwidth

Color Code This field displays the last registered AP’s color code.

Air Delay This field displays the last registered AP’s air delay.

Receive Power This field displays the last registered AP’s receive power.

Scan Statitistics

Scan Cycle Count The file displays the number of scan cycles. This increments after the SM
completes scanning every configured frequency and channel bandwidth.

Beacon Statistics

Unsupported Count of beacons that the SM has received that is from a beacon that it does not
Feature Beacon support, which will prevent registration. If encounter this, upgrade your SM to the
Received latest supported software version.

Unknown Feature Count of beacons that the SM has received that is from a beacon that is running a
Beacon Received feature that is unknown, which will prevent registration. If this stat is encountered,
upgrade your SM to the latest supported software version.

Old Version Count of the beacons where the version in the beacon mismatched and prevented
Beacon Received registration.

Wrong Frequency Count of beacons that was reported on a different frequency than was received.
Beacon Received

Using BHM Evaluation tool

The BHM Evaluation tab on Tools web page of the BHS provides information about the BHM that the BHS
sees.

BHM Evaluation page of BHS

The BHM Evaluation page of BHS is explained in below figure.

Chapter 2: Tools 394

Figure 92: BHM Evaluation tab attributes - BHS

Attribute Meaning

Index This field displays the index value that the system assigns (for only this page) to
the BHM where this BHS is registered.

Frequency This field displays the frequency that the BHM transmits.

Channel The channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. The setting for the channel
Bandwidth bandwidth must match between the BHM and the BHS.

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol
(slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle
before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefixes mean that for every 16 bits
of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

ESN This field displays the MAC address (electronic serial number) of the BHM.
For operator convenience during BHS aiming, this tab retains each detected ESN
for up to 15 minutes. If the broadcast frequency of a detected BHM changes during
a 15-minute interval in the aiming operation, then a multiple instance of the same
ESN is possible in the list. Eventually, the earlier instance expires and disappears
and the later instance remains to the end of its interval, but you can ignore the
early instance(s) whenever two or more are present.

Region This field displays the BHM’s configured Country Code setting.

Power Level This field displays the BHS’s combined received power level from the BHM’s
transmission.

Beacon Count A count of the beacons seen in a given time period.

FECEn This field contains the SNMP value from the BHM that indicates whether the
Forward Error Correction feature is enabled.

0: FEC is disabled

1: FEC is enabled

Type Multipoint indicates that the listing is for a BHM.

Chapter 2: Tools 395

Attribute Meaning

Age This is a counter for the number of minutes that the BHM has been inactive. At 15
minutes of inactivity for the BHS, this field is removed from the BHM Evaluation
tab in the BHS.

Lockout This field displays how many times the BHS has been temporarily locked out of
making registration attempts.

RegFail This field displays how many registration attempts by this BHS failed.

Range This field displays the distance in feet for this link. To derive the distance in meters,
multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048.

MaxRange This field indicates the configured value for the AP’s Max Range parameter.

TxBER A 1 in this field indicates the BHM is sending Radio BER.

Ebcast A 1 in this field indicates the BHM is encrypting broadcast packets. A 0 indicates it
is not.

Session Count This field displays how many sessions the BHS has had with the BHM. Typically,
this is the sum of Reg Count and Re-Reg Count. However, the result of internal
calculation may display here as a value that slightly differs from the sum.

In the case of a multipoint link, if the number of sessions is significantly greater

than the number for other BHS’s, then this may indicate a link problem or an
interference problem.

NoLUIDs This field indicates how many times the BHM has needed to reject a registration
request from a BHS because its capacity to make LUID assignments is full. This
then locks the BHS out of making any valid attempt for the next 15 minutes. It is
extremely unlikely that a non-zero number would be displayed here.

OutOfRange This field indicates how many times the BHM has rejected a registration request
from a BHS because the BHS is a further distance away than the range that is
currently configured in the BHM. This then locks the BHS out of making any valid
attempt for the next 15 minutes.

AuthFail This field displays how many times authentication attempts from this SM have
failed in the BHM.

EncryptFail This field displays how many times an encryption mismatch has occurred between
the BHS and the BHM.

Rescan Req This field displays how many times a re-range request has occurred for the BHM
that is being evaluated in the BHM Eval page of a BHM.

SMLimitReached This field displays 0 if additional BHSs may be registered to the BHM. If a 1 is
displayed, the BHM will not accept additional BHS registrations.

NoVC’s This counter is incremented when the BHS is registering to a BHM which
determines that no data channel resources are available for allocation. This could
be a primary data channel (a low priority data channel) or one of the other
possible data channel priorities (a Medium priority data channel, or High priority
data channel, or Ultra High priority data channel)

Chapter 2: Tools 396

 Attribute Meaning

VCRsvFail This counter is incremented when the BHS is registering to a BHM which has a VC
resource available for allocation but cannot reserve the resource for allocation.

VCActFail This counter is incremented when the BHS is registering to a BHM which has a VC
resource available for allocation and has reserved the VC, but cannot activate the
resource for allocation.

AP Gain This field displays the total external gain (antenna) used by the BHM.

RcvT This field displays the AP’s configured receive target for receiving BHS
transmissions (this field affects automatic BHS power adjust).

Sector ID This field displays the value of the Sector ID field that is provisioned for the BHM.

Color Code This field displays a value from 0 to 254 indicating the BHM’s configured color
code. For registration to occur, the color code of the BHS and the BHM must
match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management
feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a BHS to register to only a specific BHM, even
where the BHS can communicate with multiple BHMs. The default setting for the
color code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255
color codes).

BeaconVersion This field indicates that the beacon is OFDM (value of 1).

Sector User Count This field displays how many BHS’s are registered on the BHM.

NumULHalfSlots This is the number of uplink slots in the frame for this BHM.

NumDLHalfSlots This is the number of downlink slots in the frame for this.

NumULContSlots This field displays how many Contention Slots are being used in the uplink portion
of the frame.

WhiteSched Flag to display if schedule whitening is supported via FPGA

ICC This field lists the BHSs that have registered to the BHM with their Installation
Color Code (ICC), Primary CC, Secondary CC or Tertiary CC.

SM PPPoE This filed provides information to the user whether the BHS is supporting PPPoE
or not.

Frame Period This field displays the configured Frame Period of the radio.

Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool

The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all APs/BHMs to receive timing from a
synchronization source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global Positioning System). This
ensures that the modules are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame.

The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all APs/BHMs of the same frequency
band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop transmitting each
frame before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP/BHM attempting to receive the
signal from a distant SM/BHS while a nearby AP transmits, which could overpower that signal.

The following parameters on the AP determine the transmit/receive ratio:

Chapter 2: Tools 397

 l Max Range

l Frame Period

l Downlink Data percentage

l (reserved) Contention Slots

If OFDM (PMP 430, PMP 450, PTP 230) and FSK (PMP 1x0) APs/BHMs of the same frequency band are in
proximity, or if APs/BHMs set to different parameters (differing in their Max Range values, for example),
then operator must use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings.

The frame calculator is available on the Frame Calculator tab of the Tools web page. To use the Frame
Calculator, type various configurable parameter values into the calculator for each proximal AP and then
record the resulting AP/BHM Receive Start value. Next vary the Downlink Data percentage in each
calculation and iterate until the calculated AP/BHM Receive Start for all collocated AP/BHMs where the
transmit end does not come before the receive start.

The calculator does not use values in the module or populate its parameters. It is merely a convenience
application that runs on a module. For this reason, you can use any FSK module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to
perform FSK frame calculations for setting the parameters on an FSK AP and any OFDM module (AP, SM,
BHM, BHS) to perform OFDM frame calculations for setting the parameters on an OFDM AP/BHM.

For more information on PMP/PTP 450 Platform co-location, see

https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/colocationtool/

The co-location is also supported for 900 MHz PMP 450i APs (OFDM) and PMP 100 APs (FSK). Please
refer Co-location of PMP 450 and PMP 100 systems in the 900 MHz band and migration
recommendations document for details.

Caution

APs/BHMs that have slightly mismatched transmit-to-receive ratios and low

levels of data traffic may see little effect on throughput. A system that was not
tuned for co-location may work fine at low traffic levels, but encounter problems
at higher traffic levels. The conservative practice is to tune for co-location
before traffic ultimately increases. This prevents problems that occur as sectors
are built.

Chapter 2: Tools 398

The OFDM Frame Calculator page is explained in below table.

Table 103: OFDM Frame Calculator page attributes

Attribute Meaning

Link Mode For AP to SM frame calculations, select Multipoint Link

For BHM to BHS frame calculations, select Point-To-Point Link

Platform Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the AP/BHM.
Type
AP/BHM

Platform Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the SM/BHS.
Type
SM/BHS

Channel Set this to the channel bandwidth used in the AP/BHM.

Bandwidth

Cyclic Prefix Set this to the cyclic prefix used in the AP/BHM.

Max Range Set to the same value as the Max Range parameter is set in the AP(s) or BHM(s).

Frame Set to the same value as the Frame Period parameter is set in the AP(s) or BHM(s).
Period

Downlink Initially set this parameter to the same value that the AP/BHM has for its Downlink Data
Data parameter (percentage). Then, use the Frame Calculator tool procedure as described
inProcedure 26 Using the Frame Calculator , you will vary the value in this parameter to
find the proper value to write into the Downlink Data parameter of all APs or BHMs in the
cluster.

PMP 450 Platform Family APs or BHMs offer a range of 15% to 85% and default to 75%.
The value that you set in this parameter has the following interaction with the value of
the Max Range parameter (above):

The default Max Range value is 5 miles and, at that distance, the maximum Downlink
Data value (85% in PMP 450 Platform) is functional.

Contention This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention Slots configured by the
Slots operator. Set this parameter to the value of the Contention Slot parameter is set in the
APs or BHMs.

SM/BHS This field displays the time in ns (nano seconds), that a SM/BHS is away from the
One Way Air AP/BHM.
Delay

The Calculated Frame Results display several items of interest:

Chapter 2: Tools 399

Table 104: OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes

Attribute Meaning

Modulation The type of radio modulation used in the calculation (OFDM for 450 Platform Family)

Total Frame The total number of bits used in the calculated frames
Bits

Data Slots This field is based on the Downlink Data setting. For example, a result within the
(Down/Up) typical range for a Downlink Data setting of 75% is 61/21, meaning 61 data slots down
and 21 data slots up.

Contention This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention Slots configured by the
Slots operator.

Air Delay for This is the roundtrip air delay in bit times for the Max Range value set in the
Max Range calculator

Approximate The Max Range value used for frame calculation

distance for
Max Range

AP Transmit In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP/BHM ceases transmission.
End

AP Receive In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP/BHM is ready to receive
Start transmission from the SM/BHS.

AP Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP/BHM will cease receiving
transmission from the SM/BHS.

SM Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM/BHS will cease receiving
transmission from the AP/BHM.

SM Transmit In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM/BHS starts the transmission.
Start

SM One Way Air This filed displays the time in ns, that SM/BHS is away from the AP/BHM.
Delay

SM This field displays an approximate distance in miles (feet) that the SM/BHS is away
Approximate from the AP/BHM.
distance

To use the Frame Calculator to ensure that all APs or BHMs are configured to transmit and receive at the
same time, follow the procedure below:

Procedure 26 Using the Frame Calculator

1 Populate the OFDM Frame Calculator parameters with appropriate values as described above.

2 Click the Calculate button.

3 Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section

4 Record the value of the AP Receive Start field

Chapter 2: Tools 400

 5 Enter a parameter set from another AP in the system – for example, an AP in the same cluster that
has a higher Max Range value configured.

6 Click the Calculate button.

7 Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section

8 If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are within 150 bit times of each other, skip to
step 10.

9 If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are not within 150 bit times of each other,
modify the Downlink Data parameter until the calculated results for AP Receive Start are within
300 bit time of each other, if possible, 150 bit time.

10 Access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of each AP in the cluster and change its
Downlink Data parameter (percentage) to the last value that was used in the Frame Calculator.

Using the Subscriber Configuration tool

The Subscriber Configuration page in the Tools page of the AP displays:

l The current values whose control may be subject to the setting in the Configuration Source
parameter.

l An indicator of the source for each value.

This page may be referenced for information on how the link is behaving based on where the SM is
retrieving certain QoS and VLAN parameters.

Figure 93: SM Configuration page of AP

The AP displays one of the following for the configuration source:

Chapter 2: Tools 401

 l (SM) – QoS/VLAN parameters are derived from the SM’s settings

l (APCAP) – QoS/VLAN parameters are derived from the AP’s settings, including any keyed
capping (for radios capped at 4 Mbps, 10 Mbps, or 20 Mbps)

l (D) – QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from the device, due to failed retrieval from the AAA or
WM server.

l (AAA) – QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from the RADIUS server

l (BAM) – QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from a WM BAM server

Using the Link Status tool

The Link Status Tool displays information about the most-recent Link Test initiated on the SM or BHS.
Link Tests initiated from the AP or BHM are not included in the Link Status table. This table is useful for
monitoring link test results for all SMs or BHS in the system.

The Link Status table is color coded to display health of link between AP/BHM and SM/BHS. The current
Modulation Level Uplink/Downlink is chosen to determine link health and color coded accordingly.

Uplink/Downlink Rate Column will be color coded using current Rate as per the table below:

Table 105: Color code versus uplink/downlink rate column

Actual Rate 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x

MIMO-A Red Orange Green Blue NA NA NA NA

MIMO B Red Red Orange Orange Green Green Blue Blue

Link Status – AP/BHM

The current Uplink Rate for each SM or BHS in Session in now available on AP or BHM Link Status Page.
From system release 15.2, a single Rate is used and shown for all data channels of an SM.

The Link Status tool results include values for the following fields for AP/BHM.

Table 106: Link Status page attributes – AP/BHM

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber This field displays the MAC address and Site Name of the SM.

Chapter 2: Tools 402

Attribute Meaning

Note

The MAC is hot link to open the interface to the SM. In some
instances, depending on network activity and network design, this
route to the interface yields a blank web page. If this occurs, refresh
your browser view.

Site Name indicates the name of the SM. You can assign or change
this name on the Configuration web page of the SM. This
information is also set into the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and
can be polled by an SNMP management server.

LUID This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS
registers to the AP/BHM, the system assigns an LUID of 2 or a higher unique
number to the SM/BHS. If a SM/BHS loses registration with the AP/BHS and
then regains registration, the SM/BHS will retain the same LUID.

Note

Both the LUID and the MAC are hot links to open the interface to
the SM/BHS. In some instances, depending on network activity and
network design, this route to the interface yields a blank web page.
If this occurs, refresh your browser view.

Downlink Statistics - This field displays a count of beacons and maps received by the SM in
Beacon/Maps % percentage. SMs operating on System Release 20.2.1 or later will send the the
Received lower of the map and beacon percentages and that will be displayed in this field.
Curr/Min/Max/Avg SMs operating on System Release 20.2 or earlier will always send only the
beacon percentage.

This stat is recommended to be between 99-100%. If it is lower than 99%, it

indicates a problematic link as beacons and maps are sent in the lowest
modulation 1X MIMO-A. This statistic is updated every 15 seconds.

Downlink Statistics – This field represents the received power level at the SM/BHS as well as the ratio
Power Level: Signal of horizontal path signal strength to vertical path signal strength at the SM/BHS.
Strength Ratio

Downlink Statistics – This field represents the signal to noise ratio for the downlink (displayed when
Signal to Noise Ratio parameter Signal to Noise Ratio Calculation during Link Test is enabled)
expressed for both the horizontal and vertical channels.

Downlink Statistics – This field displays the average EVM statistics that measures RF signal quality.
Average EVM (dB)

Downlink Statistics – This field displays the efficiency of the radio link, expressed as a percentage, for
Link Test Efficiency the radio downlink.

Downlink Statistics – The SU-MIMO rate applies to all AP platforms.

SU-MIMO Rate
For 450m, this field indicates the rate being used for symbols where this
particular VC is not being MU-MIMO grouped with other SMs.

For 450 and 450i platforms, there is no grouping and this field indicates the
modulation rate for all symbols.

Chapter 2: Tools 403

Attribute Meaning

Downlink Statistics – This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where the low or
MU-MIMO Rate medium priority data channels are MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the
same slot with other low or Medium priority data channels from other SM's.

Uplink Statistics - This field represents the combined received power level at the AP/BHM as well
Power Level: Signal as the ratio of horizontal path signal strength to vertical path signal strength.
Strength Ratio

Uplink Statistics – The fragments modulation is an approximation at which modulation rate a

Fragments packet was received. This stat is only for engineering debugging and is not
Modulation available via SNMP and is not recommended to be used by customers. Different
packets sizes can affect the reading to only show lower modulation rates. Also,
unless “Receive Quality Debug” is enabled, it will just be a sampling of packets
and not all the packets.

Uplink Statistics – This field represents the signal to noise ratio for the uplink (displayed when
Signal to Noise Ratio parameter Signal to Noise Ratio Calculation during Link Test is enabled)
expressed for both the horizontal and vertical channels.

Uplink Statistics – This field displays the efficiency of the radio link, expressed as a percentage, for
Link Test Efficiency the radio uplink.

Uplink Statistics – The SU-MIMO rate applies to all AP platforms.

SU-MIMO Rate
For 450m, this field indicates the rate being used for symbols where a VC is not
being MU-MIMO grouped with other SMs.

For 450 and 450i platforms, there is no grouping and this field indicates the
modulation rate for all symbols.

Uplink Statistics – This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where the low or
MU-MIMO Rate medium priority data channels are MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the
same slot with other high or ultra high priority data channels from other SM's.

BER Results This field displays the over-the-air Bit Error Rates for each downlink. (The ARQ
[Automatic Resend Request] ensures that the transport BER [the BER seen end-
to-end through a network] is essentially zero.) The level of acceptable over-the-
air BER varies, based on operating requirements, but a reasonable value for a
good link is a BER of 1e-4 (1 x 10-4) or better, approximately a packet resend rate
of 5%.

BER is generated using unused bits in the downlink. During periods of peak load,
BER data is not updated as often, because the system puts priority on transport
rather than on BER calculation.

Reg Requests A Reg Requests count is the number of times the SM/BHS registered after the
AP/BHM determined that the link had been down.

If the number of sessions is significantly greater than the number for other
SMs/BHS, then this may indicate a link problem (check mounting, alignment,
receive power levels) or an interference problem (conduct a spectrum scan).

ReReg Requests A ReReg Requests count is the number of times the AP/BHM received a SM/BHS
registration request while the AP/BHM considered the link to be still up (and
therefore did not expect registration requests).

Chapter 2: Tools 404

Attribute Meaning

If the number of sessions is significantly greater than the number for other
SMs/BHS, then this may indicate a link problem (check mounting, alignment,
receive power levels) or an interference problem (conduct a spectrum scan).

Link Status – SM/BHS

The Link Status tool of SM/BHS displays Downlink Status and Uplink Status information.

Table 107: Link Status page attributes – SM/BHS

Attribute Meaning

Downlink Status

Receive Power This field lists the current combined receive power level, in dBm.

Path Info

Signal Strength This field displays the difference of the Vertical path received signal power to the
Ratio Horizontal path received signal power for downlink.

Signal to Noise This field lists the current signal-to-noise level, an indication of the separation of
Ratio the received power level vs. noise floor for downlink.

EVM This field displays the average EVM statistics that measures RF signal quality.

Chapter 2: Tools 405

Attribute Meaning

Beacons/Maps Displays a count of beacons received by the SM in percentage. This value must be
typically between 99-100%. If lower than 99%, it indicates a problematic link. This
statistic is updated every 16 seconds.

Received This field represents the percentage of fragments received at each modulation
Fragments state, per path (polarization)
Modulation

Latest Remote This field is not applicable.

Link Test
Efficiency
Percentage

BER Total Avg This field displays the over-the-air average Bit Error Rates (BER) for downlink.
Results

Beacons Received The beacon count on the SM can be used to estimate the interference in the
Last 15 minutes channel. The min/avg/max beacon percentage displayed based on this value for
the last 15 mins.

Uplink Status

Transmit Power This field displays the current combined transmit power level, in dBm.

Max Transmit This field displays the maximum transmit power of SM.
Power

Power Level This field indicates the combined power level at which the SM is set to transmit,
based on the Country Code and Antenna Gain settings.

Signal Strength This field displays the difference of the Vertical path received signal power to the
Ratio Horizontal path received signal power for uplink.

Signal to Noise This field lists the current signal-to-noise level, an indication of the separation of
Ratio the received power level vs. noise floor for uplink.

Average EVM This field displays the average EVM statistics that measures RF signal quality.

Latest Remote This field is not applicable.

Link Test
Efficiency
Percentage

Local Stats

Session Status This field displays the current state, Virtual channel, channel rate adaptation and
MIMO-A/MIMO-B/SISO status of SM.

Spatial Frequency This filed displays the spatial frequency value of the VC or SM.

Run Link Test

See Exploratory Test section of Performing Extrapolated Link Test

Link Quality Indicator

Chapter 2: Tools 406

 Attribute Meaning

LQI This field displays the quality of the link used for data communication between AP
and SM.

This value is derived by calculating:

Downlink LQI value * Uplink LQI value * Re-Registration Quality Index value

Downlink LQI This field displays the downlink quality of the link. It is the ratio of Actual Average
Modulation Rate of the data packets and the expected modulation rate.

Downlink Actual This field displays the average value of the actual Downlink modulation rate.
Average
Modulation Rate

Downlink This field displays the expected Downlink modulation rate.

Expected
Modulation Rate

Beacon Quality This field displays the Beacon Quality Index. It is calculated based on the receive
Index beacon percentage.

Uplink LQI This field displays the uplink quality of the link. It is the ratio of Actual Average
Modulation Rate of the data packets and the expected modulation rate.

Uplink Actual This field displays the average value of the actual uplink modulation rate.
Average
Modulation Rate

Uplink Expected This field displays the expected Uplink modulation rate.
Modulation Rate

Re-Registration This field displays the number of re-registrations of the SM. When there are no re-
Quality Index registrations, this quality index will be 100%.

Re-Registration This field displays the re-registration count of the SM.

Count

Reference Downlink reference EVM used for LQI calculations.

Downlink Quality
Index

Reference Uplink Uplink reference EVM used for LQI calculations.

Quality Index

Access Point MAC This field displays the MAC address of the AP to which this SM is registered.
Address

Using BER Results tool

Radio BER data represents bit errors at the RF link level. Due to CRC checks on fragments and packets
and ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request), the BER of customer data is essentially zero. Radio BER gives one
indication of link quality. Other important indications to consider includes the received power level, signal
to noise ratio and link tests.

BER is only instrumented on the downlink and is displayed on the BER Results tab of the Tools page in
any SM. Each time the tab is clicked, the current results are read and counters are reset to zero.

Chapter 2: Tools 407

The BER Results tab can be helpful in troubleshooting poor link performance.

The link is acceptable if the value of this field is less than 10−4. If the BER is greater than 10−4, re-evaluate
the installation of both modules in the link.

The BER test signal is broadcast by the AP/BHM (and compared to the expected test signal by the
SM/BHS) only when capacity in the sector allows it. This signal is the lowest priority for AP/BHM
transmissions.

Figure 94: BER Results tab of the SM

Using the Sessions tool

The PMP 450 Platform Family AP has a tab Sessions under the Tools category which allows operators to
drop one or all selected SM sessions and force a SM re-registration. This operation is useful to force QoS
changes for SMs without losing AP logs or statistics. This operation may take 5 minutes to regain all SM
registrations.

Figure 95: Sessions tab of the AP

Using the Ping Test tool

The PMP 450 Platform Family AP has a tab Ping Test under the Tools category which allows users to
check the accessibility of the given IP V4 address or a valid domain name

Chapter 2: Tools 408

Figure 96: Ping Test tab of the AP

Note

When a domain name (for example, www.google.com) is used for ping test,
make sure that Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server parameters are
configured in the Configuration > IP tab of the AP.

Firmware Upgrade
Prior to System Release 22.0, the PMP 450 family of Radios can only be upgraded either from cnMaestro
or CNUT. This feature allows the operator to upgrade software from the Radios Graphical User Interface
(GUI). The software can be upgraded from the Tools -> Firmware Upgrade page, under the Upload and
Update New Firmware Image section, by uploading the cnMaestro Software Package.

Chapter 2: Tools 409

Figure 97: Firmware upgrade

Note

PMP 450 AP, PMP 450 SM, and PTP 450 Radios do not have enough resources
to support uploading the cnMaestro software package.

The operator can upgrade PMP 450 AP, PMP 450 SM, and PTP 450 Radios from Web GUI by uploading a
radio-specific image file. The image that can be uploaded to a Radio is listed under the Image details
section, on the Tools -> Firmware Upgrade page and is shown in Figure 98 (for AP) and Figure 99 (for
SM).

Figure 98: Firmware upgrade page for PMP 450 AP

Figure 99: Firmware upgrade page for PMP 450 SM

Radio-specific image files can be extracted from the cnMaestro Software Package, using file extractor
tools like WinZip, 7-Zip, etc.

Table 108 lists the image files specific to the Radios and their location in the cnMaestro software package.

Chapter 2: Tools 410

Table 108: Image file location for Radio types

Radio Type Image File Location

PMP 450 AP 5x_20_cf200.img \NIOS2\IMAGES\450\AP\SIGNED\

PMP 450 SM 5x_cat120.img \NIOS2\IMAGES\450\SM_BH\SIGNED\

PTP 450 ptp450_c120.img \NIOS2\IMAGES\450\SM_BH\SIGNED\

Chapter 2: Tools 411

Chapter 3: Operation
This chapter provides instructions for operators of the 450 Platform Family wireless Ethernet Bridge. The
following topics are described in this chapter:

l System information

l Viewing General Status

l Viewing Session Status

l Viewing Remote Subscribers

l Interpreting messages in the Event Log

l Viewing the Network Interface

l Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors

l System statistics

l Viewing the Scheduler Statistics

l Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics

l Interpreting Bridging Table statistics

l Interpreting Translation Table statistics

l Interpreting Ethernet statistics

l Interpreting RF Control Block statistics

l Interpreting VLAN statistics

l Interpreting Data Channels statistics

l Interpreting Proportional Scheduler

l Interpreting MIR/Burst statistics

l Interpreting Overload statistics

l Interpreting DHCP Relay statistics

l Interpreting Filter statistics

l Viewing ARP statistics

l Viewing NAT statistics

l Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics

l Interpreting Sync Status statistics

Chapter 3: Operation 412

 l Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities

l Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics

l Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics

l Interpreting syslog statistics

l Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics

l Radio Recovery

System information
This section describes how to use the summary and status pages to monitor the status of the Ethernet
ports and wireless link.

l Viewing General Status

l Viewing Session Status

l Viewing Remote Subscribers

l Interpreting messages in the Event Log

l Viewing the Network Interface

l Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors

Viewing General Status

The General Status tab provides information on the operation of this AP/BHM and SM/BHS. This is the
page that opens by default when you access the GUI of the radio.

General Status page of AP

The General Status page of PMP 450m AP is explained in General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP

The General Status page of PMP 450 AP is explained in.General Status page attributes – PMP 450 AP

The General Status page of PMP 450i AP is explained in General Status page of AP.

Chapter 3: Operation 413

Table 109: General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP

Chapter 3: Operation 414

Attribute Meaning

Device Type This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of
the device, its module type and its MAC address.

Board Type This field indicates the series of hardware.

Product Type The field indicates model number of 450m device. The 450m Series has two model
variants.

l PMP 450m: This model works in SU-MIMO mode which is default “limited”
mode. The MU-MIMO license can be purchased from Cambium Networks
and applied.

MU-MIMO: This model works in MU-MIMO mode.

Software Version This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release and
whether communications involving the module are secured by AES encryption. If
you request technical support, provide the information from this field.

Bootloader This field indicates the version of Uboot running on the 450m AP platform.
Version

CPU Usage This field indicates the current CPU utilization of the device.

Board MSN This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Serial number. A unique serial number
assigned to each radio at the factory for inventory and quality control.

Board Model This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Model number. A unique serial number
assigned to each for inventory and quality control.

FPGA Version This field indicates the version of the field-programmable gate array (FPGA) on
the module. If you request technical support, provide the value of this field.

Uptime This field indicates how long the module has operated since power was applied.

System Time This field provides the current time. If the AP is connected to a CMM4, then this
field provides GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). Any SM that registers to the AP
inherits the system time.

Main Ethernet This field indicates the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet interface to the AP.
Interface

Region Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which automatically
implements frequency band range for the selected region. Units shipped to regions
other than restrictions the United States must be configured with the
corresponding Region Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

Regulatory This field indicates whether the configured Country Code and radio frequency are
compliant with respect to their compatibility. 450 Platform Family products
shipped to the United States is locked to a Country Code setting of “United
States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be configured
with the corresponding Country Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.

Chapter 3: Operation 415

Attribute Meaning

DFS (Dynamic This field dynamically selects frequency based on detection of radar pulses.
Frequency
Selection)

Channel This field indicates the current operating center frequency, in MHz.
Frequency

Channel This field indicates the current size of the channel band used for radio
Bandwidth transmission.

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol
(slot) is repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle
before receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits
of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

Frame Period This field indicates the current Frame Period setting of the radio in ms.

Encryption This field indicates the capability and the encryption configuration of the device.

Color Code This field displays a value from 0 to 254 indicating the AP’s configured color code.
For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Color
code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature,
typically for assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a SM to register to only a specific AP, even where
the SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code
value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

Max Range This field indicates the setting of the Max Range parameter, which contributes to
the way the radio transmits. Verify that the Max Range parameter is set to a
distance slightly greater than the distance between the AP and the furthest SM
that must register to this AP.

EIRP This field indicates the combined power level at which the AP will transmit, based
on the Country Code.

Temperature This field indicates the current operating temperature of the device board.

CBSD Grant State This field indicates the CBRS Registration and Grant state as described in
Winnforum document WINNF-TS-0016. For more information on CBRS
procedures and states see the Cambium's CBRS Consolidated Procedurs Guide.

Registered SM This field indicates how many SMs are registered to the AP.
Count

Sync Pulse Status This field indicates the status of synchronization as follows:

Generating Sync indicates that the module is set to generate the sync pulse.

Receiving Sync indicates that the module is set to receive a sync pulse from an
outside source and is receiving the pulse.

No Sync Since Boot up / ERROR: No Sync Pulse indicates that the module is set to
receive a sync pulse from an outside source and is not receiving the pulse.

Chapter 3: Operation 416

Attribute Meaning

Note

When this message is displayed, the AP transmitter is turned off to

avoid self-interference within the system.

Sync Pulse Source This field indicates the status of the synchronization source:

Searching indicates that the unit is searching for a GPS fix

Timing Port/UGPS indicates that the module is receiving sync via the timing
AUX/SYNC timing port

Power Port indicates that the module is receiving sync via the power port
(Ethernet port).

On-board GPS indicates that the module is receiving sync via the unit’s internal
GPS module

Maximum Count This field displays the largest number of SMs that have been simultaneously
of Registered SMs registered in the AP since it was last rebooted. This count can provide some insight
into sector history and provide comparison between current and maximum SM
counts at a glance.

Data Slots Down This field indicates the number of frame slots that are designated for use by data
traffic in the downlink (sent from the AP to the SM). The AP calculates the number
of data slots based on the Max Range, Downlink Data and (reserved) Contention
Slots configured by the operator.

Data Slots Up This field indicates the number of frame slots that are designated for use by data
traffic in the uplink (sent from the SM to the AP). The AP calculates the number of
data slots based on the Max Range, Downlink Data and (reserved) Contention
Slots configured by the operator.

Contention Slots This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention Slots configured by the
operator. See Contention slots.

Connection Status This field indicates the device connectivity to cnMaestro (Cambium’s cloud-based
network management system).

Account ID This field shows Account ID which is registered with Cambium Networks and it
allows operator to manage devices using cnMaestro.

Site Name This field indicates the name of the physical module. You can assign or change this
name in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page. This information is also set
into the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management
server.

Site Contact This field indicates contact information for the physical module. You can provide
or change this information in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page. This
information is also set into the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by
an SNMP management server.

Site Location This field indicates site information for the physical module. You can provide or
change this information in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page.

Chapter 3: Operation 417

Attribute Meaning

MU-MIMO Mode This field displays information about MU-MIMO mode. If AP is keyed as MU-MIMO,
it will display “MU-MIMO” (Multi User - MIMO) otherwise it will display “SU-MIMO”
(Single User - MIMO).

AES-256 This displays the status of the entered AES-256 Encryption Key.
Encryption Keyed
Note

To enable AES-256 Encryption, a feature key needs to be purchased.

Time Updated and This field displays information about the keying of the radio.
Location Code

Chapter 3: Operation 418

Table 110: General Status page attributes – PMP 450 AP

Chapter 3: Operation 419

Attribute Meaning

Device Type See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Board Type

Product Type This indicates model of the device.

Software Version See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

CPU Usage This field indicates the current CPU utilization of the device.

Board MSN This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Serial number. A unique serial number
assigned to each radio at the factory for inventory and quality control.

FPGA Version See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

PLD Version This field indicates the firmware version on the Programmable Logic Device.

Uptime See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

System Time

Main Ethernet
Interface

Region Code See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Regulatory

Antenna Type

Channel Center
Frequency

Channel
Bandwidth

Cyclic Prefix

Frame Period

Color Code

Max Range

Transmit Power This field indicates the combined power level at which the AP is set to transmit,
based on the Country Code and Antenna Gain settings.

Temperature See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Total Antenna This field indicates the total antenna gain.

Gain

Chapter 3: Operation 420

Attribute Meaning

Sync Pulse Status

Sync Pulse Source

Maximum Count of
Registered SMs

Data Slots Down

Data Slots Up

Contention Slots

Connection Status See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details
Account ID

Site Name

Site Contact

Site Location

Time Updated and

Location Code

Chapter 3: Operation 421

Table 111: General Status page attributes – PMP 450i AP

Chapter 3: Operation 422

Attribute Meaning

Device Type See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Board Type

Product Type This indicates model of the device.

Software Version See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

CPU Usage This field indicates the current CPU utilization of the device.

Board MSN This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Serial number. A unique serial number
assigned to each radio at the factory for inventory and quality control.

Board Model This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Model number.

FPGA Version See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Uptime

System Time

Main Ethernet
Interface

Aux Ethernet See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details
Interface

Chapter 3: Operation 423

Attribute Meaning

Region Code See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

Regulatory

Antenna Type

Channel Center
Frequency

Channel
Bandwidth

Cyclic Prefix

Frame Period

Color Code

Max Range

Transmit Power This field indicates the combined power level at which the AP is set to transmit,
based on the Country Code and Antenna Gain settings.

Total Antenna This field indicates the total antenna gain.

Gain

Temperature See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details

802.3at Type 2 The field displays whether PoE Classification functionality is enabled or disabled. It
PoE Status is only applicable for 450i Series devices.

Registered SM See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details
Count

Sync Pulse Status

Sync Pulse Source

Maximum Count of
Registered SMs

Data Slots Down

Data Slots Up
See General Status page attributes – PMP 450m AP for details
Contention Slots

Connection Status

Account ID

Site Name

Site Contact

Site Location

Time Updated and

Location Code

Chapter 3: Operation 424

General status page - SM
The SM’s General Status page is explained in below table.

Note

For accurate power level readings to be displayed, traffic must be present on the
radio link.

Table 112: General Status page attributes - SM

Chapter 3: Operation 425

Attribute Meaning

Device Type This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the
SM, its module type and its MAC address.

Board Type This field indicates the series of hardware.

Product Type This indicates model of the device.

Software This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release. If you request
Version technical support, provide the information from this field.

CPU Usage This field indicates the current CPU utilization of the device.

Board MSN This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Serial number. A unique serial number assigned
to each radio at the factory for inventory and quality control.

Board Model This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Model number.

FPGA Version This field indicates the version of the field-programmable gate array (FPGA) on the
module. When you request technical support, provide the information from this field.

Uptime This field indicates how long the module has operated since power was applied.

System Time This field provides the current time. Any SM that registers to an AP inherits the system
time, which is displayed in this field as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

Ethernet This field indicates the speed and duplex state of Ethernet interface to the SM.
Interface

Regional Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which automatically
implements frequency band range restrictions for the selected region. Units shipped to
regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding
Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

Chapter 3: Operation 426

Attribute Meaning

DFS This field indicates that DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region
code, if applicable.

Antenna Type The current antenna type that has been selected.

Frame Period This field indicates the current Frame Period setting of the radio in ms.

Encryption This field indicates the capability and the encryption configuration of the device.

Temperature The current operating temperature of the board.

Session Status This field displays the following information about the current session:

Scanning indicates that this SM currently cycles through the radio frequencies that are
selected in the Radio tab of the Configuration page.

Syncing indicates that this SM currently attempts to receive sync.

Registering indicates that this SM has sent a registration request message to the AP
and has not yet received a response.

Registered indicates that this SM is both:

l registered to an AP.

l ready to transmit and receive data packets.

Session This field displays the duration of the current link. The syntax of the displayed time is
Uptime hh:mm:ss.

Registered AP Displays the MAC address and site name of the AP to which the SM is registered to.
This parameter provides click-through proxy access to the AP’s management
interface.

Color Code This field displays a value from 0 to 254 indicating the SM’s configured color code. For
registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the AP must match. Color code is
not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature, typically for
assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force a SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the
SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code value is
0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

Channel This field lists the current operating frequency of the radio.
Frequency

Channel The size in MHz of the operating channel.

Bandwidth

Cyclic Prefix OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is
repeated at the beginning of the symbol to allow multi-pathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of
throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

Chapter 3: Operation 427

Attribute Meaning

Air Delay This field displays the current air delay in nanoseconds between this SM and the AP,
and the distance that computes to. The distances reported as less than 200 feet (61
meters) are unreliable. If the Nomadic Mode feature is enabled, this field will also
include minimum and maximum air delays measured for this SM since this air interface
connection was established.

Receive This field lists the current combined receive power level, in dBm.
Power

Signal This field displays the difference of the Vertical path received signal power to the
Strength Ratio Horizontal path received signal power.

Signal to This field lists the current signal-to-noise level, an indication of the separation of the
Noise Ratio received power level vs. noise floor.

Beacons Displays a count of beacons received by the SM in percentage. This value must be
typically between 99-100%. If lower than 99%, it indicates a problematic link. This
statistic is updated every 16 seconds.

Transmit This field lists the current combined transmit power level, in dBm.
Power
Note

The red SM message “target power exceeded maximum” does not

necessarily indicate a problem.

In this case, the AP is requesting the SM to transmit at a higher power

level, but the SM is restricted due to EIRP limits or hardware capabilities.
This message can be an indication that the SM is deployed further from
the AP than optimal, causing the AP to adjust the SM to maximum
transmit power.

Data Slots This field lists the number of slots used for downlink data transmission.
Down

Data Slots Up This field lists the number of slots used for uplink data transmission.

Contention This field indicates the number of (reserved) Contention Slots configured by the
Slots operator. See Contention slots .

Site Name This field indicates the name of the physical module. You can assign or change this
name in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page. This information is also set into
the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Site Contact This field indicates contact information for the physical module. You can provide or
change this information in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page. This
information is also set into the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an
SNMP management server.

Site Location This field indicates site information for the physical module. You can provide or
change this information in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page.

Chapter 3: Operation 428

Attribute Meaning

Maximum This field indicates the limit of aggregate throughput for the SM and is based on the
Throughput default (factory) limit of the SM and any floating license that is currently assigned to it.

Time Updated This field displays information about the keying of the radio.
and Location
Code

Note

For PMP 450 SM 900 MHz, there is additional parameter Path Info (under
Subscriber Module Stats) which displays polarization path(A & B) information.

General Status page of BHM

The BHM’s General Status page is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 429

Table 113: General Status page attributes - BHM

Attribute Meaning

Device Type This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the
BHM, its module type and its MAC address.

Chapter 3: Operation 430

Attribute Meaning

Board Type This field indicates the series of hardware.

Product Type This indicates model of the device.

Software This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release. If you request
Version technical support, provide the information from this field.

CPU Usage This field indicates the current CPU utilization of the device.

Board MSN This field indicates the Manufacture’s Serial number. A unique serial number assigned
to each radio at the factory for inventory and quality control.

Board Model This field indicates the Manufacturer’s Model number.

FPGA Version This field indicates the version of the field-programmable gate array (FPGA) on the
module. When you request technical support, provide the information from this field.

Uptime This field indicates how long the module has operated since power was applied.

System Time This field provides the current time. Any BHS that registers to a BHM inherits the
system time, which is displayed in this field as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

Ethernet This field indicates the speed and duplex state of Ethernet interface to the BHM.
Interface

Antenna Type The current antenna type that has been selected.

Temperature The current operating temperature of the board.

Session Status This field displays the following information about the current session:

Scanning indicates that this BHS currently cycles through the radio frequencies that
are selected in the Radio tab of the Configuration page.

Syncing indicates that this BHM currently attempts to receive sync.

Registering indicates that this BHM has sent a registration request message to the
BHM and has not yet received a response.

Registered indicates that this BHM is both:

l Registered to a BHM.
l Ready to transmit and receive data packets.

Session This field displays the duration of the current link. The syntax of the displayed time is
Uptime hh:mm:ss.

Registered Displays the MAC address and site name of the BHM to which the BHS is registered to.
Backhaul This parameter provides click-through proxy access to the BHM’s management
interface.

Channel This field lists the current operating frequency of the radio.
Frequency

Receive This field lists the current combined receive power level, in dBm.
Power

Chapter 3: Operation 431

 Attribute Meaning

Signal This field displays the difference of the Vertical path received signal power to the
Strength Ratio Horizontal path received signal power.

Transmit This field lists the current combined transmit power level, in dBm.
Power

Signal to This field lists the current signal-to-noise level, an indication of the separation of the
Noise Ratio received power level vs. noise floor.

Beacons Displays a count of beacons received by the BHM in percentage. This value must be
typically between 99-100%. If lower than 99%, it indicates a problematic link. This
statistic is updated every 16 seconds.

Air Delay This field displays the distance in feet between this BHS and the BHM. To derive the
distance in meters, multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048. Distances reported
as less than 200 feet (61 meters) are unreliable.

Data Slots This field lists the number of slots used for downlink data transmission.
Down

Data Slots Up This field lists the number of slots used for uplink data transmission.

Regional Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which automatically
implements frequency band range restrictions for the selected region. Units shipped to
regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding
Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

Site Name This field indicates the name of the physical module. Assign or change this name in the
Configuration > SNMP page. This information is also set into the sysName SNMP MIB-II
object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Time Updated This field displays information about the keying of the radio.
and Location
Code

General Status page of BHS

The BHS’s General Status page is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 432

Table 114: General Status page attributes - BHS

Chapter 3: Operation 433

Attribute Meaning

Device Type See General Status page attributes - BHS

Board Type

Software Version

CPU Usage

Board MSN

Board Model

FPGA Version

Uptime

System Time

Ethernet Interface

Antenna Type

Temperature

Session Status

Session Uptime

Registered Backhaul

Channel Frequency

Receive Power

Signal Strength Ratio

Transmit Power

Signal to Noise Ratio

Beacons

Air Delay

Data Slots Down

Data Slots Up

Regional Code

Site Name See General Status page attributes - BHS

Site Contact

Site Location

Time Updated and Location Code

Chapter 3: Operation 434

Viewing Session Status
The Session Status page in the Home page provides information about each SM or BHS that has
registered to the AP or BHM. This information is useful for managing and troubleshooting a system. This
page also includes the current active values on each SM or BHS for MIR and VLAN, as well as the source
of these values, representing the SM/BHS itself, Authentication Server, or the Authentication Server and
SM/BHS.

Note

For accurate power level readings to be displayed, traffic must be present on the
radio link.

The Session Status List has four tabs: Device, Session, Power, Configuration, and Link Quality.

The Session Status .xml hyper link allows user to export session status page from web management
interface of AP or BHM. The session status page will be exported in xml file.

Device tab
The Device tab provides information on the Subscriber’s LUID and MAC, Hardware, Software, FPGA
versions and the state of the SM/BHS (Registered and/or encrypted).

Chapter 3: Operation 435

Table 115: Device tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID), MAC address and Site Name of the
SM/BHS.

Note: The MAC is a hot link to open the interface to the SM/BHS. In some instances,
depending on network activity and network design, this route to the interface
yields a blank web page. If this occurs, refresh your browser view.

Chapter 3: Operation 436

Attribute Meaning

Site Name indicates the name of the SM/BHS. Change this name on the
Configuration web page of the SM/BHS. This information is also set into the
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

LUID This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS
registers to the AP/BHM, the system assigns an LUID of 2 or a higher unique
number to the SM/BHS. If a SM/BHS loses registration with the AP/BHS and then
regains registration, the SM/BHS will retain the same LUID.

Note: Both the LUID and the MAC are hot links to open the interface to the SM/BHS.
In some instances, depending on network activity and network design, this route to
the interface yields a blank web page. If this occurs, refresh your browser view.

Hardware This field displays the SMs or BHS hardware type.

Software Version This field displays the software release that operates on the SM/BHS, the release
date and time of the software.

FPGA Version This field displays the version of FPGA that runs on the SM/BHS

State This field displays the current status of the SM/BHS as either

l IN SESSION to indicate that the SM/BHS is currently registered to the

AP/BHM.

l IDLE to indicate that the SM/BHS was registered to the AP/BHM at one time,
but now is not.

This field also indicates whether the encryption scheme in the module is enabled.

Airlink Security Attribute is available if AP security setting is AES. Will be missing if security setting
is NONE. Possible values are AES-128 and AES-256.

Grant State This field displays the current Grant State such as Registered, Granted, Suspended,
Authorized and Unregistered.

Authorized The field indicates the total number of AUTHORIZED grants for this device,
Grants followed by the total number of grants for this device. If the Multigrant feature is
disabled, there will never be more than 1 grant per device.

Time Elapsed In Displays the time since the last state change.
State

EIRP Req: EIRP requested in the Grant Request.

Req/Auth/In Use
Auth: EIRP allowed by the SAS in the grant response.

CBRS operators using Federated Wireless SAS might also see a TMP flag in this
field. This indicates that the Authorized grant value is a same day grant value - a
temporary value while the SAS does more precise calculations on what a final value
could be. This TMP flag would be cleared in less than 24 hours - at the next CBRS
CPAs interval, at which time the final EIRP value, which can be more, less, or equal
to the TMP value, would be granted.

Chapter 3: Operation 437

Attribute Meaning

In Use: For SMs, this value is the smaller of the granted EIRP and the Max EIRP
configured on the SM. It represents the largest EIRP value the SM can power control
up to. A cnMaestro obtained grant value larger than the SMs configured Max EIRP is
1 scenario where this In Use value is lower than the Authorized value. A runtime edit
of the SM's Max EIRP to a value lower than the authorized value is another example,
although in this case the In Use value does not reflect the edit until the next SM or
AP reboot.

Heartbeat Missed: The heartbeat request was sent but no response was received.

Failed: The heartbeat response was received with a failure code.

Skipped: The AP did not include this SM in the HB exchange ( For SM only).

Grant Expiry Displays the Day/Time grant expires.

Relinguish Grant Check and click Perform Religuish/Deregister button to relinquish this grant. Keep
checked to prevent the device to request the same grant.

De-Register Check and click the Perform Religuish/Deregister button to de-register this device
(and relinquish associated grants). Keep checked to prevent the device from de-
registering.

Number of idle This is a count of the number of SMs that, after a channel/EIRP change, are
SMs which are currently in IDLE state and are being tracked and expected to reconnect to
considered active compute the percentage used in the SM Reconnection Percentage alarm feature.
SMs that were IDLE just before a channel/EIRP change, but had a connected state
at any time in the 12 hours before the channel/EIRP are counted. Additionally, if the
AP rebooted 12 hours before the channel/EIRP change, all IDLE SMs are counted.

Total number of This is the total number of SMs that were connected before the most recent change
SMs before last and the number of SMs that were idle just before the channel/EIRP change but are
channel/EIRP being considered active per the definition described in the Number of idle SMs
change which are considered active above.

Number of SMs This is a count of the number of SMs that are expected to reconnect, but have not
not reconnected reconnected to the air interface since the last channel/EIRP change.
after last
channel/EIRP
change

Channel Change This statistic is a computation of the number of active SMs that need to experience
When Only SMs a termination or suspension before the Channel Change When Only SMs are
are Impacted Impacted feature is invoked, moving the sector’s channel, based only on CBRS SM
terminations or suspensions while the AP is authorized. Only currently active SMs
factor into this statistic. For example, if four SMs are active and the Threshold for
Channel Change configuration item is left at its default value of 10%, then this
statistic has a value of 1. Changing the Threshold for Channel Change configuration
value from 10% to 26% changes this statistic to a value of 2.

Note

Reconnected SM Information table of counters is not normally visible – it’s not visible after
an AP upgrade or reboot. The table will appear and begin updating when a channel/EIRP
change has been made.

Chapter 3: Operation 438

Session tab
The Session tab provides information on the SMs or BHS Session Count, Reg Count, Re-Reg Count,
Uptime, Air delay, PPPoE State and Timeouts.

Table 116: Session tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID See Device tab attributes

State This filed displays the status of the registered SM.

Uptime Once a SM/BHS successfully registers to an AP/BHM, this timer is started. If a session
(Downtime) drops or is interrupted, this timer is reactivated once re-registration is complete.

Session This field displays how many sessions the SM/BHS has had with the AP/BHM. Typically,
Count this is the sum of Registration Requests and Re-Registration Requests. However, the
result of internal calculation may display here as a value that slightly differs from the
sum.

If the number of sessions is significantly greater than the number for other SMs or BHS,
then this may indicate a link problem or an interference problem.

Registration When a SM/BHS makes a Registration Request, the AP/BHM checks its local session
Requests database to see whether it was registered earlier. If the AP/BHM concludes that the
SM/BHS is not currently in session database and it is valid Registration Request, then
the request increments the value of this field.

In ideal situation, the Registration Requests indicates total number of connected SMs to
an AP.

Note

The user can clear Registration Requests by dropping all current sessions
of SM (or BHS) from Configuration > Tools > Sessions menu.

Re- When a SM/BHS makes a Registration Request, the AP/BHM checks its local session
Registration database to see whether it was registered earlier. If the AP/BHM concludes that the
Requests SM/BHS is currently in session database, then the request increments the value of this
field.

Typically, a Re-Registration Requests is the case where both:

l SM/BHS attempts to reregister for having lost communication with the AP/BHM.

Chapter 3: Operation 439

 Attribute Meaning

l AP/BHM has not yet observed the link to the SM/BHS as being down.

It is possible for a small period of time if there is no downlink traffic and AP/BHM still
assumes the session is up, but the SM/BHS, loses session and quickly re-connects
before the AP/BHM knew the session had dropped. This is how a re-registration
happens.

If the number of sessions is significantly greater than the number for other SMs or BHS,
then this may indicate a link problem (check mounting, alignment, receive power
levels) or an interference problem (conduct a spectrum scan).

CC Priority The field displays Color Code Priority (ICC, Primary, Secondary or Tertiary) of all
connected SM.

AirDelay This field displays the distance of the SM/BHS from the AP/BHM in meters,
nanoseconds and bits. At close distances, the value in this field is unreliable.

PPPoE state This field displays the current PPPoE state (whether configured) of the SM/BHS.

Timeout This field displays the timeout in seconds for management sessions via HTTP, ftp
access to the SM/BHS. 0 indicates that no limit is imposed.

Power tab
Table 117: Power tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID

Hardware This field displays the SMs or BHS hardware type.

Downlink This field displays whether the high-priority channel is enabled in the SM/BHS and the
Rate SU- status of rate adapt. For example, if “8X/4X” is listed, the radio is capable of operating
MIMO at 8X but is currently operating at 4X, due to RF conditions.

Chapter 3: Operation 440

 Attribute Meaning

This field also states whether it is MIMO-A or MIMO-B radio e.g. “8X/8X MIMO-B”
indicates MIMO-B and “8X/4X MIMO-A” indicates MIMO-A.

A data channel starts at its lowest modulation and slowly rate adapts up, as traffic is
successfully transmitted over the data channel. From system release 15.2, all data
channels in a single SM will have the same modulation rates.

Note: The SU-MIMO rate applies to all AP platforms. For 450m, this field indicates the
rate being used for symbols where this particular VC is not being MU-MIMO grouped
with other SMs.

Downlink This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where the low or medium
Rate MU- priority data channels are MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the same slot with
MIMO other low or Medium priority data channels from other SM's.

Uplink Rate This field the status of rate adapt. For example, if “8X/4X” is listed, the radio is capable
SU-MIMO of operating at 8X but is currently operating at 4X, due to RF conditions.

This field also states whether it is MIMO-A or MIMO-B radio e.g. “8X/8X MIMO-B”
indicates MIMO-B and “8X/4X MIMO-A” indicates MIMO-A.

A data channel starts at its lowest modulation and slowly rate adapts up, as traffic is
successfully transmitted over the data channel. From system release 15.2, all data
channels in a single SM will have the same modulation rates.

Note: The SU-MIMO rate applies to all AP platforms. For 450m, this field indicates the
rate being used for symbols where this particular VC is not being MU-MIMO grouped
with other SMs.

Uplink Rate This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where the MUMIMO groupable
MU-MIMO data channels are MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the same slot with other MU-
MIMO groupable data channels from other SM's.

AP Rx Power This field indicates the AP’s or BHM’s combined receive power level for the listed
(dBm) SM/BHS.

Signal This field displays the ratio of the Vertical path received signal power to the Horizontal
Strength path received signal power. This ratio can be useful for determining multipathing
Ratio (dB) conditions (high vertical to horizontal ratio) for Uplink.

Signal to This field lists the current signal-to-noise level, an indication of the separation of the
Noise Ratio received power level vs. noise floor. In other words, it indicates signal to noise ratio for
(dB) Uplink.

Configuration tab
The Configuration tab provides information on the SMs or BHS Uplink or Downlink (UL/DL) Sustained
Data Rate, UL/DL Burst Allocation, UL/DL Burst Rate, UL/DL Low Priority CIR, UL/DL Medium Priority
CIR UL/DL High Priority CIR, UL/DL Ultra High Priority CIR, the UL/DL Broadcast or Multicast Allocation,
SM Prioritization Group, RADIUS Authentication Reply, and RADIUS Authentication Server. This data is
refreshed based on the Web Page Auto Update setting on the AP’s or BHS’s General Configuration page.

Chapter 3: Operation 441

Table 118: Configuration tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID

Sustained Data Rate This field specifies the maximum sustained data rate between SM/BHS and
Cap (kbps) AP/BHM. If this field displays “Uncapped”, then there is no limit set for data
rate. If this field displays 4000, then the maximum sustained data rate between
SM/BHS and AP/BHM is limited to 4000 kbps.

Sustained Data Rate This field displays the value that is currently in effect for the SM/BHS, with the
(kbps) - Uplink source of that value in parentheses. This is the specified rate at which each
SM/BHS registered to this AP/BHM is replenished with credits for transmission.
The configuration source of the value is indicated in parentheses.

See Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters on page 1.

Sustained Data Rate This field displays the value that is currently in effect for the SM/BHS, with the
(kbps) - Downlink source of that value in parentheses. This is the specified the rate at which the
AP/BHM should be replenished with credits (tokens) for transmission to each
of the SMs/BHS’s in its sector. The configuration source of the value is
indicated in parentheses.

See Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters.

Burst Allocation This field displays the value that is currently in effect for the SM/BHS, with the
(kbit) - Uplink source of that value in parentheses. This is the specified maximum amount of
data that each SM/BHS is allowed to transmit before being recharged at the
Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transmit more. The configuration
source of the value is indicated in parentheses.

See Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings.

Burst Allocation This field displays the value that is currently in effect for the SM/BHS, with the
(kbit) - Downlink source of that value in parentheses. This is the specified the rate at which the
AP/BHM should be replenished with credits (tokens) for transmission to each
of the SMs/BHS’s in its sector. The configuration source of the value is
indicated in parentheses.

See Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings.

Max Burst Rate (kbit) The data rate at which an SM/BHS is allowed to burst (until burst allocation
- Uplink limit is reached) before being recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with
credits to transit more. When set to 0 (default), the burst rate is unlimited.

Chapter 3: Operation 442

Attribute Meaning

See Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings.

Max Burst Rate (kbit) The data rate at which an SM/BHS is allowed to burst (until burst allocation
- Downlink limit is reached) before being recharged at the Sustained Downlink Data Rate
with credits to transit more. When set to 0 (default), the burst rate is unlimited.

See Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings.

Low Priority CIR This field indicates the minimum rate at which low priority traffic is sent over
the uplink and downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is
degraded).

Medium Priority CIR This field indicates the minimum rate at which medium priority traffic is sent
over the uplink and downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is
degraded).

High Priority CIR This field indicates the minimum rate at which high priority traffic is sent over
the uplink and downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is
degraded).

Ultra High Priority CIR This field indicates the minimum rate at which ultra high priority traffic is sent
over the uplink and downlink (unless CIR is oversubscribed or RF link quality is
degraded).

Broadcast/Multicast This field displays the data rate at which Broadcast and Multicast traffic is sent
Allocation via the radio link.

SM Prioritization This field displays the priority level configured on the SM under SM
Group Prioritization Group.

RADIUS This field displays whether RADIUS server is reachable or not.

Authentication Reply

RADIUS This field displays the associated RADIUS Authentication Server for each SM
Authentication Server where it was authenticated. This information is useful when there are multiple
RADIUS servers (maximum three servers supported by Cambium). If one server
is not reachable, other configured servers are tried in sequential order as a fall-
back. In this scenario, the Session Status is useful to identify associate RADIUS
Authentication Server for all connected SMs.

Chapter 3: Operation 443

Table 119: Session Status > Configuration CIR configuration denotations

Attribute Meaning

(SM) QoS/VLAN parameters are derived from the SM’s/BHS’s settings

(APCAP) QoS/VLAN parameters are derived from the AP’s settings, including any keyed capping
(for radios capped at 4 Mbps, 10 Mbps, or 20 Mbps)

(D) QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from the device, due to failed retrieval from the AAA
or WM server.

(AAA) QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from the RADIUS server

(BAM) QoS/VLAN parameters are retrieved from a WM BAM server

Link Quality tab

The Link Quality tab provides information on the Subscriber’s UID, Link quality, Downlink, Uplink, Beacon,
ReReg, and the Uptime.

This data is refreshed based on the Link Quality Update Interval parameter configuration under the
Sessions Status page.

Link Quality Metric parameter offers an option to choose either EVM or Rate based LQI calculation.

The Link Quality tab displays the calculated Link Quality Indicator (LQI) for the configured interval (Link
Quality Update Interval parameter).

Table 120: Link Quality tab attributes

Link Quality Metric: Rate

Chapter 3: Operation 444

Link Quality Metric: EVM

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID

Link Quality This field displays quality of the link. It is calculated based on receive power,
Indicator modulation rate, re-registrations and beacon percentage.

Downlink - This field displays the downlink quality in percentage. It is calculated based on
Quality Index Downlink receiver power, modulation rate, and beacon percentage.

Downlink - This field displays the average Downlink modulation rate. For 450m, this field
Actual Average specifies the SU-MIMO Modulation Rate. When Rate based LQI is selected, only
Rate actual rate and expected rate will be displayed.

Downlink - This field displays the average Downlink EVM rate.

Actual Average
EVM

Downlink - This field displays the expected modulation rate based on receive power in
Expected Rate Downlink. When EVM based LQI is selected, only actual EVM and expected EVM will
be displayed.

Downlink - This field displays the beacon quality index. It is calculated based on beacon
Beacon Quality percentage.
Index

Downlink - This field displays the received beacon percentage.

Beacon %

Uplink - Quality This field displays the uplink quality in percentage. It is calculated based on Uplink
Index receiver power and modulation rate.

Uplink -Actual This field displays the average Uplink modulation rate.
Average Rate

Uplink -Actual This field displays the average Uplink EVM rate.
Average EVM

Uplink - This field displays the expected modulation rate based on receive power in Uplink.
Expected Rate

Re-Reg - Quality This field displays the re-registration quality. It is calculated based on the re-
Index registration count.

Re-Reg Count This field displays the number of re-registrations.

Uptime This field displays the uptime of the device.

Chapter 3: Operation 445

Viewing Remote Subscribers
This page allows to view the web pages of registered SMs or BHS over the RF link. To view the pages for
a selected SM/BHS, click its link. The General Status page of the SM opens.

Figure 100: Remote Subscribers page of AP

Interpreting messages in the Event Log

Each line in the Event Log of a module Home page begins with a time and date stamp. However, some of
these lines wrap as a combined result of window width, browser preferences and line length. You may
find this tab easiest to use if you expand the window till all lines are shown beginning with time and date
stamp.

Time and Date Stamp

The time and date stamp reflect one of the following:

l GPS time and date directly or indirectly received from the CMM4.

l NTP time and date from a NTP server (CMM4 may serve as an NTP server)

l The running time and date that you have set in the Time & Date web page.

Note

In the Time & Date web page, if you have left any time field or date field unset
and clicked the Set Time and Date button, then the time and date default to
00:00:00 UT: 01/01/00.

A reboot causes the preset time to pause or, in some cases, to run in reverse.
Additionally, a power cycle resets the running time and date to the default
00:00:00 UT: 01/01/00. Thus, whenever either a reboot or a power cycle has
occurred, must reset the time and date in the Time & Date web page of any
module that is not set to receive sync.

Event Log Data Collection

The collection of event data continues through reboots and power cycles. When the buffer allowance for
event log data is reached, the system adds new data into the log and discards an identical amount of the
oldest data.

Each line that contains the expression WatchDog flags an event that was both:

Chapter 3: Operation 446

 l considered by the system software to have been an exception

l recorded in the preceding line.

Conversely, a Fatal Error () message flags an event that is recorded in the next line. Some exceptions and
fatal errors may be significant and require either operator action or technical support.

Figure 101: Event log data

Messages that Flag Abnormal Events

The messages listed below flag abnormal events and, case by case, may signal the need for corrective
action or technical support.

Table 121: Event Log messages for abnormal events

Event Message Meaning

FatalError () The event recorded on the line immediately beneath this message
triggered the Fatal Error ().

Loss of GPS Sync Pulse Module has lost GPS sync signal.

Machine Check Exception This is a symptom of a possible hardware failure. If this is a recurring
message, begin the RMA process for the module.

System Reset Exception The unit lost power or was power cycled.
External Hard Reset

System Reset Exception The event recorded on the preceding line triggered this WatchDog
External Hard Reset WatchDog message.

Messages that Flag Normal Events

The messages listed below record normal events and typically do not signal a need for any corrective
action or technical support.

Table 122: Event Log messages for normal events

Event Message Meaning

Acquired GPS Sync Pulse. Module has acquired GPS sync signal.

FPGA Features Type of encryption.

Chapter 3: Operation 447

 Event Message Meaning

FPGA Version FPGA (JBC) version in the module.

GPS Date/Time Set Module is now on GPS time.

Reboot from Webpage Module was rebooted from management interface.

Software Boot Version Boot version in the module.

Software Version The software release and authentication method for the unit.

System Log Cleared Event log was manually cleared.

Viewing the Network Interface

In any module, the LAN1 Network Interface section of this tab displays the defined Internet Protocol
scheme for the Ethernet interface to the module. In SM/BHS devices, this page also provides an RF Public
Network Interface section, which displays the Internet Protocol scheme defined for network access
through the master device (AP/BHM).

Figure 102: Network Interface tab of the AP

Figure 103: Network Interface tab of the SM

Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors

In the Layer 2 Neighbors tab, a module reports any device from which it has received a message in Link
Layer Discovery Protocol within the previous two minutes. Given the frequency of LLDP messaging, this
means that the connected device will appear in this tab 30 seconds after it is booted and remain until two
minutes after its shutdown.

Chapter 3: Operation 448

Figure 104: Layer 2 Neighbors page

System statistics
This section describes how to use the system statistics pages to manage the performance of the
PMP/PTP 450 Platform Family link.

Viewing the Scheduler Statistics

The Statistics -> Scheduler page is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS) and the parameters are
displayed as shown below:

Table 123: Radio Statistics attributes for (AP/SM/BHM/BHS)

Attribute Meaning

Transmit Unicast Total amount of unicast packets transmitted from the radio
Data Count

Chapter 3: Operation 449

Attribute Meaning

Transmit Total amount of broadcast packets transmitted from the radio

Broadcast Data
Count

Transmit Multicast Total amount of multicast packets transmitted by the radio

Data Count

Receive Unicast Total amount of unicast packets received by the radio

Data Count

Receive Broadcast Total amount of broadcast packets received by the radio

Data Count

Receive Multicast Total amount of multicast packets received by the radio

Data Count

Transmit Control Amount of radio control type messages transmitted (registration requests and
Count grants, etc.)

Receive Control Amount of radio control type messages received (registration requests and
Count grants, etc.)

In Sync Count Number of times the radio has acquired sync. When GPS synchronization is used
it is number of times GPS sync acquired. For the SM, it is the number of times the
SM successfully obtained sync with an AP.

Out of Sync Count Number of times the radio lost same sync lock

Overrun Count Number of times FPGA frame has overrun its TX Frame

Underrun Count Number of times FPGAs TX Frame aborted prematurely

Receive Corrupt Number of times a corrupt packet has been received at the FPGA.
Data Count

Receive Corrupt Number of times a corrupt control data packet has been received at the FPGA.
Control Data Count

Receive Bad Number of times the radio has received an invalid control message via broadcast
Broadcast Control (SM only).
Count

Rcv LT Start Number of Link Test Start messages received. A remote radio has requested that
this radio start a link test to it.

Rcv LT Start HS Number of Link Test Start Handshake messages received. This radio requested
that a remote radio start a link test and the remote radio has sent a handshake
back acknowledging the start.

Rcv LT Result This radio received Link Test results from the remote radio under test. When this
radio initiates a link test, the remote radio will send its results to this radio for
display.

Chapter 3: Operation 450

Attribute Meaning

Xmt LT Result This radio transmitted its link test results to the remote radio under test. When the
remote radio initiates a link test, this radio must send its results to the remote
radio for display there.

Frame Too Big This statistic indicates the number of packets received and processed by the
radios which were greater than max packet size 1700 bytes.

Bad This statistic indicates the number of packets received as bad acknowledgment. It
Acknowledgment is for engineering use only.

Bad Fragment This statistic indicates number of fragments tagged internally as bad. It is for
engineering use only.

VC Clear Error This statistic indicates number of times VC clear failed.

Count

Rx No Buffer Count Currently unused

Scheduler Error This error is incremented when the scheduler cannot send or get scheduled to
send a packet. It is also called as “VC Error”.

Transmit Ring This is a state that records when Canopy’s MAC Transmit Ring Error. One or more
Error of these will cause the session to drop and be re-established. That static should be
zero. If you are seeing this statistic increment, please contact Cambium support.

TDD Slips TDD Slips indicate that the 450m AP processer is heavily loaded and could lead
to buffer discards.

The Nomadic Mode table is applicable for all modules (AP/SM) and the parameters are displayed as
shown below:

Table 124: Nomadic mode for AP

Attribute Meaning

Enabled The number of registered SMs in this sector that have the Nomadic Mode feature
SMs enabled.

Update Nomadic mode ranging updates are a 3 step exchange. The first step is an update
Requests request sent to the SM from the AP. This statistic counts the total number of these
Sent update requests sent to all the nomadic mode enabled SMs in the sector since the stats
were last cleared.

Missed The second step in the 3 step ranging update exchange is an update response sent from
Responses the SM to the AP. Because these responses use the sector's contention space, missed
responses will be common.

Percent This is simply the percentage of responses that were not missed.
Received

Chapter 3: Operation 451

 Attribute Meaning

Results sent The third step in the 3 steps ranging from update exchange is a Nomadic Mode result
sent to the SM. Note that not received update responses will be valid, so it's common
that the Results Sent/Update Requests Sent rate may be less than the Percent Received.

Note

The Nomadic Mode feature is not supported on PMP 450m and in PTP modes.

Table 125: Nomadic mode for SM

Attribute Meaning

Update Responses Sent The number of Nomadic Mode update responses sent to the AP.

Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics

SM Registration Failures page of AP
The SM Registration Failures tab identifies SMs that have recently attempted and failed to register to this
AP. With its time stamps, these instances may suggest that a new or transient source of interference
exists.

Table 126: SM Registration Failures page attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Status 17 No response was received from the AAA server and hence SM is trying to send a session
Flag 0 request again.

BHS Registration Failures page of BHM

Table 127: BHS Registration Failures page attributes - BHM

Chapter 3: Operation 452

 Attribute Meaning

Status 17 No response was received from the AAA server and hence BHS is trying to send a
Flag 0 session request again.

There is a list of flags from 0 to 20 as shown in Flags status and the “Flags” can be ignored.

Table 128: Flags status

Flag Meaning Flag Meaning

0 Normal 11 AP Lite Limit Reached

1 Out of Range 12 Only Ver 9.5+ Allowed

2 No Luids 13 Temporary Data VC for AAA

3 BH ReRange 14 AAA Authentication Failure

4 Auth Fail 15 Registration Grant Reject

5 Encrypt Fail 16 Blank

6 Power Adjust 17 AAA Session Retry

7 No VCs 18 AAA Reauth Failure

8 Reserve VC Fail 19 RegReq at zero power

9 Activate VC Fail 20 RegReq no time ref

10 Hi VC Setup Fail - -

Interpreting Bridging Table statistics

If NAT (network address translation) is not active on the SM/BHS, then the Bridging Table page provides
the MAC address of all devices that are attached to registered SMs/BHS (identified by LUIDs).

The SM/BHS management MAC addresses are also added in bridge table upon SMs/BHS registration.
These entries will be remove automically from the table once SMs/BHS is de-registered. This alleviates
the arp cache > bridge cache timeout problems.

The bridging table allows data to be sent to the correct module as follows:

l For the AP/BHM, the uplink is from RF to Ethernet. Thus, when a packet arrives in the RF interface
to the AP/BHM, the AP/BHM reads the MAC address from the inbound packet and creates a
bridging table entry of the source MAC address on the other end of the RF interface.

l For the SM/BHS, the uplink is from Ethernet to RF. Thus, when a packet arrives in the Ethernet
interface to one of these modules, the module reads the MAC address from the inbound packet
and creates a bridging table entry of the source MAC address on the other end of the Ethernet
interface.

Chapter 3: Operation 453

Figure 105: Bridging Table page

The Bridging Table supports up to 4096 entries.

Interpreting Translation Table statistics

When Translation Bridging is enabled in the AP, each SM keeps a table mapping MAC addresses of
devices attached to the AP to IP addresses, as otherwise the mapping of end-user MAC addresses to IP
addresses is lost. (When Translation Bridging is enabled, an AP modifies all uplink traffic originating from
registered SMs such that the source MAC address of every packet is changed to that of the SM which
bridged the packet in the uplink direction.)

Figure 106: Translation Table page of SM

Interpreting Ethernet statistics

The Statistics > Ethernet page reports TCP throughput and error information for the Ethernet connection
of the module. This page is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS).

The Ethernet page displays the following fields.

Chapter 3: Operation 454

Table 129: Ethernet tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Link Detected 3 indicates that an Ethernet link is established to the radio, 0 indicates that no
Ethernet link is established.

Link Speed This field indicates the speed of the link set of negotiated.

PHY ID This field indicates the identifier of the Ethernet PHY chip on the PCB.

Link Uptime This field indicates how long the Ethernet link has been up.

Link Lost This field indicates a count of how many times the Ethernet link was lost.

Undersized Toss This field indicates the number of packets that were too small to process and
Count hence discarded.

inoctets Count This field displays how many octets were received on the interface, including
those that deliver framing information.

inucastpkts Count This field displays how many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered
to a higher-layer protocol.

Innucastpkts This field displays how many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or

Count subnetwork-multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

indiscards Count This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded without errors that
would have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. (Some of these
packets may have been discarded to increase buffer space.)

Chapter 3: Operation 455

Attribute Meaning

inerrors Count This field displays how many inbound packets contained errors that prevented
their delivery to a higher-layer protocol.

inunknownprotos This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded because of an
Count unknown or unsupported protocol.

outoctets Count This field displays how many octets were transmitted out of the interface,
including those that deliver framing information.

outucastpkts This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols
Count requested transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes
those that were discarded or not sent.

outnucastpkts This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols
Count requested transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-
multicast) address. The number includes those that were discarded or not sent.

outdiscards Count This field displays how many outbound packets were discarded without errors
that would have prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets may have
been discarded to increase buffer space.)

outerrrors Count This field displays how many outbound packets contained errors that prevented
their transmission.

RxBabErr This field displays how many receiver babble errors occurred.

RcvFifoNoBuf This field displays the number of times no FIFO buffer space was able to be
allocated.

Note:

PMP 450 AP running in Gigabit Ethernet Mode displays error

“RcfFifoNoBuf” which indicates packet loss.

For 450 AP platforms, if ethernet auto-negotation is set to Gigabit,

then it is a known limitation that “RcfFifoNoBuf” error will be seen.
This issue is not seen if autonegotation is set to 100Mbps or lower,
and the issue is not seen on 450i or 450m AP's.

RxOverrun This field displays how many receiver overrun errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.

Late Collision This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the Ethernet controller. A
normal collision occurs during the first 512 bits of the frame transmission. A
collision that occurs after the first 512 bits is considered a late collision.

Caution

A late collision is a serious network problem because the frame being

transmitted is discarded. A late collision is most commonly caused
by a mismatch between duplex configurations at the ends of a link
segment.

Excessive This field displays the number of packets whose retransmission limit expired.
Collisions

Chapter 3: Operation 456

 Attribute Meaning

TxUnderrun This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors occurred on the
Ethernet controller.

Carrier Sense Lost This field displays how many carrier sense lost errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.

No Carrier This field displays how many no carrier errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

Large Frame An ethernet packet that has been recieved that is greater than the board MTU, or
a segmented frame.

Excessive The number of frames that are not sent after the time exceeds the maximum-
Deferrals packet time.

Jabbers A count of the number of attempts to send a packet > 2048 bytes.

RX Pause Frames A count of the number of Ethernet pause frames discarded.

Discarded

RX Ethernet Number of times ethernet link has been bounced due to not receiving any
Bounce ethernet packets over the configured ethernet bounce timeout interval.

TX Ethernet Number of times ethernet link has been bounced due to not transmitting any
Bounce ethernet packets over the configured ethernet bounce timeout interval.

Interpreting RF Control Block statistics

The Statistics > Radio page is applicable for all module (AP/SM/BHM/BHS). The Radio page of the
Statistics page displays the following fields.

Table 130: Radio (Statistics) page attributes – RF Control Block

Attribute Meaning

inoctets Count This field displays how many octets were received on the interface, including
those that deliver framing information.

Chapter 3: Operation 457

 Attribute Meaning

inucastpkts Count This field displays how many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered
to a higher-layer protocol.

Innucastpkts This field displays how many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or

Count subnetwork-multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

indiscards Count This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded without errors that
would have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. This stat is pegged
whenever corrupt data is received by software or whenever the RF Software
Bridge queue is full.

Corrupt data is a very unusual event because all packets are CRC checked by
hardware before being passed into software.

The likely case for indiscards is if the RF bridge queue is full. If this is the case the
radio is most likely PPS limited due to excessive small packet traffic or a problem
at the Ethernet interface. If there is a problem at the Ethernet interface there is
likely to be discards at the Ethernet as well.

inerrors Count This field displays how many inbound packets contained errors that prevented
their delivery to a higher-layer protocol.

inunknownprotos This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded because of an
Count unknown or unsupported protocol.

outoctets Count This field displays how many octets were transmitted out of the interface,
including those that deliver framing information.

outucastpkts This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols
Count requested transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes
those that were discarded or not sent.

outnucastpkts This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols
Count requested transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-
multicast) address. The number includes those that were discarded or not sent.

outdiscards Count This field displays how many outbound packets were discarded without errors
that would have prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets may have
been discarded to increase buffer space.)

outerrrors Count This field displays how many outbound packets contained errors that prevented
their transmission.

Interpreting Sounding statistics for AP

In the 450m AP GUI, sounding statistics can be found under Statistics > Sounding Statistics.

Chapter 3: Operation 458

Table 131: Sounding Statistics - 450m AP page attributes

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber This field displays the MAC address and Site Name of the SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS
registers to the AP/BHM.

LUID This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS registers
to the AP/BHM, the system assigns an LUID of 2 or a higher unique number to the
SM/BHS. If a SM/BHS loses registration with the AP/BHS and then regains registration,
the SM/BHS will retain the same LUID.

Spatial This field displays the spatial frequency value of the LUID or SM. Values 0 to 1023 are
Frequency valid and value 2048 is considered as invalid.

Azimuth This field displays the Azimuth range in degrees corresponding to the spatial
frequencies of the bin. The zero-degree azimuth is boresight.

Note

Some SF ranges correspond to multiple azimuth ranges. This is because

for some spatial frequencies the AP generates beams in multiple azimuth
directions. The SM can be physically located in any of the azimuth ranges.

Downlink - Different types of Sounding states are:

Sounding
State l UNKNOWN: SM has recently registered to the AP but not registered with the
channel manager yet.

l NEW: SM has been registered with the channel manager and will soon transition
to ASSESSING.

l ASSESSING: AP will instruct SM to take the channel measurements. Channel

estimates and spatial frequencies will be calculated.

l TRACKING: Valid measurements resulted in good channel estimates and spatial

frequency. This SM can now be used for MU-MIMO.

l INVALID: Inconsistent measurements resulting in no channel estimate or spatial

frequency. This SM cannot be used for MU-MIMO and it will ultimately be re-
assessed.

l NOT ELIGIBLE: Due to poor RF link conditions, the RF link as rate adapted down
to SU-MIMO transmissions.

Chapter 3: Operation 459

 Attribute Meaning

Downlink - This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where this particular LUID is
MU-MIMO MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the same slot with other LUIDs.
Rate

Uplink - This field indicates the status of uplink sounding.

Sounding
State

Uplink - MU- This field indicates the modulation rate used for symbols where the MU-MIMO
MIMO Rate groupable data channels are MU-MIMO scheduled by grouping it in the same slot with
other MU-MIMO groupable data channels from other SM's.

Interpreting VLAN statistics

The Statistics > VLAN page provides a list of the most recent packets that were filtered because of VLAN
membership violations. It is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS).

Table 132: VLAN page attributes

Attribute Meaning

Unknown This must not occur. Contact Technical Support.

Only The packet was filtered because the configuration is set to accept only packets that have
Tagged an 802.1Q header and this packet did not.

Ingress When the packet entered through the wired Ethernet interface, the packet was filtered
because it indicated an incorrect VLAN membership.

Local When the packet was received from the local TCP/IP stack, the packet was filtered
Ingress because it indicated an incorrect VLAN membership. This must not occur. Contact
Technical Support.

Chapter 3: Operation 460

 Attribute Meaning

Egress When the packet attempted to leave through the wired Ethernet interface, the packet was
filtered because it indicated an incorrect VLAN membership.

Local When the packet attempted to reach the local TCP/IP stack, the packet was filtered
Egress because it indicated an incorrect VLAN membership.

Interpreting Data Channels statistics

The Statistics > Data Channels page displays information about data channels used in data
communications. This page is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS).

The Data VC tab displays the fields as explained in Data Channel page attributes.

Table 133: Data Channel page attributes

Chapter 3: Operation 461

Attribute Meaning

Subscriber This field displays the MAC address and Site Name of the SM/BHS.

LUID This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS
registers to the AP/BHM, the system assigns an LUID of 2 or a higher unique number
to the SM/BHS. If a SM/BHS loses registration with the AP/BHS and then regains
registration, the SM/BHS will retain the same LUID.

Note

Both the LUID and the MAC are hot links to open the interface to the
SM/BHS. In some instances, depending on network activity and network
design, this route to the interface yields a blank web page. If this occurs,
refresh your browser view.

Channel Priority This field displays the channel priority for the virtual channel. The values supported
are Low, Medium, High, and Ultra High.

Inbound This field displays how many octets were received on the interface, including those
Statistics, that deliver framing information.
octets

Inbound This field displays how many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered to
Statistics, a higher-layer protocol.
ucastpkts

Inbound This field displays how many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or

Statistics, subnetwork-multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
nucastpkts

Inbound This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded without errors that
Statistics, would have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. Inbound discard
discards statistics are incremented similar to the indiscards stat on the RF control block stats
page. The sum of all data VC indiscards must be close to the RF control block in
discards. If indiscards are evenly distributed across SMs, then the radio is PPS limited
due to either excessive small packet transmissions, or a problem at the Ethernet link.
If indiscards are contained to one or a few SMs, then there is likely a problem at or
underneath the SM which is incrementing the count.

Outbound This field displays how many octets were transmitted out of the interface, including
Statistics, those that deliver framing information.
octets

Outbound This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested
Statistics, transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes those that were
ucastpkts discarded or not sent.

Outbound This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested
Statistics, transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast)
nucastpkts address. The number includes those that were discarded or not sent.

Chapter 3: Operation 462

 Attribute Meaning

Outbound This field displays how many outbound packets were discarded without errors that
Statistics, would have prevented their transmission. Outbound discard statistics are
discards incremented if a VC is not active when a packet is ready to send. This is a rare
condition.

Outbound This field displays how many outbound packets contained errors that prevented their
Statistics, transmission.
errors

Queue This is a count of packets that were discarded because the queue for the VC was
Overflow already full. If Queue Overflows are being seen across most or all SMs, then there is
either an interferer local to the AP or the APs RF link is at capacity. If Queue
Overflows are being seen at one or only a few SMs, then it is likely that there is a
problem with those specific links whether it is insufficient signal strength, interferer,
or a problem with the actual SM hardware.

High Priority This is a count of packets that were received on high priority queue.
Queue

Fragments Modulation - Receive Fragments Modulation

QPSK This field displays how many inbound fragments were received via the QPSK
modulation scheme.

16-QAM This field displays how many inbound fragments were received via the 16-QAM
modulation scheme.

64-QAM This field displays how many inbound fragments were received via the 64-QAM
modulation scheme.

256-QAM This field displays how many inbound fragments were received via the 256-QAM
modulation scheme.

Retransmitted This field displays how many outbound fragments were retransmitted.
Fragments

Interpreting Proportional Scheduler

The Statistics > Proportional Scheduler page displays information:

Table 134: MIR/Burst page attributes for AP

Chapter 3: Operation 463

 Attribute Meaning

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID

Lock Modulation This field displays the Lock Modulation mode of all registered SMs.

Modulation The database configured Lock Modulation value if lock modulation is set to Enable
below threshold or Enabled.

Weight This field displays the weight of each registered SM. For more information about
Weight, See QoS page attributes - AP.

Downlink This field displays the Dowlink statistics of every registered SM.
Statistics

Uplink Statistics This field displays the Uplink statistics of every registered SM.

Rate Plan This field displays the rate plan associated with each SM.

Current The currently operating modulation of this SM.

Modulation

Slots Percentage This field displays the percentage of slot used by each SM.

Guaranteed Guaranteed minimum throughput based on the SM's Rate Plan configuration, it's
minimum current modulation rate, and any Lock Modulation settings.
throughput
For 450m AP's the maximum possible Throughput shown here assumes all
SUMIMO scheduling. MUMIMO scheduling will result in higher TPUT.

Sustained Data This field displays the preset rate limit of data transfer for every SM.
Rate

Interpreting MIR/Burst statistics

The Statistics > MIR/Burst page displays information about MIR/Burst. This page is applicable for all
modules (AP/SM).

The MIR/Burst tab displays the fields as explained in MIR/Burst page attributes for AP and MIR/Burst
page attributes for SM.

Table 135: MIR/Burst page attributes for AP

Chapter 3: Operation 464

 Attribute Meaning

Subscriber This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID), MAC address and Site Name of the
SM/BHS. As each SM or BHS registers to the AP/BHM, the system assigns an LUID of 2
or a higher unique number to the SM/BHS. As of release 15.2, if an SM/BHS loses
registration with the AP/BHM and then regains registration, the SM/BHS retains the
same LUID.

Current This field displays the number of bits in the bucket to be potentially consumed at
Downlink above-MIR rates, up to Max Burst MIR rate.
Bucket Size

Downlink This field displays the active configured MIR rate per second. This is the rate that the
MIR bucket is filled with bits.

Downlink This field displays the rate that the bucket is filled with bits at every 500 ms interval.
MIR Per
500ms
Interval

Downlink This field displays the configured maximum bucket size, which is the maximum number
Max Bucket of bits that can be in the bucket. The bucket fills at MIR rate and can hold this number of
Size bits, which is a configuration value.

Current Max If Max Burst is enabled, there is a secondary “bucket” that controls the maximum rate of
Burst Bucket bit consumption. If Max Burst is not enabled (which means not limited), this will be 0 as
Size the bucket is not used.

Downlink This field displays the configured value of the Max Burst rate. This is the maximum rate
Max Burst at which bits can be consumed above MIR. Once excess (> MIR) bits have been
MIR consumed, the link will be throttled to MIR.

Downlink This field displays the configured value of the Max Burst rate at every 500 ms interval.
Max Burst
MIR Per
500ms
Interval

Uplink MIR This field displays the active configured MIR rate per second in the SM.

Uplink Max This field displays the configured maximum bucket size of the SM, which is the
Bucket Size maximum number of bits that can be in the bucket. The bucket fills at MIR rate and can
hold this number of bits, which is a configuration value.

Uplink Max This field displays the configured value of the MaxBurst rate of the SM. This is the
Burst MIR maximum rate at which bits can be consumed above MIR. Once excess (> MIR) bits have
been consumed, the link will be throttled to MIR.

Table 136: MIR/Burst page attributes for SM

Chapter 3: Operation 465

 Attribute Meaning

Current Uplink This field displays the number of bits in the bucket to be potentially consumed at
Bucket Size above-MIR rates, up to Max Burst MIR rate.

Uplink MIR This field displays the active MIR rate per second. This is the rate that the bucket
is filled with bits.

Uplink MIR Per This field displays the rate that the bucket is filled with bits at every 100 ms
100ms Interval interval.

Uplink Max Bucket This field displays the maximum bucket size, which is the maximum number of
Size bits that can be in the bucket. The bucket fills at MIR rate and can hold this
number of bits, which is a configuration value.

Current Max Burst If Max Burst is enabled, there is a secondary “bucket” that controls the maximum
Bucket Size rate of bit consumption. If Max Burst is not enabled (which means not limited),
this will be 0 as the bucket is not used.

Uplink Max Burst This field displays the configured value of the Max Burst rate. This is the maximum
MIR rate at which bits can be consumed above MIR. Once excess (> MIR) bits have
been consumed, the link will be throttled to MIR.

Uplink Max Burst This field displays the configured value of the Max Burst rate at every 100 ms
MIR per 100ms interval.
Interval

Uplink Broadcast This field displays the broadcast credit.

Credit

Uplink Broadcast This field displays the broadcast MIR rate per second.
MIR

Uplink Broadcast This field displays the type of the broadcast MIR.
MIR Type

Downlink MIR This field displays the active configured MIR rate per second. This is the rate that
the bucket is filled with bits.

Downlink Max This field displays the configured maximum bucket size, which is the maximum
Bucket Size number of bits that can be in the bucket. The bucket fills at MIR rate and can hold
this number of bits, which is a configuration value.

Downlink Max This field displays the configured value of the Max Burst rate. This is the maximum
Burst MIR rate at which bits can be consumed above MIR. Once excess (> MIR) bits have
been consumed, the link will be throttled to MIR.

Interpreting Throughput statistics

The 450 Platform Family has a Statistics > Throughput page which shows historical information about
sector or backhaul throughput and packet discards. This page is applicable for AP and BHM modules.
This information can be useful to identify an overloaded sector or heavy bandwidth users. This page also
shows the user throughput in terms of data rate (kbps) and packet rate (packets per second, or PPS), as
well as the average packet size during the sample period.

Operators may set the AP/BHM to send an SNMP trap when it detects an RF overload condition based on
a configurable threshold.

Chapter 3: Operation 466

The following configuration parameters are available on the Throughput tab GUI pane and a radio reboot
is not required when configuring these parameters:

Table 137: RF overload Configuration attributes – AP/BHM

Attribute Meaning

Throughput This enables or disables the monitoring of sector throughput and packet discards. This
Monitoring parameter is disabled by default.

SNMP Trap on This enables or disables the sending of an SNMP trap when an AP/BHM overload
RF Overload condition is reached (based on Downlink RF Overload Threshold).

Downlink RF This parameter determines the overload threshold in percent of packets discarded
Overload that triggers the generation of an SNMP trap.
Threshold

Downlink RF This field displays the status of the capacity of the RF link.
Link Status

Time Period These two configuration parameters determine what set of collection samples to show
Length on the GUI display. The Time Period Length can be set from one to three hours. Time
Period Ending allows the operator to set the end time for the set of collection samples
Time Period
to display.
Ending

Following configuration settings are three tables that display the statistics that are collected.

Board Performance statistics

This table contains a row that corresponds to each 1 minute statistics collection interval. Each row
contains the following data aggregated for the entire AP/BHM:

l Ethernet Throughput - Statistics collected at the Ethernet port:

o kbps in – average throughput over the collection interval in Kbps into the AP/BHM on the

Ethernet Interface
o kbps out – average throughput over the collection interval in Kbps out of the AP/BHM on
the Ethernet Interface
o PPS in – average packets per second over the collection interval into the AP/BHM on the
Ethernet Interface
o PPS out – average packets per second over the collection interval out of the AP/BHM on the
Ethernet Interface

Chapter 3: Operation 467

 l RF Throughput - Statistics collected at the RF Interface:
o kbps in – average throughput over the collection interval in Kbps into the AP/BHM on the

RF Interface
o kbps out – average throughput over the collection interval in Kbps out of the AP/BHM on
the RF Interface
o PPS in – average packets per second over the collection interval into the AP/BHM on the RF
Interface
o PPS out – average packets per second over the collection interval out of the AP/BHM on the
RF Interface
l Aggregate Through Board – Sum of bidirectional data transferred through (not originating or
terminating at) the AP/BHM:
o kbps – average bidirectional throughput over the collection interval in Kbps

o PPS – average bidirectional packets per second over the collection interval
o Ave Pkt Size – Average Packet size over the collection interval of bidirectional data
transferred

Board Throughput statistics

This table contains a row that corresponds to each one minute statistics collection interval. This table
may be used to determine if there are problems with any of the interfaces. For example, if the Ethernet in
packets is much higher than the RF out packets it could indicate a denial of service (DoS) attack on the
AP/BHM. Each row contains the following data aggregated for the entire AP/BHM:

l Ethernet Statistics - Statistics collected at the Ethernet port:

o inOctets – Number of octets (bytes) received by the AP/BHM at the Ethernet Interface over

the collection interval

o outOctets – Number of octets (bytes) sent by the AP/BHM at the Ethernet Interface over
the collection interval
o inPkts – Number of packets received by the AP/BHM at the Ethernet Interface over the
collection interval
o outPkts – Number of packets sent by the AP/BHM at the Ethernet Interface over the
collection interval
o Discards (in/out) – Number of packets that had to be discarded by the AP/BHM at the
respective Ethernet Interface Queue
l RF Statistics - Statistics collected at the RF Interface:
o inOctets – Number of octets (bytes) received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface over the

collection interval
o outOctets – Number of octets (bytes) sent by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface over the
collection interval
o inPkts – Number of packets received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface over the collection
interval
o outPkts – Number of packets sent by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface over the collection
interval
o Discards (in/out) – Number of packets that had to be discarded by the AP/BHM at the
respective RF Interface Queue during the collection interval
o Discards % (in/out) – Percent of the total packets received / transmitted that had to be
discarded during the collection interval

Chapter 3: Operation 468

LUID RF Throughput statistics
This table contains a row that corresponds to each active LUID served by the AP/BHM. Note that an LUID
may be assigned 1 or 2 VCs. If the LUID is assigned 2 VCs, then the data in the table is the sum of the
activity for both VCs. This table may be used to determine which LUIDs are experiencing overload so that
corrective action can be taken (i.e. fixing a poor RF link or moving a heavily loaded link to a less
congested AP/BHM). Each row contains counters and statistics related to the RF Interface that are
updated once per minute:

l Inbound Statistics - Statistics collected at the RF Interface for the Uplink:

l octets – Number of octets (bytes) received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID over
the collection interval
l pkts – Number of packets received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID over the
collection interval
l Ave Pkt Size – Average size of the packets received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this
LUID over the collection interval
l discards – Number of packets received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID over the
collection interval that had to be discarded because the RF In Queue was full
l discards % – Percent of the total packets received by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID
over the collection interval that had to be discarded because the RF In Queue was full
l Outbound Statistics - Statistics collected at the RF Interface for the Downlink:
l octets – Number of octets (bytes) transmitted by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID
over the collection interval
l pkts – Number of packets transmitted by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID over the
collection interval
l Ave Pkt Size – Average size of the packets transmitted by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this
LUID over the collection interval
l discards – Number of packets to be transmitted by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for this LUID
over the collection interval that had to be discarded because the RF Out Queue was full
l discards % – Percent of the total packets to be transmitted by the AP/BHM at the RF Interface for
this LUID over the collection interval that had to be discarded because the RF Out Queue was full.

Interpreting Overload statistics

The Statistics > Overload page displays statistics on packet overload and resultant packet discards.
Unlike the other fields, the Total Packets Overload Count is expressed in only this page. It is not a count
of how many packets have been lost, but rather of how many discard events (packet loss bursts) have
been detected due to overload condition.

This statistics page is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS) and explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 469

Table 138: Overload page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS

Attribute Meaning

Total This field represents the sum of all RF and Ethernet in/out discards.
Packets
Overload
Count

Ethernet In This field represents the number of packets tossed due to the Ethernet queue being full.
Discards If a climb in this stat accompanies a climb in RF Out Discards stat, then most likely the
board is at RF capacity either due to traffic exceeding the RF pipe, or interference
temporarily limiting the RF throughput. If this stat climbs without the RF Out Discards
stat climbing, then the radio is most likely PPS limited.

Ethernet This field represents the number of packets tossed due to an Ethernet out overload. This
Out stat must not climb in normal operation because the Ethernet link is much higher
Discards capacity than the RF link. If this stat is incrementing, then either the Ethernet link is
established at a low speed (i.e. 10Mbps – half duplex), or there is a problem with
cabling/Ethernet hardware.

RF In This field indicates the number of packets tossed due to no resources available within
Discards the radio to process them. This stat also must not be increasing because the system is
designed to shed packets on the RF Out interface. If this stat is incrementing the board, it
is most likely congested due to high PPS rate in combination with an Ethernet Out
problem, which limits packet flow off the device.

RF Out This field indicates the number of packets tossed due to RF link at capacity. This stat will
Discards increase whenever the RF link is at capacity. When the internal FPGA RF input queue
overflows, this stat is incremented. If this stat is seen to be incrementing at the AP, then
the sector is congested. If seen at the SM, the number of Contention Slots must be
looked at to ensure that enough Contention Slots are allocated to allow for bandwidth
requests to be seen at the AP.

Note

PMP 450m overload:

The 450m Series AP is designed to handle high load in terms of high throughput and high
PPS. In terms of throughput, PMP 450m is designed to achieve 3x or more throughput
improvement over PMP 450 and PMP 450i Series products. In terms of packets per second
(PPS), PMP 450m is designed to handle more than 100k PPS.

Chapter 3: Operation 470

 Overload occurs when the offered load exceeds the above limits. When overload occurs,
PMP 450m will start discarding packets and TCP throughput will degrade due to packet
loss.

It’s worth noting that Frame Utilization statistics (Statistics > Frame Utilization tab: Frame
Utilization: Downlink and Uplink) are not necessarily indicative of overload condition. They
show how much the TDD frame is utilized. High frame utilization depends on:

l High traffic during busy periods: those statistics will be close to 100% and almost all
slots will be utilized. In this case if the Overload statistics show that packets are
discarded then this is an indication of overload condition.
l High percentage of VCs with low modulation with moderate traffic. Those VCs will
require more slots to service them (due to low modulation) and the frame utilization
will be high. In this case the TDD frame is fully utilized but the system is at low
capacity and is not in an overload condition.

PMP 450m has higher PPS than PMP 450 and PMP 450i and supports higher throughput
through spatial multiplexing, therefore when a PMP 450m replaces an overloaded PMP 450
or PMP 450i AP the PMP 450m will not be overloaded under the same conditions but the
frame utilization may still show close to 100%; this should not alarm the customer. The
overload statistics shall be monitored on PMP 450m to see if it is overloaded or not.

Interpreting DHCP Relay statistics

The Statistics > DHCP Relay page displays requests and replies received, relayed and discarded when the
AP is configured as a DHCP relay. Typically, in a working DHCP relay configuration a one-to-one ratio is
established between requests and replies that are received and relayed. This statistics page is only
applicable for PMP (AP and SM modules) and it is explained in below figure.

Figure 107: DHCP Relay page attributes – AP/SM

Attribute Meaning

Requests Received This field represents the number of DHCP relay requests
received by the AP.

Chapter 3: Operation 471

 Attribute Meaning

Requests Relayed This field represents the number of DHCP relay requests
relayed by the AP.

Requests Discarded This field represents the number of DHCP relay requests
discarded by the AP due to errors in the request.

Replies Received This field represents the number of DHCP relay replies
received by the AP.

Replies Relayed This field represents the number of DHCP relay replies relayed
by the AP.

Replies Discarded This field represents the number of DHCP relay replies
discarded by the AP due to errors in the reply.

Untrusted Message Discards This field indicates messages that were discarded because the
message already contained Option 82 information with no
Relay Agent specified.

Max Hop Exceeded Discards This field indicates messages that have been relayed too
many times, exceeding the max hop count (16).

Invalid Relay Agent Address Discards This field indicates messages that have been discarded
because the message relay agent address is already in place
(relay agent address does not equal address of the AP).

Relay Info Exceeding Max Message This field indicates DHCP messages too large to fit Option 82
Size (DHCP message relayed without data. These messages are sent on without Option 82
Option 82) information.

Subscriber See Device tab attributes

LUID

Circuit ID This field displays the option 82 data of the SM in binary and
ASCII formats.
Remote ID

Vendor Specific ID

Interpreting Filter statistics

The Statistics > Filter page displays statistics on packets that have been filtered (dropped) due to the
filters set on the Protocol Filtering page. The filter page of SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 472

Table 139: Filter page attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

PPPoE Count Number of PPPoE packets filtered.

All IPv4 Count Number of IPv4 packets filtered.

All Other IPv4 Any IPv4 message that was not SMB, SNMP, Bootp, Multicast or one of the user
Count defined filters, that was filtered out.

SMB Count Number of IPv4 Server Message Block (file sharing) packets filtered.

SNMP Count Number of IPv4 SNMP packets filtered.

Bootp Client Total number of IPv4 DHCP requests filtered.

Count

Bootp Server Total number of IPv4 DHCP replies filtered.

Count

IPv4 Multicast Number of IPv4 Multicast messages filtered.

Count

All IPv6 Count Number of IPv6 messages filtered.

All Other IPv6 Any IPv6 message that was not SMB, SNMP, Bootp, Multicast or one of the user
Count defined filters, that was filtered out.

IPv6 SMB Count Number of IPv6 Server Message Block (file sharing) packets filtered

IPv6 SNMP Count Number of IPv6 SNMP messages filtered

IPv6 Bootp Client Total number of IPv6 DHCP replies filtered

Count

IPv6 Bootp Server Total number of IPv6 DHCP replies filtered

Count

Chapter 3: Operation 473

Attribute Meaning

IPv6 Multicast Number of IPv6 Multicast messages filtered

Count

ARP Count Total number of ARP packets filtered.

All other Count The count of any messages that did not fit above that were filtered out

User Defined Number of packets defined by the user port1 that were filtered.
Port1 Count

User Defined Number of packets defined by the user port2 that were filtered.
Port2 Count

User Defined Number of packets defined by the user port3 that were filtered.
Port3 Count

Viewing ARP statistics

The Statistics > ARP page in a SM module correlated the IP address of the Ethernet-connected device to
its MAC address and provides data about the connection.

Figure 108: ARP page of the SM

Viewing NAT statistics

When NAT is enabled on a SM, statistics are kept on the Public and Private (WAN and LAN) sides of the
NAT and displayed on the Statistics > NAT Stats page. The NAT page of SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 474

Table 140: NAT page attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

Private NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of packets received on the SM’s
Packet In Count LAN/Ethernet interface

Private NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of packets sent from the SM’s
Packet Out Count LAN/Ethernet interface

Private NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of packets that we not sent from the
Packet Out Toss Count SM’s LAN/Ethernet interface due to addressing issues.

Private NAT Statistics, Out This field represents the number of times the NAT table for the SM’s
of Resources Count LAN/Ethernet interfaces has been filled.

Private NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of times that the device failed to insert
Failed Hash Insert Count an address binding into the NAT hash table.

Public NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of packets received on the SM’s
Packet In Count WAN/wireless interface

Public NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of packets sent from the SM’s
Packet Out Count WAN/wireless interface

Public NAT Statistics, Out This field represents the number of packets that we not sent from the
of Resources Count SM’s WAN/wireless interface due to addressing issues.

Public NAT Statistics, This field represents the number of times the NAT table for the SM’s
Failed Hash Insert Count WAN/wireless interfaces has been filled.

Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics

The Statistics > NAT DHCP page displays NAT enabled DHCP client statistics. This is statistics page is
applicable for SM only.

Chapter 3: Operation 475

When NAT is enabled on a SM with DHCP client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN
interface) and/or DHCP Server, statistics are kept for packets transmitted, received and tossed, as well as
a table of lease information for the DHCP server (Assigned IP Address, Hardware Address and Lease
Remained/State).

Table 141: NAT DHCP Statistics page attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

PktXmt Count Represents the number of DHCP packets transmitted from the client

PktRcv Count This field represents the number of DHCP packets received by the client

PktToss This field represents the number of packets tossed due to failed attempts to
ARPUnresolved resolve an IP address into a physical MAC address
Overflow Count

PktToss Unsupported This field represents the number of packets tossed due to the receipt of an
MsgType Count unsupported message type (cannot be interpreted by DHCP client)

PktToss XID The field represents the number of packets that were tossed due to a
Mismatch Count transaction ID mismatch

PktToss NoSID Count This field represents the number of packets that were tossed due to lack of a
DHCP session ID

PktToss SID Mismatch Represents the number of packets tossed due to a session ID mismatch
Count

Failure to Reset Client This field represents the number of times the DHCP client was unable to be
Count reset (resulting in no IP address being served).

Chapter 3: Operation 476

Interpreting Sync Status statistics
The Statistics > Sync Status page of AP is only displayed when the Sync Input is set to AutoSync or
AutoSync+Free Run.

The Sync Status page is explained in below table.

Table 142: Sync Status page attributes - AP

Attribute Meaning

Sync Pulse Source This field indicates the status of the synchronization source:

l Searching indicates that the unit is searching for a GPS fix

l Timing Port/UGPS indicates that the module is receiving sync via
the timing AUX/SYNC timing port
l Power Port indicates that the module is receiving sync via the
power port (Ethernet port).

Sync Pulse Status This field indicates synchronization source pulse status.

Sync Pulse Status - Timing This field indicates synchronization pulse status over Timing Port/UGPS
Port/UGPS port.

Sync Pulse Status - Power This field indicates synchronization pulse status over power port.
Port

UGPS Power Status This field indicates UGPS power up status (on or off).

This information may be helpful in a decision of whether to climb a tower to diagnose a perceived
antenna problem.

Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities

The page can be access under Statistics > PPPoE of SM GUI.

When the PPPoE feature is enabled on the SM, PPPoE statistics provide data about activities of the
customer.

The PPPoE Statistics of SM is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 477

Table 143: PPPoE Statistics page attributes - SM

Attribute Meaning

IP address This field displays the IP address of the PPPoE session initiator
(situated below the SM)

PPPoE Session Status This field displays the operational status of the PPPoE Session

PPPoE AC Name This field displays access concentrator name used in the PPPoE
session

PPPoE Service Name This field displays the PPPoE service name associated with the PPPoE
server in use

PPPoE Session ID This field displays the current PPPoE session ID

PPPoE Session Uptime This field displays the total session uptime for the PPPoE session

PPPoE Session Idle Time This field displays the total idle time for the PPPoE session

PPPoE Session MTU This field displays Maximum Transmission Unit configured for the
PPPoE session

Primary DNS Address This field displays the primary DNS server used by the PPPoE session

Secondary DNS Address This field displays the secondary DNS server used by the PPPoE
session

PPPoE Control Bytes Sent Displays the total number of PPPoE session control bytes sent from
SM

PPPoE Control Bytes This field displays the total number of PPPoE session control bytes
Received received by the SM

PPPoE Data Session Bytes This field displays the total number of PPPoE data session (non-
Sent control/non-session management user data) sent by the SM

PPPoE Data Session Bytes This field displays the total number of PPPoE data session (non-
Received control/non-session management user data)

Chapter 3: Operation 478

Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics
The Statistics > Bridge Control Block page displays statistics of Bridge FEC, Bridge ratio and Bridge error.
The page is applicable for all modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS). The Bridge Control Block Statistics page is
explained in below table.

Table 144: Bridge Control Block page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS

Attribute Meaning

Bridge FEC Stats

Chapter 3: Operation 479

Attribute Meaning

FEC bin This field indicates the number of broadcast packets received by the bridge
control block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC bout This field indicates the number of broadcast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC btoss This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed out by the bridge
control block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC btosscap This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed out at the Main
Ethernet interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

FEC uin This field indicates the number of unicast packets received by the bridge
control block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC uout This field indicates the number of unicast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC utoss This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed by the bridge control
block on the Main Ethernet interface

FEC utosscap This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed out at the Main
Ethernet interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

Bridge Eth Aux Stats

FEC bin This field indicates the number of broadcast packets received by the bridge
control block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC bout This field indicates the number of broadcast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC btoss This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed out by the bridge
control block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC btosscap This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed out at the Aux
Ethernet interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

FEC uin This field indicates the number of unicast packets received by the bridge
control block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC uout This field indicates the number of unicast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC utoss This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed by the bridge control
block on the Aux Ethernet interface

FEC utosscap This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed out at the Aux
Ethernet interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

Bridge Radio Stats

RF bin This field indicates the number of broadcast packets received by the bridge
control block on the radio interface

Chapter 3: Operation 480

 Attribute Meaning

RF bout This field indicates the number of broadcast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the radio interface

RF btoss This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed by the bridge
control block on the radio interface

RF btosscap This field indicates the number of broadcast packets tossed out at the radio
interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

RF uin This field indicates the number of unicast packets received by the bridge
control block on the radio interface

RF uout This field indicates the number of unicast packets sent by the bridge control
block on the radio interface

RF utoss This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed by the bridge control
block on the radio interface

RF utosscap This field indicates the number of unicast packets tossed out at the radio
interface due to MIR cap being exceeded.

Bridge Error Stats

ErrNI1QSend This field indicates that a packet which was sourced from the radio network
stack interface 1 (Ethernet interface) could not be sent because the radio
bridge queue was full. The packet was tossed out.

ErrNI2QSend This field indicates that a packet which was sourced from the radio network
stack interface 2 (RF interface) could not be sent because the radio bridge
queue was full. The packet was tossed out.

ErrBridgeFull This field indicates the total number of times the bridging table was full and
could not accept new entries.

ErrSendMsg This field displays the error message from bridge core call back routine.

ErrApFecQSend This field indicates that a packet which was received on the Ethernet interface
could not be processed because the radio bridge queue was full and packet
was tossed out.

ErrApRfQSend This field indicates that a packet which was received on the RF interface could
not be processed because the radio bridge queue was full. The packet was
tossed out.

Interpreting Pass Through Statistics

The Statistics > Pass Through Statistics page displays radius related statistics. The page is applicable for
PMP 450 Platform Family - AP only. The Pass Through Statistics page is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 481

Table 145: Pass Through Statistics page attributes – AP

Attribute Meaning

IdentityReqSent This field indicates the number of EAP Identity requests sent through the AP
with respect to an SM.

PktsEncapsulated This field indicates no of packets received from the SM which are encapsulated
by the AP.

PktsDecasulated This field indicates no of packets received from the radius server and are
decapsulated by the AP with respect to an SM

AccessAcceptRcvd This field indicates no of RADIUS Access Accept message received by the AP
with respect to an SM.

Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics

The Statistics > SNMPv3 Statistics page displays all SNMPv3 related statistics. The page is applicable for
all type of ODUs of PMP 450 Platform. The SNMPv3 Statistics page is explained in below table.

Chapter 3: Operation 482

Table 146: SNMPv3 Statistics page attributes – AP

Attribute Meaning

Statistics for snmpMPDStats group SNMP Message Processing and Dispatching RFC 3412

snmpUnknownSecurityModels The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they referenced
a securityModel that was not known to or supported
by the SNMP engine.

snmpInvalidMsgs The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because there were
invalid or inconsistent components in the SNMP
message.

Chapter 3: Operation 483

Attribute Meaning

snmpUnknownPDUHandlers The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because the PDU
contained in the packet could not be passed to an
application responsible for handling the pduType, e.g.
no SNMP application had registered for the proper
combination of the contextEngineID and the
pduType.

usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they requested a
securityLevel that was unknown to the SNMP engine
or otherwise unavailable.

usmStatsNotInTimeWindows The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they appeared
outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window.

usmStatsUnknownUserNames The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they referenced
a user that was not known to the SNMP engine.

usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they referenced
a snmpEngineID that was not known to the SNMP
engine.

usmStatsWrongDigests The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they didn't
contain the expected digest value.

usmStatsDecryptionErrors The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because they could not
be decrypted.

snmpTargetSpinLock This object is used to facilitate modification of table

entries in the SNMP-TARGET-MIB module by multiple
managers.

snmpUnavailableContexts The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because the context
contained in the message was unavailable.

snmpUnknownContexts The total number of packets received by the SNMP

engine which were dropped because the context
contained in the message was unknown.

usmUserSpinLock The use of usmUserSpinlock is to avoid conflicts with

another SNMP command generator application which
may also be acting on the usmUserTable.

Chapter 3: Operation 484

 Attribute Meaning

vacmViewSpinLock An advisory lock used to allow cooperating SNMP

Command Generator applications to coordinate their
use of the Set operation in creating or modifying
views.

snmpEngineBoots It is a count of the number of times the SNMP engine

has re-booted/re-initialized since snmpEngineID was
last configured

snmpEngineTime time since engine is up which is the number of seconds since the
snmpEngineBoots counter was last incremented

Interpreting syslog statistics

The Statistics > Syslog Statistics page displays statistics of syslog messages. The page is applicable for all
modules (AP/SM/BHM/BHS). The Syslog Statistics page is explained in below table.

Table 147: Syslog statistics page attributes – AP/SM/BH

Attribute Meaning

Syslog Server This displays dotted decimal or DNS name (if the DNS is enabled) of the
syslog server address.

Syslog Server Port The syslog server port (default 514) to which syslog messaging is sent.

Syslog Status This indicates status of syslog messaging. It can be Enable or Disabled based
on configuration

Syslog Message This field indicates the count of syslog messages sent to UDP layer.
Transmissions

Syslog Message This field indicates the count of dropped syslog messages.
Dropped

CBRS Statistics for AP/SM

The Statistics > CBRS page displays CBRS heart beat statistics and CBRS EIRP Change History. This page
is visible only on the AP/BHM. Statistics for the SMs can also be seen on this page, viewed on the
AP/BHM Radio. The CBRS statistics for AP/SM page is explained in Table 1.

Chapter 3: Operation 485

Figure 109: CBRS statistics for AP

Table 148: CBRS statistics for AP

Attribute Meaning

Select CBSD

Current CBSD Allows an operator to select the statistics for a particular AP/BHM.

CBSD Statistics

Channel The low frequency and high frequency range of a CBRS grant. Each row in the
CBSD Statistics table represents a channel range for a currently active CBRS
grant. Note that the statistics per row represent all the counts for all the grants in
a particular channel range since the statistics were last cleared, assuming a grant
is currently held for that channel range.

Total The total count of the heartbeat requests sent, per frequency range, since the
statistics were last cleared.

Missed The AP sent a heartbeat request but did not receive a heartbeat response.

Failed The AP received a heartbeat response with a failure code.

Grant Suspend The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS, per frequency
range, with reason code suspended grant.

Grant Terminate The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS with reason code
500 – terminated grant. Note that as of System Release 21.0, terminated grants
will immediately be removed from the table. But as mentioned previously in the
Channel field description, the statistics show all the counts for all grants held in
every channel range since the statistics were last cleared. If at any time after a
grant termination, an operator moves the radio’s back to the previously
terminated channel range and is successful in obtaining a new grant, these counts
will include the counts for the previously terminated grant as well as the newly
obtained grant.

Unsync failure The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS with reason code
502 – unsync failure.

EIRP Change History

Chapter 3: Operation 486

 Attribute Meaning

Timestamps Each row in the EIRP Change History table represents a point in the time when the
total EIRP for a particular CBSD was changed. The events are listed in
chronological order.

EIRP The total transmit EIRP the CBSD moved to at this point in time.

Reason The detailed reason for that EIRP change.

Figure 110: CBRS Statistics for SM

Table 149: CBRS Statistics for SM

Attribute Meaning

Select CBSD

Current CBSD Allows an operator to select to view statistics for a particular SM.

CBSD Statistics

Channel The low frequency and high frequency range of a CBRS grant. Each row in the CBSD
Statistics table represents a channel range for a currently active CBRS grant. Note that
the statistics per row represent all the counts for all the grants in a particular channel
range since the statistics were last cleared, assuming a grant is currently held for that
channel range.

Total The total count of the heartbeat requests sent, per frequency range, since the statistics
were last cleared.

Missed The heartbeat request was sent but no response was received.

Failed The heartbeat response was received with a failure code.

Grant The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS, per frequency range,
Suspend with reason code suspended grant.

Grant The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS with reason code 500
Terminate – terminated grant. Note that as of PMP System Release 21.0, terminated grants will
immediately be removed from the table. But as mentioned previously in the Channel

Chapter 3: Operation 487

 Attribute Meaning

field description, the statistics show all the counts for all grants held in every channel
range since the statistics were last cleared. If at any time after a grant termination, an
operator moves the Radio’s back to the previously terminated channel range and is
successful in obtaining a new grant, these counts will include the counts for the
previously terminated grant as well as the newly obtained grant.

Unsync The total number of heartbeat responses received from the SAS with reason code 502
failure – unsync failure.

Skipped The AP did not include this SM in the heartbeat exchange.

Relative bulk The total number of heartbeat requests sent for this particular SM that was included in
a bulk heartbeat request with other SMs.

Standalone The total number of heartbeat requests sent for this particular SM that was sent
standalone – not part of a bulk heartbeat request with other SMs.

EIRP Change History

Timestamps Each row in the EIRP Change History table represents a point in the time when the total
EIRP for a particular CBSD was changed. The events are listed in chronological order.

EIRP The total transmit EIRP the CBSD moved to at this point in time.

Reason The detailed reason for that EIRP change. Note that an "EIRP lowered" or an "EIRP
increased" reason that does not mention grants is typically a user-initiated change.

Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics

The Frame Utilization Statistics is a feature helps user to understand how effectively the RF channel is
being utilized. This feature allows to check Time Division Duplex (TDD) frame utilization pattern and
diagnose for any excessive usage in uplink or downlink direction.

This forms the first step of identifying the TDD frame utilization information. If the user finds excessive
utilization based on these stats, the second step would be to take several actions like sectorization,
tuning the uplink/downlink ratio etc. to improve RF channel utilization. Efficient use of the TDD frame will
help to achieve optimum performance of link.

Note

The backhauls (BHM and BHS) contain only the downlink scheduler-based statistics.

Chapter 3: Operation 488

Table 150: Frame utilization statistics for 450m

Chapter 3: Operation 489

Attribute Meaning

Frame Utilization Interval

Statistics Display This allows to configure timer interval to monitor and display the frame
interval utilization statistics. It can be configured for 1 minute (low interval), 5 minutes
(medium interval) or 15 minutes (high interval) based on requirement.

Next Update This field displays when the next update will occur.

MU-MIMO Utilization

Slot Grouping - This specifies the distribution of group size for the past 1/5/15 minutes. For each
Group Size group size, from 1 to 7, the table shows the percentage of slots using that group
size.

l A group size of 1 corresponds to beamformed transmissions.

l A group size of 2 to 7 corresponds to MU-MIMO transmissions.

Note that for 30 MHz and 40 MHz bandwidths, the UL group size is limited to 3
or smaller.

Group Forming Statistics

Chapter 3: Operation 490

Attribute Meaning

Number of Groups Indicates what percentage of frames in this measurement window had the
Per Frame corresponding number of MU-MIMO groups per frame, and per direction. In the
example shown, 5.3% of the frames had 3 different MU-MIMO groups formed.
Note that this frame could also contain SU-MIMO scheduled data. The "0
ungrouped" shows the percentage of frames that had non-MUMIMO scheduled
traffic at all. This frame would have only SU-MIMO scheduled traffic, and/or
unused symbols.

The "2" and "3" rows always show N/A in the Uplink direction because current
PMP software only supports a single MU-MIMO group per frame in the Uplink
direction.

Additional Statistics

Average MU-MIMO This specifies the average number of users in the MU-MIMO groups formed in
Group Size - Data the last 1/5/15 minutes for data traffic only.

Total Utilization This is a percentage of available timeslots used in the past 1/5/15 minutes.

Multiplexing Gain This specifies the ratio between the number of logical slots and the number of
physical slots used.

A physical slot is an OFDM symbol. In non MU-MIMO mode, each logical slot is
sent during one physical slot. In MU-MIMO mode a number of logical slots are
sent during a physical slot, equal to the number of VCs in the group. A logical
slot carries new information; if data is repeated in a group, because some VCs
have more data to send then others, then the repeated transmissions are not
counted as a logical slots.

Without MU-MIMO operation, the multiplexing gain would always be equal to 1.

With MU-MIMO operation, this number accounts for parallel transmissions to

multiple users in the MU-MIMO group.

The difference between the Average MU-MIMO Group Size and the Multiplexing
Gain is that the Average MU-MIMO Group Size only considers the MU-MIMO
groups, and it averages the number of VCs in the Group. The Multiplexing Gain
also considers non MU-MIMO transmissions, which are counted as groups of
size 1.

Sector Utilization

SU-MIMO This specifies the portion of the Total Utilization used for SU-MIMO
transmissions.

MU-MIMO This specifies the portion of the Total Utilization used for MU-MIMO
transmissions.

ACK This specifies the portion of the Total Utilization used for acknowledgments
transmission.

MU-MIMO ACK This specifies the portion of the Total Utilization used for acknowledgements
transmissions that are MU-MIMO scheduled. Currently only the UL direction
supports MU-MIMO scheduling of ACK's.

Chapter 3: Operation 491

Attribute Meaning

Broadcast & Multicast This specifies the portion of the Total Utilization used for broadcast and
multicast transmissions.

Slots Counts - Uplink and Downlink Slot Counts

Per Frame Average This indicates the average data per frame in the downlink traffic.

Low Priority The number of downlink data slots used for low priority downlink traffic.

Medium Priority The number of downlink data slots used for medium priority downlink traffic.

High Priority The number of downlink data slots used for high priority downlink traffic.

Ultra High Priority The number of downlink data slots used for ultra high priority downlink traffic.

Note:

The above Low, Medium, High, and Ultra High Priority Counts are physical slot transmissions. For MU-
MIMO scheduling, some transmissions can contain data from more than 1 data channel priority. In those
cases, the highest data channel used is "counted" in these statistics, and the other data channels are
not, to avoid overcounting.

Broadcast & Multicast The number of downlink data slots used for broadcast and multicast traffic.

Authentication and The number of slots used for registration and control message transmissions
Configuration

Registration and The number of slots used for Authentication and Configuration transmissions.
control

MAC The number of downlink data slots used as ACKs.

Acknowledgements

Contention Slots It is the average number of contention slots in a frame for the last duration.
Average Per Frame Duration is 1/5/15 mins.

Bandwidth Requests This indicates the number of Bandwidth Requests received from SMs.
Received

Bandwidth Requests This indicates how many of Bandwidth Requests are colliding.
Missed

Total This indicates the sum of all downlink data slots used in the configured interval.

Frame Utilization

Downlink This indicates the percentage of downlink data slots used against the maximum
number of slots possible in the configured interval.

Uplink This indicates the percentage of uplink data slots used against the maximum
number of uplink slots possible in the configured interval.

Chapter 3: Operation 492

Attribute Meaning

Bandwidth Request The "Bandwidth Request Success" is a message sent from the SM to the AP
Success asking to be scheduled for bandwidth to send in the uplink. This gets
transmitted in the unscheduled portion of the uplink. Unscheduled uplink is
defined as Contention Slots + unscheduled uplink slots. Since this is sent in the
unscheduled portion of the uplink, it will result in collisions when SMs randomly
pick the same slot.

The "Bandwidth Request Missed" metrics are to add data to know how many of
requests are colliding. If it is near 100%, then near all of the SM’s bandwidth
requests are getting through to the AP, so this a is near perfect scenario. If it is
significantly less than that, you may be experiencing uplink latency as your SMs
are attempting to request bandwidth and are unable to do so.

Also note that if it is consistently at 100% the AP may be able to reduce its
contention slots to a lower value and gain more data slots.

Maximum possible counts

Downlink This indicates the maximum possible downlink data slots in the configured
interval. This is based on the configuration of Channel Bandwidth, Frame
period, uplink/downlink allocation, contention slots and configured Statistics
Display interval.

Uplink This indicates the maximum possible uplink data slots in the configured interval.
This is based on the configuration of Channel Bandwidth, Frame period,
uplink/downlink allocation, contention slots and configured Statistics Display
interval.

Contention This indicates the maximum possible contention slots.

Packet Discard counts

Ethernet indiscards This indicates the number of Ethernet packets discarded in the IN queue.

Ethernet outdiscards This indicates the number of Ethernet packets discarded in the OUT queue.

Radio indiscards This indicates the number of packets discarded over radio in the IN queue.

Radio outdiscards This indicates the number of packets discarded over radio in the OUT queue.

Chapter 3: Operation 493

Table 151: Frame utilization statistics for 450, 450i

Chapter 3: Operation 494

Attribute Meaning

Frame Utilization Interval

Statistics Display interval This allows to configure timer interval to monitor and display the
frame utilization statistics. It can be configured for 1 minute (low
interval), 5 minutes (medium interval) or 15 minutes (high interval)
based on requirement.

Next Update This field displays when the next update will occur.

Frame Utilization Summary

Utilization Total percentage used in the time interval.

Spectral Efficeincy (user data Provides an actual measure of how many bits per hertz per second
bits per second per hertz) achieved for user data in the most recent frame utilization interval.

Data to Overhead Percentage Provides a breakdown of user data to overhead data.

Data Per Modulation Percentage Provides a breakdown of data slots used per modulation.

Data Per QoS Percentage Provides what percentage of used slots were due to which QoS
levels. Note that “AAA” QoS refers to slots used for
authentication/authorization/accounting. “Ctl” QoS refers to slots
used for system level messages (registration, encryption).

Bandwidth Request Receive How efficient the SM's Bandwidth Request messages are getting to
Efficiency the AP.

Interval Slot Count Summary- Provides a summary of actual slot counts rather than the
Used percentages provided in the Frame Utilization Summary.

Used Provides a breakdown of total slots used in each direction. It further

breaks down the total between data and acks. Finally, it provides an
average slots used per TDD frame.

Modulation (1X : Count of slot Provides a breakdown of the number of slots used at each
containing 1 fragment of user modulation.
data. 2X: Count of slot containing
2 fragments of user data...)

Quality of Service Provides a breakdown of the number of slots used at each QoS
level.

Aknowledgements Provides the number of slots used for acks. It also provides a new
count called Partial.

Contention This indicates the maximum possible contention slots.

Packet Discard counts

Ethernet indiscards This indicates the number of Ethernet packets discarded in the IN
queue.

Ethernet outdiscards This indicates the number of Ethernet packets discarded in the OUT
queue.

Chapter 3: Operation 495

Attribute Meaning

Radio indiscards This indicates the number of packets discarded over radio in the IN
queue.

Radio outdiscards This indicates the number of packets discarded over radio in the
OUT queue.

Interpreting Channel Change History statistics

The Channel Change History statistics are available for all PMP AP and BHM products. For non-CBRS
deployments, the Authorized Grants column is not be visible, and only user-triggered channel change
reasons are displayed.

Figure 111: The Channel Change History statistics for AP and BHM

Table 152: The Channel Change History statistics for AP and BHM

Attribute Meaning

Center frequency The center frequency of the operating channel for the sector. For example, if a
CBRS AP holds four 10 MHz multigrants ranging in frequency from 3580 through
3620, the first, second, and fourth 10 MHz channels are authorized while the third
channel was suspended, 3590 would be the center frequency displayed here.

Bandwidth The bandwidth of the operating channel for the sector. For example, if a CBRS
AP holds four 10 MHz multigrants ranging in frequency from 3580 through 3620,
the first, second, and fourth 10 MHz channels are authorized while the third
channel was suspended, 20 MHz would be the bandwidth displayed here.

Chapter 3: Operation 496

 Attribute Meaning

Timestamp The time that the AP/BHM switch to the Center Frequency and Bandwidth
displayed in this row. The channel changes are displayed in chronological order,
with the newest changes at the bottom of the table.

Reason The particular reason for the channel change. For example, CBRS grant
termination.

Authorized Grants The grants authorized/the total number of grants held by the AP. For example, ½
indicates that 2 CBRS grants are held by the AP, of which only 1 grant is currently
in an authorized state.

Interpreting Spatial Utilization statistics

Table 153: Spatial Utilization statistics

Chapter 3: Operation 497

Spatial Frequency Heatmap

Chapter 3: Operation 498

Attribute Meaning

Instantaneous This table is updated every 500 ms and displays the following:
Distribution
l Group: Each row corresponds to the top (most active) 1, 2, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
and 256 VCs.
l Median Slot Count: Median value of the average number of slots scheduled
for the VCs in each group in the past 500 ms.

l LUIDs in Group: List of LUIDs belonging to each bin.

Spatial This is a table (32 rows) that lists frame utilization for each spatial frequency (SF)
Utilization range with following information:

l Spatial Frequency: Range of spatial frequency for each bin. Each bin includes
32 consecutive spatial frequency values.
l Azimuth (degrees): Azimuth range in degrees corresponding to the spatial
frequencies of the bin. The zero-degree Azimuth is boresight.

Note

Some SF ranges correspond to multiple azimuth ranges. This is

because for some spatial frequencies the AP generates beams in
multiple azimuth directions. The SM can be physically located in any of
the azimuth ranges.

Spatial 1. Instantaneous (%): Frame utilization for the SF bin, updated every 500 ms.
Utilization The frame utilization percentage accounts for all traffic, sector mode,
(Contd.) beamforming mode, and MU-MIMO mode.
2. Total (%): Average utilization in the SF bin for the past 1/5/15 minutes, as
selected in the Statistics Display interval.
3. Max (%): Maximum instantaneous utilization in the 1/5/15 minute interval.
4. Min (%): Minimum instantaneous utilization in the 1/5/15 minute interval.
5. VCs in Range: List of VCs with spatial frequency falling in the bin.
6. LUIDs in Range: List of LUIDs with spatial frequency falling in the bin.

Note

The size of each SF bin is smaller than the beam generated by the AP
during a MU-MIMO transmission. This means that when a VC in a bin is
scheduled for a MU-MIMO transmission, the adjacent bins also receive
the signal, and the transmission is counted towards their utilization as
well. Bins with consistent low utilization indicate the areas of the sector
where more SMs could be installed, or the cutomers that could be
offered higher data plans.

Spacial The spatial frequency heatmap allow the operator to see how the 450m spatial
Frequency frequency have been occupied (utilised) over the previous hour of operation. There
Heatmap are two heatmaps the first displays downlink utilisation and the lower the uplink
utilisation. The heatmaps are useful when operators are identifying:

l congested spatial directions

l spare capacity in spatial directions

Chapter 3: Operation 499

 Attribute Meaning

The heatmap uses a graduated colour scale to represent the percentage utilisation.
The graphic to the right-hand side of the heatmap should be used as a key to
interpret the GUI. Where dark blue represents zero percent utilisation and red
represents 100% utilisation.

Radio Recovery
This section describes:

l How to recover a PMP/PTP 450i and PMP 450m Series ODUs from configuration errors or
software image corruption
l How to override a PMP/PTP 450 Series ODUs from forgotten IP address and password to factory
default

Radio Recovery Console– PMP/PTP 450i/450b and PMP 450m

Recovery mode allows to restore IP address and password. Also, it allows new main application software
to be loaded even when the integrity of the existing main application software image has been
compromised. The most likely cause of an integrity problem with the installed main application software
is where the power supply has been interrupted during a software upgrade.

Note

When Recovery has been entered through a power on/off/on cycle, the ODU
will revert to normal operation if no web access has been made to the unit within
30 seconds. This prevents the unit remaining inadvertently in recovery following
a power outage.

Options in recovery mode are:

l Boot with normal operation

l Boot with default Canopy system software settings
l Load a previous SW image

The last most recent software images loaded to the board are retained. However the factory image is not
retained.

Boot with default Canopy system software settings (similar to the hardware Default Plug based on 450
Platforms Family).

Note

The unit may enter recovery console automatically, in response to some failures.

Note

Once the unit has entered recovery, it will switch back to normal operation if no
access has been made to the recovery web page within 30 seconds.

Use below procedure to enter in recovery console manually.

Procedure 27 Radio Recovery Console:

Chapter 3: Operation 500

 1 Apply power to PSU for at least 10 seconds.

2 Remove power from the PSU, and then re-apply it as soon as the power indicator light goes out
(about 1 - 2 seconds).

3 When the unit is in recovery mode, access the web interface by entering the default IP address
169.254.1.1. The Recovery Image Warning page is displayed.

4 Review the Boot Selection (Recovery Options attributes).

5 Select a recovery option

Figure 112: Recovery Options page

Table 154: Recovery Options attributes

Attribute Meaning

Boot Selection Boot – Default Mode: Use this option to temporarily set the IP and Ethernet
attributes to factory defaults until the next reboot.

Boot – Normal: Use this option to reboot the unit.

IP address, These fields display IP address, Netmask and Gateway of the radio while it is in
Netmask, Gateway recovery or default mode.

Note

The radio enters recovery mode when a short power cycle is used. The radio will
boot normally if power has been removed for a longer period (typically 5 - 10
seconds).

Default Mode (or Default/Override Plug) - PMP/PTP 450 Series

The default mode allows to temporarily override some PMP/PTP 450 Series ODU settings and thereby
regain control of the module by powering the module on with the Default Plug inserted into the unit’s

Chapter 3: Operation 501

synchronization (RJ11) port.

This override plug is needed for access to the module in any of the following cases:

l You have forgotten either

l the IP address assigned to the ODU.

l the password that provides access to the ODU.

l The ODU has been locked by the No Remote Access feature.

l You want local access to a module that has had the 802.3 link disabled in the Configuration page.

You can configure the module such that, when it senses the override plug, it responds by either

l resetting the LAN1 IP address to 169.254.1.1, allowing access through the default configuration
without changing the configuration, whereupon you will be able to view and reset any non-default
values as you wish.

l resetting all configurable parameters to their factory default values.

Note

The Default Plug is available from Best-Tronics Manufacturing, Inc.

See https://btpa.com/Cambium-Products/ as Part BT-0583 (RJ-11 Default Plug).
Alternatively, you can fabricate an override plug. See Override plug cable in
Planning and Installation Guide for pinout.

Using the Default/Override Plug

The following section details usage of the override plug to regain access to PMP/PTP 450 Series ODU.

Note

While the override plug is connected to a PMP/PTP 450 Series ODU, the ODU
can neither register nor allow registration of another ODU.

Note

Since the 900 MHz SM is based on the 450 Series, it only supports the "Default Plug" mode
of overriding.

Use below procedure to enter in default mode manually.

Procedure 28 Default mode

1 Insert the override plug into the RJ-11 GPS utility port of the module.

2 Power cycle by removing, then re-inserting, the Ethernet cable.

RESULT: The module boots with the default IP address of 169.254.1.1, password fields blank, and all
other configuration values as previously set.

3 Wait approximately 30 seconds for the boot to complete.

4 Remove the override plug.

Chapter 3: Operation 502

5 Set passwords and IP address as desired.

6 Change configuration values if desired.

7 Click the Save Changes button.

8 Click the Reboot button.

Chapter 3: Operation 503

Chapter 4: Reference information
This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the 450 Platform Family
ODUs.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

l Equipment specifications contains specifications of the 450 Platform Family, ODU specifications
including RF bands, channel width and link loss.
l Data network specifications shows the 450 Platform Family Ethernet interface specifications.
l Wireless specifications lists the safety specifications against which 450 Platform Family ODU has
been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
l Country specific radio regulations describes how the 450 Platform Family complies with the radio
regulations that are enforced in various countries.
l Equipment Disposal describes the Equipment Disposal system for Electronic and Electric
Equipment.

Equipment specifications
This section contains specifications of the AP, SM, BHM and BHS associated supplies required for 450
Platform Family installations.

Specifications for 5 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP

The 5 GHz PMP 450m AP conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 155: 5 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450m AP

Spectrum

Channel Spacing Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 to 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary

Physical Layer 14x14 Multi-User MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Chapter 4: Reference information 504

Category Specification

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -99.4 dBm, 2x = -96.9 dBm, 4x = -90.5 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 5 MHz Channel 84.3 dBm, 8x = -76.9 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -100.6 dBm, 2x = -97 dBm, 4x = -90.5 dBm, 6x = -

84 dBm, 8x = -76.3 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -100.5 dBm, 2x = -96.7 dBm, 4x = -90.1 dBm, 6x = -

83.7 dBm, 8x = -76.1 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -101.2 dBm, 2x = -96.2 dBm, 4x = -90.3 dBm, 6x = -

83.9 dBm, 8x = -76.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -100.8 dBm, 2x = -96.5 dBm, 4x = -90.3 dBm, 6x =

-84 dBm, 8x = -76.3 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -97.5 dBm, 2x = -94.8 dBm, 4x = -88.4 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 10 MHz Channel 82.3 dBm, 8x = -75.1 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -97.9 dBm, 2x = -94.3 dBm, 4x = -87.8 dBm, 6x = -

81.5 dBm, 8x = -74.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -97.9 dBm, 2x = -93.9 dBm, 4x = -87.4 dBm, 6x = -

81.1 dBm, 8x = -73.9 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -98.1 dBm, 2x = -94.1 dBm, 4x = -87.5 dBm, 6x = -

81.3 dBm, 8x = -74.2 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -98.4 dBm, 2x = -94.3 dBm, 4x = -87.8 dBm, 6x = -

81.5 dBm, 8x = -74.4 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -96 dBm, 2x = -93.2 dBm, 4x = -86.7 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 15 MHz Channel 80.3 dBm, 8x = -73.5 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -96.5 dBm, 2x = -92.8 dBm, 4x = -86.4 dBm, 6x = -

80 dBm, 8x = -72.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -96.4 dBm, 2x = -92.2 dBm, 4x = -85.4 dBm, 6x = -

79.1 dBm, 8x = -72.2 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -96.7 dBm, 2x = -92.4 dBm, 4x = -85.7 dBm, 6x = -

79.4 dBm, 8x = -72.6 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -97.4 dBm, 2x = -92.8 dBm, 4x = -86.2 dBm, 6x = -

80 dBm, 8x = -73 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 505

Category Specification

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -94.7 dBm, 2x = -92.1 dBm, 4x = -85.5 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 20 MHz Channel 79.2 dBm, 8x = -72.5 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -95.2 dBm, 2x = -91.5 dBm, 4x = -85.1 dBm, 6x = -

78.7 dBm, 8x = -71.7 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -95.2 dBm, 2x = -91.3 dBm, 4x = -84.8 dBm, 6x = -

78.5 dBm, 8x = -71.5 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -95.6 dBm, 2x = -90.8 dBm, 4x = -84.8 dBm, 6x = -

78.5 dBm, 8x = -71.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -96.3 dBm, 2x = -91.3 dBm, 4x = -85.2 dBm, 6x = -

78.8 dBm, 8x = -71.6 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -89.9 dBm, 4x = -83.6 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 30 MHz Channel 77.4 dBm, 8x = -70.9 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -93.1 dBm, 2x = -89.0 dBm, 4x = -83.0 dBm, 6x = -

76.7 dBm, 8x = -69.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -93.1 dBm, 2x = -88.7 dBm, 4x = -82.5 dBm, 6x = -

76.2 dBm, 8x = -69.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -93.6 dBm, 2x = -89.1 dBm, 4x = -82.9 dBm, 6x = -

76.5 dBm, 8x = -69.7 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -94.1 dBm, 2x = -89.4 dBm, 4x = -83.2 dBm, 6x = -

76.8 dBm, 8x = -69.9 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ 4.9 GHz 1x = -91.5 dBm, 2x = -88.8 dBm, 4x = -82.5 dBm, 6x = -
FEC) @ 40 MHz Channel 76.3 dBm, 8x = -69.7 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -92.1 dBm, 2x = -88.1 dBm, 4x = -82.0 dBm, 6x = -

75.5 dBm, 8x = -68.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.7 dBm, 4x = -81.7 dBm, 6x = -

75.3 dBm, 8x = -67.9 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -92.7 dBm, 2x = -87.4 dBm, 4x = -81.8 dBm, 6x = -

75.4 dBm, 8x = -68.2 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 4x = -82.1 dBm, 6x = -

75.6 dBm, 8x = -68.1 dBm

Performance

Subscriber Per Sector Up to 238

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms, 5 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 506

Category Specification

Modulation Levels (Adaptive) Modulation Levels SNR (in dB)

2x QPSK 10

4x 16-QAM 17

6x 64-QAM 24

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 10 ms, typical (MU-MIMO introduces additional latency

for the traffic that is MU-MIMO scheduled.)

Maximum Deployment Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (UGPS)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 5 GHz 90° integrated sector (Dual polarity, H+V)

Antenna Gain +14 dBi

Maximum EIRP +48 dBm

Physical

Data, Sync/AUX and SFP port RJ45 l 1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l AUX port for UGPS or PoE out to 802.3at

Antenna Connection Integrated Sector Array

Surge Suppression (with LPU) EN61000-4-5: 1.2 us/50 us, 500 V voltage waveform

Recommended external surge suppressor:

Cambium Networks Model # C000065L007B

Mean Time Between Failure > 40 Years

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)

0-95% non-condensing

Weight Integrated Approx. 14.2 kg (31 bs)

Chapter 4: Reference information 507

Category Specification

Wind Loading – Front Facing @90 mph / 144 kph 376 N

@110 mph /177 kph 562 N

Dimension (HxWxD) Integrated 52 x 65 x 11 cm (20.3” x 25.7” x 4.4”)

Power Consumption 70 W typical, 80 W peak

(up to 110 W max with AUX port PoE enabled)

Input Voltage 58 V, 1.7 A

Mounting Pole mount with included brackets

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for 3 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP

The 3 GHz PMP 450m AP conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 156: 3 GHz PMP 450m Series - AP specifications

Category Specification

Model Number 3 GHz PMP 450m AP

Spectrum

Channel Spacing Customizable channel selection to 50kHz

raster

Frequency Range 3300 – 3900 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Networks Proprietary

Physical Layer 8x8 Multi-User MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 100/1000BaseT, full duplex, rate auto

negotiated (802.3 compliant), dual SFP
support for 1 Gbps optical

Protocols Used IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP/IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP,

HTTP, FTP

Network Management IPv4/IPv6 (dual stack), HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet,

FTP, SNMPv2c and v3, Cambium Networks
cnMaestroTM

Chapter 4: Reference information 508

Category Specification

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-inQ), 802.1Q with 802.1p

priority, dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -97.6 dBm, 2x = -95 dBm, 4x = -88.7 dBm,
@ 5 MHz Channel 6x = -82.5 dBm, 8x = -75 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -96.9 dBm, 2x = -94.4 dBm, 4x = -88.1

dBm, 6x = -81.7 dBm, 8x = -74 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -96.1 dBm, 2x = -93.4 dBm, 4x = -87.1 dBm,
@ 6x = -81.1 dBm, 8x = -74.7 dBm

7 MHz Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -96 dBm, 2x = -92.9 dBm, 4x = -86.6 dBm,
6x = -80.6 dBm, 8x = -73.6 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -95.2 dBm, 2x = -92.8 dBm, 4x = -86.4
@ 10 MHz Channel dBm, 6x = -80.3 dBm, 8x = -73.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -94.6 dBm, 2x = -92.5 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm,

6x = -79.6 dBm, 8x = -72.8 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -93.6 dBm, 2x = -91.1 dBm, 4x = -84.6 dBm,
@ 15 MHz Channel 6x = -78.4 dBm, 8x = -71.8 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -92.8 dBm, 2x = -90.4 dBm, 4x = -84 dBm,

6x = -78 dBm, 8x = -71.1 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -92.3 dBm, 2x = -89.8 dBm, 4x = -83.4
@ 20 MHz Channel dBm, 6x = -77.2 dBm, 8x = -70.7 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -91.5 dBm, 2x = -89.3 dBm, 4x = -82.9 dBm,

6x = -76.5 dBm, 8x = -70 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -87.2 dBm, 4x = -81.1 dBm,
@ 30 MHz Channel 6x = -74.8 dBm, 8x = -68.7 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -86.6 dBm, 4x = -80.7 dBm,

6x = -74.4 dBm, 8x = -68.1 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 3.5 GHz 1x = -88.7 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 4x = -80.1
@ 40 MHz Channel dBm, 6x = -73.7 dBm, 8x = -67.4 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -85.5 dBm, 4x = -79.5 dBm,

6x = -73.3 dBm, 8x = -66.7 dBm

Performance

Subscriber Per Sector Up to 238

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms, 5 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 509

Category Specification

Modulation Levels (Adaptive) Modulation MCS SNR (in

Levels dB)

2x QPSK 10

4x 16-QAM 17

6x 64-QAM 24

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 10 ms, typical

Maximum Deployment Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (UGPS, CMM5 (GPS only, no

power))

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width (Azimuth) 90° integrated sector (3dB rolloff), 120° (6dB
rolloff), (dual slant polarity, ±45°

Antenna Beam Width (Elevation) 2° Electrical Downtilt, 8° Elevation (with Null

Fill)

Antenna Gain +16 dBi

Maximum EIRP +52 dBm (or up to maximum allowed by

regulation)

Physical

Data ports

Main port RJ45 1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

Aux port RJ45 100BASE-T with 802.3at PoE out; UGPS

power/sync
SFP port 1 SFP
SFP Single channel SFP, 1 Gbps
SFP port 2
Dual channel SFP, 1 Gbps

Power 4-pin DC power input

Antenna Connection Integrated Sector Array

Surge Suppression (with LPU) MAIN and AUX ports: EN61000-4-5: 10/700us,
4 kV voltage waveform. Recommended
external surge suppressor: Model #
C000065L007B

Chapter 4: Reference information 510

 Category Specification

DC IN port: EN61000-4-5: 1.2/50us, 2 kV/4 kV.

Recommended external surge suppressor:
Model # C000000L114A

Mean Time Between Failure > 40 Years

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) / 100%

condensing

Weight Integrated Without Mounting Brackets: 20.4 kg (45 lbs)

With Mounting Brackets: 22.6 kg (49.8 lbs)

Wind Loading – Front Facing @90 mph / 144 kph 521 N

@110 mph /177 kph 787 N

@124 mph/ 200kph 986 N

Dimension (HxWxD) Integrated 69 x 61 x 17.5 cm (27.2” x 24” x 7”)

Power Consumption 140 W typical, 150 W peak (up to 180 W max

with AUX port PoE enabled)

Input Voltage 40 - 60 V DC

Mounting Pole mount with included brackets (1.25" to 4"

pole diameter)

Security

Encryption FIPS-197 128-bit AES, Optional 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450i Series - AP

The PMP 450i AP conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 157: PMP 450i Series - AP specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450i AP

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Chapter 4: Reference information 511

Category Specification

Frequency Range 902 to 928 MHz

3300 - 3900 MHz

4900 - 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 902 – 928 MHz 5, 7, 10, 15, and 20 MHz

3300 - 3900 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

MHz

4900 – 5925 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary

Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Chapter 4: Reference information 512

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -91.9 dBm, 2x = -87.29 dBm, 3x = -83.38 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5 81.34 dBm, 5x = -78.41 dBm, 6x = -75.42 dBm, 7x = -72.46
MHz Channel dBm, 8x = -68.58 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -93 dBm, 2x = -89.3 dBm, 3x = -84.9 dBm, 4x = -82.6

dBm, 5x = -79.2 dBm, 6x = -76.1 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x
= -68.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -83.6 dBm, 4x = -

81.0 dBm, 5x = -78.2 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0
dBm, 8x = -67.2 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -91.6 dBm, 2x = -87.6 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm,4x = -

80.4 dBm, 5x = -77.2 dBm, 6x = -74.3 dBm, 7x = -71.0
dBm, 8x = -66.3 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

80.3 dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

80.3 dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6
dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

80.3 dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6
dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -90.5 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

80.0 dBm, 5x = -76.3 dBm, 6x = -73.6 dBm, 7x = -70.0
dBm, 8x = -66.1 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -89.31 dBm, 2x = -85.32 dBm, 3x = -82.35 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 7 80.35 dBm, 5x = -77.43 dBm, 6x = -74.36 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 71.53 dBm, 8x = -67.47 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.7 dBm, 3x = -82.6 dBm, 4x = -

80.4 dBm, 5x = -77.5 dBm, 6x = -74.5 dBm, 7x = -71.1
dBm, 8x = -66.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -90.6 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.1 dBm, 4x = -

80.0 dBm, 5x = -77.0 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.0
dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 513

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -89.47 dBm, 2x = -84.61 dBm, 3x = -81.71 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 10 78.77 dBm, 5x = -75.82 dBm, 6x = -73.69 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 70.78 dBm, 8x = -66.76 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -90.2 dBm, 2x = -86.2 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

79.9 dBm, 5x = -76.3 dBm, 6x = -73.2 dBm, 7x = -70.0
dBm, 8x = -65.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.0 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -

78.8 dBm, 5x = -75.3 dBm, 6x = -72.8 dBm, 7x = -69.0
dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -88.8 dBm, 2x = -84.2 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -

77.9 dBm, 5x = -74.3 dBm, 6x = -71.4 dBm, 7x = -68.3
dBm, 8x = -64.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -

78.0 dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -67.6
dBm, 8x = -64.6 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -

78.0 dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -67.6
dBm, 8x = -64.6 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.6 dBm, 4x = -

77.8 dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -68.0
dBm, 8x = -63.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.6 dBm, 4x = -

77.8 dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -68.0
dBm, 8x = -63.8 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 514

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -88.5 dBm, 2x = -83.56 dBm, 3x = -79.67 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 15 75.58 dBm, 5x = -74.66 dBm, 6x = -71.57 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 68.64 dBm, 8x = -65.61 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -84.4 dBm, 3x = -80.2 dBm, 4x = -

78.0 dBm, 5x = -74.9 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.1
dBm, 8x = -63.8 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -

77.0 dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -71.1 dBm, 7x = -67.1
dBm, 8x = -63.1 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -

76.2 dBm, 5x = -73.0 dBm, 6x = -69.6 dBm, 7x = -66.3
dBm, 8x = -62.6 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -82.9 dBm, 3x = -78.5 dBm, 4x = -

76.5 dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.8
dBm, 8x = -62.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -82.9 dBm, 3x = -78.5 dBm, 4x = -

76.5 dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.8
dBm, 8x = -62.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.6 dBm, 2x = -82.4 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -

76.0 dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -66.2
dBm, 8x = -62.2 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -81.5 dBm, 3x = -77.5 dBm, 4x = -

75.5 dBm, 5x = -72.4 dBm, 6x = -69.2 dBm, 7x = -66.0
dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 515

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -86.51 dBm, 2x = -82.51 dBm, 3x = -78.56 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 20 75.58 dBm, 5x = -72.61 dBm, 6x = -70.55 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 67.64 dBm, 8x = -63.54 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -87.4 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -78.8 dBm, 4x = -

76.9 dBm, 5x = -73.2 dBm, 6x = -69.9 dBm, 7x = -66.0
dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -86.8 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -

76.0 dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.9
dBm, 8x = -61.6 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -

75.0 dBm, 5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8
dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -

75.0 dBm, 5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8
dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -

75.0 dBm, 5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8
dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -

75.0 dBm, 5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8
dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -85.8 dBm, 2x = -80.7 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -

74.6 dBm, 5x = -71.5 dBm, 6x = -68.7 dBm, 7x = -64.9
dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 516

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -81.4 dBm, 3x = -77.0 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 30 74.9 dBm, 5x = -71.9 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.3
MHz Channel dBm, 8x = -60.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -80.5 dBm, 3x = -75.8 dBm, 4x = -

73.9 dBm, 5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.1
dBm, 8x = -60.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -84.1 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -

73.0 dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.2
dBm, 8x = -59.6 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -

73.5 dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6
dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -

73.5 dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6
dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -

73.5 dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6
dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.2 dBm, 3x = -74.1 dBm, 4x = -

73.0 dBm, 5x = -69.3 dBm, 6x = -66.2 dBm, 7x = -63.0
dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 517

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -83.9 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 73.0 dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.0
40 MHz Channel dBm, 8x = -58.5 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -83.4 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -74.6 dBm, 4x = -

72.4 dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.0
dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -78.9 dBm, 3x = -74.2 dBm, 4x = -

72.0 dBm, 5x = -69.2 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.3
dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -

72.4 dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3
dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -

72.4 dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3
dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -

72.4 dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3
dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -81.8 dBm, 2x = -78.4 dBm, 3x = -73.6 dBm, 4x = -71.6

dBm, 5x = -68.2 dBm, 6x = -65.2 dBm, 7x = -61.7 dBm, 8x
= -57.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 2.5 - 5 ms

Maximum Deployment Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Range
Up to 120 miles (190 km) for 900 MHz

Chapter 4: Reference information 518

Category Specification

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4), via UGPS

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 900 MHz 65° sector antenna (Dual Slant)

3 GHz 90° sector for integrated (Dual polarity, slant +45° and -
45°)

5 GHz 90° (3 dB roll off) sector for integrated (Dual polarity,

H+V)

Antenna Gain (Does not 900 MHz 13 dBi

include cable loss, ~1dB)
3 GHz 17 dBi integrated 90° sector or external

5 GHz 17 dBi integrated 90° sector or external

Transmit Power Range -27 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB
step)

Maximum Transmit +27 dBm combined output (for 5 GHz)

Power
+25 dBm combined output (for 3 GHz)

+25 dBm combined output (for 900MHz)

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering
of UGPS Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 1.2 us/50 us, 500 V voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium
Networks Model # C000000L033A

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-

condensing

Weight Connectorized Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)

Integrated Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)

Chapter 4: Reference information 519

Category Specification

Wind Survival Connectorized 322 km/h (200 mi/h)

Integrated 200 km/h (124 mi/h)

Dimension (HxWxD) Connectorized 26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.3” x 5.3” x 3.3”)

Integrated 37.0 x 37.0 x 6.3 cm (14.5” x 14.5” x 3.2”)

Power Consumption 15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE out
enabled

Input Voltage 48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant

Mounting Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #

N000045L002A

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450 MicroPoP - AP

The PMP 450 MicroPoP conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 158: PMP 450 MicroPoP Series - AP specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450 MicroPoP AP

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 – 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management IPv4/IPv6 (dual stack), HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMPv2c
and v3, Cambium Networks cnMaestro

Chapter 4: Reference information 520

Category Specification

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic

port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -91.9 dBm, 2x = -87.29 dBm, 3x = -83.38 dBm, 4x = -81.34
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -78.41 dBm, 6x = -75.42 dBm, 7x = -72.46 dBm, 8x = -
FEC) @ 5 MHz 68.58 dBm
Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -93 dBm, 2x = -89.3 dBm, 3x = -84.9 dBm, 4x = -82.6 dBm,
5x = -79.2 dBm, 6x = -76.1 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x = -68.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -83.6 dBm, 4x = -81.0

dBm, 5x = -78.2 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -
67.2 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -91.6 dBm, 2x = -87.6 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm,4x = -80.4 dBm,
5x = -77.2 dBm, 6x = -74.3 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -66.3 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.3

dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6 dBm, 8x = -66
dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.3

dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6 dBm, 8x = -
66.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.3

dBm, 5x = -76.6 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.6 dBm, 8x = -
66.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -90.5 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.0

dBm, 5x = -76.3 dBm, 6x = -73.6 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -
66.1 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 521

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -89.47 dBm, 2x = -84.61 dBm, 3x = -81.71 dBm, 4x = -78.77
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -75.82 dBm, 6x = -73.69 dBm, 7x = -70.78 dBm, 8x =
FEC) @ 10 MHz -66.76 dBm
Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -90.2 dBm, 2x = -86.2 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -79.9
dBm, 5x = -76.3 dBm, 6x = -73.2 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -
65.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.0 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -75.3 dBm, 6x = -72.8 dBm, 7x = -69.0 dBm, 8x = -
65.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -88.8 dBm, 2x = -84.2 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -77.9

dBm, 5x = -74.3 dBm, 6x = -71.4 dBm, 7x = -68.3 dBm, 8x = -
64.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -78.0

dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -67.6 dBm, 8x = -
64.6 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -78.0

dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -67.6 dBm, 8x = -
64.6 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.6 dBm, 4x = -77.8

dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -68.0 dBm, 8x = -
63.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.6 dBm, 4x = -77.8

dBm, 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -68.0 dBm, 8x = -
63.8 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 522

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -88.5 dBm, 2x = -83.56 dBm, 3x = -79.67 dBm, 4x = -75.58
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -74.66 dBm, 6x = -71.57 dBm, 7x = -68.64 dBm, 8x =
FEC) @ 15 MHz -65.61 dBm
Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -84.4 dBm, 3x = -80.2 dBm, 4x = -78.0
dBm, 5x = -74.9 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.1 dBm, 8x = -
63.8 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -77.0

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -71.1 dBm, 7x = -67.1 dBm, 8x = -63.1
dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -76.2

dBm, 5x = -73.0 dBm, 6x = -69.6 dBm, 7x = -66.3 dBm, 8x = -
62.6 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -82.9 dBm, 3x = -78.5 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.8 dBm, 8x = -
62.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -82.9 dBm, 3x = -78.5 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.8 dBm, 8x = -
62.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.6 dBm, 2x = -82.4 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0

dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -66.2 dBm, 8x = -
62.2 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -81.5 dBm, 3x = -77.5 dBm, 4x = -75.5 dBm,
5x = -72.4 dBm, 6x = -69.2 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -62.0
dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 523

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -86.51 dBm, 2x = -82.51 dBm, 3x = -78.56 dBm, 4x = -75.58
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -72.61 dBm, 6x = -70.55 dBm, 7x = -67.64 dBm, 8x = -
FEC) @ 20 MHz 63.54 dBm
Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -87.4 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -78.8 dBm, 4x = -76.9
dBm, 5x = -73.2 dBm, 6x = -69.9 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -
62.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -86.8 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0

dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -
61.6 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.3 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -64.8 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -85.8 dBm, 2x = -80.7 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -74.6

dBm, 5x = -71.5 dBm, 6x = -68.7 dBm, 7x = -64.9 dBm, 8x = -
61.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 524

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -81.4 dBm, 3x = -77.0 dBm, 4x = -74.9
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -71.9 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.3 dBm, 8x = -
FEC) @ 30 MHz 60.0 dBm
Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -80.5 dBm, 3x = -75.8 dBm, 4x = -73.9
dBm, 5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.1 dBm, 8x = -
60.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -84.1 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.0

dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.2 dBm, 8x = -
59.6 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.5

dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -
59.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.5

dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -
59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.5

dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -66.6 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -
59.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.2 dBm, 3x = -74.1 dBm, 4x = -73.0 dBm,
5x = -69.3 dBm, 6x = -66.2 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -59.0
dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -83.9 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.0
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -
FEC) @ 40 MHz 58.5 dBm
Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -83.4 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -74.6 dBm, 4x = -72.4
dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -
58.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -78.9 dBm, 3x = -74.2 dBm, 4x = -72.0

dBm, 5x = -69.2 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.3 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -62.3 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -81.8 dBm, 2x = -78.4 dBm, 3x = -73.6 dBm, 4x = -71.6 dBm,
5x = -68.2 dBm, 6x = -65.2 dBm, 7x = -61.7 dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 525

Category Specification

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels (Adaptive) Modulation Levels MCS SNR (in dB)

2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3-5 ms with 2.5 ms frame, 7-10 ms with 5 ms frame

Maximum Deployment Range Up to 2 miles (3.2 k)

With license key up to 40 miles (64 km)

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4), via UGPS

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Omni 360-degree integrated omni (dual polarity, vertical and
Width horizontal)

Sector 90-degree integrated (dual polarity, vertical and horizontal)

Connectorized Gain of external antenna

Omni 9 dBi

Antenna Gain Sector 13 dBi

Connectorized Gain of external antenna

Transmit Power 54 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Range

Maximum Transmit +27 dBm

Power

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)

Chapter 4: Reference information 526

Category Specification

l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of

UGPS Sync input)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10x700us, 4kV, EN 61000-4-2: ESD 30 kV

contact / 30 kV air

Mean Time > 40 Years

Between Failure

Environmental IP67

Temperature / Omni -40C to +60C (-40F to +140F) 0-95% non-condensing

Humidity
Sector -40C to +60C (-40F to +140F) 0-100% condensings

Weight Omni 1.2 kg (includes mounting bracket)

Sector 2 kg (includes mounting bracket)

Connectorized 0.9 kg (includes mounting bracket)

Wind Survival Omni 200 km/Hr

Sector 200 km/Hr

Connectorized 200 km/Hr

Dimension Omni 56 x 9 x 9 cm (22’’ x 3.5’’ x 3.5’’), mount standoff 11 cm (4.3’’)

(HxWxD)
Sector 31 x 17 x 10 cm (12’’ x 6.7’’ x 3.7’’), mount standoff 11 cm (4.3’’)

Connectorized 24 x 4 x 9 cm (9.5”x1.5”x3.5”)

Power 9 W typical, 12 W peak

Consumption

Input Voltage 48-59 V DC, 802.3at compatible

Mounting Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #

N000045L002A

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP/PTP 450b Retro - SM

The PMP/PTP 450b Retro conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Chapter 4: Reference information 527

Table 159: PMP/PTP 450b Retro Series - SM specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450b Retro SM

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 – 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, IPv6, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management IPv4/IPv6 (dual stack), HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMPv2c
and v3, Cambium Networks cnMaestro

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive Sensitivity 4.9 GHz 1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.4
(w/ FEC) @ 5 MHz Channel dBm, 5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.8 dBm, 8x = -
64.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -83.4 dBm, 4x = -80.8

dBm, 5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.2 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -
67.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.3

dBm, 5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.9 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x = -
68.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -92.1 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -82.1

dBm, 5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -
68.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 528

Category Specification

Nominal Receive Sensitivity

(w/ FEC) @ 10 MHz 4.9 GHz 1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.4
Channel dBm, 5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.8 dBm, 8x = -
64.2 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -
64.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -
64.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2

dBm, 5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x = -
65.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2

dBm, 5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x = -
65.0 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity 4.9 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.9 dBm, 4x = -76.6
(w/ FEC) @ 15 MHz Channel dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.8 dBm, 8x = -
63.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6

dBm, 5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x = -
63.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6

dBm, 5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x = -
63.2 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -
63.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -
63.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 529

Category Specification

Nominal Receive Sensitivity 4.9 GHz 1x = -86.3 dBm, 2x = -81.3 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4
(w/ FEC) @ 20 MHz dBm, 5x = -72.2 dBm, 6x = -69.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -
Channel 61.4 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4

dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -
61.4 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4

dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -
61.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -75.6

dBm, 5x = -72.6 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -
62.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.9

dBm, 5x = -72.8 dBm, 6x = -69.2 dBm, 7x = -66.2 dBm, 8x = -
62.0 dBm

Nominal Receive Sensitivity 4.9 GHz 1x = -84.5 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -76.2 dBm, 4x = -74.1
(w/ FEC) @ 30 MHz dBm, 5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -67.7 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -
Channel 59.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3

dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -
59.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3

dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -
59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -
59.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -
59.5 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 530

Category Specification

Nominal Receive Sensitivity 4.9 GHz 1x = -82.9 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4
(w/ FEC) @ 40 MHz dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -
Channel 56.4 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x = -
57.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels (Adaptive) Modulation Levels MCS SNR (in dB)

2x QPSK 10

4x 16-QAM 17

6x 64-QAM 24

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Maximum Deployment Range PMP mode: up to 40 miles (64 km)

GPS Synchronization Yes, synchronized by Access Point

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 60 degrees

Antenna Gain 9 dBi

Transmit Power Range 54 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Maximum Transmit Power +27 dBm

Physical

Chapter 4: Reference information 531

 Category Specification

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
UGPS Sync input)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10x700us, 4kV, EN 61000-4-2: ESD 30 kV

contact / 30 kV air

Mean Time Between Failure > 40 Years

Environmental IP55

Temperature / Humidity -40C to +60C (-40F to +140F) 0-95% non-condensing

Weight 0.4 kg (1 lb.) (includes mounting bracket)

Wind Survival 200 km/hour (124 mi/hour)

Dimension (HxWxD) 28.6 x 8.9 x 8.9 cm (11.25’’ x 3.5’’ x 3.5’’)

Power Consumption 9 W typical, 12 W peak

Input Voltage 48-59 V DC, 802.3at compatible

Mounting Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #

N000045L002A

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450i Series - SM

The PMP 450i SM conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 160: PMP 450i Series - SM specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450i SM

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 3300 – 3900 MHz

4900 - 5925 MHz

Chapter 4: Reference information 532

Category Specification

Channel 3300 – 3900 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Bandwidth MHz

4900 – 5925 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Cambium Proprietary

Access Control)
Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3

compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3

Management

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic

port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -89.2 dBm, 3x = -85.3 dBm, 4x = -82.9 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -79.4 dBm, 6x = -76.2 dBm, 7x = -72.4 dBm, 8x = -68.5 dBm
FEC) @ 5 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.0
dBm, 5x = -78.6 dBm, 6x = -75.6 dBm, 7x = -71.7 dBm, 8x = -68.6
dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -92.5 dBm, 2x = -88.3 dBm, 3x = -83.8 dBm, 4x = -81.4 dBm,
5x = -78.4 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -71.4 dBm, 8x = -67.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -67.4 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -67.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -67.4 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -91.3 dBm, 2x = -87.3 dBm, 3x = -83.3 dBm, 4x = -81.3 dBm,
5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -67.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -92.3 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -78.8 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -67.8 dBm
FEC) @ 7 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -82.6 dBm, 4x = -81.4 dBm,
5x = -76.7 dBm, 6x = -73.7 dBm, 7x = -70.3 dBm, 8x = -67.8 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 533

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -90.3 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 3x = -81.8 dBm, 4x = -80.2 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -76.4 dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -69.8 dBm, 8x = -66.3 dBm
FEC) @ 10 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.4 dBm, 3x = -80.9 dBm, 4x = -78.6 dBm,
5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.7 dBm, 7x = -69.1 dBm, 8x = -65.8 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -84.9 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8 dBm,
5x = -75.0 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -69.0 dBm, 8x = -64.5 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -89.8 dBm, 2x = -85.5 dBm, 3x = -80.6 dBm, 4x = -79.0 dBm,
5x = -75.4 dBm, 6x = -71.8 dBm, 7x = -69.7 dBm, 8x = -64.5 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -89.8 dBm, 2x = -85.5 dBm, 3x = -80.6 dBm, 4x = -79.0 dBm,
5x = -75.4 dBm, 6x = -71.8 dBm, 7x = -69.7 dBm, 8x = -64.5 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.7 dBm,
5x = -75.6 dBm, 6x = -72.2 dBm, 7x = -68.7 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.7 dBm,
5x = -75.6 dBm, 6x = -72.2 dBm, 7x = -68.7 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -84.5 dBm, 3x = -80.2 dBm, 4x = -77.9 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -74.5 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -68.4 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm
FEC) @ 15 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -88.3 dBm, 2x = -83.8 dBm, 3x = -79.5 dBm, 4x = -76.8 dBm,
5x = -73.7 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -64.4 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.1 dBm, 3x = 79.0 dBm, 4x = -76.9 dBm,
5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.0 dBm, 8x = -62.3 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -77.5 dBm,
5x = -73.7 dBm, 6x = -70.2 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -62.9 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -88.6 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.7 dBm, 4x = -77.5 dBm,
5x = -73.7 dBm, 6x = -70.2 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -62.9 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -78.8 dBm, 4x = -76.6 dBm,
5x = -73.7 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -66.7 dBm, 8x = -62.6 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.9 dBm, 2x = -82.9 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0 dBm,
5x = -73.0 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.1 dBm, 8x = -62.3 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 534

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -78.8 dBm, 4x = -76.3 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -73.1 dBm, 6x = -70.3 dBm, 7x = -67.0 dBm, 8x = -63.2 dBm
FEC) @ 20 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -86.7 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -75.7 dBm,
5x = -72.6 dBm, 6x = -69.8 dBm, 7x = -65.8 dBm, 8x = -62.8 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -61.8 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -61.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -61.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -61.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -85.9 dBm, 2x = -81.5 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -74.8 dBm,
5x = -72.1 dBm, 6x = -68.7 dBm, 7x = -65.2 dBm, 8x = -61.2 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -85.5 dBm, 2x = -81.2 dBm, 3x = -76.7 dBm, 4x = -74.6 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -71.3 dBm, 6x = -68.8 dBm, 7x = -65.3 dBm, 8x = -61.1 dBm
FEC) @ 30 MHz
Channel 3.6 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.4 dBm, 3x = -76.2 dBm, 4x = -73.6 dBm,
5x = -70.7 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.4 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -84.9 dBm, 2x = -80.9 dBm, 3x = -75.8 dBm, 4x = -73.2 dBm,
5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.2 dBm, 8x = -59.6 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -80.2 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -73.8 dBm,
5x = -70.6 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -59.6 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -80.2 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -73.8 dBm,
5x = -70.6 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -59.6 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -80.2 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -73.8 dBm,
5x = -70.6 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x = -59.6 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -84.0 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -74.8 dBm, 4x = -73.9

dBm, 5x = -69.9 dBm, 6x = -66.8 dBm, 7x = -63.8 dBm, 8x = -59.1
dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 535

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -83.5 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -64.0 dBm, 8x = -60.0
FEC) @ 40 MHz dBm
Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -82.9 dBm, 2x = -78.9 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.0 dBm,
5x = -69.1 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.9 dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -83.7 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -74.7 dBm, 4x = -72.7 dBm,
5x = -69.7 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.7 dBm, 8x = -56.8 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.1 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.5 dBm,
5x = -69.5 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.4 dBm, 8x = -56.9 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.1 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.5 dBm,
5x = -69.5 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.4 dBm, 8x = -56.9 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.1 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.5 dBm,
5x = -69.5 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.4 dBm, 8x = -56.9 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -82.7 dBm, 2x = -78.7 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.7 dBm,
5x = -68.6 dBm, 6x = -65.6 dBm, 7x = -61.7 dBm, 8x = -56.3 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels MCS SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Maximum Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Deployment
Range

GPS Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Synchronization

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Chapter 4: Reference information 536

Category Specification

Antenna Beam 10° azimuth for 23 dBi integrated antenna

Width

Antenna Gain 5 GHz +23 dBi H+V, integrated or external

(Does not include
cable loss, ~1dB) 3 GHz +19 dBi dual slant, integrated or external

Transmit Power 40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Range

Maximum +27 dBm combined output (for 5 GHz)

Transmit Power
+25 dBm combined output (for 3 GHz)

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data PoE output (planned for
future release) Sync input or output (Connection and powering
of UGPS Sync input)

Antenna 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Connection

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium Networks
Model # C000000L033A

Mean Time > 40 Years

Between Failure

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-condensing

Humidity

Weight Connectorized Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)

Integrated Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)

Wind Survival Connectorized 322 km/h (200 mi/h)

Integrated 200 km/h (124 mi/h)

Dimension Connectorized 26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.3” x 5.3” x 3.3”)

(HxWxD)
Integrated 31.0 x 31.0 x 6.4 cm (12” x 12” x 2.5”)

Power 15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE out

Consumption enabled

Input Voltage 48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant

Mounting Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #

N000045L002A

Security

Chapter 4: Reference information 537

 Category Specification

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PTP 450i Series - BH

The PTP 450i BH conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 161: PTP 450i Series - BH specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PTP 450i BH

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 - 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 4900 – 5925 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz
MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary

Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Chapter 4: Reference information 538

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -89.3 dBm, 3x = -85.0 dBm, 4x = -82.2
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5 dBm, 5x = -79.2 dBm, 6x = -76.3 dBm, 7x = -72.6 dBm, 8x
MHz Channel = -69.1 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -88.1 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.3

dBm, 5x = -78.8 dBm, 6x = -75.9 dBm, 7x = -72.1 dBm, 8x =
-68.6 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.3 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -81.6

dBm, 5x = -78.4 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x
= -68.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -

82.0 dBm, 5x = -78.3 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -72.4 dBm,
8x = -68.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -

82.0 dBm, 5x = -78.3 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -72.4 dBm,
8x = -68.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -88.6 dBm, 3x = -84.2 dBm, 4x = -81.3

dBm, 5x = -78.8 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -72.2 dBm, 8x
= -68.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -88.4 dBm, 3x = -82.6 dBm, 4x = -81.2

dBm, 5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -71.4 dBm, 8x =
-67.2 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.2
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 7 dBm, 5x = -77.8 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -68.1 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -86.9 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.8

dBm, 5x = -76.2 dBm, 6x = -73.8 dBm, 7x = -70.4 dBm, 8x
= -67.3 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 539

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -90.3 dBm, 2x = -86.5 dBm, 3x = -81.6 dBm, 4x = -79.4
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ dBm, 5x = -76.5 dBm, 6x = -73.4 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x
10 MHz Channel = -66.3 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -89.8 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -80.5 dBm, 4x = -

78.9 dBm, 5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.5 dBm, 7x = -69.0
dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = 90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.2 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -76.0 dBm, 6x = -72.8 dBm, 7x = -69.0 dBm, 8x
= -65.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = 90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.2 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -76.0 dBm, 6x = -72.8 dBm, 7x = -69.0 dBm, 8x
= -65.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = 90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.5 dBm, 4x = -78.4

dBm, 5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.2 dBm, 7x = -68.9 dBm, 8x
= -65.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = 89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.2 dBm, 3x = -81.2 dBm, 4x = -78.6

dBm, 5x = -75.5 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x
= -64.7 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = 89.6 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.5

dBm, 5x = -74.8 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -68.7 dBm, 8x =
-64.3 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 540

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = 88.6 dBm, 2x = -84.5 dBm, 3x = -79.8 dBm, 4x = -77.6
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ dBm, 5x = -74.7 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -68.5 dBm, 8x =
15 MHz Channel -65.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = 88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -78.9 dBm, 4x = -76.7

dBm, 5x = -73.9 dBm, 6x = -70.8 dBm, 7x = -67.8 dBm, 8x
= -64.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = 88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.2 dBm, 4x = -77.0

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -67.2 dBm, 8x =
-63.1 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = 88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.6 dBm, 3x = -79.2 dBm, 4x = -77.0

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -67.2 dBm, 8x =
-63.1 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = 88.1 dBm, 2x = -83.9 dBm, 3x = -79.5 dBm, 4x = -76.6

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x
= -62.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = 88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.9 dBm, 3x = -79.3 dBm, 4x = -77.1

dBm, 5x = -73.6 dBm, 6x = -70.7 dBm, 7x = -67.4 dBm, 8x
= -63.4 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = 87.9 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -78.4 dBm, 4x = -76.7

dBm, 5x = -73.4 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -66.7 dBm, 8x
= -62.5 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 541

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = 87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -78.4 dBm, 4x = -76.6
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ dBm, 5x = -73.2 dBm, 6x = -70.2 dBm, 7x = -67.3 dBm, 8x
20 MHz Channel’ = -63.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = 87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.4 dBm, 3x = -77.8 dBm, 4x = -75.8

dBm, 5x = -72.6 dBm, 6x = -69.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x
= -63.2 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = 87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.4 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0

dBm, 5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -66.1 dBm, 8x =
-62.4 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = 87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.4 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0

dBm, 5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -66.1 dBm, 8x =
-62.4 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = 87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.5 dBm, 3x = -77.7 dBm, 4x = -76.0

dBm, 5x = -72.8 dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -66.8 dBm, 8x
= -61.9 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = 86.7 dBm, 2x = -82.8 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -75.7

dBm, 5x = -72.4 dBm, 6x = -69.6 dBm, 7x = -66.2 dBm, 8x
= -61.3 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = 85.9 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 3x = -77.6 dBm, 4x = -75.5

dBm, 5x = -71.7 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -65.8 dBm, 8x =
-60.8 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 542

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = 86.0 dBm, 2x = -81.0 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -75.0
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ dBm, 5x = -71.3 dBm, 6x = -68.2 dBm, 7x = -65.3 dBm, 8x =
30 MHz Channel -61.1 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = 85.2 dBm, 2x = -80.5 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -74.0

dBm, 5x = -70.4 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.6 dBm, 8x
= -61.0 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = -84.9 dBm, 2x= -80.5 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -74.0
dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -63.9 dBm, 8x
= -59.8 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -84.9 dBm, 2x= -80.5 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -74.0
dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -63.9 dBm, 8x
= -59.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = 85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.5 dBm, 3x = -75.9 dBm, 4x = -74.2

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.9 dBm, 7x = -64.9 dBm, 8x
= -59.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = 85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.4 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -74.2

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.6 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x =
-60.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = 84.7 dBm, 2x = -79.9 dBm, 3x = -75.5 dBm, 4x = -73.3

dBm, 5x = -70.5 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.8 dBm, 8x
= -59.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 543

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = 84.0 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -73.4
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ dBm, 5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -64.0 dBm, 8x
40 MHz Channel = -59.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = 84.0 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.0

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.5 dBm, 7x = -63.1 dBm, 8x =
-58.9 dBm

4.9 GHz 1x = 83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -74.6 dBm, 4x = -72.0

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.7 dBm, 8x
= -58.7 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = 83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -74.6 dBm, 4x = -72.0

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.7 dBm, 8x
= -58.7 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = 83.7 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -74.9 dBm, 4x = -72.6

dBm, 5x = -69.5 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -63.6 dBm, 8x
= -58.6 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = 83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.1 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -72.8

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.9 dBm, 7x = -62.8 dBm, 8x
= -58.4 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = 83.3 dBm, 2x = -78.5 dBm, 3x = -74.2 dBm, 4x = -72.7

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.3 dBm, 8x
= -58.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in

(Adaptive) dB)

2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 544

Category Specification

Maximum Deployment Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Range

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 900 MHz 37° azimuth for 12 dBi Yagi antenna

5 GHz 10° azimuth for 23 dBi integrated antenna

Antenna Gain (Does not 900 MHz 12 dBi Yagi antenna

include cable loss, ~1dB)
5 GHz +23 dBi H+V, integrated or external

Transmit Power Range 40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Maximum Transmit +27 dBm combined output

Power

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
UGPS Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 1.2 us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium
Networks Model # C000000L033A

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F),

0-95% non-condensing

Weight Connectorized Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)

Integrated Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)

Wind Survival Connectorized 322 km/h (200 mi/h)

Integrated 200 km/h (124 mi/h)

Dimension (HxWxD) Connectorized 26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.25” x 5.25” x 3.25”)

Integrated 31.0 x 31.0 x 6.4 cm (12” x 12” x 2.5”)

Chapter 4: Reference information 545

Category Specification

Power Consumption 15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE out
enabled

Input Voltage 48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant

Mounting Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model

#N000045L002A

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450b 5 GHz Mid-Gain Series - SM

The PMP 450b 5 GHz Mid-Gain conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 162: PMP 450b 5 GHz Mid-Gain Series - SM specifications

Category Specification

Model Number 5 GHz PMP 450b Mid-Gain

Spectrum

Channel Spacing Configurable in 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 - 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Layer Cambium Proprietary

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Chapter 4: Reference information 546

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.0
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5 dBm, 5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -72.5 dBm, 8x = -
MHz Channel 68.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -82.6 dBm, 4x = -80.8

dBm, 5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.2 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -
66.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -83.4 dBm, 4x = -80.8

dBm, 5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.2 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -
67.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.3

dBm, 5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.9 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x =
-68.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -92.1 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -82.1

dBm, 5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x =
-68.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.4
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 10 dBm, 5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.8 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -64.2 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -
64.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8

dBm, 5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -
64.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2

dBm, 5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x =
-65.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2

dBm, 5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x =
-65.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 547

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.9 dBm, 4x = -76.6
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 15 dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.8 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -63.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6

dBm, 5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x =
-63.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6

dBm, 5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x =
-63.2 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x =
-63.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5

dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x =
-63.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -86.3 dBm, 2x = -81.3 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 20 dBm, 5x = -72.2 dBm, 6x = -69.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -61.4 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4

dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -
61.4 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4

dBm, 5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -
61.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -75.6

dBm, 5x = -72.6 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -
62.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.9

dBm, 5x = -72.8 dBm, 6x = -69.2 dBm, 7x = -66.2 dBm, 8x =
-62.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 548

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -84.5 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -76.2 dBm, 4x = -74.1
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 30 dBm, 5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -67.7 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -59.0 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3

dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x =
-59.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3

dBm, 5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x =
-59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -
59.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6

dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -
59.5 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -82.9 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @40 dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x =
MHz Channel -56.4 dBm

5.1 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x =
-57.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1

dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x =
-57.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x =
-57.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4

dBm, 5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x =
-57.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 549

Category Specification

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Maximum Deployment Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Range

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 15° azimuth for 16 dBi integrated antenna

30° elevation for 16 dBi integrated antenna

Antenna Gain 5 GHz +16 dBi H+V, integrated

Transmit Power Range 40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Maximum Transmit Power +27 dBm combined output

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
UGPS Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10us/700us, Level 4, 4kV voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended surge suppressor: Cambium Networks
Model # C000000L065A

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP55

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-condensing

Chapter 4: Reference information 550

Category Specification

Weight Integrated Approx. 0.5 kg (1.1 lb. including mounting bracket)

Wind Survival Integrated 190 km/h (118 mi/h)

Dimension (HxWxD) Integrated 12.4 x 25.1 x 11.9 cm (4.9” x 9.9” x 4.7”)

Power Consumption 9 W nominal, 12 W peak

Input Voltage 20 - 32 V DC,

Mounting Wall or Pole mount

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450b 5 GHz High Gain Series – SM

The PMP 450b High Gain SM conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 163: PMP 450b High Gain Series – SM specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450b High Gain SM

Spectrum

Channel Spacing Configurable in 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 4900 - 5925 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary

Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3

compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3

Management

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic

port VID

Chapter 4: Reference information 551

Category Specification

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -72.5 dBm, 8x = -68.0 dBm
@ 5 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -82.6 dBm, 4x = -80.8 dBm,
5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.2 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -66.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -83.4 dBm, 4x = -80.8 dBm,
5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.2 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -67.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -92.6 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.3 dBm,
5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.9 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x = -68.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -92.1 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -82.1 dBm,
5x = -79.0 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -68.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -78.4 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.8 dBm, 8x = -64.2 dBm
@ 10 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8 dBm,
5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -85.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.8 dBm,
5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -69.2 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2 dBm,
5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -89.6 dBm, 2x = -85.6 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -78.2 dBm,
5x = -75.9 dBm, 6x = -72.4 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.9 dBm, 4x = -76.6 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.4 dBm, 7x = -67.8 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm
@ 15 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6 dBm,
5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x = -63.2 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -87.8 dBm, 2x = -83.7 dBm, 3x = -78.3 dBm, 4x = -76.6 dBm,
5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x = -63.2 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5 dBm,
5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.5 dBm, 3x = -79.4 dBm, 4x = -76.5 dBm,
5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.5 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 552

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -86.3 dBm, 2x = -81.3 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -72.2 dBm, 6x = -69.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -61.4 dBm
@ 20 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -61.4 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.4 dBm,
5x = -72.5 dBm, 6x = -69.3 dBm, 7x = -65.5 dBm, 8x = -61.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.0 dBm, 4x = -75.6 dBm,
5x = -72.6 dBm, 6x = -69.1 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -77.9 dBm, 4x = -75.9 dBm,
5x = -72.8 dBm, 6x = -69.2 dBm, 7x = -66.2 dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -84.5 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -76.2 dBm, 4x = -74.1 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -70.8 dBm, 6x = -67.7 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm
@ 30 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3 dBm,
5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -84.6 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -75.2 dBm, 4x = -73.3 dBm,
5x = -70.2 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.2 dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6 dBm,
5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -59.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -84.8 dBm, 2x = -79.8 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -73.6 dBm,
5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.7 dBm, 8x = -59.5 dBm

Nominal Receive 4.9 GHz 1x = -82.9 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -72.4 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -56.4 dBm
@ 40 MHz Channel
5.1 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1 dBm,
5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.2 GHz 1x = -83.2 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -72.1 dBm,
5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.0 dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4 dBm,
5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -75.4 dBm, 4x = -72.4 dBm,
5x = -69.4 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -63.5 dBm, 8x = -57.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 553

Category Specification

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels MCS SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Maximum Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Deployment Range

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 7° azimuth for 23 dBi integrated antenna

7° elevation for 23 dBi integrated antenna

Antenna Gain 5 GHz +23 dBi H+V, integrated

Transmit Power 22 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Range

Maximum Transmit +27 dBm combined output (+22 dBm @ 256QAM)

Power

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of UGPS
Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10us/700us, Level 4, 4kV voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended surge suppressor: Cambium Networks Model #
C000000L065A

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP67

Chapter 4: Reference information 554

Category Specification

Temperature / -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-condensing

Humidity

Weight Integrated Approx. 3.1 kg (7 lb. including mounting bracket)

Wind Survival Integrated 145 km/h (90 mi/h)

Dimension (HxWxD) Integrated 47 cm diameter x 28 cm (18.5” diameter x 11.2”)

Power Consumption 9 W nominal, 12 W peak

Input Voltage 20 - 32 V DC,

Mounting Wall or Pole mount

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP/PTP 450b 3 GHz High Gain Series –

SM/BHS
The PMP/PTP 450b 3 GHz High Gain – SM/BHS conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 164: PMP/PTP 450b 3 GHz High Gain Series specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP/PTP 450b 3 GHz High Gain – SM/BHS

Spectrum

Channel Spacing Customizable channel selection to 50 kHz raster

Frequency Range 3300 – 3900 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Networks Proprietary

Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3

compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3

Management

Chapter 4: Reference information 555

Category Specification

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic

port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -90.1 dBm, 3x = -86.2 dBm, 4x = -83.8 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -80.3 dBm, 6x = -77.6 dBm, 7x = -73.9 dBm, 8x = -70.1 dBm
@ 5 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -93.0 dBm, 2x = -89.7 dBm, 3x = -85.6 dBm, 4x = -83.0 dBm,
5x = -80.0 dBm, 6x = -76.8 dBm, 7x = -73.0 dBm, 8x = -69.9 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -88.2 dBm, 3x = -84.5 dBm, 4x = -82.2 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -79.4 dBm, 6x = -76.0 dBm, 7x = -73.0 dBm, 8x = -68.4 dBm
@ 7 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.9 dBm, 3x = -83.6 dBm, 4x = -81.4 dBm,
5x = -78.2 dBm, 6x = -75.4 dBm, 7x = -71.6 dBm, 8x = -67.8 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -80.4 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -77.6 dBm, 6x = -74.4 dBm, 7x = -71.2 dBm, 8x = -67.4 dBm
@ 10 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -90.0 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -82.1 dBm, 4x = -80.0 dBm,
5x = -77.0 dBm, 6x = -74.0 dBm, 7x = -70.8 dBm, 8x = -66.7 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -85.1 dBm, 3x = -81.0 dBm, 4x = -79.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -75.6 dBm, 6x = -72.7 dBm, 7x = -69.4 dBm, 8x = -65.9 dBm
@ 15 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -84.9 dBm, 3x = -80.2 dBm, 4x = -78.1 dBm,
5x = -75.0 dBm, 6x = -71.9 dBm, 7x = -69.0 dBm, 8x = -64.9 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -77.8 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -74.6 dBm, 6x = -71.6 dBm, 7x = -68.5 dBm, 8x = -64.5 dBm
@ 20 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -87.9 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -76.8 dBm,
5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.2 dBm, 7x = -67.5 dBm, 8x = -63.9 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -86.5 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -78.2 dBm, 4x = -75.8 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.6 dBm, 7x = -66.4 dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm
@ 30 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -80.8 dBm, 3x = -77.6 dBm, 4x = -74.7 dBm,
5x = -72.0 dBm, 6x = -68.5 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -61.5 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.7 dBm, 3x = -76.4 dBm, 4x = -74.4 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -71.6 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -65.4 dBm, 8x = -60.0 dBm
@ 40 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -84.2 dBm, 2x = -80.2 dBm, 3x = -76.2 dBm, 4x = -73.4 dBm,
5x = -70.4 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -64.5 dBm, 8x = -60.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 556

Category Specification

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in

(Adaptive) dB)

2x QPSK 10

3x 8-QAM 14

4x 16-QAM 17

5x 32-QAM 21

6x 64-QAM 24

7x 128-QAM 28

8x 256-QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms

Maximum Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Deployment Range

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 12° azimuth for 20 dBi integrated antenna

12° elevation for 20 dBi integrated antenna

Antenna Gain +20 dBi H+V, integrated

Transmit Power 40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Range

Maximum Transmit 29 dBm combined output (23 dBm @ 256-QAM)

Power

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output (planned for future release)
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of UGPS
Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP67

Chapter 4: Reference information 557

 Category Specification

Temperature / -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-condensing

Humidity

Weight Integrated Approx. 3.1 kg (7 lb. including mounting bracket)

Wind Survival Integrated 145 km/h (90 mi/h)

Dimension (HxWxD) Integrated 47 cm diameter x 28 cm (18.5” diameter x 11.2”)

Power Consumption 9 W nominal, 12 W peak

Input Voltage 20 - 32 V DC,

Mounting Wall or Pole mount

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450 Series - AP

The PMP 450 AP conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 165: PMP 450 Series - AP specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450 AP

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 and 30 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz

3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz

3.65 GHz 3500 – 3850 MHz

5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 3.5 and 3.65 GHz 5, 7, 10, 15, 20 and 30 MHz

2.4 and 5 GHz 5, 10, 15, 20 and 30 MHz

OFDM Subcarriers 512 FFT

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary

Control) Layer

Chapter 4: Reference information 558

Category Specification

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto

negotiated (802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP,
TFTP, RADIUS

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3, TFTP, Syslog

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,

dynamic port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 900 GHz 1x = -91.9 dBm, 2x = -87.29 dBm, 3x = -83.38 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5 81.34 dBm, 5x = -78.41 dBm, 6x = -75.42 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 72.46 dBm, 8x = -68.58 dBm

2.4 GHz 1x = -88.7 dBm, 2x = -85.62 dBm, 3x = -81.14 dBm, 4x = -

78.87 dBm, 5x = -75.71 dBm, 6x = -72.71 dBm, 7x = -69.0
dBm, 8x = -65.02 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.3 dBm, 4x = -

79.7 dBm, 5x = -76.7 dBm, 6x = -73.3 dBm, 7x = -70.0
dBm, 8x = -65.8 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -86.1 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -

80.0 dBm, 5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.8
dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.7 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -

77.0 dBm, 5x = -74.0 dBm, 6x = -70.9 dBm, 7x = -67.0
dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.5 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -78.7 dBm, 4x = -

76.6 dBm, 5x = -73.7 dBm, 6x = -69.7 dBm, 7x = -66.7
dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 GHz 1x = -89.31 dBm, 2x = -85.32 dBm, 3x = -82.35 dBm, 4x =
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 7 -80.35 dBm, 5x = -77.43 dBm, 6x = -74.36 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 71.53 dBm, 8x = -67.47 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -80.8 dBm, 4x = -

78.8 dBm, 5x = -75.4 dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.6
dBm, 8x = -64.3 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -85.0 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -

78.0 dBm, 5x = -74.5 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -67.5
dBm, 8x = -64.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 GHz 1x = -89.47 dBm, 2x = -84.61 dBm, 3x = -81.71 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 10 78.77dBm, 5x = -75.82 dBm, 6x = -73.69 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 70.78 dBm, 8x = -66.76 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 559

Category Specification

2.4 GHz 1x = -87.27 dBm, 2x = -83.62 dBm, 3x = -80.36 dBm, 4x =

-77.81dBm, 5x = -74.76 dBm, 6x = -71.73 dBm, 7x = -
68.79 dBm, 8x = -64.82 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.8 dBm, 4x = -

77.8 dBm, 5x = -74.4 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -67.4
dBm, 8x = -63.2 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -

77.0 dBm, 5x = -72.8 dBm, 6x = -69.8 dBm, 7x = -66.4
dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -86.1 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -76.3 dBm, 4x = -

74.6 dBm, 5x = -71.3 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.3
dBm, 8x = -60.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.2 dBm, 3x = -76.0 dBm, 4x = -

74.6 dBm, 5x = -71.0 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -64.0
dBm, 8x = -60.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 GHz 1x = -88.5 dBm, 2x = -83.56 dBm, 3x = -79.67 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 15 75.58 dBm, 5x = -74.66 dBm, 6x = -71.57 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 68.64 dBm, 8x = -65.61 dBm

2.4 GHz 1x = -85.39 dBm, 2x = -82.86 dBm, 3x = -77.91 dBm, 4x =

-74.87 dBm, 5x = -72.9 dBm, 6x = -69.81 dBm, 7x = -
66.94 dBm, 8x = -63.67 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -82.8 dBm, 3x = -78.7 dBm, 4x = -

76.3 dBm, 5x = -72.7 dBm, 6x = -69.8 dBm, 7x = -66.5
dBm, 8x = -62.6 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -86.4 dBm, 2x = -82.6 dBm, 3x = -77.0 dBm, 4x = -

76.0 dBm, 5x = -71.5 dBm, 6x = -68.9 dBm, 7x = -65.5
dBm, 8x = -61.5 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.2 dBm, 2x = -80.2 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -

72.9 dBm, 5x = -69.9 dBm, 6x = -66.9 dBm, 7x = -62.9
dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -74.6 dBm, 4x = -

73.0 dBm, 5x = -69.1 dBm, 6x = -66.4 dBm, 7x = -62.1
dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 GHz 1x = -86.51 dBm, 2x = -82.51 dBm, 3x = -78.56 dBm, 4x = -
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 20 75.58 dBm, 5x = -72.61 dBm, 6x = -70.55 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 67.64 dBm, 8x = -63.54 dBm

2.4 GHz 1x = -84.22 dBm, 2x = -81.27 dBm, 3x = -77.27 dBm, 4x =

-74.73 dBm, 5x = -71.3 dBm, 6x = -68.86 dBm, 7x = -
65.29 dBm, 8x = -62.2 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -85.8 dBm, 2x = -81.8 dBm, 3x = -77.4 dBm, 4x = -

75.0 dBm, 5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -68.8 dBm, 7x = -65.5

Chapter 4: Reference information 560

Category Specification

dBm, 8x = -61.2 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -81.5 dBm, 3x = -76.9 dBm, 4x = -

75.2 dBm, 5x = -70.5 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -64.0
dBm, 8x = -61.2 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.1 dBm, 2x = -78.9 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -

72.0 dBm, 5x = -68.7 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -62.0
dBm, 8x = -56.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -78.8 dBm, 3x = -73.7 dBm, 4x = -

71.8 dBm, 5x = -67.8 dBm, 6x = -64.7 dBm, 7x = -62.8
dBm, 8x = -56.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 2.4 GHz 1x = -82.16 dBm, 2x = -79.77 dBm, 3x = -75.72 dBm, 4x =
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 30 -73.31 dBm, 5x = -70.31 dBm, 6x = -67.29 dBm, 7x = -
MHz Channel 64.31 dBm, 8x = -59.18 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -75.8 dBm, 4x = -

73.6 dBm, 5x = -69.8 dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -63.6
dBm, 8x = -59.4 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -83.7 dBm, 2x = -79.5 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -

73.0 dBm, 5x = -69.0 dBm, 6x = -65.9 dBm, 7x = -62.5
dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -81.0 dBm, 2x = -76.9 dBm, 3x = -72.0 dBm, 4x = -

70.1 dBm, 5x = -66.1 dBm, 6x = -64.0 dBm, 7x = -60.1
dBm, 8x = -55.8 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -80.9 dBm, 2x = -76.8 dBm, 3x = -71.8 dBm, 4x = -

69.7 dBm, 5x = -66.0 dBm, 6x = -63.5 dBm, 7x = -59.0
dBm, 8x = -55.0 dBm

Performance

Subscribers Per Sector Up to 238

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 561

Category Specification

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8QAM 14

4x 16QAM 17

5x 32QAM 21

6x 64QAM 24

7x 128QAM 28

8x 256QAM 32

Latency 3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms Frame Period

6-10 ms for 5.0 ms Frame Period

Maximum Deployment Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Packets Per Second 12,500

GPS Synchronization Yes, via CMM3, CMM4 or UGPS

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Gain (Does not 2.4 GHz 18 dBi Dual Slant

include cable loss, ~1dB)
3.5 GHz 16 dBi Dual Slant

3.65 GHz 16 dBi Dual Slant

5 GHz 17 dBi Horizontal and Vertical

Combined Transmit -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-
Power configurable intervals (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)

-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-

configurable intervals (3.5 GHz)

-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region and channel

bandwidth) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (3.6 GHz)

Maximum Transmit Power l 22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)

(dependent upon Region Code setting)
l 25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz),
(dependent upon Region Code setting)

Physical

Wind Survival 200 mph (322 kph)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Chapter 4: Reference information 562

 Category Specification

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10us/700us, Level 4, 4kV voltage

EN61000-4-5 waveform

Recommended surge suppressor: Cambium Networks

Model # C000000L065A

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / Humidity -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) /

0-95% non-condensing

Weight 2.4 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

5 GHz 5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

Dimension (HxWxD) 2.4 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)

Antenna: 112.2 x 24.5 x 11.7 cm (44.2” x 9.6” x 4.6”)

3.5 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)

3.6 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)

5 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)

Antenna: 51 x 13 x 7.3 cm (20.2” x 5.1” x 2.9”)

Power Consumption 14 W

Input Voltage 22 to 32 VDC

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PMP 450 Series - SM

The PMP 450 SM conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Chapter 4: Reference information 563

Table 166: PMP 450 Series - SM specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PMP 450 SM

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 900 MHz 902 – 928 MHz

2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz

3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz

3.65 GHz 3500 – 3850 MHz

5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz

Channel 900 MHz, 5, 7, 10, 15, and 20 MHz

Bandwidth
2.4 GHz, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz
3.5 GHz,
Note:
3.65 GHz
and 5 2.4 GHz band does not support 40 MHz.
GHz

OFDM Subcarriers 512 FFT

Interface

MAC (Media Access Control) Cambium Proprietary

Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP

Network HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3

Management

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic port
VID

Sensitivity

Chapter 4: Reference information 564

Category Specification

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -93.66 dBm, 2x = -89.6 dBm, 3x = -85.65 dBm, 4x = -83.58 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ 5x = -80.65 dBm, 6x = -77.59 dBm, 7x = -74.24 dBm, 8x = -70.59 dBm
FEC) @ 5 MHz
Channel 2.4 GHz 1x = -92.18 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 3x = -84.19 dBm, 4x = -81.15 dBm, 5x =
-78.2 dBm, 6x = -74.15 dBm, 7x = -70.21 dBm, 8x = -65.18 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -89.4 dBm, 3x = -85.6 dBm, 4x = -83.5 dBm, 5x = -
79.0 dBm, 6x = -76.4 dBm, 7x = -73.0 dBm, 8x = -67.0 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -91.3 dBm, 2x = -89.1 dBm, 3x = -85.0 dBm, 4x = -82.2 dBm, 5x = -
79.0 dBm, 6x = -76.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -67.3 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -91.2 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -83.2 dBm, 4x = -81.1 dBm, 5x = -
78.0 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -71.1 dBm, 8x = -66.3 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -84.0 dBm, 4x = -82.0 dBm, 5x =
-79.0 dBm, 6x = -76.0 dBm, 7x = -72.0 dBm, 8x = -64.9 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -92.08 dBm, 2x = -88.71 dBm, 3x = -84.71 dBm, 4x = -81.71 dBm, 5x
Sensitivity (w/ = -78.76 dBm, 6x = -75.7 dBm, 7x = -72.78 dBm, 8x = -68.73 dBm
FEC) @ 7 MHz
Channel 3.5 GHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -83.0, 4x = -81.4 dBm, 5x = -78.0
dBm, 6x = -74.5 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -90.4 dBm, 2x = -87.3 dBm, 3x = -82.4, 4x = -81.0 dBm, 5x = -78.0
dBm, 6x = -74.0 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -90.1 dBm, 2x = -86.89 dBm, 3x = -82.95, 4x = -80.73 dBm, 5x = -
Sensitivity (w/ 77.95 dBm, 6x = -74.67 dBm, 7x = -70.96 dBm, 8x = -67.88 dBm
FEC) @ 10 MHz
Channel 2.4 GHz 1x = -89.78 dBm, 2x = -84.77 dBm, 3x = -80.8, 4x = -78.85 dBm, 5x = -
74.81 dBm, 6x = -71.75 dBm, 7x = -68.91 dBm, 8x = -64.77 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -90.5 dBm, 2x = -86.5 dBm, 3x = -82.0, 4x = -80.5 dBm, 5x = -76.5
dBm, 6x = -73.5 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -89.3 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 3x = -81.6, 4x = -79.0 dBm, 5x = -75.6
dBm, 6x = -72.5 dBm, 7x = -68.5 dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.8 dBm, 3x = -80.4, 4x = -78.6 dBm, 5x = -74.8
dBm, 6x = -71.7 dBm, 7x = -67.7 dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.9 dBm, 2x = -85.0 dBm, 3x = -80.5, 4x = -78.8 dBm, 5x = -75.0
dBm, 6x = -72.0 dBm, 7x = -68.0 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -87.0 dBm, 2x = -84.82 dBm, 3x = -80.98, 4x = -78.79 dBm, 5x = -
Sensitivity (w/ 74.98 dBm, 6x = -71.9 dBm, 7x = -68.99 dBm, 8x = -64.92 dBm
FEC) @ 15 MHz
Channel 2.4 GHz 1x = -87.81 dBm, 2x = -82.8 dBm, 3x = -78.81, 4x = -76.35 dBm, 5x = -
72.42 dBm, 6x = -69.77 dBm, 7x = -67.45 dBm, 8x = -62.78 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -89.5 dBm, 2x = -84.5 dBm, 3x = -81.0, 4x = -78.5 dBm, 5x = -75.0
dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -68.4 dBm, 8x = -64.0 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -84.3 dBm, 3x = -80.0, 4x = -79.9 dBm, 5x = -74.4
dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -68.0 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 565

Category Specification

5.4 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.7 dBm, 3x = -78.7, 4x = -76.6 dBm, 5x = -73.7
dBm, 6x = -69.5 dBm, 7x = -65.7 dBm, 8x = -59.5 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.9 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -78.9, 4x = -77.1 dBm, 5x = -73.9
dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -86.92 dBm, 2x = -83.9 dBm, 3x = -79.92, 4x = -77.0 dBm, 5x = -
Sensitivity (w/ 73.93 dBm, 6x = -70.85 dBm, 7x = -67.97 dBm, 8x = -64.89 dBm
FEC) @ 20 MHz
Channel 2.4 GHz 1x = -86.73 dBm, 2x = -81.71 dBm, 3x = -76.69, 4x = -74.69 dBm, 5x = -
70.76 dBm, 6x = -67.68 dBm, 7x = -64.77 dBm, 8x = -61.69 dBm

3.5 GHz 1x = -87.7 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -78.6, 4x = -77.6 dBm, 5x = -74.0
dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -67.4 dBm, 8x = -62.0 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -79.0, 4x = -77.0 dBm, 5x = -73.0
dBm, 6x = -68.5 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -81.7 dBm, 3x = -77.0, 4x = -75.6 dBm, 5x = -71.7
dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -63.7 dBm, 8x = -57.3 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -77.0, 4x = -75.0 dBm, 5x = -72.0
dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -63.9 dBm, 8x = -56.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 2.4 GHz 1x = -84.72 dBm, 2x = -80.4 dBm, 3x = -75.74, 4x = -72.68 dBm, 5x = -
Sensitivity (w/ 69.75 dBm, 6x = -66.66 dBm, 7x = -63.76 dBm, 8x = -59.67 dBm
FEC) @ 30 MHz
Channel 3.5 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -77.0, 4x = -75.6 dBm, 5x = -72.0
dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -65.9 dBm, 8x = -60.1 dBm

3.65 GHz 1x = -84.3 dBm, 2x = -80.3 dBm, 3x = -76.0, 4x = -74.3 dBm, 5x = -71.4
dBm, 6x = -67.0 dBm, 7x = -64.8 dBm, 8x = -58.5 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -80.7 dBm, 3x = -75.5, 4x = -73.7 dBm, 5x = -69.0
dBm, 6x = -65.5 dBm, 7x = -60.6 dBm, 8x = -55.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -83.8 dBm, 2x = -80.7 dBm, 3x = -75.8, 4x = -73.8 dBm, 5x = -70.0
dBm, 6x = -65.0 dBm, 7x = -60.8 dBm, 8x = -54.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -83.1 dBm, 2x = -79.3 dBm, 3x = -75.0, 4x = -72.9 dBm, 5x = -70.0
Sensitivity (w/ dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -64.0 dBm, 8x = -56.3 dBm
FEC) @ 40 MHz
Channel 3.65 GHz 1x = -83.6 dBm, 2x = -79.6 dBm, 3x = -74.5, 4x = -72.3 dBm, 5x = -69.6
dBm, 6x = -65.3 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -54.4 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -83.0 dBm, 2x = -78.4 dBm, 3x = -73.6, 4x = -72.0 dBm, 5x = -68.6
dBm, 6x = -64.6 dBm, 7x = -59.4 dBm, 8x = -54.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -82.6 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -73.6, 4x = -72.6 dBm, 5x = -68.7
dBm, 6x = -64.0 dBm, 7x = -59.6 dBm, 8x = -52.0 dBm

Performance

Subscribers Per Up to 238

Sector

Chapter 4: Reference information 566

Category Specification

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Modulation Levels Modulation Levels SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive)
2x QPSK 10

3x 8QAM 14

4x 16QAM 17

5x 32QAM 21

6x 64QAM 24

7x 128QAM 28

8x 256QAM 32

Latency l 3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms Frame Period

l 6-10 ms for 5.0 ms Frame Period

Maximum Deployment Range Up to 40 miles (64 km)

GPS Yes
Synchronization

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Gain 900 MHz 12 dBi Yagi antenna

(Does not include
cable loss, ~1dB) 2.4 GHz 7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

3.5 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

19 dBi Flat Plate, integrated patch

3.65 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

19 dBi Flat Plate, integrated patch

5 GHz 9 dBi H+V, integrate d patch

25 dBi H+V, integrated dish

Combined Transmit Power -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 2.4, 5 GHz

-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 3.5, 3.6 GHz

25 dBm - 3 GHz

Maximum Transmit l 22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz) (dependent upon
Power Region Code setting)
l 25 dBm combined OFDM (900 MHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz),

Chapter 4: Reference information 567

Category Specification

(dependent upon Region Code setting)

Reflector antenna 2.4 GHz +12 dBi

gain
3.5 GHz +11 dBi

3.65 GHz +11 dBi

5 GHz +15 dBi

Other antenna (5 CLIP Gain +8 dBi

GHz only)
LENS +5.5 dBi
Gain

Physical

Wind Survival 200 mph (322 kph)

Antenna 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Connection

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 10us/700us, Level 4, 4kV voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended surge suppressor: Cambium Networks Model #
600SSH

Environmental IP55

Temperature / -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) /

Humidity
0-95% non-condensing

Weight 2.4 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) for 450 ruggedized

3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) for 450 ruggedized

5 GHz 5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.5 kg (7.7 lbs) for 450d

Dimensions (H x W x D) 30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”)

50 x 50 x 38 cm (19.69” x 19.69” x 14.96”) for 450d

31.0 x 31.0 x 6.4 cm (12” x 12” x 2.5”) for 450 ruggedized

Chapter 4: Reference information 568

 Category Specification

Power 12 W
Consumption

Input Voltage 20 to 32 VDC

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

Specifications for PTP 450 Series - BH

The PTP 450 BH conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 167: PTP 450 Series - BH specifications

Category Specification

Model Number PTP 450 BH

Spectrum

Channel Spacing 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments

Frequency Range 902 to 928 MHz

3300 – 3600 MHz

3500 – 3850 MHz

5470 – 5875 MHz

Channel Bandwidth 900 MHz 5, 7, 10, 15, and 20 MHz

3.5 GHz, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 , and 40 MHz

3.6 GHz,
7 MHz Channel bandwidth configurable for 3.5 GHz and 3.65 GHz
and 5 GHz
band only.

OFDM Subcarriers 512 FFT

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary

Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated (802.3
compliant)

Chapter 4: Reference information 569

Category Specification

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, TFTP,
RADIUS

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3, TFTP, Syslog

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority, dynamic

port VID

Sensitivity

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -94.0 dBm, 2x = -90.7 dBm, 3x = -85.6 dBm, 4x = -83.8 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5x = -80.6 dBm, 6x = -77.5 dBm, 7x = -73.8 dBm, 8x = -69.8 dBm
5 MHz Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -94.0 dBm, 2x = -89.6 dBm, 3x = -85.4 dBm, 4x = -83.0 dBm,
5x = -80.0 dBm, 6x = -76.5 dBm, 7x = -72.3 dBm, 8x = -68.2 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -94.0 dBm, 2x = -90.0 dBm, 3x = -85.0 dBm, 4x = -82.7 dBm,
5x = -79.6 dBm, 6x = -75.0 dBm, 7x = -71.9 dBm, 8x = -66.7 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -90.9 dBm, 2x = -86.8 dBm, 3x = -83.7 dBm, 4x = -80.8 dBm,
5x = -78.0 dBm, 6x = -74.8 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -91.5 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -83.0 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
5x = -77.8 dBm, 6x = -74.0 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -66.4 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -88.3 dBm, 3x = -83.9 dBm, 4x = -81.8 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -78.9 dBm, 6x = -75.9 dBm, 7x = -72.9 dBm, 8x = -68.9 dBm
@7 MHz Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -88.0 dBm, 3x = -83.5 dBm, 4x = -81.0 dBm,
5x = -78.1 dBm, 6x = -75.1 dBm, 7x = -70.9 dBm, 8x = -67.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -92.0 dBm, 2x = -87.7 dBm, 3x = -83.6 dBm, 4x = -80.7 dBm,
5x = -78.1 dBm, 6x = -74.0 dBm, 7x = -70.8 dBm, 8x = -66.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -91.0 dBm, 2x = -87.0 dBm, 3x = -82.8 dBm, 4x = -80.9 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -77.7 dBm, 6x = -74.6 dBm, 7x = -71.0 dBm, 8x = -66.9 dBm
@10 MHz Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -91.5 dBm, 2x = -86.5 dBm, 3x = -82.0 dBm, 4x = -80.1 dBm,
5x = -76.5 dBm, 6x = -73.2 dBm, 7x = -70.0 dBm, 8x = -65.7 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -90.7 dBm, 2x = -86.0 dBm, 3x = -82.1 dBm, 4x = -80.0 dBm,
5x = -76.5 dBm, 6x = -72.7 dBm, 7x = -69.1 dBm, 8x = -64.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -84.1 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -77.9 dBm,
5x = -75.0 dBm, 6x = -71.5 dBm, 7x = -67.0 dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.0 dBm,
5x = -75.0 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -61.7 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -89.8 dBm, 2x = -85.7 dBm, 3x = -80.9 dBm, 4x = -78.7 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -75.8 dBm, 6x = -72.9 dBm, 7x = -69.1 dBm, 8x = -65.0 dBm
@15 MHz Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -89.0 dBm, 2x = -85.0 dBm, 3x = -80.0 dBm, 4x = -78.0 dBm,
5x = -75.2 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -68.3 dBm, 8x = -64.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -88.7 dBm, 2x = -84.7 dBm, 3x = -80.7 dBm, 4x = -77.7 dBm,
5x = -74.5 dBm, 6x = -70.7 dBm, 7x = -67.8 dBm, 8x = -62.3 dBm

Chapter 4: Reference information 570

Category Specification

5.4 GHz 1x = -85.3 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -79.1 dBm, 4x = -76.0 dBm,
5x = -73.0 dBm, 6x = -70.0 dBm, 7x = -66.0 dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -87.4 dBm, 2x = -83.0 dBm, 3x = -78.5 dBm, 4x = -76.5 dBm,
5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -69.7 dBm, 7x = -64.5 dBm, 8x = -58.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 900 MHz 1x = -88.1 dBm, 2x = -84.0 dBm, 3x = -79.3 dBm, 4x = -77.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) 5x = -74.3 dBm, 6x = -71.0 dBm, 7x = -67.4 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm
@20 MHz Channel
3.5 GHz 1x = -88.0 dBm, 2x = -83.3 dBm, 3x = -79.5 dBm, 4x = -77.1 dBm,
5x = -73.5 dBm, 6x = -70.3 dBm, 7x = -67.0 dBm, 8x = -63.0 dBm

3.6 GHz 1x = -87.7 dBm, 2x = -82.7 dBm, 3x = -79.0 dBm, 4x = -76.0 dBm,
5x = -73.0 dBm, 6x = -68.6 dBm, 7x = -66.8 dBm, 8x = -61.5 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -84.4 dBm, 2x = -81.0 dBm, 3x = -77.0 dBm, 4x = -74.9 dBm,
5x = -71.9 dBm, 6x = -67.8 dBm, 7x = -64.0 dBm, 8x = -56.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -85.0 dBm, 2x = -81.0 dBm, 3x = -77.2 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.8 dBm, 6x = -67.5 dBm, 7x = -63.0 dBm, 8x = -56.0 dBm

Nominal Receive 3.5 GHz 1x = -86.0 dBm, 2x = -82.0 dBm, 3x = -77.5 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5x = -71.5 dBm, 6x = -68.0 dBm, 7x = -65.4 dBm, 8x = -61.0 dBm
30 MHz Channel
3.6 GHz 1x = -86.2 dBm, 2x = -81.7 dBm, 3x = -77.7 dBm, 4x = -75.0 dBm,
5x = -71.4 dBm, 6x = -67.4 dBm, 7x = -64.5 dBm, 8x = -59.0 dBm

5.4 GHz 1x = -82.4 dBm, 2x = -80.0 dBm, 3x = -75.9 dBm, 4x = -73.0 dBm,
5x = -69.9 dBm, 6x = -66.0 dBm, 7x = -60.0 dBm, 8x = -54.0 dBm

5.8 GHz 1x = -84.0 dBm, 2x = -79.0 dBm, 3x = -75.0 dBm, 4x = -72.5 dBm,
5x = -70.0 dBm, 6x = -65.0 dBm, 7x = -59.2 dBm, 8x = -53.2 dBm

Nominal Receive 5.4 GHz 1x = -82.4 dBm, 2x = -78.0 dBm, 3x = -74.5 dBm, 4x = -71.3 dBm,
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @ 5x = -68.5 dBm, 6x = -63.3 dBm, 7x = -58.0 dBm, 8x = -53.0 dBm
40 MHz Channel
5.8 GHz 1x = -82.0 dBm, 2x = -78.6 dBm, 3x = -74.0 dBm, 4x = -72.0 dBm,
5x = -68.5 dBm, 6x = -64.0 dBm, 7x = -58.0 dBm, 8x = -50.0 dBm

Performance

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms or 5.0 ms

Chapter 4: Reference information 571

Category Specification

Modulation Levels Modulation SNR (in dB)

(Adaptive) Levels

2x QPSK 10

3x 8QAM 14

4x 16QAM 17

5x 32QAM 21

6x 64QAM 24

5x 128QAM 28

8x 256QAM 32

Latency l 3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms frame period

l 6 - 10 ms for 5.0 ms frame period

Packets Per Second 12,500

Maximum Deployment Up to 40 miles (64 km)

Range

GPS Synchronization Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Combined Transmit - l 30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-

Power configurable intervals (5 GHz)
l -30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-
configurable intervals (3.5 GHz)
l -30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region and channel
bandwidth) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (3.6 GHz)

Antenna Gain (Does 3.5 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
not include cable loss,
~1dB) 19 dBi Flat Plate, integrated patch

3.65 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

19 dBi Flat Plate, integrated patch

5 GHz 9 dBi H+V, integrated patch

25 dBi H+V, integrated dish

Transmit Power Range 40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB step)

Maximum Transmit l 22 dBm combined OFDM (5 GHz) (dependent upon

Power Region Code setting)
l 25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz), (dependent
upon Region Code setting)

Chapter 4: Reference information 572

Category Specification

Reflector antenna gain 3.5 GHz +11 dBi

3.65 GHz +11 dBi

5 GHz +15 dBi

Other antenna (5 GHz CLIP Gain +8 dBi

only)
LENS Gain +5.5 dBi

Physical

Sync/AUX port RJ45 l 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

l PoE output
l Sync input or output (Connection and powering of UGPS
Sync input)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)

Surge Suppression EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform

EN61000-4-5
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium Networks
Model # C000000L033A

Mean Time Between > 40 Years

Failure

Environmental IP66, IP67

Temperature / -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-condensing

Humidity

Weight 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna

2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

Wind Survival 200 mph (322 kph)

Dimension (HxWxD) 30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”)

Maximum Power 14 W
Consumption

Input Voltage 22 to 32 VDC

Security

Encryption 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

Note

AES-256 requires a license key.

PSU specifications
The PMP/PTP 450i AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Chapter 4: Reference information 573

Table 168: PMP/PTP 450i AC power Injector specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions 137 mm (5.4 in) x 56 mm (2.2 in) x 38 mm (1.5 in)

Weight 0.240 Kg (0.5 lbs)

Temperature -40°C to +60°C

Humidity 90% non-condensing

Waterproofing Not waterproof

Altitude Sea level to 5000 meters (16000 ft)

AC Input Min 90 V AC, 57 – 63 Hz, max 264 V AC, 47 – 53 Hz.

DC output voltage to the 58V +2V/- 0V

ODU

AC connector IEC-320-C8

Efficiency Better than 85%, efficiency level ‘VI’

Over Current Protection Hiccup current limiting, trip point set between 120% to 150% of full load
current

Hold up time At least 10 milliseconds

Warning

Use the above PSU to only power up 450i and 450m products.

The PMP/PTP 450 power supply conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 169: PMP/PTP 450 power supply specifications (part number: N000900L001A)

Category Specification

Dimensions 118 mm (4.66 in) x 45 mm (1.75 in) x 32 mm (1.25 in)

Weight 0.240 Kg (0.5 lbs)

Temperature 0°C to +40°C

Humidity 20 to 90%

AC Input 90-264 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz, 0.5 A rms at 120 VAC, 0.25 A rms at 240 VAC.

DC output voltage to the 30 V ± 5%

ODU

AC connector IEC-320-C8

Efficiency Better than 85%, efficiency level ‘V’

Chapter 4: Reference information 574

 Category Specification

Over Current Protection Short circuit, with auto recovery; Should restart between every 0.5 to 2
sec.

Hold up time 10mS min at max load, 120VAC

Note

The 30bV PSU (part number: #N000900L001A) has to be used for PMP 450
900 MHz SM.

Warning

The PMP 450 Ruggedized High Gain Integrated Subscriber Module (Cambium
part numbers C035045C014A and C036045C014A), while encapsulated in a
450i-type enclosure, contains 450 circuitry which must be powered via 30VDC.
Powering these SMs with 56 VDC will damage the device.

Data network specifications

This section contains specifications of the PMP/PTP 450 platform Ethernet interface.

Ethernet interface
450m/450i Series
The 450m/450i Series Ethernet port conforms to the specifications listed in below table.

Table 170: 450m/450i Series Main and Aux Ethernet bridging specifications

Ethernet Bridging Specification

Protocol IEEE 802.3 compatible

QoS IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4

Main Ethernet port 10/100/1000 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

Aux Ethernet port 10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated

Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 1700 Bytes

450/450b Series
Table 171: 450 Series Ethernet bridging specifications

Ethernet Bridging Specification

Protocol IEEE 802.3 compatible

QoS IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4

Chapter 4: Reference information 575

 Ethernet Bridging Specification

Interface 10/100/1000* BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto

negotiated

Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 1700 Bytes

* 450 SM does not support 1000 BaseT.

* 450 AP supports 1000 BaseT, but with known CRC errors and it is not recommended to use.

Note

Practical Ethernet rates depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols

and platforms used.

Over the air throughput is restricted to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the
receiving end of the link.

Wireless specifications
This section contains specifications of the 450 Platform Family wireless interface. These specifications
include RF bands, channel bandwidth, spectrum settings, maximum power and link loss.

General wireless specifications

The wireless specifications that apply to all 450 Platform variants are listed under below table.

Table 172: 450 Platform Family - wireless specifications

Item Specification

Channel Manual selection (fixed frequency).

selection

Manual power To avoid interference to other users of the band, maximum power can be set lower
control than the default power limit.

Duplex scheme Adaptive TDD

Chapter 4: Reference information 576

 Item Specification

Range Band Platform Range

900 MHz PMP 450i Series - AP and 120 mi / 193 km

PMP 450 Series - SM

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Series 40 mi / 64 km

3.5 GHz PMP/PTP 450/450b Series 40 mi / 64 km (PMP)

186 mi/ 299 km (PTP)

3.65 GHz PMP/PTP 450/450b Series 40 mi / 64 km (PMP)

186 mi/ 299 km (PTP)

5 GHz PMP/PTP 450/450i/450b 40 mi / 64 km (PMP)

Series and
186 mi/ 299 km (PTP)
PMP 450m Series AP

Over-the-air 128-bit AES and 256-bit AES

encryption

Error Correction Rate 3/4 RS coder

Link Range and Throughput

Link range and throughput estimates are based on site-specific attributes and configuration parameters.
For the most up-to-date information on link range and throughput for your equipment see the Capacity
Planner and LINKPlanner software tools:

l For average-deployment link range and throughput planning information, see:

l https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/capacityplanner/
l For site-specific link range and throughput planning information, see:
l https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/linkplanner

Country specific radio regulations

This section describes how the 450 Platform Family complies with the radio regulations that are enforced
in various countries.

Caution

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the

user’s authority to operate the system.

Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the
system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency
bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the system can be used
provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference
from other ODUs and installations.

Chapter 4: Reference information 577

The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for 450 Platform frequency variants are
listed in below table.

Table 173: Radio certifications

Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals)

900 MHz PMP 450i Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210

USA FCC Part 15.247

Mexico NOM-121-SCT1-2009

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210

USA FCC Part 15 Class B

3.5 GHz PMP/PTP 450 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192

Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2

3.6 GHz PMP/PTP 450 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 197

USA FCC Part 15 Class B

3.5 GHz PMP 450m Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192

Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2

3.6 GHz PMP 450m Canada RSS Gen and RSS 197

USA FCC Part 90Z and Part 15 Class B

Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2

4.9 GHz PMP/PTP 450i/450b/450m/450 USA FCC Part 90 Subpart Y

MicroPoP/450b Retro
Canada RSS Gen and RSS 111

5.1 GHz PMP/PTP 450i/450b/450 USA FCC Part 15 Class B

MicroPoP/450b Retro

5.1 GHz PMP 450m USA FCC Part 15E and Part 15B

Europe ETSI EN 302 625 V1.1.1

5.2 GHz PMP 450m USA FCC Part 15E and Part 15B

5.2 GHz PMP/PTP 450i/450b/450 USA FCC Part 15 Class B

MicroPoP/450b Retro
Canada RSS Gen and RSS 247

5.4 GHz PMP/PTP 450 and 450i/450 Europe ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1
MicroPoP/450b Retro
USA FCC Part 15 Class B

5.4 GHz PMP 450m USA FCC Part 15E and Part 15B

Canada RSS Gen and RSS 247

Europe ETSI EN 301 893 v1.8.1

ETSI EN 301 893 v2.1.1 Clause 4.8

Chapter 4: Reference information 578

 Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals)

5.8 GHz PMP/PTP 450 and 450i/450 Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210
MicroPoP/450b Retro
USA FCC Part 15 Class B

Europe ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1

5.8 GHz PMP 450m USA FCC Part 15E and Part 15B

Canada RSS Gen and RSS 247

Europe ETSI EN 302 502 v2.1.1

DFS for 2.4 and 5 GHz Radios

Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 2.4 and 5 GHz
unlicensed systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation.

The details of DFS operation and channels available for each Country Code, including whether DFS is
active on the AP, SM, which DFS regulation apply, and any channel restrictions are shown in below table.

Chapter 4: Reference information 579

Table 174: Country & Bands DFS setting

Region Code Country Band AP SM Weather Radar

Code Notch-Out

North USA 2.4 No effect No effect No

America GHz

5.2 FCC DFS No effect No

GHz

5.4 FCC DFS No effect No

GHz

5.8 No effect No effect No

GHz

Canada 2.4 No effect No effect No

GHz

5.2 RSS-247 Iss2 DFS No effect No

GHz

5.4 RSS-247 Iss2 DFS No effect Yes

GHz

5.8 No effect No effect No

GHz

Mexico 2.4 No effect No effect No

GHz

5.2 ANATEL Res506- No effect No

GHz 2008

5.4 ANATEL Res506- No effect No

GHz 2008

5.8 No effect No effect No

GHz

South Brazil 5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 No effect No

America GHz v2.1.1DFS

5.8 No effect No effect No

GHz

Europe ETSI 5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893 Yes
GHz v2.1.1 DFS v2.1.1 DFS

5.8 ETSI EN 302 502 ETSI EN 302 502 Yes

GHz v2.1.1 DFS v2.1.1 DFS

Chapter 4: Reference information 580

Region Code Country Band AP SM Weather Radar
Code Notch-Out

Other- Other- 2.4 No effect No effect No

Regulatory FCC GHz

5.2 FCC DFS No effect No

GHz

5.4 FCC DFS No effect No

GHz

5.8- No effect No effect No

GHz

Other- 5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893 No

ETSI GHz v2.1.1 DFS v1.7.1 DFS

5.8 ETSI EN 302 502 ETSI EN 302 502 No

GHz v2.1.1 DFS v1.2.1 DFS

Equipment Disposal
Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric Equipment
Please do not dispose of Electronic and Electric Equipment or Electronic
and Electric Accessories with your household waste. In some countries or
regions, collection systems have been set up to handle waste of electrical
and electronic equipment. In European Union countries, please contact
your local equipment supplier representative or service center for
information about the waste collection system in your country.

Country specific band range maximum transmit power

Chapter 4: Reference information 581

Maximum transmit power 900 MHz band
Table 175: Frequency range and Maximum transmit power – 900 MHz band PMP 450i Series

Region Country Band Range Device Antenna EIRP Limit /Conducted Power Limit (dBm)
Type Type
Lower Upper 5 7 10 15 20 30 40

MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz

North Other 902 928 Any Any EIRP 36 36 36 36 36 - -

America FCC, USA,

Canada,

Mexico, CPL
Puerto,

Rico

Oceania Australia 915 928 Any Any EIRP 30 30 30 30 - - -

CPL 19 19 19 19 - - -

915 928 Any Any EIRP 30 30 30 36 - - -

CPL 19 19 19 19 - - -

582
Region Country Band Range Device Antenna EIRP Limit /Conducted Power Limit (dBm)
Type Type
Lower Upper 5 7 10 15 20 30 40

MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz

South New Zealand Brazil 920.5 (7 924.5 (7 Any Any EIRP 30 30 30 36 - - -

America MHz) MHz)
Ecuador CPL 19 19 19 19 - - -

919.5 (5 MHz) 925.5 (5 Any Any EIRP 30 30 30 36 - - -

MHz)
CPL 19 19 19 19 - - -

902 907.5 Any Any EIRP 36 36 36 36 - - -

CPL

915 928 Any Any EIRP 36 36 36 36 - - -

CPL - - -

902 928 Any Any EIRP - -

CPL 27 27 27 27 27 - -

Colombia, Panama, 902 928 Any Any EIRP 36 36 36 36 36 - -

Venezuela
CPL - -

Others Others 902 928 Any Any EIRP - -

CPL - -

CPL= Conducted Power Limit

583
Maximum transmit power 2.4 GHz band
Table 176: Frequency range and Maximum transmit power – 2.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series

Country Band Range Device Antenna EIRP Limit /Conducted Power Limit
Type Type (dBm)

Lower Upper 5 10 15 20 30 40

MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz

Other 2400 2483.5 AP Sector EIRP 36 36 36 36 - -

FCC, USA,
Canada CPL 18 18 18 18 - -
and SM, BH Integrated EIRP 36 36 36 36 - -
Indonesia
CPL - -

Reflector EIRP 36 36 36 36 - -

CPL 24 24 24 24 - -

Integrated EIRP 36 36 36 36 - -
Dish
(450d) CPL 11 11 11 11 - -

Others 2400 2483.5 Any Any EIRP

CPL 30 30 30 30 30 30

CPL= Conducted Power Limit

584
Maximum transmit power 3 GHz band
Table 177: Frequency range and Maximum transmit power – 3 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series

Country Band Range Device Antenna EIRP Limit /Conducted Power Limit (dBm)

Type Type
Lower Upper 5 7 10 15 20 30 40
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz

Other 3300 3850 Any Any EIRP

* * * * * * *
(1) (1)
CPL
* * * * * * *
FCC 3650 3700 Any Any EIRP 37 38.5 40 41.7 43 44.7 46

CPL 19 20.5 22 23.7 25 26.7 28

ETSI 3410 3800 Any Any EIRP

* * * * * * *
(2) (2) (5)
CPL
* * * * * * *
India 3300 3800 Any Any EIRP
* * * * * * *
(3) (3)
CPL
* * * * * * *
Indonesia 3600 3800 Any Any EIRP
* * * * * * *
CPL
* * * * * * *
China 3300 3400 Any Any EIRP
* * * * * * *
CPL
* * * * * * *
Canada 3450 3650 Any Any EIRP 62 62 62 62 62 62 62

CPL
* * * * * * *
3650 3700 Any Any EIRP 37 38.5 40 41.7 43 44.7 46

CPL 19 20.5 22 23.7 25 26.7 28

USA 3550 3700 Any Any EIRP 44 45.5 47 48.7 50 51.7 53

(4) (4) CPL 24 25.5 27 28.1 30 30 30

3650 3700 Any Any EIRP 37 38.5 40 41.7 43 44.7 46

CPL 19 20.5 22 23.7 25 26.7 28

585
 Country Band Range Device Antenna EIRP Limit /Conducted Power Limit (dBm)

Type Type
Lower Upper 5 7 10 15 20 30 40
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz

Mexico 3300 3750 Any Any EIRP

* * * * * * *
CPL
* * * * * * *
Australia 3300 3800 Any Any EIRP 57 58.9 60 61.7 63 63 X

CPL X X
* * * * *
Brazil 3400 3600 Any Any EIRP X X
* * * * *
CPL X X
* * * * *

( ) = No limit
*
(X) = Not allowed

CPL= Conducted Power Limit

1. = Frequencies between 3850 and 3900 can also be selected, but performance is not guaranteed in
this portion of the band. For example, sensitivity is degraded

2. = No PTP support in ETSi region

3. = Either ETSI or FCCC

4. = This band follows the CBRS rules (devices need to connect to a SAS to be granted a channel)

5. For any PMP 450b Radio operating in Croatia, operators will need to restrict the TX Power to 27
dBm or lower to comply with Croatia's country-specific regulatory requirements. This applies
independently of how the PMP 450b is used (SM, BHM, and BHS). This restriction does not apply
to PMP 450 or PMP 450m Radios.

586
Maximum transmit power 4.9 GHz band
Table 178: Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Gain Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW (dBi) Limit (dBm) (dBm)

USA, AP Sector 5 MHz 16 24 40

Canada,
Other FCC 10 MHz 16 24 40

15 MHz 16 24 40

20 MHz 16 24 40

Omni 5 MHz 12 24 36

10 MHz 12 24 36

15 MHz 12 24 36

20 MHz 12 24 36

SM, BH Flate plate 5 MHz 27 24 51

10 MHz 27 24 51

15 MHz 27 24 51

20 MHz 27 24 51

4ft 5 MHz 32 24 56
parabolic
10 MHz 32 24 56

15 MHz 32 24 56

20 MHz 32 23 52

6ft 5 MHz 36 24 60
parabolic
10 MHz 36 24 60

15 MHz 36 24 60

20 MHz 36 24 60

Brazil AP Sector 5 MHz 16 27 43

10 MHz 16 27 43

15 MHz 16 27 43

20 MHz 16 27 43

587
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Gain Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW (dBi) Limit (dBm) (dBm)

Mexico AP Sector 5 MHz 16 22 38

10 MHz 16 22 38

15 MHz 16 22 38

20 MHz 16 22 38

30 MHz 16 22 38

40 MHz 16 22 38

Other Any Any Any - 27 -

Table 179: Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP 450b Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP

Type Type BW Gain (dBi) Power Limit Limit
(dBm) (dBm)

FCC SM 16 dBi 5 MHz 16 26 42

Mid-Gain
10 MHz 16 26 42

15 MHz 16 26 42

20 MHz 16 26 42

23 dBi 5 MHz 23 26 49
High Gain
10 MHz 23 26 49

15 MHz 23 26 49

20 MHz 23 26 49

588
Table 180: Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel EIRP Limit (dBm)

Type Type BW

USA, AP Sector 5 MHz 42 dBm (in sector mode)/ 48 dBm (in

Canada, beamforming mode)
Other FCC 10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Brazil AP Sector 5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Mexico AP Sector 5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

30 MHz

40 MHz

Other AP Sector Any

589
Maximum transmit power 5.1 GHz band
Table 181: Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.1 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel BW Antenna Conducted EIRP

Type Type Gain (dBi) Power Limit Limit
(dBm) (dBm)

USA, AP Sector 5 MHz 16 14 30

Other FCC and
Canada 10 MHz 16 17 33

15 MHz 16 18 34

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

Omni 5 MHz 12 16 28

10 MHz 12 19 31

15 MHz 12 22 34

20 MHz 12 24 36

30 MHz 12 24 36

40 MHz 12 24 36

SM, BH Flat plate 5 MHz 23 24 47

10 MHz 23 27 50

15 MHz 23 27 50

20 MHz 23 27 50

30 MHz 23 27 50

40 MHz 23 27 50

4ft 5 MHz 33 14 47
parabolic
10 MHz 33 17 50

15 MHz 33 18 51

20 MHz 33 20 53

30 MHz 33 20 53

40 MHz 33 20 53

590
Countries Device Antenna Channel BW Antenna Conducted EIRP
Type Type Gain (dBi) Power Limit Limit
(dBm) (dBm)

6ft 5 MHz 36 11 47
parabolic
10 MHz 36 14 50

15 MHz 36 15 51

20 MHz 36 17 53

30 MHz 36 17 53

40 MHz 36 17 53

591
Table 182: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain and High
Gain

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Gain Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW (dBi) Limit (dBm) (dBm)

FCC SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 9 47

Gain
10 MHz 16 6 50

15 MHz 16 6 51

20 MHz 16 6 53

30 MHz 16 6 53

40 MHz 16 6 53

23 dBi High 5 MHz 23 9 47

Gain
10 MHz 23 6 50

15 MHz 23 6 51.7

20 MHz 23 6 53

30 MHz 23 6 53

40 MHz 23 6 53

(1) Last channel at full power is 5325. Channel centers 5327.5 and 5330 need a backoff of 7 dB.

(2) First channel at full power is 5495. Channel centers 5490 and 5492.5 need a backoff of 5 dB.

(3) FCC Tx power limits need to be captured in the user guide

(4) Channel center 5170 needs a 4 dB backoff.

Table 183: Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

USA AP Sector 5 MHz 30

10 MHz 33

15 MHz 34

20 MHz 36

30 MHz 36

40 MHz 36

592
Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

ETSI AP Sector 5 MHz 33

10 MHz 36

15 MHz 37.7

20 MHz 39

Mexico AP Sector 20 MHz 23

30 MHz 23

40 MHz 23

Other Any Any 5 MHz 42

10 MHz 42

15 MHz 42

20 MHz 42

30 MHz 42

40 MHz 42

Note

For releases 16.0 and later, although sector transmission mode EIRP is limited to 42
dBm, ROW GUI configuration limit allows a setting of up to 48 dBm. This allows the
software to transmit as high as 48 dBm for ROW regions, depending on the
modulation mode and transmission mode in use. For a detailed explanation, see the
Release 16.0 training slides available at:

https://learning.cambiumnetworks.com/learn/course/121/PMP450SoftwareRelease16

Maximum transmit power 5.2 GHz band

Note

The selection of 5 MHz channel is not available for the PMP 450 AP and the PTP
450 BHM. It is available for the PMP/PTP 450i AP/SM and the PMP 450m AP.

593
Table 184: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP Limit

Type Type BW Gain (dBi) Power Limit (dBm)
(dBm)

USA, Other AP Sector 5 MHz 16 8 24

FCC
10 MHz 16 11 27

15 MHz 16 12 28

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

USA, Other SM, BH Omni 5 MHz 12 12 24

FCC
10 MHz 12 15 27

15 MHz 12 16 28

20 MHz 12 18 30

30 MHz 12 18 30

40 MHz 12 18 30

USA, Other SM, BH Flat plate 5 MHz 23 27 50

FCC
10 MHz 23 27 50

15 MHz 23 27 50

20 MHz 23 27 50

30 MHz 23 27 50

40 MHz 23 27 50

USA, Other SM, BH 4ft parabolic 5 MHz 32 27 59

FCC
10 MHz 32 27 59

15 MHz 32 27 59

20 MHz 32 27 59

30 MHz 32 27 59

40 MHz 32 27 59

594
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP Limit
Type Type BW Gain (dBi) Power Limit (dBm)
(dBm)

USA, Other SM, BH 6ft parabolic 5 MHz 36 27 63

FCC
10 MHz 36 27 27

15 MHz 36 27 27

20 MHz 36 27 27

30 MHz 36 27 27

40 MHz 36 27 27

Mexico Any Any 5 MHz - - 24

10 MHz - - 27

15 MHz - - 28

20 MHz - - 30

30 MHz - - 30

40 MHz - - 30

Other Any Any Any - - -

Table 185: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain and High
Gain

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Gain Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW (dBi) Limit (dBm) (dBm)

FCC SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 8 24

Gain
10 MHz 16 11 27

15 MHz 16 12 28

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

23 dBi High 5 MHz 23 1 24

Gain
10 MHz 23 4 27

15 MHz 23 5 28

20 MHz 23 7 30

30 MHz 23 7 30

40 MHz 23 7 30

595
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Gain Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW (dBi) Limit (dBm) (dBm)

Other SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 27 43

Gain
10 MHz 16 27 43

15 MHz 16 27 43

20 MHz 16 27 43

30 MHz 16 27 43

40 MHz 16 27 43

23 dBi High 5 MHz 16 27 43

Gain
10 MHz 16 27 43

15 MHz 16 27 43

20 MHz 16 27 43

30 MHz 16 27 43

40 MHz 16 27 43

Table 186: Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

USA, AP Sector 5 MHz 24

Other FCC
10 MHz 27

15 MHz 28

20 MHz 30

30 MHz 30

40 MHz 30

Mexico AP Sector 5 MHz 24

10 MHz 27

15 MHz 28

20 MHz 30

30 MHz 30

40 MHz 30

596
 Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

Other Any Any 5 MHz 42

10 MHz 42

15 MHz 42

20 MHz 42

30 MHz 42

40 MHz 42

Note

For releases 16.0 and later, although sector transmission mode EIRP is limited to 42
dBm, ROW GUI configuration limit allows a setting of up to 48 dBm. This allows the
software to transmit as high as 48 dBm for ROW regions, depending on the
modulation mode and transmission mode in use. For a detailed explanation, see the
Release 16.0 training slides available at:

https://learning.cambiumnetworks.com/learn/course/121/PMP450SoftwareRelease16

Maximum transmit power 5.4 GHz band

Table 187: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

FCC AP Sector 5 MHz 24

10 MHz 27

15 MHz 28

20 MHz 29

30 MHz 30

40 MHz 30

ETSI AP Sector 5 MHz 24

10 MHz 27

15 MHz 28

20 MHz 30

30 MHz 30

40 MHz 30

597
Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

RoW AP Sector 5 MHz 42

10 MHz 42

15 MHz 42

20 MHz 42

30 MHz 42

40 MHz 42

RoW Other AP Sector - 42

Note

l The selection of 5 MHz channel is not available for the PMP 450 AP and
the PTP 450 BHM. It is available for PMP/PTP 450i AP/SM, PMP 40b SM,
and PMP 450m AP.
l Power reduction at the band edges is required in some cases.

598
Table 188: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted Power EIRP Limit

Type Type BW Gain Limit (dBm) (dBm)

(dBi)

AP Sector 5 MHz 16 8 24

USA, 10 MHz 16 11 27
Other FCC
15 MHz 16 12 28

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

Omni 5 MHz 12 12 24

10 MHz 12 15 27

15 MHz 12 16 28

20 MHz 12 18 30

30 MHz 12 18 30

40 MHz 12 18 30

SM, BH Flat plate 5 MHz 27 27 54

10 MHz 27 27 54

15 MHz 27 27 54

20 MHz 27 27 54

30 MHz 27 27 54

40 MHz 27 27 54

4ft 5 MHz 32 27 59
parabolic
10 MHz 32 27 59

15 MHz 32 27 59

20 MHz 32 27 59

30 MHz 32 27 59

40 MHz 32 27 59

599
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted Power EIRP Limit
Type Type BW Gain Limit (dBm) (dBm)

(dBi)

Brazil, Mexico, Any Any 5 MHz 36 27 63

Australia,
10 MHz 36 27 63
ETSI
15 MHz 36 27 63

20 MHz 36 27 63

30 MHz 36 27 63

40 MHz 36 27 63

Other Any Any Any - 27 -

Table 189: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain and High
Gain

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted Power Limit EIRP Limit
Type Type BW Gain (dBm) (dBm)

(dBi)

FCC, ETSI SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 8 24

Gain
10 MHz 16 11 27

15 MHz 16 12 28

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

23 dBi High 5 MHz 23 1 24

Gain
10 MHz 23 4 27

15 MHz 23 5 28

20 MHz 23 9 30

30 MHz 23 9 30

40 MHz 23 9 30

600
Table 190: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450 Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP

Type Type BW Gain Power Limit Limit
(dBm) (dBm)
(dBi)

United States, Canada, AP Sector 5 MHz 16 8 24

Brazil, Australia, Denmark,
Finland, Germany, Greece, 10 MHz 16 11 27
Liechtenstein, Norway, 15 MHz 16 12 28
Portugal, Spain, UK,
Vietnam 20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

SM,BH Flat plate 5 MHz - 27 -

(Gain: 27),
4ft parabolic 10 MHz - 27 -
(Gain: 32), 15 MHz - 27 -
6ftparabolic
(Gain: 36) 20 MHz - 27 -

30 MHz - 27 -

40 MHz - 27 -

Austria, Belgium, Bosnia & AP Sector 5 MHz 16 8 24

Herzegovina, Bulgaria,
27*
Croatia, Cyprus, Czech 10 MHz 16 11
Republic, France, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, 15 MHz 16 12 28
Lithuania, Luxembourg,
Macedonia, Malta, 20 MHz 16 14 30
Netherlands, Poland,
30 MHz 16 14 30
Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Sweden 40 MHz 16 14 30
Algeria AP Sector 5 MHz 16 14 30

10 MHz 16 14 30

15 MHz 16 14 30

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MH 16 14 30

601
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP
Type Type BW Gain Power Limit Limit
(dBm) (dBm)
(dBi)

Other AP Sector 5 MHz 16 - No EIRP

limit
10 MHz 16 19

15 MHz 16 -

20 MHz 16 19

30 MHz 16 -

40 MHz 16 -

(*) At 5.4 GHz, EU regulations are harmonized. 5600 – 5650 MHz excluded, as ten-minute Channel
Availability Check (CAC) is required.

Note

For releases 16.0 and later, although sector transmission mode EIRP is limited to 42
dBm, ROW GUI configuration limit allows a setting of up to 48 dBm. This allows the
software to transmit as high as 48 dBm for ROW regions, depending on the
modulation mode and transmission mode in use. For a detailed explanation, see the
Release 16.0 training slides available at:
https://learning.cambiumnetworks.com/learn/course/121/PMP450SoftwareRelease16

Maximum transmit power 5.8 GHz band

Table 191: Default combined transmit power per Country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

USA, AP Sector 5 MHz 36

Other FCC
10 MHz 36

15 MHz 36

20 MHz 36

30 MHz 36

40 MHz 36

Mexico AP Sector 5 MHz 30

10 MHz 33

15 MHz 34

20 MHz 36

30 MHz 36

40 MHz 36

602
Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel BW EIRP Limit (dBm)

ETSI AP Sector 5 MHz 30

10 MHz 33

15 MHz 34

20 MHz 36

30 MHz 36

40 MHz 36

Other AP Sector 5 MHz 42

10 MHz 42

15 MHz 42

20 MHz 42

30 MHz 42

40 MHz 42

603
Table 192: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Device Type Antenna Type Channel Antenna Conducted Power EIRP Limit
BW Gain Limit (dBm) (dBm)

(dBi)

USA, AP Sector, 5 MHz 16 20 36

Canada, Omni
Brazil, 10 MHz 16 20 36
Other FCC 15 MHz 16 20 36

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

SM, BH Flat plate, 5 MHz - 27 -

4ft parabolic,
6ft parabolic 10 MHz - 27 -
(26 for 5733 MHz
and below)

15 MHz - 27 -

Note 20 MHz - 27 -

Canada is limited to 4ft 30 MHz - 27 -

parabolic Antenna type.
40 MHz - 27 -

Mexico Any Any 5 MHz - - 30

10 MHz - - 33

15 MHz - - 34

20 MHz - - 36

30 MHz - - 36

40 MHz - - 36

Other Any Any 5 MHz - 27 -

604
Table 193: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain and High
Gain

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted Power Limit EIRP Limit
Type Type BW Gain (dBm) (dBm)

(dBi)

FCC SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 20 36

Gain
10 MHz 16 20 36

15 MHz 16 20 36

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

23 dBi High 5 MHz 23 13 36

Gain
10 MHz 23 13 36

15 MHz 23 13 36

20 MHz 23 13 36

30 MHz 23 13 36

40 MHz 23 13 36

ETSI/Other SM 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 16 14 30

ETSI Gain
10 MHz 16 17 33

15 MHz 16 18 34

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

23 dBi High 5 MHz 23 7 30

Gain
10 MHz 23 10 33

15 MHz 23 11 34

20 MHz 23 13 36

30 MHz 23 13 36

40 MHz 23 13 36

605
Table 194: Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450 Series

Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP Limit

Type Type BW Gain Power Limit (dBm)
(dBm)
(dBi)

Australia, India, United AP Sector 5 MHz 16 20 36

States
10 MHz 16 20 36

15 MHz 16 20 36

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

Vietnam AP Sector 5 MHz 16 8 24

10 MHz 16 11 27

15 MHz 16 12 28

20 MHz 16 14 30

30 MHz 16 14 30

40 MHz 16 14 30

Brazil AP Sector 5 MHz 16 20 36

10 MHz 16 20 36

15 MHz 16 20 36

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

Canada AP Sector 5 MHz 16 10 26

10 MHz 16 20 36

15 MHz 16 20 36

20 MHz 16 20 36

30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

606
Countries Device Antenna Channel Antenna Conducted EIRP Limit
Type Type BW Gain Power Limit (dBm)
(dBm)
(dBi)

Denmark, Finland, AP Sector 5 MHz 16 14 30

Germany, Greece,
Iceland, Ireland, 10 MHz 16 17 33
Liechtenstein, Norway, 15 MHz 16 18 34
Portugal, Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland, United 20 MHz 16 20 36
Kingdom,
30 MHz 16 20 36

40 MHz 16 20 36

Indonesia AP Sector 5 MHz 16 14 30

10 MHz 16 17 33

15 MHz 16 18 34

20 MHz 16 20 36

Table 195: Extrapolated EIRP and Tx power limits for PMP 450 MicroPoP Series

5/10 MHz 20/40 MHz

Rounded MicroPoP MicroPoP MicroPoP Rounded MicroPoP MicroPoP MicroPoP

EIRP Omni Sector Connectorized EIRP Omni Sector Connectorized
Tx power Tx power Tx power Tx powe

4.9 26 dBm 26 dBm 26 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm 24 dBm

GHz

5.1 26 dBm 17 dBm 13 dBm EIRP – 32 dBm 23 dBm 19 dBm EIRP –

GHz Antenna Gain Antenna Gain

5.2 25 dBm 16 dBm 12 dBm EIRP – 25 dBm 16 dBm 12 dBm EIRP –

GHz Antenna Gain Antenna Gain

5.4 25 dBm 16 dBm 12 dBm EIRP – 25 dBm 16 dBm 12 dBm EIRP –

GHz Antenna Gain Antenna Gain

5.8 32 dBm 23 dBm 19 dBm EIRP – 31 dBm 22 dBm 18 dBm EIRP –

GHz Antenna Gain Antenna Gain

Note

For releases 16.0 and later, although sector transmission mode EIRP is limited to 42
dBm, ROW GUI configuration limit allows a setting of up to 48 dBm. This allows the
software to transmit as high as 48 dBm for ROW regions, depending on the
modulation mode and transmission mode in use. For a detailed explanation, see the
Release 16.0 training slides available at:
https://learning.cambiumnetworks.com/learn/course/121/PMP450SoftwareRelease16

607
Country specific frequency range
Frequency range 900 MHz band
Table 196: Frequency range per country – 900 MHz band
Region Country Channel center Frequency limits Notes
(MHz)

Lower Upper

Other Other 902 928

Other-FCC 902 928

North Canada 902 928

America
United States 902 928

Mexico 902 928

Puerto Rico 902 928

Oceania Australia 915 928 HW limits:

l Max Tx power 19 dBm 1

x 10 MHz channel on
923 or 922 MH
l 1 x 7 MHz channel
between 920.5 and
924.5 MHz inclusive
l 2 x adjacent 5 MHz
channels between
919.5 and 925.5
inclusive

New Zealand 915 928 EIRP is 36 dBm between 915

and 920, and 30 above 920.
920.5 (7 MHz) 924.5 (7 MHz)
HW limits:
919.5 (5 MHz) 925.5 (5 MHz)
l Max Tx power 19 dBm
across the entire band
1 x 10 MHz channel on
923 or 922 MHz
l 1 x 7 MHz channel
between 920.5 and
924.5 MHz inclusive
l 2 x adjacent 5 MHz
channels between
919.5 and 925.5
inclusive

South Brazil 902 907.5

America
915 928

608
Region Country Channel center Frequency limits Notes
(MHz)

Lower Upper

Ecuador 902 928

Colombia 902 928

Panama 902 928

Venezuela 902 928

Frequency range 2.4 GHz band

Table 197: Frequency range per country – 2.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits

Typ BW (MHz)

Lower Upper

Canada, Any 5 MHz 2402.5 2481

United States, Other, Other-FCC and
Indonesia * 10 MHz 2405 2478.5

15 MHz 2407.5 2476

20 MHz 2410 2473.5

(*) Usable frequency range 2402-2482 MHz

Frequency range 3.5 GHz band

Table 198: Frequency range per country – 3.5 GHz band PMP/PTP 450/450i/450b/450m Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Brazil, Other-ETSI Any 5 MHz 3402.5 3597.5

7 MHz 3403.5 3596.5

10 MHz 3405 3595

20 MHz 3410 3590

China Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3397.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3396.5

10 MHz 3305 3395

20 MHz 3310 3390

609
Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Others Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3847.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3846.5

10 MHz 3305 3845

15 MHz 3307.5 3842.5

20 MHz 3310 3840

30 MHz 3315 3835

40 MHz 3320 3830

Canada Any 5 MHz 3452.5 3597.5

7 MHz 3453.5 3596.5

10 MHz 3455 3595

15 MHz 3457.5 3592.5

20 MHz 3460 3590

30 MHz 3465 3585

40 MHz 3470 3580

Mexico Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3597.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3596.5

10 MHz 3305 3595

15 MHz 3307.5 3592.5

20 MHz 3310 3590

30 MHz 3315 3585

40 MHz 3320 3580

Australia Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3597.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3596.5

10 MHz 3305 3595

15 MHz 3307.5 3592.5

20 MHz 3310 3590

30 MHz 3315 3580

610
Frequency range 3.65 GHz band
Table 199: Frequency range per country – 3.65 GHz band PMP/PTP 450/450i/450b/450m Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Australia and India Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3797.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3796.5

10 MHz 3305 3795

15 MHz 3307.5 3792.5

20 MHz 3310 3790

30 MHz 3315 3785

40 MHz* 3320 3780

Note

Australia does not support 40 MHz channel bandwidth.

Other Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3897.5

7 MHz 3303.5 3896.5

10 MHz 3305 3895

15 MHz 3307.5 3892.5

20 MHz 3310 3890

30 MHz 3315 3885

40 MHz 3320 3880

Other – ETSI Any 5 MHz 3412.5 3797.5

10 MHz 3415 3795

15 MHz 3417.5 3792.5

20 MHz 3420 3790

30 MHz 3425 3785

40 MHz 3430 3780

Indonesia Any 5 MHz 3602.5 3797.5

7 MHz 3603.5 3796.5

10 MHz 3605 3795

20 MHz 3610 3790

40 MHz 3620 3780

611
Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Mexico Any 5 MHz 3302.5 3747.5

10 MHz 3305 3745

20 MHz 3310 3740

40 MHz 3320 3730

612
Frequency range 4.9 GHz band
Table 200: Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

USA, Any 5 MHz 4942.5 4987.5

Mexico, Canada,
Other FCC 10 MHz 4945 4985

15 MHz 4947.5 4982.5

20 MHz 4950 4980

Brazil Any 5 MHz 4912.5 4987.5

10 MHz 4915 4985

15 MHz 4917.5 4982.5

20 MHz 4920 4980

Other Any 5 MHz 4902.5 5147.5

10 MHz 4905 5145

15 MHz 4907.5 5142.5

20 MHz 4910 5140

30 MHz 4915 5135

40 MHz 4920 5130

Table 201: Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP 450b Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz) EIRP (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi Mid-Gain 5 MHz 4942.5 4987.5 26

23 dBi High Gain 10 MHz 4945 4985 26

15 MHz 4947.5 4982.5 26

20 MHz 4950 4980 24

613
Table 202: Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

USA,Mexico, Canada,Other FCC Any 5 MHz 4942.5 4987.5

10 MHz 4945 4985

15 MHz 4947.5 4982.5

20 MHz 4950 4980

Brazil Any 5 MHz 4912.5 4987.5

10 MHz 4915 4985

15 MHz 4917.5 4982.5

20 MHz 4920 4980

Other Any 5 MHz 4902.5 5147.5

10 MHz 4905 5145

15 MHz 4907.5 5142.5

20 MHz 4910 5140

30 MHz 4915 5135

40 MHz 4920 5130

614
Frequency range 5.1 GHz band
Table 203: Frequency range per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

United States, FCC Any 5 MHz 5157.51 5247.5

10 MHz 51602 5245

15 MHz 51653 5242.5

20 MHz 51704 5240

30 MHz 51805 5235

40 MHz 51806 5230

ETSI Any 5 MHz 5155 5245

10 MHz 5155 5245

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5

20 MHz 5160 5240

Other Any 5 MHz 5152.5 5247.5

10 MHz 5155 5245

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5

20 MHz 5160 5240

30 MHz 5165 5235

40 MHz 5170 5230

1Center frequency 5160 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequency is 20.6 dBm.

2Center frequency 5165 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequencies is 22.8 dBm.

3Center frequency 5170 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequencies is 23 dBm.

4Center frequency 5177.5 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequency is 23 dBm.

5Center frequency 5190 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequency is 22.9 dBm.

6Center frequency 5205 is the lowest allowed at full power. Max power for edge frequency is 22.9 dBm.

615
Table 204: Frequency range per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi 5 MHz 5155 5247.5 9

10 MHz 5155 5245 6

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5 6

20 MHz 5160 5240 6

30 MHz 5165 5235 6

40 MHz* 5170 5230 6

* Channel center 5170 needs a 4 dB backoff.

Table 205: Frequency range per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450 MicroPoP Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi 5 MHz 5155 5247.5 26

10 MHz 5155 5245 26

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5 32

20 MHz 5160 5240 32

30 MHz 5165 5235 32

40 MHz 5170 5230 32

Table 206: Frequency range per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450b High Gain Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 23 dBi 5 MHz 51551 52452 10

10 MHz 5155 5245 8

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5 8

20 MHz 5160 5235 8

30 MHz 5165 5235 8

40 MHz 51703 52304 8

1 Center frequency 5155 needs a 9 dB backoff

616
2 Center frequency 5245 needs a 2 dB backoff
3 Center frequencies 5170 and 5172.5 need a 9 dB backoff
4 The FCC grant allows up to 5250

Table 207: Frequency range per country – 5.1 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits (MHz) Conducted6

Type BW Power (dBm)
Lower Upper

United States, Any 5 MHz 5162.5 5247.5 30

Canada and FCC4
10 MHz 5160 5197.5 26

5200 5245 33

15 MHz 5165 5197.5 26

5200 5242.5 34

20 MHz 5170 5197.5 26

5200 5240 36

30 MHz 5165 5180 30

5182.5 5192.5 33

5195 5235 36

40 MHz 51705 5185 30

5187.5 5197.5 33

5200 5230 36

ETSI Any 5 MHz 5152.5 1 5247.51 33

10 MHz 5155 5245 36

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5 362

20 MHz 5160 5240 363

Other Any 5 MHz 5152.5 5247.5 48

10 MHz 5155 5245 48

15 MHz 5157.5 5242.5 48

20 MHz 5160 5240 48

30 MHz 5165 5235 48

40 MHz 5170 5230 48

1 Frequencies 5152.5 and 5247.5 are supported by the PMP 450m AP, but not by the PMP 450i SM. As this
is the only SM the AP can communicate with in this band, these frequencies should not be available at the
AP until there is an SM that supports them as well.

617
2 The regulatory EIRP limit is 37 dBm, but the hardware supports up to 36 dBm.
3 The regulatory EIRP limit is 39 dBm, but the hardware supports up to 36 dBm.
4 The split EIRP limits are currently applied to all FCC regions. They are needed for US and Canada.

Note that center frequencies from 5165 to 5175 are not supported by the SM, and therefore are not
allowed in the 450m SW.
5 Note that center frequencies from 5170 to 5177.5 are not supported by the SM, and therefore are not
allowed in the 450m SW.

However, the 450m has a grant for these frequencies, and could be enabled in the future if any SM
supports them.
6This EIRP value is the limit of the parameter configured in the PMP 450m GUI. Note that not all
operating modes achieve the same EIRP.

The limits are as follows:

Sector mode 42 dBm

Beamforming mode QPSK 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 16-QAM 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 64-QAM 46 dBm

Beamforming mode 256-QAM 44 dBm

MU-MIMO mode 44 dBm

Frequency range 5.2 GHz band

Table 208: Frequency range per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

United States, FCC Any 10 MHz 5255 5340

15 MHz 5257.5 5337.5

20 MHz 5260 5332.52

30 MHz 5265 5332.53

40 MHz 5270 53254

Other Any 10 MHz 5255 5345

15 MHz 5257.5 5342.5

20 MHz 5260 5340

30 MHz 5265 5335

40 MHz 5270 5330

618
2Center frequency 5330 is the highest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 20.4
dBm.
3Center frequency 5317.5 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 20.8
dBm.
4Center frequency 5310 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequencies is 20.5
dBm.

619
Table 209: Frequency range per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency Conducted Power

limits (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi 10 MHz 5255 5340 3

15 MHz 5257.5 5337.5 6

20 MHz 5260 5337.5 6

30 MHz 5265 5330 6

40 MHz 5270 5330 (*) 6

(*) Last channel at full power is 5325. Channel centers 5327.5 and 5330 need a
power back off of 5 dB.

Table 210: Frequency range per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450b High Gain Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 23 dBi 10 MHz 52551 5340 2

15 MHz 5257.5 5337.5 3

20 MHz 5260 5335 3

30 MHz 5265 5332.5 3

40 MHz 52702 53303 3

1 The FCC grant allows down to 5250

2 Center frequency 5270 can have power increased by 2 dB.
3 Center frequencies 5325, 5327.5 and 5330 need a 6 dB backoff

620
Table 211: Frequency range per country – 5.2 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)5

Lower Upper

United States, Any 5 MHz 5252.5 5347.51 24

FCC
10 MHz 5255 5300 27

5302.5 5340 25

15 MHz 5257.5 5300 282

5302.5 5335 25

20 MHz 5260 5300 30

5302.5 53403 25

30 MHz 5265 5335 30

40 MHz 5270 53304 30

Other Any 5 MHz 5252.5 5347.5 48

10 MHz 5255 5345 48

15 MHz 5257.5 5342.5 48

20 MHz 5260 5340 48

30 MHz 5265 5335 48

40 MHz 5270 5330 48

1 Frequencies 5345 and 5347.5 are supported by the PMP 450m AP, but not by the PMP 450i SM. As this
is the only SM the AP can communicate with in this band, these frequencies should not be available at the
AP until there is an SM that supports them as well.
2 PMP 450m is certified for up to 29 dBm, but the regulatory limit is 28.7 dBm, and the GUI only allows
integer inputs.
3Frequency above 5332.5 are not supported by the PMP 450i SM. As this is the only SM available in this
band, the PMP 450m AP should also not offer these frequencies until there is an SM able to support them.
4Max frequency supported by 450i SM is 5325 MHz. This is also the SW limit for 450m until there is an
SM that supports the additional frequencies.
5This EIRP value is the limit of the parameter configured in the PMP 450m GUI. Note that not all
operating modes achieve the same EIRP.

The limits are as follows:

Sector mode 42 dBm

Beamforming mode QPSK 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 16-QAM 48 dBm

621
Beamforming mode 64-QAM 46 dBm

Beamforming mode 256-QAM 44 dBm

MU-MIMO mode 44 dBm

Frequency range 5.4 GHz band

Table 212: Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Mexico Any 5 MHz 5472.5 5722.5

10 MHz 5475 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5685

Other Any 5 MHz 5472.5 5722.5

10 MHz 5475 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5705

Other FCC12 5 MHz 54753 57201 4

10 MHz 54755 5717.56

15 MHz 5480 5717.5

20 MHz 5482.58 57151

30 MHz 5487.59 5710

40 MHz 5497.510 5705

622
 Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Other ETSI 5 MHz 54722 5597.5

5652.57 57208

10 MHz 5475 5595

5655 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5

5657.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5590

5660 5715

Other ETSI 30 MHz 5485 5585

5665 5710

40 MHz 5490 5580

5670 5705

1 Beyond highest full power channel. SW does not reduce max power.
2 Center frequency 5487.5 is the lowest allowed at full power
3Center frequency 5477.5 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 7
dBm. PMP 450 SM supports down to 5472.5
4 PMP 450 SM supports up to 5722.5
5Center frequency 5477.5 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 12.1
dBm. PMP 450 SM supports down to 5475
6 PMP 450 SM supports up to 5720
7 5 MHz channel not available in DFS regions for PMP 450b.
8Center frequency 5495 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 16.5
dBm
9Center frequency 5495 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is 22.8
dBm.
10Center frequency 5507.5 is the lowest allowed at full power. Maximum power for edge frequency is
22.4 dBm
11 PMP 450 AP needs the 5600-5650 MHz exclusion, as it was never re-certified with the new rules.

All other products do not need this notch.

623
Table 213: Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-Gain Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency Conducted Power

limits (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi 10 MHz 5477.5 5720 3

15 MHz 5480 5717.5 8

20 MHz 5482.5 5715 8

30 MHz 5487.5 5710 8

40 MHz 5490 (*) 5705 8

(*) First channel at full power is 5495. Channel centers 5490 and 5492.5 need a
power backoff of 5 dB.

Table 214: Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450b High Gain Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power

Type BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 23 dBi 10 MHz 54801 57202 3

15 MHz 5487.5 5717.5 6

20 MHz 5490 5715 6

30 MHz 5495 5710 6

40 MHz 54902 57054 6

1 Center frequency 5480 and below needs a 1 dB backoff

2 The FCC grant allows up to 5725

Center frequencies from 5715 and above need a 1 dB backoff

3 Center frequencies 5495 and below need a 5 dB backoff
4 Center frequencies 5700 and above need a 6 dB backoff

624
Table 215: Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series

Region Country Code Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits

code (MHz)

Lower Upper

Other Any 5 MHz 5472.5 5722.5

10 MHz 5475 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5705

Other-FCC 5 MHz 5475 5720

10 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5705

Other-ETSI 5 MHz 5472.5 5597.5

5652.5 5722.5

10 MHz 5475 5595

5655 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5

5657.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5460 5590

5640 5715

30 MHz 5485 5585

5665 5710

40 MHz 5490 5580

5670 5705

Oceania Australia 5 MHz 5472.5 5597.5

5652.5 5722.5

10 MHz 5475 5595

5645 5720

625
Region Country Code Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits
code (MHz)

Lower Upper

Oceania Australia 15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5

5657.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5465 5490

5640 5715

30 MHz 5485 5585

5665 5710

40 MHz 5490 5580

5670 5705

North Canada 10 MHz 5475 5597.5

America
5655 5722.5

15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5

5657.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5590

5660 5715

30 MHz 5485 5585

5665 5710

40 MHz 5490 5580

5670 5705

South Brazil 10 MHz 5475 5720

America
15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5705

Asia Vietnam 10 MHz 5475 5720

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5480 5715

30 MHz 5485 5710

40 MHz 5490 5705

626
Region Country Code Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits
code (MHz)

Lower Upper

Africa Algeria 5 MHz 5472.5 5667.5

10 MHz 5475 5665

15 MHz 5477.5 5662.5

20 MHz 5480 5660

30 MHz 5485 5655

40 MHz 5490 5650

Europe Europe (Denmark, Finland, France, 10 MHz 5475 5595

Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland,
Italy, Liechtenstein, Norway, 5655 5720
Portugal, Serbia, Spain, Switzerland, 15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5
United Kingdom)
5657.5 5717.5

20 MHz 5465 5490

5660 5715

30 MHz 5485 5585

5665 5710

40 MHz 5490 5580

5670 5705

627
Table 216: Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz) EIRP

(dBm)4

Lower Upper

United States, FCC Any 5 MHz 5475 5720 24

10 MHz 54753 5477.5 22

5480 57203 27

15 MHz 5477.5 5482.5 22

5485 5717.5 281

20 MHz 5480 5487.5 22

5490 5715 29

30 MHz 5485 5710 30

40 MHz 5490 5705 30

ETSI Any 5 MHz 5472.52 5597.5 24

5652.5 5722.5 24

10 MHz 5475 5595 27

5655 5720 27

15 MHz 5477.5 5592.5 28

5657.5 5717.5 28

20 MHz 5480 5590 30

5660 5715 30

30 MHz 5485 5585 30

5665 5710 30

40 MHz 5490 5585 30

5670 5705 30

Other Any 5 MHz 5472.5 5722.5 48

10 MHz 5475 5720 48

15 MHz 5477.5 5717.5 48

20 MHz 5480 5715 48

30 MHz 5485 5710 48

40 MHz 5490 5705 48

628
1PMP 450m is certified for up to 29 dBm, but the regulatory limit is 28.7 dBm, and the GUI only allows
integer inputs.
2 5472.5 can be used only with PMP 450 SMs. PMP 450i SMs do not support this center frequency.
3Edge frequencies are not supported by PMP 450i SMs, but they are supported by PMP 450 SMs. They
can be selected with the 450m AP as long as there are no PMP 450i SMs in the sector.
4This EIRP value is the limit of the parameter configured in the PMP 450m GUI. Note that not all
operating modes achieve the same EIRP.

The limits are as follows:

Sector mode 42 dBm

Beamforming mode QPSK 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 16-QAM 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 64-QAM 46 dBm

Beamforming mode 256-QAM 44 dBm

MU-MIMO mode 44 dBm

Frequency range 5.8 GHz band

Table 217: Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450i Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

USA, Any 5 MHz 57301 58452

Canada,
Brazil, 10 MHz 57303 5845
Other FCC 15 MHz 5732.54 5842.55

20 MHz 57356 5840

30 MHz 5740 5835

40 MHz 57457 58307

Mexico Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5847.5

10 MHz 5730 5845

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5

20 MHz 5735 5840

30 MHz 5740 5835

40 MHz 5745 5830

629
 Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz)

Lower Upper

Other Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5922.5

10 MHz 5730 5920

15 MHz 5732.5 5917.5

20 MHz 5735 5915

30 MHz 5740 5910

40 MHz 5745 5905

ETSI Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5872.5

10 MHz 5730 5870

15 MHz 5735 5867.5

20 MHz 5737.5 5865

30 MHz 5740 5860

40 MHz 5745 5855

1 PMP 450 SM supports down to 5727.5

2 PMP 450 SM supports up to 5847.5
3 At 5730 and 5732.5 Tx power limited to 26 dBm
4 At 5732.5 and 5735 Tx power limited to 26 dBm
5 At 5842.5, 5840, 5837.5 Tx power limited to 26 dBm
6 At 5735 and 5737.5 Tx power limited to 26 dBm
7 At all frequencies, power limited to 26 dBm

Table 218: Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450b Mid-GainSeries

Countries Antenna Type Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power
BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 16 dBi Mid- 5 MHz 5730 5845 19

Gain
10 MHz 5730 5845 19

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5 19

20 MHz 5735 5840 19

30 MHz 5740 5835 19

40 MHz 5745 5830 19

630
Table 219: Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450b High Gain Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel Channel center Frequency limits Conducted Power
BW (MHz) (dBm)

Lower Upper

FCC 23 dBi High 5 MHz 5730 5845 21

Gain
10 MHz 5730 5845 21

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5 21

20 MHz 5735 5840 21

30 MHz 5740 5835 21

40 MHz 5745 5830 21

Table 220: Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP/PTP 450 Series

Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits

Type BW (MHz)

Lower Upper

Denmark, Norway, United Kingdom, Any 10 MHz 5730 5790

Finland

5820 5845

15 MHz 5732.5 5787.5

5822.5 5842.5

20 MHz 5735 5785

5825 5840

30 MHz 5740 5780

5830 5835

40 MHz 5745 5775

5835 5830

Germany Any 10 MHz 5760 5870

15 MHz 5762.5 5867.5

20 MHz 5765 5865

30 MHz 5770 5860

40 MHz 5775 5855

631
Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits
Type BW (MHz)

Lower Upper

Spain Any 10 MHz 5730 5790

5820 5850

15 MHz 5732.5 5787.5

5822.5 5847.5

20 MHz 5735 5785

5825 5845

30 MHz 5740 5780

5830 5840

40 MHz 5745 5775

5835 5835

Greece Any 10 MHz 5730 5790

15 MHz 5732.5 5787.5

20 MHz 5735 5785

30 MHz 5740 5780

40 MHz 5745 5775

Portugal, Iceland, Serbia Any 10 MHz 5730 5870

15 MHz 5732.5 5867.5

20 MHz 5735 5865

30 MHz 5740 5860

40 MHz 5745 5855

632
Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits
Type BW (MHz)

Lower Upper

Switzerland, Liechtenstein Any 10 MHz 5730 5790

5820 5870

15 MHz 5732.5 5787.5

5822.5 5867.5

20 MHz 5735 5785

5825 5865

30 MHz 5740 5780

5830 5860

40 MHz 5745 5775

5835 5855

Australia Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5847.5

10 MHz 5730 5845

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5

20 MHz 5735 5840

30 MHz 5740 5835

40 MHz 5745 5830

Canada, United States Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5847.5

10 MHz 5730 5845

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5

20 MHz 5735 5840

30 MHz 5740 5835

40 MHz 5745 5830

India Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5872.5

10 MHz 5730 5870

15 MHz 5832.5 5867.5

20 MHz 5735 5865

30 MHz 5840 5860

40 MHz 5845 5855

633
Countries Antenna Channel Channel center Frequency limits
Type BW (MHz)

Lower Upper

Brazil, Vietnam Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5847.5

10 MHz 5730 5845

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5

20 MHz 5735 5840

30 MHz 5740 5835

40 MHz 5745 5830

Indonesia Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5822.5

10 MHz 5730 5820

15 MHz 5732.5 5817.5

20 MHz 5735 5815

Malaysia Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5872.5

10 MHz 5830 5870

20 MHz 5835 5865

634
Table 221: Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band PMP 450m Series

Countries Antenna Type Channel BW Channel center Frequency limits (MHz) EIRP

Lower Upper (dBm)1

United States, FCC Any 5 MHz 5730 5845 36

10 MHz 5730 5845 36

15 MHz 5732.5 5842.5 36

20 MHz 5735 5840 36

30 MHz 5740 5835 36

40 MHz 5745 5830 36

ETSI Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5872.5 30

10 MHz 5730 5870 33

15 MHz 5735 5867.5 34

20 MHz 5737.5 5865 36

30 MHz 5740 5860 36

40 MHz 5745 5855 36

Other Any 5 MHz 5727.5 5922.5 48

10 MHz 5730 5920 48

15 MHz 5732.5 5917.5 48

20 MHz 5735 5915 48

30 MHz 5740 5910 48

40 MHz 5745 5905 48

1This EIRP value is the limit of the parameter configured in the PMP 450m GUI. Note that not all
operating modes achieve the same EIRP.

The limits are as follows:

Sector mode 42 dBm

Beamforming mode QPSK 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 16-QAM 48 dBm

Beamforming mode 64-QAM 46 dBm

Beamforming mode 256-QAM 44 dBm

MU-MIMO mode 44 dBm

635
FCC specific information
FCC compliance testing
With GPS synchronization installed, the system has been tested for compliance to US (FCC)
specifications. It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA. These limits have been designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference. However, the equipment can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to other radio communications. There is no guarantee that interference does not occur in a
particular installation.

Note

A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential

environment, notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial
environments.

Note

Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed (and qualified) the 450 Platform
Family ODUs to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential
for interference, the 450 Platform Family ODU range is not marketed for use in a
residential environment.

FCC IDs
Table 222: US FCC IDs

FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum

Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0021 900 MHz 900 MHz 5 MHz 904.5 – 925.5 25 dBm

and PMP 450i AP MHz
Z8H89FT0022 & PMP 450
SM 7 MHz 905.5 – 924.5 25 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 907.0 – 923.0 25 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 909.5 – 920.5 25 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 912.0 – 918.0 MHz 25 dBm

636
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0003 2.4 GHz PMP 2.4 GHz 5 MHz 2402.5 – 2480.0 19 dBm
and 450 AP & SM MHz
Z8H89FT004
10 MHz 2405.0 – 2477.5 19 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 2407.5 – 2475.0 19 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 2410.0 – 2472.5 19 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 2415.0 – 2467.5 19 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0009 3.5 GHz PMP 3.5 GHz 5 MHz 3452.5 – 3647.5 25 dBm
and 450i AP & SM MHz
Z8H89FT0010
7 MHz 3453.5 – 3646.5 25 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3455.0 – 3645 25 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3457.5 – 3642.5 25 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3460.0 – 3640 25 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3465.0 – 3635 25 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3470.0 – 3630 25 dBm

MHz

637
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0009 3.65 GHz 3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 -3697.5 19 dBm

and PMP 450i AP MHz
Z8H89FT0010 & SM
7 MHz 3653.5 – 3696.5 21 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3655.0 – 3695.0 22 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3657.5 – 3692.5 24 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 25 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3665.0 – 3685.0 25 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 25 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0009 3.5 GHz PMP 3.5 GHz 5 MHz 3452.5 – 3647.5 22 dBm
and 450 AP & SM MHz
Z8H89FT0010
7 MHz 3453.5 – 3646.5 22 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3455.0 – 3645 22 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3457.5 – 3642.5 22 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3460.0 – 3640 22 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3465.0 – 3635 22 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3470.0 – 3630 22 dBm

MHz

638
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0009 3.65 GHz 3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 -3697.5 19 dBm

and PMP 450 AP MHz
Z8H89FT0010 & SM
7 MHz 3653.5 – 3696.5 21 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3655.0 – 3695.0 22 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3657.5 – 3692.5 22 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 22 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3665.0 – 3685.0 22 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 22 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0053 3.5 GHz PMP 3.5 GHz 5 MHz 3452.5 – 3647.5 27 dBm
450b High MHz
Gain SM
7 MHz 3453.5 – 3646.5 27 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3455.0 – 3645 27 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3457.5 – 3642.5 27 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3460.0 – 3640 27 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3465.0 – 3635 27 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3470.0 – 3630 27 dBm

MHz

639
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0053 3.65 GHz 3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 -3697.5 27 dBm

PMP 450b MHz
High Gain SM
7 MHz 3653.5 – 3696.5 27 dBm
MHz

10 MHz 3655.0 – 3695.0 27 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 3657.5 – 3692.5 27 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 27 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 3665.0 – 3685.0 27 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 27 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942.5 – 4987.5 27 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/ 450i (PMP/PTP MHz
and QWP- AP, SM & PTP 450i only)
50450I 450/450i BH 10 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 27 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 4947.5 – 4982.5 27 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 27 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 4955.0 – 4975.0 27 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 4960.0 – 4970.0 27 dBm

MHz

640
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 5.1 GHz 5 MHz 5160.0 – 5247.5 21 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/ 450i (PMP/PTP MHz
and QWP- AP, SM & PTP 450i only)
50450I 450/450i BH 10 MHz 5165.0 – 5245.0 23 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 5170.0 – 5242.5 23 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5177.5 – 5240.0 23 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5190.0 – 5235.0 22 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5205.0 – 5230.0 22 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 5.2 GHz 5 MHz 5252.5 – 5330.0 20 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/ 450i (PMP/PTP MHz
and QWP- AP, SM & PTP 450i only)
50450I 450/450i BH 10 MHz 5255.0 – 5340.0 27 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 5257.5 – 5337.5 27 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5330.0 – 5332.5 21 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5317.5.0 – 5332.5 21 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5310.0 – 5325.0 21 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 5.4 GHz 5 MHz 5475.0 – 5720.0 27 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/450i MHz
and QWP- AP, SM & PTP
50450I 450/450i BH 10 MHz 5477.5 –5717.5 27 dBm
MHz

Note

For 10 MHz, lower frequency at 5475.0 is also allowed

with a maximum power limited to 12 dBm.

15 MHz 5478.0 – 5717.5 27 dBm

MHz

641
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 20 MHz 5482.5 – 5715.0 27 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/450i MHz
and QWP- AP, SM & PTP
50450I 450/450i BH Note

For 20 MHz, center frequency at 5495.0

is the lowest allowed at full power and
the maximum power for edge frequency
is limited to 17 dBm.

30 MHz 5487.5 – 5710 MHz 27 dBm

Note

For 30 MHz, center frequency at 5495.0

is the lowest allowed at full power and
the maximum power for edge frequency
is limited to 23 dBm.

40 MHz 5497.5 – 5705 27 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0001, Note
Z8H89FT0002
and QWP- For 40 MHz, center frequency at 5507.5
50450I is the lowest allowed and the maximum
power for edge frequency is limited to 22
dBm.

642
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 5.8 GHz 5 MHz 5730.0 – 5872.5 27 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450/450i AP MHz
and QWP- SM & PTP
50450I 450/450i BH 10 MHz 5730.0 – 5870.0 27 dBm
MHz

Note

For 10 MHz, Tx power for lower

frequencies at 5730 and 5732.5 is limited
to 26 dBm.

15 MHz 5732.5 – 5867.5 27 dBm

MHz

Note

For 15 MHz,

Tx power for lower frequency at 5732.5

and 5732 is limited to 26 dBm.

Tx power for higher frequencies at

5842.5, 5840, 5837.5 is limited to 26
dBm.

20 MHz 5735.0 – 5865.0 27 dBm

MHz

Note

For 20 MHz, Tx power for lower

frequencies at 5735 and 5737.5 is limited
to 26 dBm.

30 MHz 5740.0 – 5860.0 27 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5745.0 – 5855.0 26 dBm

MHz

643
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0032 5 GHz PMP 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942.5 – 4987.5 26 dBm

450b Mid- MHz
Gain SM
10 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 26 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 4947.5 – 4982.5 26 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 24 dBm

MHz

5.1 GHz 5 MHz 5155 – 5247.5 MHz 9 dBm

10 MHz 5155 – 5245.0 MHz 6 dBm

15 MHz 5157.5 – 5242.5 6 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5160.0 – 5240.0 6 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5165.0 – 5235.0 6 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5170.0 – 5230.0 6 dBm

MHz

Z8H89FT0032 5 GHz PMP 5.2 GHz 10 MHz 5255.0 – 5340.0 3 dBm

450b Mid- MHz
Gain or 450
MicroPoP 15 MHz 5257.5 – 5337.5 6 dBm
MHz

Z8H89FT0042 5 GHz 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942-5 – 4987.5 26 dBm

PMP/PTP MHz
450b High
Gain or 450b
Retro

644
FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

Z8H89FT0001, 5 GHz PMP 5.4 GHz 5 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 27 dBm

Z8H89FT0002 450 AP, SM & MHz
and QWP- PTP 450 BH
50450I 10 MHz 4947.5 – 4982.5 27 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 27 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4955.0 – 4975.0 27 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 4960.0 – 4970.0 27 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5490.0 – 5705 22 dBm

MHz

5.8 GHz 5 MHz 5730.0 – 5872.5 22 dBm

MHz

10 MHz 5730.0 – 5870.0 22 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 5732.5 – 5867.5 22 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5735.0 – 5865.0 22 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5740.0 – 5860.0 22 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5745.0 – 5855.0 22 dBm

MHz

QWP-30450M 3.65 GHz 3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 -3697.5 37 dBm

PMP 450m MHz
AP
20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 39 dBm
MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 43 dBm

MHz

645
 FCC ID Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth Combined Tx
Output Power

QWP-50450M 5 GHz PMP 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942.5 – 4987.5 48 dBm

450m AP MHz

10 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 47 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 4952.5 - 4982.5 48 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 48 dBm

MHz

5.1 GHz 5 MHz 5152.5 -5247.5 36 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5160.0 – 5240.0 36 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5170.0 – 5230.0 36 dBm

MHz

5.2 GHz 5 MHz 5252.5 – 5347.5 30 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5260.0 – 5340.0 30 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5270.0 – 5330.0 30 dBm

MHz

5.4 GHz 5 MHz 5472.5 – 5722.5 30 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5480.0 – 5715.0 30 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5490.0 – 5705.0 30 dBm

MHz

5.8 GHz 5 MHz 5727.5 – 5845 36 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5735.0 – 5840.0 36 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5745.0 – 5830.0 36 dBm

MHz

(*) 27 dBm conducted power for 450i Series and 22 dBm conducted power for 450 Series

646
FCC approved antenna list for 450i
The lists of antennas which have been approved for operation by the FCC are provided in:

l USA approved antenna list 4.9 GHz for 4.9 GHz

l USA approved antenna list 5.1 and 5.2 GHz for 5.1 and 5.2 GHz
l USA approved antenna list 5.4 GHz for 5.4 GHz
l USA approved antenna list 5.8 GHz for 5.8 GHz

Note

Any antenna of the same type and of gain equal or lower than the one approved
by the FCC can be used in the countries following the FCC rules.

Table 223: USA approved antenna list 4.9 GHz

Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain

(dBi)

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23.0

Networks

2 ft dual polarised flat Mars Antennas MA-WA56-DP-28N 28.0

plate

4 ft parabolic dual Gabriel Dual QuickFire QFD4- 33.7

polarised Antennas 49-N

6 ft parabolic dual Gabriel QuickFire QF6-49-N 37.2

polarised Antennas

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16.0

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i Cambium N/A 17.0

AP Networks

90° sectorised Cambium 85009324001 17.0

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 17.0

Networks

Omni- Dual polar omni- KP KPPA-5.7-DPOMA 13.0

directional directional

647
Table 224: USA approved antenna list 5.1 and 5.2 GHz

Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain

(dBi)

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23.0

Networks

2ft dual polarised flat plate Mars Antennas MA-WA56-DP- 28.5

28N

4ft parabolic dual polarised Gabriel Antennas PX4F-52-N7A/A 34.5

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16.0

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i AP Cambium N/A 17.0

Networks

90° sectorised Cambium 85009324001 17.0

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 17.0

Networks

Omni- Dual polar omni-directional KP KPPA-5.7- 13.0

directional DPOMA

Dual polar omni-directional Mars Antennas MA-WO56-DP10 10.0

Table 225: USA approved antenna list 5.4 GHz

Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain

(dBi)

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23.0

Networks

2 ft dual polarised flat plate Mars Antennas MA-WA56-DP- 28.5

28N

2 ft dual polarised parabolic MTI MT-486013-NVH 28.5

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16.0

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i AP Cambium N/A 17.0

Networks

90° sectorised Cambium 85009324001 17.0

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 17.0

Networks

Omni- Dual polar omni-directional KP KPPA-5.7- 13.0

directional DPOMA

Dual polar omni-directional Mars Antennas MA-WO56-DP10 10.0

648
Table 226: USA approved antenna list 5.8 GHz

Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain

(dBi)

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23.0

Networks

2 ft dual polarised flat plate Mars Antennas MA-WA56-DP- 28.0

28N

4 ft parabolic dual polarised Gabriel Antennas PX4F-52-N7A/A 35.3

6 ft Parabolic dual polarised Gabriel Antennas PX6F-52/A 38.1

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16.0

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i AP Cambium N/A 17.0

Networks

90° sectorised Cambium 85009324001 17.0

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 17.0

Networks

Omni- Dual polar omni-directional KP KPPA-5.7- 13.0

directional DPOMA

FCC approved antenna list for 450b Connectorized and 450

MicroPoP
Antennas with a maximum gain of 24 dBi were included in the approval.

Innovation Science and Economic Development Canada

(ISEDC) specific information
900 MHz ISEDC notification
Radio Standards Specification RSS-247, Issue 1, Digital Transmission Systems (DTSs), Frequency Hopping
Systems (FHSs) and License-Exempt Local Area Network (LE-LAN) Devices, is a new standard to replace
annexes 8 and 9 of RSS-210, Issue 8.

4.9 GHz ISEDC notification

The system has been approved under ISEDC RSS-111 for Public Safety Agency usage. The installer or
operator is responsible for obtaining the appropriate site licenses before installing or using the system.

Utilisation de la bande 4.9 GHz FCC et ISEDC

Le système a été approuvé en vertu d’ ISEDC RSS-111 pour l'utilisation par l'Agence de la Sécurité
publique. L'installateur ou l'exploitant est responsable de l'obtention des licences de appropriées avant

649
d'installer ou d'utiliser le système.

5.2 GHz and 5.4 GHz ISEDC notification

This device complies with ISEDC RSS-247. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. Users should be cautioned to take note that
high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 – 5350 MHz and
5650 – 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area
networks (LELAN).

For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to other
users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power
(EIRP) is not more than that permitted by the regulations. The transmitted power must be reduced to
achieve this requirement.

Utilisation de la bande 5.2 and 5.4 GHz ISEDC

Cet appareil est conforme à ISEDC RSS-247. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes: (1) Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interférences nuisibles, et (2) Cet appareil doit tolérer
toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
Les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars à haute puissance sont considères comme les
utilisateurs prioritaires de 5250 à 5350 MHz et 5650 à 5850 MHz et ces radars peuvent causer des
interférences et / ou interférer avec un réseau local ne nécessitant pas de licence.

Pour la version du produit avec antenne externe et afin de réduire le risque d'interférence avec d'autres
utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis afin que la puissance isotrope rayonnée
équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure à celle permise par la règlementation. Il peut être nécessaire de
réduire la puissance transmise doit être réduite pour satisfaire cette exigence.

ISEDC notification 5.8 GHz

RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) Licence-Exempt Radio Apparatus:

This device complies with ISEDC license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

In Canada, high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of the 5600 –
5650 MHz spectrum. These radars could cause interference or damage to license-exempt local area
network (LE-LAN) devices.

Utilisation de la bande 5.8 GHz ISEDC

RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) appareil utilisant la bande sans licence:

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Au Canada, les radars à haute puissance sont désignés comme utilisateurs principaux (ils ont la priorité)
dans la bande 5600 à 5650 MHz. Ces radars peuvent causer des interférences et / ou interférer avec un
réseau local ne nécessitant pas de licence.

650
ISEDC certification numbers
Table 227: ISEDC Certification Numbers – PMP 450i

ISEDC Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum combined Tx

Cert. Band Bandwidth output power

109W- 3 GHz 3.45 GHz 5 MHz 3452.5 – 3647.5 46 dBm

0028 MHz
AP, SM &
BH 20 MHz 3460.0 – 3640.0 45 dBm
MHz

40 MHz 3470.0 – 3630.0 46 dBm

MHz

3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 36 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 42 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 41 dBm

MHz

109AO- 5 GHz 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942.5 – 4987.5 24 dBm

50450I MHz
AP, SM &
BH 10 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 24 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 4952.5 - 4982.5 24 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 24 dBm

MHz

109AO- 5 GHz 5.2 GHz 5 MHz 5252.5 – 5342.5 11 dBm

50450I MHz
AP, SM &
BH 10 MHz 5255.0 – 5340.0 11 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 5257.5 – 5337.5 11 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5260.0 – 5332.5 11 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5265.0 – 5332.5 11 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5270.0 – 5325.0 11 dBm

MHz

651
ISEDC Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum combined Tx
Cert. Band Bandwidth output power

109AO- 5 GHz 5.4 GHz 5 MHz 5472.5 – 5722.5 11 dBm

50450I MHz
AP, SM &
BH 10 MHz 5475.0 – 5720.0 14 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 5477.5 – 5717.5 14 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5480.0 – 5715.0 16 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5485.0 – 5710.0 16 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5490.0 – 5705.0 16 dBm

MHz

109AO- 5 GH 5.8 GHz 5 MHz 5730.0 – 5845.0 28 dBm

50450I MHz
AP, SM &
BH 10 MHz 5730.0 – 5845.0 28 dBm
MHz

15 MHz 5732.5 – 5842.5 28 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5735.0 – 5840.0 28 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5740.0 – 5825.0 28 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5745.0 – 28dBm

5820.MHz

652
Table 228: ISEDC Certification Numbers – PMP 450m

ISEDC Cert. Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum

Band Bandwidth EIRP

109AO- 3 GHz PMP 450m 3.45 GHz 5 MHz 3452.5 – 3647.5 57 dBm
30450m AP MHz

20 MHz 3460.0 – 3640.0 57 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3470.0 – 3630.0 57 dBm

MHz

3.65 GHz 5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 57dBm

MHz

20 MHz 3660.0 – 3690.0 57 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 3670.0 – 3680.0 57dBm

MHz

109A0- 5 GHz PMP 450m 4.9 GHz 5 MHz 4942.5 – 4987.5 48 dBm
50450M AP MHz

10 MHz 4945.0 – 4985.0 48 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 4952.5 - 4982.5 48 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 4950.0 – 4980.0 48 dBm

MHz

109A0- 5 GHz PMP 450m 5.4 GHz 5 MHz 5472.5 – 5722.5 23.5 dBm
50450M AP MHz

10 MHz 5475.0 – 5720.0 27 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 5477.5 – 5717.5 29 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5480.0 – 5715.0 30 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5485.0 – 5710.0 30 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5490.0 – 5705.0 30 dBm

MHz

653
 ISEDC Cert. Product Frequency Channel Frequencies Maximum
Band Bandwidth EIRP

109A0- 5 GHz PMP 450m 5.8 GHz 5 MHz 5730.0 – 5845.0 36 dBm
50450M AP MHz

10 MHz 5730.0 – 5845.0 36 dBm

MHz

15 MHz 5732.5 – 5842.5 36 dBm

MHz

20 MHz 5735.0 – 5840.0 36 dBm

MHz

30 MHz 5265.0 – 5332.5 36 dBm

MHz

40 MHz 5270.0 – 5325.0 36 dBm

MHz

Canada approved antenna list

Under ISEDC regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using dedicated external antenna of a
type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by ISEDC . To reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain must be so chosen that the equivalent
isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.

Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une
antenne externe dédiée d'un type et un gain maximal (ou moins) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie
Canada. Afin de réduire le risque d'interférence radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son
gain doivent être choisis afin que la puissance irradiée isotrope équivalente (EIRP) ne dépasse pas
l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.

This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number) has been approved by ISEDC to
operate with the antenna types listed in Country specific radio regulations, Innovation Science and
Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information, Canada approved dedicated external
antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for
each dedicated external antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain
greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.

Cet émetteur radio (identifier l'appareil par son numéro de certification) a été approuvé par Industrie
Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenneexterne dédiée énumérées dans les règlements
radiophoniques spécifiques au pays, Country specific radio regulations, Innovation Science and
Economic Development Canada (ISEDC) specific information, Canada approved dedicated external
antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque
type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne s'ils ne sont pas inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur
au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour le fonctionnement de l'émetteur.

654
Table 229: Canada approved dedicated external antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz

Antenna type Description Manufacturer Reference Gain (dBi)

4.9 5.8
GHz GHz

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23 23

Networks

2 ft dual polarised flat plate MARS Antennas MA-WA56-DP- 28.5 28

28N

4 ft parabolic dual polarised Andrews PX4F-52-N7A/A N/A 35.3

Antennas

6 ft Parabolic dual polarised Gabriel Antennas QF6-49-N 37.2 N/A

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16 16

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i AP Cambium N/A 17.0

Networks

90°sector Cambium 85009324001 17 17

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 16 16

Networks

Omni- Omni-directional KP Antennas KPPA-5.7- 13 13

directional DPOMA

Omni-directional MARS Antennas MA-WO56-DP10 10 10

Table 230: Canada approved dedicated external antenna list 5.2 and 5.4 GHz

Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain

(dBi)

Directional Integrated flat plate Cambium N/A 23.0

Networks

2ft dual polarised flat plate Mars Antennas MA-WA56-DP- 28.5

28N

2ft dual polarised parabolic MTI MT-486013-NVH 28.5

655
Directivity Type Manufacturer Reference Stated Gain
(dBi)

Sector Integrated 90° sector flat Cambium A005240 16.0

plate Networks

Integrated 90° PMP 450i AP Cambium N/A 17.0

Networks

90° sectorised Cambium 85009324001 17.0

Networks

60° sectorised Cambium 85009325001 17.0

Networks

Omni- Dual polar omni-directional KP KPPA-5.7- 13.0

directional DPOMA

Dual polar omni-directional Mars Antennas MA-WO56-DP10 10.0

656
Chapter 5: Troubleshooting
This chapter contains procedures for identifying and correcting faults in a 450 Platform Family link. These
procedures can be performed either on a newly installed link, or on an operational link if communication
is lost, or after a lightning strike.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

l General troubleshooting procedure

l Troubleshooting procedures

l Power-up troubleshooting

l Power-up troubleshooting

l Logs

General troubleshooting procedure

General planning for troubleshooting
Effective troubleshooting depends in part on measures that you take before you experience trouble in
your network. Cambium recommends the following measures for each site:

l Identify troubleshooting tools that are available at your site (such as a protocol analyzer).

l Identify commands and other sources that can capture baseline data for the site. These may
include:

l Ping

l Tracert or traceroute

l Link Capacity Test results

l Throughput data

l Configuration tab captures

l Status tab captures

l Session logs

l Web browser used

l Start a log for the site.

l Include the following information in the log:

l Operating procedures

l Site-specific configuration records

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 657

 l Network topology

l Software releases, boot versions and FPGA firmware versions

l Types of hardware deployed

l Site-specific troubleshooting processes

l Escalation procedures
Capture baseline data into the log from the sources listed above

General fault isolation process

Effective troubleshooting also requires an effective fault isolation methodology that includes the
following:

l Attempting to isolate the problem to the level of a system, subsystem, or link, such as

l AP to SM

l AP to CMM4

l AP to GPS

l Backhaul (BH)

l Backhaul (BH) to CMM4

l Power

l Researching Event Logs of the involved equipment

l Interpreting messages in the Event Log

l Answering the questions listed in the following sections.

l Reversing the last previous corrective attempt before proceeding to the next.

l Performing only one corrective attempt at a time.

Questions to help isolate the problem

When a problem occurs, attempt to answer the following questions:

l What is the history of the problem?

l Have we changed something recently?

l Have we seen other symptoms before this?

l How wide-spread is the symptom?

l Is the problem on only a single SM? (If so, focus on that SM.)

l Is the problem on multiple SMs? If so

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 658

 o is the problem on one AP in the cluster? (If so, focus on that AP)
o is the problem on multiple, but not all, APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on those APs)
o is the problem on all APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on the CMM4 and the GPS
signal.)

l Based on data in the Event Log

l does the problem correlate to External Hard Resets with no WatchDog timers? (If so, this
indicates a loss of power. Correct your power problem.)

l is intermittent connectivity indicated? (If so, verify your configuration, power level, cables
and connections and the speed duplex of both ends of the link).

l does the problem correlate to loss-of-sync events?

l Are connections made via shielded cables?

l Does the GPS antenna have an unobstructed view of the entire horizon?

l Has the site grounding been verified?

Secondary Steps
After preliminary fault isolation is completed through the above steps, follow these:

l Check the Canopy knowledge base (http://community.cambiumnetworks.com/ to find whether

other network operators have encountered a similar problem.
l Proceed to any appropriate set of diagnostic steps. These are organized as follows:
o Module has lost or does not establish connectivity

o NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity

o SM Does Not Register to an AP
o Module has lost or does not gain sync
o Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity
o CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules
o Module Software Cannot be Upgraded
o Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible

Troubleshooting procedures
Proceed to any appropriate set of diagnostic steps. These are organized as follows:

l Module has lost or does not establish connectivity

l NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity

l SM Does Not Register to an AP

l Module has lost or does not gain sync

l Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity

l CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 659

 l Module Software Cannot be Upgraded

l Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible

Module has lost or does not establish connectivity

To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity, perform the following steps:

Procedure 29 Troubleshooting loss of connectivity

1 Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as routers, switches and
firewalls.

2 Set up the minimal amount of equipment.

3 On each end of the link:

l Check the cables and connections.

l Verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is correct.

l Verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.

l Access the General Status tab in the Home page of the module.

l Verify that the SM is registered.

l Verify that Received Power Level is -87 dBm or higher.

l Access the IP tab in the Configuration page of the module.

l Verify that IP addresses match and are in the same subnet.

l If RADIUS authentication is configured, ensure that the RADIUS server is operational

4 On the SM end of the link:

l Verify that the PC that is connected to the SM is correctly configured to obtain an IP

address through DHCP.

l Execute ipconfig (Windows) or ifconfig (linux)

l Verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.

5 On each end of the link:

l Access the General tab in the Configuration page of each module.

l Verify that the setting for Link Speeds (or negotiation) matches that of the other module.

l Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of each module.

l Verify that the Radio Frequency Carrier setting is checked in the Custom Radio Frequency
Scan Selection List.

l Verify that the Color Code setting matches that of the other module.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 660

 l Access the browser LAN settings (for example, at
Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings in Internet Explorer).

l Verify that none of the settings are selected.

l Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools page of the module.

l Perform a link test

l Verify that the link test results show efficiency greater than 90% in both the uplink and
downlink

l Execute ping.

l Verify that no packet loss was experienced.

l Verify that response times are not significantly greater than
l 15 ms from SM to AP
l 4 ms from AP to SM
l Replace any cables that you suspect may be causing the problem.

Note

A ping size larger than 1494 Bytes to a module times out and fails. However, a ping of
this size or larger to a system that is behind a Canopy module typically succeeds. It is
generally advisable to ping such a system, since Canopy handles that ping with the
same priority as is given all other transport traffic. The results are unaffected by ping
size and by the load on the Canopy module that brokers this traffic.

6 After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and variables that you
removed in Step 1.

NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish

connectivity
Before troubleshooting this problem, identify the NAT/DHCP configuration from the following list:

l NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface) and DHCP
Server

l NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)

l NAT with DHCP Server

l NAT without DHCP

To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity for a SM configured for NAT/DHCP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 30 Troubleshooting loss of connectivity for NAT/DHCP-configured SM

1 Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as routers, switches and
firewalls.

2 Set up the minimal amount of equipment.

3 On each end of the link:

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 661

 l Check the cables and connections.
l Verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is correct.
l Verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.

4 At the SM:

l Access the NAT Table tab in the Logs web page.

l Verify that the correct NAT translations are listed.
RESULT: NAT is eliminated as a possible cause if these translations are correct.

5 If this SM is configured for NAT with DHCP, then at the SM:

l Execute ipconfig (Windows) or ifconfig (Linux)

l Verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.
l If the PC does not have an assigned IP address, then

l enter ipconfig /release “Adapter Name”.

l enter ipconfig /renew “Adapter Name”.

l reboot the PC.

l after the PC has completed rebooting, execute ipconfig
l if the PC has an assigned IP address, then
l access the NAT DHCP Statistics tab in the Statistics web page of the SM.
l verify that DHCP is operating as configured.

6 After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and variables that you
removed in Step 1.

SM Does Not Register to an AP

To troubleshoot a SM failing to register to an AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 31 Troubleshooting SM failing to register to an AP

1 Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the SM.

2 Note the Color Code of the SM.

3 Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the AP.

4 Verify that the Color Code of the AP matches that of the SM.

5 Note the Radio Frequency Carrier of the AP.

6 Verify that the value of the RF Frequency Carrier of the AP is selected in the Custom Radio
Frequency Scan Selection List parameter in the SM.

7 In the AP, verify that the Max Range parameter is set to a distance slightly greater than the
distance between the AP and the furthest SM that must register to this AP.

8 Verify that no obstruction significantly penetrates the Fresnel zone of the attempted link.

9 Access the General Status tab in the Home page of each module.

10 Remove the bottom cover of the SM to expose the LEDs.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 662

 11 Power cycle the SM.
RESULT: Approximately 25 seconds after the power cycle, the green LED labeled LNK must light
to indicate that the link has been established. If the orange LED labeled SYN is lit instead, then the
SM is in Alignment mode because the SM failed to establish the link.

12 If the AP is configured to require authentication, ensure proper configuration of RADIUS or Pre-

shared AP key.

13 In this latter case and if the SM has encountered no customer-inflicted damage, then request an
RMA for the SM.

Module has lost or does not gain sync

To troubleshoot a loss of sync, perform the following steps.

Procedure 32 Troubleshooting loss of sync

1 Access the Event Log tab in the Home page of the SM

2 Check for messages with the following format:

RcvFrmNum =
ExpFrmNum =

3 If these messages are present, check the Event Log tab of another SM that is registered to the
same AP for messages of the same type.

4 If the Event Log of this second SM does not contain these messages, then the fault is isolated to
the first SM.

If the Event Log page of this second SM contains these messages, access the GPS Status page of
the AP.

5 If the Satellites Tracked field in the GPS Status page of the AP indicates fewer than 4 or the Pulse
Status field does not indicate Generating Sync, check the GPS Status page of another AP in the
same AP cluster for these indicators. GPS signal acquisition must not take longer than 5 minutes
from unit startup.

6 If these indicators are present in the second AP, then:

l Verify that the GPS antenna still has an unobstructed view of the entire horizon.
l Visually inspect the cable and connections between the GPS antenna and the CMM4. If this
cable is not shielded, replace the cable with shielded cable.

7 If these indicators are not present in the second AP, visually inspect the cable and connections
between the CMM4 and the AP antenna. If this cable is not shielded, replace the cable with
shielded cable.

Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity

To troubleshoot a loss of Ethernet connectivity, perform the following steps:

Procedure 33 Troubleshooting loss of Ethernet connectivity

1 Verify that the connector crimps on the Ethernet cable are not loose.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 663

 2 Verify that the Ethernet cable is not damaged.

3 If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a network interface card (NIC), verify that the cable
is pinned out as a straight-through cable.

4 If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a hub, switch, or router, verify that the cable is
pinned out as a crossover cable.

5 Verify that the Ethernet port to which the cable connects the module is set to auto-negotiate
speed.

6 Verify VLAN configuration in the network, which may cause loss of module access if the accessing
device is on a separate VLAN from the radio.

7 Power cycle the module.

RESULT: Approximately 25 seconds after the power cycle, the green LED labeled LNK must light
up to indicate that the link has been established. If the orange LED labeled SYN is lit instead, then
the module is in Alignment mode because the module failed to establish the link.

8 In this latter case and if the module has encountered no customer-inflicted damage, then request
an RMA for the module.

CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules

If the Event Log tabs in all connected modules contain Loss of GPS Sync Pulse messages, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 34 Troubleshooting CMM4 not passing sync

1 Verify that the GPS antenna has an unobstructed view of the entire horizon.

2 Verify that the GPS coaxial cable meets specifications.

3 Verify that the GPS sync cable meets specifications for wiring and length.

4 If the web pages of connected modules indicate any of the following, then find and eliminate the
source of noise that is being coupled into the GPS sync cable:

l In the GPS Status page:

n anomalous number of Satellites Tracked (greater than 12, for example)

n incorrect reported Latitude and/or Longitude of the antenna

l In the Event Log page:

n garbled GPS messages

n large number of Acquired GPS Sync Pulse messages

GPS signal acquisition must not take longer than 5 minutes from unit startup.

5 If these efforts fail to resolve the problem, then request an RMA for the CMM4.

Module Software Cannot be Upgraded

If your attempt to upgrade the software of a module fails, perform the following steps.

Procedure 35 Troubleshooting an unsuccessful software upgrade

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 664

 1 Download the latest issue of the target release and the associated release notes.

2 Verify that the latest version of CNUT is installed.

3 Compare the files used in the failed attempt to the newly downloaded software.

4 Compare the procedure used in the failed attempt to the procedure in the newly downloaded
release notes.

5 If these comparisons reveal a difference, retry the upgrade, this time with the newer file or newer
procedure.

6 If, during attempts to upgrade the FPGA firmware, the following message is repeatable, then
request an RMA for the module:
Error code 6, unrecognized device

Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became

Inaccessible
If a module continues to pass traffic and the SNMP interface to the module continues to function, but the
web interface to the module does not display, perform the following steps:

Procedure 36 Restoring web management GUI access

1 Enter telnet DottedIPAddress.

RESULT: A telnet session to the module is invoked.

2 At the Login prompt, enter root.

3 At the Password prompt, enter PasswordIfConfigured.

4 At the Telnet +> prompt, enter reset.

RESULT: The web interface is accessible again and this telnet connection is closed.

Note

The module may also be rebooted via an SNMP-based NMS (Wireless Manager, for
example)

5 If the issue persists, turn off any SNMP-based network/radio monitoring software and repeat steps
1-4.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 665

Power-up troubleshooting

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 666

Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
SM/BMS Registration
If no SMs are registered to this AP, then the Session Status tab displays the simple message No sessions.
In this case, try the following steps.

1 More finely aim the SM or SMs toward the AP.

2 Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.

3 If still no LUIDs are reported on the Session Status tab, click the Configuration button on the left
side of the Home page.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the AP Configuration page.

4 Click the Radio tab.

5 Find the Color Code parameter and note the setting.

6 In the same sequence as you did for the AP directly under Configuration Link for Test in Planning
and Installation Guide, connect the SM to a computing device and to power.

7 On the left side of the SM Home page, click the Configuration button.
RESULT: The Configuration page of the SM opens.

8 Click the Radio tab.

9 If the transmit frequency of the AP is not selected in the Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection
List parameter, select the frequency that matches.

10 If the Color Code parameter on this page is not identical to the Color Code parameter you noted
from the AP, change one of them so that they match.

11 At the bottom of the Radio tab for the SM, click the Save Changes button.

12 Click the Reboot button.

13 Allow several minutes for the SM to reboot and register to the AP.

14 Return to the computing device that is connected to the AP.

15 Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.

Logs
Persistent Logging
PMP 450 SM supports logging information such as session logs, authentication logs, and authorization
logs that are persistent through reboots and connectivity losses.

Navigate to Logs to view:

l SM Session
l SM Authentication
l SM Authorization

All the SM logs are saved to flash and displayed upon reboot.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 667

Figure 113: SM Logs

Figure 114: SM Session log

Figure 115: SM Authentication log

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 668

Figure 116: SM Authorization log

PMP 450m Reference information

A.1 Specifications

Please see the Specification sheets listed on the Cambium Networks website for the most up-to-date
PMP 450m Series AP specifications:

http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/resource/pmp-450m/

A.2 PMP 450m overload

The PMP 450m Series AP is designed to handle high load in terms of high throughput and high PPS. In
terms of throughput, PMP 450m is designed to achieve 3x or more throughput improvement over
PMP 450 and PMP 450i Series products. In terms of packets per second (PPS), PMP 450m is designed to
handle more than 100K PPS.

Overload occurs when the offered load exceeds the above limits. When overload occurs, PMP 450m will
start discarding packets and TCP throughput will degrade due to packet loss. The PMP 450 family of
products have a set of overload statistics that can be used to monitor overload conditions (Statistics >
Overload tab).

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 669

The above statistics shall be monitored over time for overload conditions over consecutive periods. Refer
to Interpreting Overload statistics for description of those statistics.

It’s worth noting that Frame Utilization statistics (Statistics > Frame Utilization tab: Frame Utilization:
Downlink and Uplink) are not necessarily indicative of overload condition. They show how much the TDD
frame is utilized. High frame utilization depends on:

1. High traffic during busy periods: those statistics will be close to 100% and almost all slots will be
utilized. In this case if the Overload statistics show that packets are discarded then this is an
indication of overload condition.
2. High percentage of VCs with low modulation with moderate traffic. Those VCs will require more
slots to service them (due to low modulation) and the frame utilization will be high. In this case the
TDD frame is fully utilized but the system is at low capacity and is not in an overload condition.

450m has higher PPS than PMP 450 and PMP 450i and supports higher throughput through spatial
multiplexing, therefore when a PMP 450m replaces an overloaded 450 or PMP 450i AP the PMP 450m
will not be overloaded under the same conditions but the frame utilization may still show close to 100%;
this should not alarm the customer. The overload statistics shall be monitored on PMP 450m to see if it is
overloaded or not.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 670

Quality of Service (QoS) Glossary
Term Definition

10Base-T Technology in Ethernet communications that can deliver 10 Mb of data across 328
feet (100 meters) of CAT 5 cable.

169.254.0.0 Gateway IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network

modules.

169.254.1.1 IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules.

255.255.0.0 Subnet mask default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network modules and
in Microsoft and Apple operating systems.

802.3 An IEEE standard that defines the contents of frames that are transferred through
Ethernet connections. Each of these frames contains a preamble, the address to
which the frame is sent, the address that sends the frame, the length of the data to
expect, the data, and a checksum to validate that no contents were lost.

Access Point Two to six Access Point Modules that together distribute network or Internet
Cluster services to a community of subscribers. Each Access Point Module covers a 60° or
90° sector. This cluster covers as much as 360°. Also known as AP cluster.

Access Point Also known as AP. One module that distributes network or Internet services in a 60°
Module or 90° sector.

ACT/4 Second-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is lit when data
activity is present on the Ethernet link.

Address Protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to correlate a host IP
Resolution address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
Protocol http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.

Aggregate The sum of the throughputs in the uplink and the downlink.
Throughput

AP Access Point Module. One module that distributes network or Internet services to
subscriber modules.

ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network
element to correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.

APs MIB Management Information Base file that defines objects that are specific to the
Access Point Module. See also Management Information Base.

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One language. The format of the text files that compose
the Management Information Base.

Attenuation Reduction of signal strength caused by the travel from the transmitter to the
receiver, and caused by any object between. In the absence of objects between, a
signal that has a short wavelength experiences a high degree of attenuation
nevertheless.

BER Bit Error Rate. The ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 671

Term Definition

BHM Backhaul Timing Master (BHM)- a module that is used in a point to point link. This
module controls the air protocol and configurations for the link..

BHS Backhaul Timing Slave (BHS)- a module that is used in a point to point link. This
module accepts configuration and timing from the master module.

Bit Error Rate Ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.

Box MIB Management Information Base file that defines module-level objects. See also
Management Information Base.

Bridge Network element that uses the physical address (not the logical address) of another
to pass data. The bridge passes the data to either the destination address, if found in
the simple routing table, or to all network segments other than the one that
transmitted the data. Modules are Layer 2 bridges except that, where NAT is enabled
for an SM, the SM is a Layer 3 switch. Compare to Switch and Router, and see also
NAT.

Buckets Theoretical data repositories that can be filled at preset rates or emptied when
preset conditions are experienced, such as when data is transferred.

Burst Preset amount limit of data that may be continuously transferred.

CAT 5 Cable Cable that delivers Ethernet communications from module to module. Later modules
auto-sense whether this cable is wired in a straight-through or crossover scheme.

CIR Committed Information Rate. For an SM or specified group of SMs, a level of

bandwidth that can be guaranteed to never fall below a specified minimum (unless
oversubscribed). In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Low
Priority Uplink CIR, Low Priority Downlink CIR, Medium Priority Uplink CIR, Medium
Priority Downlink CIR parameters, High Priority Uplink CIR, High Priority Downlink
CIR parameters, Ultra High Priority Uplink CIR, and Ultra High Priority Downlink CIR
parameters.

Cluster Module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking connections for an AP
Management cluster. Also known as CMM4.
Module

CMM Cluster Management Module. A module that provides power, GPS timing, and
networking connections for an Access Point cluster.

CodePoint See DiffServ.

Color Code Module parameter that identifies the other modules with which communication is
Field allowed. The range of valid values is 0 to 255.

Community Control string that allows a network management station to access MIB information
String Field about the module.

Connectorized The 450 Platform Family Connectorized Radio solution provide RF port to connect
external antenna. It gives flexibility to connect to a variety of external antennas.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 672

Term Definition

Country Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which automatically
implements frequency band range restrictions for the selected country. Units
shipped to countries other than the United States must be configured with the
corresponding Region Code and Country Code to comply with local regulatory
requirements.

CRCError Field This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

Data Encryption Over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. Data
Standard Encryption Standard (DES) performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and
recombination operations on blocks of data.

Demilitarized Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. Defined in RFC 2647. See
Zone http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.

DES Data Encryption Standard. An over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys
and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and
recombination operations on blocks of data.

DFS See Dynamic Frequency Selection

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defined in RFC 2131. Protocol that enables a
device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default
gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time,
conserves IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different network
within the system. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2131.html. See also Static IP
Address Assignment.

DiffServ Differentiated Services, consistent with RFC 2474. A byte in the type of service
(TOS) field of packets whose values correlates to the channel on which the packet
should be sent. The value is a numeric code point. The PMP 450 AP’s support four
levels of QoS. The mapping of these eight priority values to data channels is
determined by the number of data channels configured per SM as shown in the table
below:

For example, for an AP that uses the default table shown above has configured 3
QoS levels per SM, would see codepoints 0 through 15 mapped to the Low Priority
data channels, codepoint 16 would be mapped to the Medium Priority data channels,
and so on.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 673

Term Definition

Note that CodePoints 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 48, and 56 are predefined to the fixed values
shown in Table 22 DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM and are not user configurable.
Operator cannot change any of these fixed priority values. Among the configurable
parameters, the priority values (and therefore the handling of packets in the high or
low priority channel) are set in the AP/BHM for all downlinks within the sector and in
the SM/BHS for each uplink.

DMZ Demilitarized Zone as defined in RFC 2647. An Internet Protocol area outside of a
firewall. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.

Dynamic A requirement in certain countries and regions for systems to detect

Frequency
interference from other systems, notably radar systems, and to avoid co-channel
Selection
operation with these systems.

Dynamic Host See DHCP.

Configuration
Protocol

Electronic Serial Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for identification in the
Number Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address
serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC Address.

ESN Electronic Serial Number. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the
module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as
MAC Address.

Ethernet Any of several IEEE standards that define the contents of frames that are transferred
Protocol from one network element to another through Ethernet connections.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

Fade Margin The difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the
receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic
of a more reliable link. Standard operating margin.

FCC Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.A.

Field- Array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory programmed and can
programmable be reprogrammed.
Gate Array

File Transfer Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between
Protocol computing devices that do not operate on the same platform. Defined in RFC 959.
See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.

FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array. An array of logic, relational data, and wiring data
that is factory programmed and can be reprogrammed.

Free Space Path Signal attenuation that is naturally caused by atmospheric conditions and by the
Loss distance between the antenna and the receiver.

Fresnel Zone Space in which no object should exist that can attenuate, diffract, or reflect a
transmitted signal before the signal reaches the target receiver.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 674

Term Definition

FTP File Transfer Protocol, defined in RFC 959. Utility that transfers of files through TCP
(Transport Control Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate on the
same platform. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.

Global Network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on earth, which use the
Positioning time signal to synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid interference)
System and to provide reference for troubleshooting activities.

GPS Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides absolute time to
networks on earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and
reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference for
troubleshooting activities.

GPS/3 Third-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode for an Access Point
Module, this LED is continuously lit as the module receives sync pulse. In the
operating mode for a Subscriber, this LED flashes on and off to indicate that the
module is not registered.

GUI Graphical user interface.

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol, used to make the Internet resources available on the
World Wide Web. Defined in RFC 2068. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2068.html.

HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocols defined in RFC 792, used to identify Internet
Protocol (IP)-level problems and to allow IP links to be tested. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc792.html.

Integrated The 450 Platform Family integrated Radio solution provides integrated antenna..

IP Internet Protocol defined in RFC 791. The Network Layer in the TCP/IP protocol
stack. This protocol is applied to addressing, routing, and delivering, and re-
assembling data packets into the Data Link layer of the protocol stack. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc791.html.

IP Address 32-bit binary number that identifies a network element by both network and host.
See also Subnet Mask.

IPv4 Traditional version of Internet Protocol, which defines 32-bit fields for data
transmission.

ISM Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment radio frequency band, in the 900 MHz,
2.4 GHz, and 5.8 GHz ranges.

L2TP over IPSec Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security. One of several virtual private network
(VPN) implementation schemes. Regardless of whether Subscriber Modules have the
Network Address Translation feature (NAT) enabled, they support VPNs that are
based on this protocol.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 675

Term Definition

Late Collision This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the Ethernet controller. A
Field normal collision occurs during the first 512 bits of the frame transmission. A collision
that occurs after the first 512 bits is considered a late collision. A late collision is a
serious network problem because the frame being transmitted is discarded. A late
collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch between duplex configurations at
the ends of a link segment.

Line of Sight Wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to module. The path that
results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone.

LNK/5 Furthest left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is continuously lit
when the Ethernet link is present. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber Module, this
LED is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link.

Logical Unit ID Final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.

LOS Line of sight. The wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to
module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal Fresnel zone.

LUID Logical Unit ID. The final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.

MAC Address Media Access Control address. The hardware address that the factory assigns to the
module for identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial number.

Management Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay information to a
Information network monitor about the status of defined variables (objects).
Base

Maximum The cap applied to the bandwidth of an SM or specified group of SMs. In the
Information Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Sustained Uplink Data Rate,
Rate (MIR) Uplink Burst Allocation, Sustained Downlink Data Rate, and Downlink Burst
Allocation parameters.

MIB Management Information Base. Space that allows a program (agent) in the network
to relay information to a network monitor about the status of defined variables
(objects).

MIR See Maximum Information Rate.

MU-MIMO Multi User- Multiple Input Multiple Output

NAT Network Address Translation defined in RFC 1631. A scheme that isolates Subscriber
Modules from the Internet. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.

NEC National Electrical Code. The set of national wiring standards that are enforced in the
U.S.A.

NetBIOS Protocol defined in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 to support an applications programming
interface in TCP/IP. This interface allows a computer to transmit and receive data
with another host computer on the network. RFC 1001 defines the concepts and
methods. RFC 1002 defines the detailed specifications. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1001.html and http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1002.html.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 676

Term Definition

Network Scheme that defines the Access Point Module as a proxy server to isolate registered
Address Subscriber Modules from the Internet. Defined in RFC 1631. See
Translation http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.

Network See NMS.

Management
Station

NMS Network Management Station. A monitor device that uses Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) to control, gather, and report information about
predefined network variables (objects). See also Simple Network Management
Protocol.

Default Mode Device that enables the operator to regain control of a module that has been locked
by the No Remote Access feature, the 802.3 Link Disable feature, or a password or IP
address that cannot be recalled. This device can be either fabricated on site or
ordered.

PMP See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.

Point-to- Defined in RFC 2178, which specifies that data that originates from a central network
Multipoint element can be received by all other network elements, but data that originates from
Protocol a non-central network element can be received by only the central network element.
See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2178.html. Also referenced as PMP.

PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. Supported on SMs for

operators who use PPPoE in other parts of their network operators who want to
deploy PPPoE to realize per-subscriber authentication, metrics, and usage control.

PPS Packet Per Second

PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol. One of several virtual private network
implementations. Regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT)
feature enabled, Subscriber Modules support VPNs that are based on this protocol.

Protective Earth Connection to earth (which has a charge of 0 volts). Also known as ground.

Proxy Server Network computer that isolates another from the Internet. The proxy server
communicates for the other computer, and sends replies to only the appropriate
computer, which has an IP address that is not unique or not registered.

PTP A Point-to-Point connection refers to a communications connection between two

nodes or endpoints.

Radio Signal Relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An acceptable link displays a
Strength Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value of greater than 700.
Indicator

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 677

Term Definition

Reflection Change of direction and reduction of amplitude of a signal that encounters an object
larger than the wavelength. Reflection may cause an additional copy of the
wavelength to arrive after the original, unobstructed wavelength arrives. This causes
partial cancellation of the signal and may render the link unacceptable. However, in
some instances where the direct signal cannot be received, the reflected copy may
be received and render an otherwise unacceptable link acceptable.

Region Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which automatically
implements frequency band range restrictions for the selected region. Units shipped
to regions other than the United States must be configured with the corresponding
Region Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

RF Radio frequency. How many times each second a cycle in the antenna occurs, from
positive to negative and back to positive amplitude.

RJ-12 Standard cable that is typically used for telephone line or modem connection.

RJ-45 Standard cable that is typically used for Ethernet connection. This cable may be
wired as straight-through or as crossover. Later modules auto-sense whether the
cable is straight-through or crossover.

Router Network element that uses the logical (IP) address of another to pass data to only
the intended recipient. Compare to Switch and Bridge.

RSSI Radio Signal Strength Indicator. A relative measure of the strength of a received
signal. An acceptable link displays an RSSI value of greater than 700.

Self- Interference with a module from another module in the same network.
interference

SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable

Simple Network Standard that is used for communications between a program (agent) in the
Management network and a network management station (monitor). Defined in RFC 1157. See
Protocol http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1157.html.

SM Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet

services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster.

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol, defined in RFC 1157.

SNMPv3 SNMP version 3

SNMP Trap Capture of information that informs the network monitor through Simple Network
Management Protocol of a monitored occurrence in the module.

Spatial Spatial Frequency is associated with an LUID or SM registered with an AP and it is

Frequency visible on both AP and SM GUIs. It is grouped into bins where each bin includes 32
consecutive spatial frequency values.

Static IP Assignment of Internet Protocol address that can be changed only manually. Thus,
Address static IP address assignment requires more configuration time and consumes more
Assignment of the available IP addresses than DHCP address assignment does. RFC 2050
provides guidelines for the static allocation of IP addresses. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2050.html. See also DHCP.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 678

Term Definition

Subnet Mask 32-bit binary number that filters an IP address to reveal what part identifies the
network and what part identifies the host. The number of subnet mask bits that are
set to 1 indicates how many leading bits of the IP address identify the network. The
number of subnet mask bits that are set 0 indicate how many trailing bits of the IP
address identify the host.

Subscriber Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or Internet
Module services by communication with an Access Point Module or an Access Point cluster.

Sustained Data Preset rate limit of data transfer.

Rate

Switch Network element that uses the port that is associated with the physical address of
another to pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Bridge and Router.

Sync GPS (Global Positioning System) absolute time, which is passed from one module to
another. Sync enables timing that prevents modules from transmitting or receiving
interference. Sync also provides correlative time stamps for troubleshooting efforts.

TCP Alternatively known as Transmission Control Protocol or Transport Control Protocol.

The Transport Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is applied to assure
that data packets arrive at the target network element and to control the flow of
data through the Internet. Defined in RFC 793. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc793.html.

TDD Time Division Duplexing. Synchronized data transmission with some time slots
allocated to devices transmitting on the uplink and some to the device transmitting
on the downlink.

telnet Utility that allows a client computer to update a server. A firewall can prevent the
use of the telnet utility to breach the security of the server. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc818.html, http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc854.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc855.html.

Tokens Theoretical amounts of data. See also Buckets.

TxUnderrun This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors occurred on the Ethernet
Field controller.

UDP User Datagram Protocol. A set of Network, Transport, and Session Layer protocols
that RFC 768 defines. These protocols include checksum and address information
but does not retransmit data or process any errors. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc768.html.

udp User-defined type of port.

U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure radio frequency band, in the 5.1 GHz
through 5.8 GHz ranges.

VID VLAN identifier. See also VLAN.

VLAN Virtual local area network. An association of devices through software that contains
broadcast traffic, as routers would, but in the switch-level protocol.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 679

Term Definition

VPN Virtual private network for communication over a public network. One typical use is
to connect remote employees, who are at home or in a different city, to their
corporate network over the Internet. Any of several VPN implementation schemes is
possible. SMs support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security)
VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs, regardless of whether the
Network Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled.

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting 680

Cambium Networks
Cambium Networks delivers wireless communications that work for businesses, communities, and cities
worldwide. Millions of our radios are deployed to connect people, places and things with a unified
wireless fabric that spans multiple standards and frequencies of fixed wireless and Wi-Fi, all managed
centrally via the cloud. Our multi-gigabit wireless fabric offers a compelling value proposition over
traditional fiber and alternative wireless solutions. We work with our Cambium certified
ConnectedPartners to deliver purpose built networks for service provider, enterprise, industrial, and
government connectivity solutions in urban, suburban, and rural environments, with wireless that just
works.

User Guides http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/guides

Technical training https://learning.cambiumnetworks.com/learn

Support website (enquiries) https://support.cambiumnetworks.com

Main website http://www.cambiumnetworks.com

Sales enquiries [email protected]

Warranty https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/standard-warranty/

Telephone number list http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/contact-us/

Address Cambium Networks Limited,

Unit B2, Linhay Business Park,
Eastern Road, Ashburton,
Devon, TQ13 7UP
United Kingdom

www.cambiumnetworks.com

Cambium Networks and the stylized circular logo are trademarks of Cambium Networks, Ltd. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

© Copyright 2022 Cambium Networks, Ltd. All rights reserved.

Cambium Networks 681